V Node

F5259_B01
SpectralWave V-NODE
STM-16/STM-4/STM-1 Multiplexer
RELEASE 2.10
USERS MANUAL
NEC Corporation
7-1, Shiba 5-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8001, Japan TEL +81-3-3454-1111
TELEX NECTOK J22686 FAX +81-3-3798-1510/9
F5259_B01
GENERAL CONTENTS
SpectralWave is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
Copyright 2005-2006 by NEC Corporation.

All rights reserved.
The information of this manual was approved by product manager of CND.
This manual is subject to change without notice.
1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B01
GENERAL CONTENTS
SpectralWave V-NODE
USERS MANUAL
To prevent machine damage or bodily injuries, please familiarize yourself
with the contents of this manual before operating the equipment.
NEC Corporation will not be responsible for any equipment damage or
physical damage resulting from improper equipment operation.
GENERAL CONTENTS
TAB#
MANUAL TITLE
EDITION#
Date of
Issue
Manual#
GENERAL CONTENT
Oct 2005
F5259_B01
SAFETY INFORMATION
Oct 2005
F5259_B02
RELEASE NOTES
Oct 2005
F5259_B03
GENERAL INFORMATION
Oct 2005
F5259_B04
FUNCTIONAL
Oct 2005
F5259_B05
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Oct 2005
F5259_B06
UNIT INSTALLATION
Oct 2005
F5259_B07
CABLE INSTALLATION
Oct 2005
F5259_B08
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Oct 2005
F5259_B09
10
PROVISIONING
Oct 2005
F5259_B10
11
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Oct 2005
F5259_B11
12
GLOSSARY
Oct 2005
F5259_B12
This page is intentionally left blank.
F5259_B02
SpectralWave V-NODE
RELEASE 2.10
SAFETY INFORMATION
NEC Corporation
F5259_B02
SAFETY INFORMATION

1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B02
SAFETY INFORMATION
SAFETY INFORMATION
The following admonishments and symbols are used in this manual. The same symbols are
also used on the equipment. Read carefully and follow the instructions.
ADMONISHMENTS
DANGER:
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This
admonishment is used only in the most extreme
situations.
WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not

avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury,
service interruption, or equipment damage. It is also
used to alert unsafe practices.
SYMBOLS
Laser light is being used.
Do not touch without proper protection.
ESD
Electrostatic sensitive devices are installed.
Safety Information
i
F5259_B02
SAFETY INFORMATION
WARNING
Keep Power Off
To avoid electrical shock, keep power off during installation.
CAUTION
Class 1 Laser Product
LASER LIGHT
Never look directly into the laser source
CAUTION
ESD
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices
Handle with precaution

Since some boards employ MOS ICs, laser diodes, or avalanche photodiodes,
observe proper precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices when
touching the boards.
Put on gloves when touching the boards.
Use a wrist strap connected to the ESD(frame ground) terminal on each shelf.
Safety Information
ii
F5259_B02
SAFETY INFORMATION
CAUTION
Optical Devices
Handle with Precaution
Optical devices related to the SpectralWave V-NODE have been precisely
adjusted under special conditions at the factory. Since optical devices can be
easily damaged by dust or shock, their handling and storage require special care.
Attach a protective cap when removing an optical connector.
Optical cords are fragile. Do not bend, twist, stretch or stress optical cords
excessively.
WARNING
EMC: SpectralWave V-NODE is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this
product may cause radio interference in which the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
CAUTION
Keep power within the power consumption level. Exceeding the limitation will
damage the power units and lower the performance.
Safety Information
iii
F5259_B02
SAFETY INFORMATION
CAUTION
Recommended Attenuation Levels:
When using a fiber patch cord to loop back an optical input/output, insert an
appropriate optical attenuator in order to avoid receiving an overload value. An
optical power input over the capacity may cause damage to the optical receiver.
The optical attenuation to be applied is shown below:
OPTICAL LEVEL
OPTICAL ATTENUATION
MAXIMUM INPUT VALUE
S-1.1
0 dB (not required)
8 dBm
L-1.1, L-1.2
15 ~ 20 dB
10 dBm
S-4.1
0 dB (not required)
8 dBm
L-4.1, L-4.2
15 ~ 20 dB
8 dBm
S-16.1
10 dB
8 dBm
L-16.1, L-16.2
15 ~ 20 dB
8 dBm
CAUTION
Do not place any object on the shelf.
Safety Information
iv
F5259_B02
SAFETY INFORMATION
CAUTION
Keep spaces around air holes
on shelves for the ventilation.
Blocking the airflow raises temperature within the equipment, resulting in
poor performances or equipment damages.
CAUTION
Keep the same ground level between subrack
and other instruments, including PC for CID.
Different frame ground levels among NEs and other instruments may
damage the electric interfaces on NEs.
Safety Information
v
F5259_B02
SAFETY INFORMATION
CATASTROPHIC FAILURE
If the operating environment exceeds the following ranges, it can cause catastrophic failure resulting
in loss of traffic or equipment damage. For storage of spare packages, the following input voltage and
temperature ranges must also be considered.
DO NOT EXCEED THE FOLLOWING RANGES:
Input Voltage: 48V DC ( 38.4V DC to 60V DC)
Temperature:
Safety Information
vi
0C to + 45C
F5259_B06
SpectralWave V-NODE
RELEASE 2.10
NEC Corporation
F5259_B06
EQUIPMENT INSTALLTION

1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B06
CONTENTS
1. SUMMARY
1-1
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
2-1
2.1 Description........................................................................................ 2-1

2.2 V-NODE Subrack View...................................................................... 2-1
2.3 V-NODE Subrack Dimensions ......................................................... 2-2
3. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENT
3-1
3.1 Environment and Performance ....................................................... 3-1

3.2 Safety Items ...................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Admonishment ................................................................................. 3-2
4. OVERVIEW OF INSTALLATION TASKS
4-1
4.1 Installation Flow................................................................................ 4-1

4.2 Reference .......................................................................................... 4-1
5. INVENTORY TOOLS
5-1
5.1 Crew Tool Box................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Personal Tool Box ............................................................................ 5-3
6. SITE PREPARATION
6-1
7. UNPACK EQUIPMENT
7-1
7.1 Unpack and Verify Contents ............................................................ 7-1
8. INSTALL V-NODE SUBRACK
8-3
8.1 To 19inch RACK................................................................................ 8-3

8.2 To NEC ETS V-RACK ........................................................................ 8-4
9. GROUNDING SYSTEM
9-1
Contents
i
F5259_B06
1. SUMMARY
This manual provides the equipment descriptions for the system, rack layouts and
Subracks used for the V-NODE, and their procedures.
Detailed descriptions on boards and modules, and their installation procedures are
provided in the Unit Installation manual.
Descriptions and procedures for cable connections are provided in the Cable
Installation manual.
NOTE: The components that make up a V-NODE system are follows:

Boards (Interface) are installed into the Subrack.
Include one MCP, two Powers INF, two CS, three FAN and thirteen interface boards.
Modules are mounted on the board for additional function.
A Subrack with the boards composes network element (NE).
Summary
1-1
F5259_B06
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
2.1 Description
V-NODE subracks can be installed into the ETSI rack and maximum 4 subracks can be
installed into the NECs ETSI subrack (V-RACK).
2.2 V-NODE Subrack View

V-Node subrack view shows as follows. If you want to see the board view, please see the
B07_UNIT INSTALLATION manual.
Figure 2-1.
V-NODE subrack view
Equipment Description
2-1
F5259_B06
2.3 V-NODE Subrack Dimensions

Figure 2-2 shows the dimension of the V-Node equipment.
Figure 2-2. V-NODE subrack dimension
Equipment Description
2-2
F5259_B06
3. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENT

Follow the safety requirements below when installing the V-NODE equipment.
3.1 Environment and Performance

When performing hazardous work or entering potentially hazardous areas, wear
protective equipment, such as head or eye protection.
Smoking or open flames are prohibited in the operation area.
Properly remove and dispose of all unused hazardous materials.
Comply with hazardous material documentation and reporting requirements
After using any power tools or other equipment, they must be cleaned up and put in
storage on a daily basis.
Keep all tools within the designated work area.
When cutting any kind of material, safety glasses are required.
When handling conducting cables, the cable ends must be taped or insulated at all
times.
Do not wear any jewelry or any other kinds of accessories, such as ID around the
neck, while working.
All accidents on-site must be reported to appropriate personnel and to your
supervisor as soon as possible.
Equipment Installation Safety Requirement

3-1
F5259_B06
3.2 Safety Items

Have all safety items available on-site:
Caution Tape
Safety Cones
Safety Glasses/Goggles
First Aid Kit
3.3 Admonishment
Installers must also be familiar with and able to employ the following Safety
Requirements:
CAUTION
ESD
ESD Sensitive Equipment
The V-NODE equipment is ESD sensitive. Every
precaution should be observed while working around
this equipment. Personnel should always wear ESD
grounding straps while handling any boards and
modules. Place them in an ESD proof bag when they
are not actually installed in the system.
Equipment Installation Safety Requirement

3-2
F5259_B06
4. OVERVIEW OF INSTALLATION TASKS

Tasks to install the SpectralWave V-NODE equipment are listed below:
4.1 Installation Flow

ORDER
TASKS (Sections Containing Procedures)
DESCRIPTION
6. Site Preparation
Prepare the installation site. Define floor layout.
7. Unpack Equipment
Receive equipment, uncrate and inspect received

equipment.
Install Rack
See appropriate instruction manual.
8. Install V-NODE Subrack
Install Subrack into the rack.
4.2 Reference
Procedures for the following tasks are provided in a separate manual:
ORDER
TASKS (Sections Containing Procedures)
REFERENCE
Verify strap settings on boards before

installing them into the Subrack.
Unit Installation manual.
Install boards into the Subrack.
Unit Installation manual.
Power and Grounding
Cable Installation manual.
Route and connect cables.
Cable Installation manual.
Overview of Installation Tasks

4-1
This page is intentionally left blank..
F5259_B06
5. INVENTORY TOOLS
Before starting the equipment installation, confirm that the following tools are
available:
5.1 Crew Tool Box

#
TOOLS
Hammer Drill
Cordless Electric Drill & Bit Index
Electric Drill
Torque Wrench
Large Pry Bar
Torque Screw Driver
3/8-inch Masonry Bit
5/8-inch Masonry Bit
TBM-14 Hydraulic Crimper (with assorted dies)
10
TBM-25S Hand Crimper
11
Jig Saw
12
Hacksaw
13
Portable Band Saw
14
3-inch Hole Saw
15
1-inch Hole Saw
16
Heat Gun
17
Wire-Wrap Gun
18
Optical Light Source / Optical Power Meter
19
Ratchet & Socket Set
20
Cable Cutters
21
Cable Jacks; for reels
22
Extension Cords
23
Plumb Bob (Line)
24
4-foot Steel Level
25
Chalk Line
26
Antistatic Wrist Strap

(3M 2224 Charge-Guard or equivalent)
CHECKS / YOUR NOTES
Inventory Tools
5-1
F5259_B06
#
27
Canvas Tarpaulin (fireproof & ESD resistant)
28
Safety Cones & Safety Tapes
29
P-Touch Label Maker & Various Cartridges
30
Brady Label & Labels
31
Working Lamp / Drop Light
32
Heavy Duty Flashlight
33
Two 6-feet Ladders (Fiberglass)
34
Vacuum Cleaner and Canister
35
Broom and Dust Pan
Inventory Tools
5-2
TOOLS
CHECKS / YOUR NOTES
F5259_B06
5.2 Personal Tool Box

#
TOOLS
36
Cable Scissors
37
Cable Butting Knife
38
Cable Lacing Needles
39
Cable Stripper
40
Hand Wire / Cable Cutters
41
Cable-Side Cutter
42
Wire Wrap/Unwrap Tool
43
Sockets
44
Crimping Tool (AMP 59500-0, 45066-3)
45
Claw Hammer
46
Ball Peen Hammer
47
Adjusted Wrenches
48
Pry Bar
49
Screw Drivers (assorted)
50
Nut Drivers (assorted)
51
Digital millimeters
52
Speed Square
53
Drill Bits
54
Pliers
55
Needle-Nose File / Rat Tail File
56
Flat or Bastard File
57
Torpedo Level
58
Center Punch
59
Sponge
60
Flashlight
61
Marking Pens
62
Measuring Tapes
CHECKS / YOUR NOTES
Inventory Tools
5-3
F5259_B06
6. SITE PREPARATION
Verify the location for the V-NODE Subrack to be installed.
Determine the availability and location of the following terminals:
Station power
Fiber distribution panel (FDP) or enhanced interface panel (EIP)
Alarm distribution panel
Determine the position and direction of all cable runs.
Site Preparation
6-1
F5259_B06
7. UNPACK EQUIPMENT
7.1 Unpack and Verify Contents
PROCEDURE
1. Verify that all crates and cartons have been received.
2. Verify that crates and cartons are not damaged.
3. Locate markings on the box, and position the box with the correct side up according
to the markings.
4. Open the carton with the carton knife or a razor blade.
5. Remove the contents from the carton, and place them on a flat patch.
6. Check the contents of the carton against the packing list.
7. Check the contents (Subracks, modules, cables, etc.) for visible damages.
NOTE: Contact NEC or your project contractor if any damage is found.
Unpack Equipment
7-1
F5259_B06
8. INSTALL V-NODE SUBRACK

8.1 To 19inch RACK
This section describes the mounting method of the V-NODE subrack for 19 inch
standard rack.
Attention!
Since the Subrack is heavy (11 kg), two or more people are required for the
installation. Subrack should be installed according to following procedure.
(1) Mount the subrack slowly into the rack.
(2) Fasten the subrack to the rack with appropriate screw.
Figure 8-1 Fasten Subrack to Standard Rack
Install V-NODE Subrack

8-3
F5259_B06
8.2 To NEC ETS V-RACK

This section describes the mounting method of the V-NODE subrack for the NEC
ETS V-RACK (ETS V-Rack). For information about the ETS V-Rack, refer to ETS
V-Rack manual.
Subrack mounting kit is necessary to mount the V-NODE subrack in the NEC ETS
V-Rack. Before starting the installation work, check supplied components of the
subrack mounting kit shown in Table 8-1 and Table 8-2.
Table 8-1
ITEM
Subrack Mounting Kit
Table 8-2
ITEM
NEC CODE NUMBER
QTY
E32-002-F5291-0A00
Component List of Subrack Mounting Kit

NEC CODE NUMBER
QTY
Subrack Support (L)
128-B26375-03
Subrack Support(R
128-B26375-04
Cable Support
128-B05323-02
RAC Nut
125-B03310-07
10
Screw (M6)
PL-CPIMSX6X10X3GF
10
Screw (M4)
PL-CPIMSX4X X3GF

8-4
SUBRACK MOUNTING KIT
F5259_B06
Figure 8-2 Components of Subrack Mounting Kit
The following flowchart shows a series of procedures necessary for installing the
subrack. The subrack should be mounted according to these procedures.

8-5
F5259_B06
Figure 8-3. The Procedures for Installing the Subrack

8-6
F5259_B06
Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5 shows one sample about the standard mounting positions
for the V-NODE subrack. If you install the cable from the upper side of the subrack,
please make a space 100mm or more between the suracks. (Figure 8-4) And if you
install the cable from left or right side of the subrack, you can install as Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-4 Subrack Mounting Positions

(The Case of Cabling from upper side)

8-7
F5259_B06
Figure 8-5 Subrack Mounting Positions

(The Case of Cabling from left or right side)

8-8
F5259_B06
Procedure 8-1: Attach the RAC Nut

Attach the RAC nuts at both sides to the mounting positions shown in Figure 8-4 and
Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-6 Attach RAC Nut

8-9
F5259_B06
Procedure 8-2: Mounting Subrack support

(1)Insert the subrack supports into the square holes on the V-Rack rear panel.
Figure 8-7 Insert Subrack support
(2) Fasten the M4 screws to fix the subrack supports.
Figure 8-8 Fasten screws to fix Subrack supports

8-10
F5259_B06
Procedure 8-3:
Mounting Cable support
(1) Insert the cable supports into the square holes on the V-Rack rear panel.
Figure 8-9 Insert cable supports into the square holes

(2) Fasten the M4 screws to fix the cable supports. Keep in mind that the fastened
positions of the cable support is differed with the cable install location.
Figure 8-10
Fasten screws to fix cable support

8-11
F5259_B06
Procedure 8-4:
Mounting the Optical Tray of Subrack
(1) Loosen the hex-head screw on the subrack.

NOTE: Do not take off the hex-head screws from the subrack.
(2) Hang the optical tray slowly on the hex-head screws.
(2) Fasten the optical tray to the V-Rack with hex-head screws.
NOTE: When you use the hex-head screw to fix the tray to the subrack, please use
the supplied hex-head wrench.
Figure 8-11.

8-12
Mounting the Optical Tray
F5259_B06
Procedure 8-5:
Mounting Subrack
(1) Mount the subrack slowly on the subrack supports.

(2) Fasten the subrack to the V-Rack with M6 screws.
Figure 8-12
Fasten Subrack to V-Rack
Attention!
1.
The Subrack is heavy (11 kg), two or more person are required for the
installation.
2.
When you install the subrack, please un-installed the board from the subrack.

8-13
F5259_B06
Attachment Cable Support (Option)

When you install the cables from upper of subrack, the appending cable support
can be used. Procedure is shown as follows.
(1) Attach the RAC nuts at both sides to the attachment of cable support which
shown Figure 8-13.
(2) Fasten the cable support on the V-Rack with M6 screws.
Figure 8-13

8-14
Fasten Cable Support on the V-Rack
F5259_B06
9. GROUNDING SYSTEM
There are 3 types of grounding: frame ground (FG); battery ground (BG); signal
ground (SG). Every type of grounding insulates from other groundings.
If need use shield to prevent the internal circuit from electromagnetic radiation,
connect with the frame ground (FG).
GROUNDING SYSTEM
9-1
F5259_B05
SpectralWave V-NODE
STM-16/ STM-4/ STM-1 Multiplexer
RELEASE 2.10
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
NEC Corporation
F5259_B05

1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B05
CONTENTS
1. SDH WORKING PRINCIPLE
1-1
1.1 Signal Multiplexing Paths ................................................................ 1-1

1.2 Basic Parameters ............................................................................. 1-2
1.2.1
Frame Structure .................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2
Multiplexing Structure and Multiplexing Methods............................. 1-2
1.2.3
Frame Synchronization and Line Code Type ..................................... 1-3
1.2.4
Overhead Function ............................................................................... 1-3
2. V-NODE WORKING PRINCIPLE
2-1
2.1 Login/Logout..................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Layer 2 Switch Function .................................................................. 2-2
2.2.1
Learning Bridge .................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2
Traffic Rate Filtering ............................................................................. 2-4
2.2.3
Maximum Frame Size ........................................................................... 2-7
2.2.4
Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay ........................................................ 2-9
2.2.5
Low Queue Delay Bound.................................................................... 2-11
2.2.6
Maximum Queue Delay Time ............................................................. 2-11
2.2.7
VLAN mode.......................................................................................... 2-13
2.2.8
Spanning-Tree Protocol ..................................................................... 2-26
2.2.9
Trunk .................................................................................................... 2-38
2.2.10 Port monitor configuration ................................................................ 2-40

2.2.11 MAC filtering........................................................................................ 2-42
2.2.12 Service priority configuration............................................................ 2-47
2.3 Encapsulation and LCAS Function ............................................... 2-50

2.3.1
Encapsulation ..................................................................................... 2-50
2.3.2
LCAS .................................................................................................... 2-59
2.4 Cross connection ........................................................................... 2-65

2.4.1
Matrix structure................................................................................... 2-65
2.4.2
Cross-connect level............................................................................ 2-65
2.4.3
Cross-connect type ............................................................................ 2-65
2.5 Protection........................................................................................ 2-77

2.5.1
MSP ...................................................................................................... 2-77
Contents
i
F5259_B05
2.5.2
MS-SP Ring.......................................................................................... 2-80
2.5.3
SNCP .................................................................................................... 2-82
2.5.4
Hardware Protection........................................................................... 2-84
2.6 Synchronization.............................................................................. 2-88

2.6.1
Timing source ..................................................................................... 2-88
2.6.2
Timing source control ........................................................................ 2-88
2.6.3
Timing source selection..................................................................... 2-91
2.6.4
DNU Group .......................................................................................... 2-93
2.7 Trace/signal label function ............................................................ 2-94

2.8 Configuration Management ........................................................... 2-96
2.9 Performance monitor ..................................................................... 2-98
2.9.1
The Definition of PM item................................................................... 2-98
2.9.2
Performance Counter Range ........................................................... 2-104
2.9.3
SES..................................................................................................... 2-107
2.9.4
Invalid condition ............................................................................... 2-108
2.9.5
Register management ...................................................................... 2-108
2.9.6
PM reset function.............................................................................. 2-109
2.9.7
TCA .................................................................................................... 2-109
2.10 Fault management ........................................................................ 2-115

2.10.1 Fault monitor items........................................................................... 2-115
2.10.2 Alarm management........................................................................... 2-124
2.10.3 Alarm report ...................................................................................... 2-125
2.11 Maintenance Management ........................................................... 2-127

2.11.1 Unit Rest ............................................................................................ 2-127
2.11.2 Equipment Initialization.................................................................... 2-128
2.11.3 Loopback ........................................................................................... 2-129
2.11.4 Software Download........................................................................... 2-131
2.11.5 Software Upgrade ............................................................................. 2-133
2.11.6 Configuration Download/Upload ..................................................... 2-134
2.11.7 Automatic Laser Shutdown ............................................................. 2-135
2.11.8 Overhead Function ........................................................................... 2-139
2.11.9 House Keeping.................................................................................. 2-140
2.11.10 Security management ..................................................................... 2-141
2.12 Memory Management ................................................................... 2-145

2.12.1 Database Distribution....................................................................... 2-145
2.12.2 Database Action................................................................................ 2-145
Contents
ii
F5259_B05
2.13 OW Function ................................................................................. 2-153

2.13.1 OW interface...................................................................................... 2-153
2.13.2 OW function....................................................................................... 2-153
2.13.3 Calling method .................................................................................. 2-154
2.13.4 Branch function ................................................................................ 2-154
2.13.5 Sequence description....................................................................... 2-155
2.13.6 Idle code ............................................................................................ 2-155
2.14 LAPD/Network /Routing Protocol................................................ 2-156

2.15 Real Time Clock System .............................................................. 2-157
2.15.1 Features ............................................................................................. 2-157
2.15.2 Block Diagram................................................................................... 2-158
2.16 Equipment Cooling System ......................................................... 2-158

2.16.1 The threshold of the fan speed........................................................ 2-158
2.16.2 The LED Status of FAN Board ......................................................... 2-158
2.17 Power Management System ........................................................ 2-159

2.18 Retiming Buffer............................................................................. 2-159
2.18.1 Functional Description and Block Diagram ................................... 2-159
2.19 LOG................................................................................................ 2-160
3. EXTERNAL INTERFACES
3-1
3.1 User channel ..................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Orderwire........................................................................................... 3-1
3.3 User Interface.................................................................................... 3-2
3.3.1
CID Interface.......................................................................................... 3-2
3.3.2
NMS ........................................................................................................ 3-3
3.4 Physical Specification...................................................................... 3-4

3.4.1
V-NODE Subrack Dimensions ............................................................. 3-4
Contents
iii
F5259_B05
1. SDH WORKING PRINCIPLE

1.1 Signal Multiplexing Paths
Figure 1-1 shows the functional diagram of signal multiplexing paths:
STM-N
AUG
AU-4
C-4
139264kbit/s
C-3
44736kbit/s
34368kbit/s
VC-12
C-12
2048kbit/s
VC-11
C-11
1544kbit/s
VC-4
TUG-3
Pointer processing
Location and calibration
multiplexing
mapping
Figure 1-1.
TU-3
VC-3
TUG-2
TU-12
STM-N Signal Multiplexing Paths
SDH Working Principle

1-1
F5259_B05
1.2 Basic Parameters

1.2.1 Frame Structure
Basic frame structure is shown in Figure 1-2.
Basic Frame Structure
See also Table 1-1 for the frame structure parameter of STM-N (N=1/4/16).
270 N columns (bytes)
9N
261 N
Section overhead
SOH
3
4
Administrative unit pointer(s)

9 rows
STM-N payload
5
Section overhead
SOH
T1518000-95
Figure 1-2. Basic Frame Structure

Table 1-1.
Frame Structure Parameter of STM-N
Grade
Rate
Frame length
Frame cycle
STM-1
155.520 Mb/s
2430 BYTES
125 us
STM-4
STM-16
622.080 Mb/s
2488.32 Mb/s
4
16
9720 BYTES
38880 BYTES
125 us
125 us
1.2.2 Multiplexing Structure and Multiplexing Methods

Multiplexing structure is provided in Figure 1-1. Multiplexing STM-1 to STM-N or
AUG to STM-N adopts multiplexing methods of byte interval insertion.
Administrator unit (AU) multiplexing to STM-N frame, and tributary mapping to
VC-4 conform to ITU-T relative references and the requirement of national optic
synchronous transmission technical system completely.

1-2
F5259_B05
1.2.3 Frame Synchronization and Line Code Type

1.2.3.1 Frame Synchronization
Frame synchronization bytes A1/A2 are transmitted at STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 output
port, and received at the corresponding input port to align the frame according to their
fixed pattern. If 5 continuous frame codes fail (neither A1 nor A2 is detected), the
frame goes out of synchronization, and the OOF (out of frame) alarm is issued. While
in the OOF status, it is considered to have searched frame signal after continuously
receiving correct A1 and A2 for two frames. And it is considered that the system goes
into LOF status (lost of frame) after OOF lasts 3 ms (24 frames). While in the LOF
status, the location of A1 and A2 will be searched again, and is considered to go into
alignment frame status after continuously receiving correct A1 and A2 for 3 ms (24
frames), and LOF alarm will disappear.
STM-4 optical line interface:
NRZ code after serial scrambling by polynomial 1 + X6 + X7
STM-1 electrical line interface: CMI code
45M electrical tributary interface: B3ZS code
34M electrical tributary interface: HDB3 code
2M electrical tributary interface: HDB3 code
1.2.4 Overhead Function

1.2.4.1 Section Overhead ( SOH )
V-NODE supports section and path OH.
The definition of SOH is shown in Figure 1-3, Figure 1-4, Figure 1-5 and Table 1-2.
The blanks in the figure and table are reserved to arrange bytes by international, is a
byte related to transmission media, is a reserved byte for the civil use, * is a byte that
are not scrambled.

1-3
F5259_B05
9 bytes
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
*
RSOH
9 rows
Administrative Unit pointer(s)

B2 B2 B2 K1
K2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
MSOH
M1 E2
T1523130-96
Bytes reserved for national use

*
Unscrambled bytes. Therefore care should be taken

with their content
Media dependent bytes
NOTE All unmarked bytes are reserved for future international

standardization (for media dependent, additional national use and
other purposes).

1-4
Figure 1-3.
SOH of STM-1
Figure 1-4.
SOH of STM-4
F5259_B05
Figure 1-5.
SOH of STM-16

1-5
F5259_B05
Table 1-2.
Byte
Summary for RSOH/MSOH of STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16
Position
(STM-1 frame)
Row
Byte
Sequence Sequence
1, 2, 3
A1 1
4, 5, 6
A2 1
Position
(STM-4 frame)
Row
Byte
Sequence Sequence
1
1 thru 12
1
13 thru
24
Position
(STM-16 frame)
Description
Row
Byte
Sequence Sequence
Frame Location
1
1 thru 48
A1: 11110110
1
49 thru
A2: 00101000
96
As signal of frame locating
1
97
Section Trace, STM Identifier
Substitute C1 in new versions
suggestion, encoding to regeneration
section
3
1
DCC (Data Communication Channel)
J0
25
D1
D2
13
49
D3
D4
3
6, 7, 8
7
1, 4, 7
3
6, 7, 8
25
1, 13, 25
3
6, 7, 8
97
1, 49, 97
E1
13
49
E2
25
97
F1
25
97
User Channel
The 64 kbit/s clear channel reserved
for user definition.
B1
Error Monitor
Detects regenerator section error by
BIP-8.
B2
1, 2, 3
Error Monitor on STM-1

Detects multiplex section error by
BIP-24.
B2
1 thru 12

BIP-96.
B2
1 thru 48

BIP-384
K1
13
49
APS (Automatic Protection Switching)
K2
25
97
Used to divert the traffic signal;

MS-AIS, MS-RDI
M1
15
51
Multiplex Section REI (Remote Error

Indication)
S1
Synchronization Status Message
12, 9
8, 9
12, 9
29 thru
36
12, 9
113 thru
144
National uses
* Not supported in V-NODE
2, 3
2, 3, 5
2, 3
5 thru 12
17 thru
20
2, 3
Illustrating types of transmission

media
thru
D12

1-6
The 192 kbit/s DCC for regenerator

section.
DCC (Data Communication Channel)
The 576 kbit/s DCC for multiplex
section.
Orderwire Channel
The 64 kbit/s orderwire channel for
regenerator section; available on VF
communication orderwire channel.
Orderwire Channel
The 64 kbit/s orderwire channel for
multiplex section; available on VF
communication orderwire channel.
F5259_B05
In it:
K1, K2 Bytes (b1 thru b5):
Two bytes are used to initiate APS when the signal degrade (signal failure or the
error exceeds specified limits) occurs. Upper 13 bits of K1, K2 bytes are used for
line protection.
K2 Bytes (b6 thru b8):
K2 bytes are used for detecting Multiplex Section Alarm Indicator (MS-AIS), and
Remote Defect Indicator (MS-RDI). If received signal fails, or has 111 for the 6
thru 8 bits on K2 byte, it is referred to have MS-AIS signal, which is invalid net
load, and send all 1 signal to the terminal.
MS-RDI indicates that the received signal is invalid, or has MS-AIS inserted.
MS-RDI is an insertion of 110 at b6, b7, b8 bits in K2 byte before scrambled
code.
S1 Bytes (b5 thru b8):
S1 bytes are used to display synchronization status for timing source selection. The
5 thru 8 bits in S1 byte are arranged to indicate synchronization status message.
Table 1-3 gives bit-pattern arrangement of four synchronization grades conforming
to ITU-T.
Table 1-3. S1 Byte Signal
Bits (5 thru 8) in S1 Byte Timing Source Quality and Grade
0000
Quality unknown
0001
Reserved
0010
0011
G.811
Reserved
0100
0101
G.812 Transit
Reserved
0110
0111
Reserved
Reserved
1000
1001
G.812 Local
Reserved
1010
1011
Reserved
G.813 (SETS)
1100
1101
Reserved
Reserved
1110
1111
Reserved
Do not use for timing source
SETS: Synchronous Equipment Timing Source

1-7
F5259_B05
M1 Byte:
M1 byte is used for Multiplex Section Remote Error Indicator (MS-REI). This byte
in STM-N outputs the count of interleaved bit blocks detected in error by BIP-24
n (B2; see below) to a remote side on a frame-by-frame basis. This value is used at
the far-end for its PM.
In STM-1: This byte outputs the number of error blocks detected by
BIP-24 (range: 0, 24).
BIP-96 (range: 0, 96).
BIP-384 (range: 0, 384). The data more than 384 is processed
as 384.
BIP operation is listed in Table 1-4:
Table 1-4.
Signal Level
BIP Operations
BIP-8 (B1)
BIP-24 (B2)
BIP-96 (B2)
BIP-384 (B2)
STM-1, STM-4,STM-16
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
After scrambling
Before scrambling
Before scrambling
Before scrambling
Regenerator Section
Multiplex Section
Multiplex Section
Multiplex Section
Except the first row

of SOH in the
previous frame, all
bits with even parity
of every 24 bits, after
scrambling
Except the first

rows of SOH in the
previous frame, all
of every 96 bits,
after scrambling
Except the first rows

of SOH in the
previous frame, all
of every 384 bits,
after scrambling
Processing The receiving system The receiving system

recomputes the
Principle at recomputes the
The receiving
system recomputes
the checksum based
upon the received
data for multiplex
section, and
compares the
values. Results are
transferred and used
by the performance
monitoring, being a
trigger of protection
switching.
The receiving
system recomputes
the checksum based
upon the received
data for multiplex
section, and
compares the
values. Results are
by the performance
monitoring, being a
switching.
Insertion
Target
Computing All bits in the

previous frame after
Range
scrambling
Reception
checksum based upon

the received data for
regenerator section,
and compares the
values. Results are
by the performance
monitoring at the
far-end.

1-8
checksum based
upon the received
data for multiplex
section, and
compares the values.
Results are
by the performance
monitoring, being a
switching.
F5259_B05
1.2.4.2 Payload Pointers

Each STM-1 frame includes an AU-4 frame; each STM-4 frame includes four AU-4s;
each STM-16 frame includes sixteen AU-4s. Each AU-4 includes two pointers, H1
and H2 bytes group, containing 3 bytes for positive frequency justification and 3
bytes for negative frequency justification. See Figure 1-6:
H2
N N N N S
D I
D I
D I
D I
10 Bit Pointer Value

I: Increment (positive frequency justification bits)
D: Decrement (negative frequency justification bits)
N: New Data Found (NDF) flags
Enabled when at least 3 out of 4 bits match 1001
Disabled when at least 3 out of 4 bits match 0110
Invalid with other codes
SS: AU TU type, 10 refers to AU-4 and TU-3.
Positive Justification:
Invert 5 I-bits
Accept majority vote
Negative Justification:
Invert 5 D-bits
Accept majority vote
When AIS occurs, the pointer values and other bits are set to all 1.
Figure 1-6.
SDH AU-4 Pointer Coding

1-9
F5259_B05
1.2.4.3 Path Overhead

In addition to the section overhead (SOH), signal overhead of STM-1/4/16 system
also contains VC-4/VC-3 and VC-12/VC-11 path overhead (POH). See Figure 1-7
below:
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2
260x9/84x9 bytes data payload
H4
F3
K3
N1
Figure 1-7(a).
VC-4/VC-3 Path Overhead
V5
J2
N2
K4
Figure 1-7(b).
VC-12/VC-11 Path Overhead
The first column of VC-4/VC-3 payload (9 bytes) is dedicated to path overhead

information:
J1 byte: Path Indication
This byte is known as the trace byte, and is user programmable. The trace byte is
used as an identification that allows verifying whether it is connected to the
designated source/destination.
B3 byte: Quality Monitoring
This byte is known as the BIP-8 or B3, and is allocated in each VC-4 for a path
error monitoring function using even parity. The path BIP-8 is calculated over all
1-10
F5259_B05
bits of the previous VC-4 before scrambling. The calculated BIP-8 is placed in the
B3 byte of the current VC-4 before scrambling.
C2 byte: Container Format
This byte is known as the signal label, and is used to indicate the composition or the
maintenance status of the VC-4.
G1 byte: Transmission Error Acknowledgement
This byte conveys the path status and performance back to a VC-4 trail termination.
This feature permits the status and performance of the complete duplex trail to be
monitored at either end, or at any point along that trail.
F2, F3 bytes: Path User Channels (Not Supported by V-NODE)
These bytes are allocated for end-user communication purpose between path
elements.
H4 byte: Position Indicator
This byte is known as the multiframe, and is used as an end-to-end generalized
multiframe indicator for payloads (a pointer).
K3 byte (b1 thru b4): APS Channel (Not Supported by V-NODE)
These bits of K3 byte are allocated for automation protection switching (APS)
signaling for protection at the VC-4 path level.
N1 byte: Network Operator Byte (Not Supported by V-NODE)
This byte is used to provide a Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) function.
Spare K3 (b5 thru b8): (Not Supported by V-NODE)
These bits of K3 byte are reserved for the future use, and have no defined values.
The receiver is required to ignore their content.
The column of VC-12/VC-11 payload is dedicated to path overhead information:
V5 byte: Lower Order Path Signal Label
The byte V5 provides the functions of error checking, signal label and path status of
the VC-2/VC-1 paths.

1-11
F5259_B05
J2 byte: Lower Order Path Trace

Byte J2 is used to transmit repetitively a Low Order Path Access Point Identifier so
that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended
transmitter.
N2 byte: Network Byte
This byte is allocated to provide a Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) function.
K4 byte: Extended Signal Marker
Automatic Protection Switching (APS) channel: K4 (b1-b4), these bits are allocated
for APS signaling for protection at the lower order path level.
Reserved: K4 (b5-b7), Bit 5 to 7 of K4 are reserved for an optional use described in
VII.2 of Appendix VII. If this option is not used, these bits shall be set to "000" or
"111". A receiver is required to be able to ignore the contents of these bits. The use
of the optional function is at the discretion of the owner of the trail termination
source generating the K4 byte.
Spare: K4 (b8), this bit is allocated for future use. This bit has no defined value. The
receiver is required to ignore its content.

1-12
F5259_B05
2. V-NODE WORKING PRINCIPLE

2.1 Login/Logout
Login Local NE and Remote NE
When the equipment communicates with the CID by direct connection, the
equipment can be defined as Local NE. The detail operation steps refer to subsection
5.2.2.1 Login to Local NE of the B09 CID OPERATING GUIDE manual.
When the equipment communicates with the CID through optical transmission path
and intermediate equipment, the equipment is defined as Remote NE. The detail
operation steps refers to subsection 5.2.2.2 Login to Remote NE of the B09 CID
OPERATING GUIDE manual.
Logout of NE
NE should support the following 3 types of logout function:
1)
manually logout
When the NE received users logout request, the system would logout the users
account.
2)
automatically logout
User password ageing time elapsed from user login and last action, NE should
automatically logout;
3)
forcibly logout
When the communication between the NE and CID is down, the NE would
logout of all registered users forcibly.
When logout of NE:

NE access is over;
Delete the logout user from registered user list;
Logout user cannot access NE until the next successful login.
Record the manually logout action;
V-NODE Working Principle

2-1
F5259_B05
2.2 Layer 2 Switch Function

V-NODE can accommodate Layer 2 Switch (L2SW) function, which includes Leaning
Bridge, Port based VLAN, Tagged VLAN, Spanning Tree Protocol, Trunk, Port Monitor,
MAC filtering and Priority by using FE. This section introduces these functions.
2.2.1 Learning Bridge

Learning bridge means the MAC address learning function of the layer 2 switch chip,
which manages MAC Address Table by analyzing received Ethernet data frame from
each port of the switch chip.
2.2.1.1 MAC Address Learning
As the Figure 2-1 shows, if the data frame with both destination address DA and
source address SA is received from switch chips specific port such as port1, the
switch chip would analyze the direction that VLAN data frame is from, then
associate the source address of the received data frame with both receiving port ID
and the VLAN ID where the port belongs, and then add it into the MAC Address
Table, as shown in Figure 2-2 (consider that the data frame belongs to VLAN x).
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
The switch chip forwards the data frame according to the internal MAC Address
Table, by the corresponding forwarding mechanism as shown below:
When any of VLANx ports (except Port1) receives data frame with destination MAC
address SA (the data frame also belongs to VLANx), where the MAC address SA
2-2
F5259_B05
is already in the MAC Address Table (see Figure 2-2), the switch chip forwards the
data frame to the Port1 only. If Port1 receives the data frame with destination MAC
address SA, the switch chip discards it on Port1, which is commonly said the filtering
function of the switch. If MAC address SA is not in the MAC Address Table, the
data frame with the destination address SA received from the switching port would
be forwarded to all ports in the VLANx.
2.2.1.2 MAC Address Ageing
The switch chips MAC Address Ageing Interval can be set to No Ageing or N
seconds (In V-NODE, N = 300 thru 765 seconds; unit = second). When set to No
Ageing, the switch chip does not time the MAC address in the MAC address table
automatically.
As Figure 2-2 shows, where the MAC Address Ageing Interval is set to N
seconds, if the Port1 does not receive the data packet with the source address SA
again before expiring the specified N seconds, the MAC address entry of SA is
deleted from the MAC address table automatically; where the MAC Address Ageing
Interval is set to No Ageing mode, the MAC address will be kept in the MAC
address table although the Port1 does not receive the data packet with the source
address SA.
NOTE:
1. For No Ageing mode, the recorded MAC address in the MAC address table for
the switch chip will be deleted as well if in the following conditions:
1> When the number of MAC addresses in the MAC address table reaches the
maximum capacity (10239 per FE package), MAC addresses will be deleted
from the oldest entry to add a new MAC address to the MAC address table.
2> When the switch chip is reset, STP topology is changed, and/or the Ethernet
port is changed.
2. MAC Address Ageing may not punctually time for the specified N seconds.

2-3
F5259_B05
2.2.2 Traffic Rate Filtering

2.2.2.1 Process Mechanism
For the FE board, Traffic Rate Filtering means Broadcast Storm Filtering that is to
say the switch chip filter for the Ethernet broadcast frame, which provides the relief
to the broadcast data flow, in order to increase the effective network bandwidth. The
Broadcast Storm Filter functions under the following two conditions:
1. When the broadcast frame flow in the switch chip exceeds the specified
threshold. The threshold value is the ratio between the data flow of the
broadcast frame and the overall data flow in the internal buffer of the switch
chip.
2. The rate of input data becomes greater than that of output data.
For example, as shown in Figure 2-3, where all the ports in layer 2 switch work as
100 Mb/s, Port1 receives two kinds of frames: F1 (data flow is 15 Mbit/s; DA1
provides broadcast destination MAC address FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF), and F2 (data
flow is 94 Mbit/s; DA2 does not provide broadcast destination MAC address); and
other port also receives the data frame Fx (total data flow 100 Mbit/s; DAx does not
provide broadcast destination MAC address). This state in the buffer of the switch
chip forms the proportion of the broadcast data flow to the total as 15/200 = 7.5%,
but when the threshold of Broadcast Storm Filtering is 5%, the switch chip
prevents the buffer used by the broadcast data from rising over 5% by discarding the
redundant broadcast data frames of F1, hence providing relief to the broadcast data
flow of F1 via output port, and to the bandwidth occupied by the broadcast data
frame.

2-4
F5259_B05
Figure 2-3

2-5
F5259_B05
2.2.2.2 Configuration
2.2.2.2.1
For FE board:
See Figure 2-4 below. Broadcast Storm Filtering parameter has 6 values to select:
0,5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, and 25%. Select the value, and then click the Set button.
Figure 2-4
Parameter 0
Selecting 0 disables the Broadcast Storm Filtering function.
Parameter N%
Set Broadcast Storm Filtering for the threshold that is the ratio between data flow
of the broadcast frame and the overall data flow in the internal buffer of the
switch chip. The greater number (N%) allows the greater proportion of the
broadcast frames to the overall capacity of the buffer.

2-6
F5259_B05
2.2.3 Maximum Frame Size

Maximum Frame Size defines the maximum length of the Ethernet frame to let it
pass through the FE package. If the length of Ethernet data frame exceeds the
specified size, the frame is discarded.

2-7
F5259_B05
Figure 2-5
As in the Figure 2-5, enter the maximum Ethernet frame length in the Maximum
Frame Size field, and then click the Set button.
The applicable parameter ranges are from 1522 to 1568, which should include the
VLAN Tag, i.e. it specifies Maximum Frame Size N for an FE package:
1. If the length of received data frame with VLAN Tag is greater than N, the
frame is discarded.
2. If the length of received data frame without VLAN Tag is greater than N 4,
the frame is discarded.
For example, as in the Figure 2-6, F1 frame has VLAN Tag and F2 frame does not.
For F1 frame, when its length exceeds the specified size N, this F1 frame is discarded,
where the frame within the size passes through to the egress port of the L2SW; For
F2 frame, when its length exceeds N 4, this F2 frame is discarded, where the frame
within the size of N 4 passes through to the egress port of the L2SW.

2-8
F5259_B05
Figure 2-6
2.2.4 Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay

The Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay function only used for the FE board.
Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay specifies the time period for the switch to buffer
the data frame. when the time delayed for the data frame in the switch is greater than
Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay, it would be discarded.
See Figure 2-7 for example. Since the bandwidth at the ingress is larger than that of
egress (as an example of any factors), the frame Fx in the L2SW is stuck at the egress
queue, and cannot go through to egress port: Where the Maximum Bridge Transmit
Delay is specified to N (N = 1, 2 or 4), if the Fx in the L2SW egress queue fails to
be sent to egress port within N seconds, the Fx is discarded. However, when the
Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay is set to Disable, the Fx is not discarded by
buffering as long as it takes.
Figure 2-7

2-9
F5259_B05
See Figure 2-8. The Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay parameter has 4 values for
selection: Disable, 1, 2, or 4. Select one, and click the Set button. This setup
should be determined depending on the type or use of the service. When the system
does not require the punctual or quick service, e.g., for file transferring etc., disabling
this function increases forwarding capacity of the flow in FE package as possible,
regardless of the internal buffer of the switch chip. When the system requires more
punctual services, this function should be enabled to avoid affecting quality of
service.
Figure 2-8
2.2.4.2 Configuration Parameter
Specifying Disable suspends the Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay function. The
data frame is allowed being in the buffer of the switch chip regardless of the time
period, and is not to be discarded.
N defines the time period to allow the data frame held in the internal buffer of the
switch chip. If it takes over the specified time period, the data frame will be
discarded.

2-10
F5259_B05
2.2.5 Low Queue Delay Bound

Low Queue Delay Bound specifies enabling/disabling the setting for the
Maximum Queue Delay Time. Specifying Enable turns the Maximum Queue
Delay Time setup effective. When disabled, the function is suspended regardless of
the entry in the Maximum Queue Delay Time field.
Figure 2-9
2.2.6 Maximum Queue Delay Time

Maximum Queue Delay Time specifies the time period for the data frame buffered in
the low priority queue. If the data frame in low priority queue in the switch stays
over the specified time period, the data frame is discarded.
See Figure 2-10 for example. Since the bandwidth at the ingres is larger than that of
egress (as an example of any factors), the frame Fx in the L2SW is stuck in the low
egress queues to egress port: Where the Maximum Queue Delay Time is set to N
(N = 2 thru 510 ms), if the Fx in the L2SW egress queue fails to be sent to egress
port within X milliseconds, the Fx is discarded. However, when the Maximum
Bridge Transmit Delay or Low Queue Delay Bound is set to Disable, the Fx is
not discarded by buffering as long as it takes.

2-11
F5259_B05
Figure 2-10
As in the Figure 2-11, enter the maximum delay required in the Maximum Queue
Delay Time field, and click the Set button.
2.2.6.2 Configured Parameter
The applicable parameter ranges are from 2 to 510, which specifies the time period to
allow the data frame with low priority held in the internal buffer of the switch chip. If
it takes over the specified time period, the data frame is discarded.

2-12
F5259_B05
Figure 2-11
NOTE: This setup is valid only when both Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay and Low
Queue Delay Bound are enabled.
2.2.7 VLAN mode

The FE interface package of the V-NODE equipment provides two types of VLAN
modes: Port based mode and IEEE 802.1Q mode.
Figure 2-12

2-13
F5259_B05
2.2.7.1 Port Based VLAN

2.2.7.1.1
Port Based VLAN overview
As shown in the Figure 2-12, click the VLAN Mode tab to display VLAN
Operation Mode option box, and select Port based from the pull-down menu,
then click the Set button.
Port Based VLAN mode is a process using the mechanism based on the physical
port, which does not use VLAN Tag but Port ID to sort VLAN, hence, in Port
Based VLAN, the Ethernet frame will be transparently forward from ingress port
to egress port of L2SW without caring the VLAN Tag. That is to say, the mode
specially suits for transparent transmission of Ethernet layer 2 data frame without
occupying VLAN Tag resource. Either VLAN1 and VLAN2 can use the same
VLAN Tag repeatedly, but the two VLANs should be separated completely by the
physical port. See Figure 2-13 below:
Figure 2-13
2.2.7.1.2
Port Based VLAN process mechanism
Following shows the mechanism of the switch chips process for the data frame
regarding the Port Based VLAN mode:

2-14
F5259_B05
Table 2-5
Frame on Ingress Direction( Figure
Port Configuration
Process Mechanism for Port Based VLAN
2-14 )
Tagged/
In Filter
Tagged Frame
Untagged
Priority Tagged
Priority Tagged
Untagged
Setting
(VID=1)
Frame
Frame
Frame
(VID is 0)
(VID is not 0)
N/A
N/A
Transparent
Transparent
Transparent
Transparent
Frame on Egress Direction( Figure

Tagged Frame
Transparent
2-14 )
Tagged Frame
Untagged
Priority
Priority Tagged
Tagged
(VID=1)
Frame
Tagged Frame
Frame
Frame with
(VID is 0)
(VID is not 0)
PVID
Transparent
Transparent
N/A
Transparent
Transparent
Tagged Frame
Transparent
Figure 2-14

2-15
F5259_B05
2.2.7.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

2.2.7.2.1
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN overview
Click the VLAN Mode tab to display VLAN Operation Mode option box, and
select IEEE 802.1Q from the pull-down menu, then click the Set button.
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN mode is a process using the mechanism based on VLAN Tag,
which sorts VLAN according to the VLAN Tag within ranges from 0 to 4095.
This mode supports the function, such as VLAN Trunk, defined by IEEE802.1Q,
and can be applied in the more complicated network.
NOTE:
For the frame with VID = 4095:
1. its forwarded transparently under the Port-based VLAN mode.
2. its discarded under the IEEE802.1Q mode.
2.2.7.2.2
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN process mechanism
Following shows the mechanism of the switch chips process mechanism for the
data frame regarding the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN mode:

2-16
F5259_B05
Table 1-6
Frame on Ingress Direction(Figure
Port Configuration
2-14)
Tagged/
In Filter
Tagged
Untagged
Priority
Priority Tagged
Untagged
Setting
Frame
Frame
Tagged Frame
Frame
(VID is 0)
(VID is not 0)
(VID=1)
Process Mechanism for IEEE802.1Q VLAN
Frame on Egress Direction(Figure

Tagged Frame
2-14)
Tagged Frame
Untagged
Priority Tagged
Priority Tagged
Tagged Frame with
(VID=1)
Frame
Frame
Frame
PVID
(VID is 0)
(VID is not 0)
Not
Forward
Pass
add VLAN tag
change VID to
Discard Frame with
Discard Frame with
Remove VID1 and
Configured
Match VID
through
with Port
Port VID=1
undefined VID other
undefined VID
forward frame to
forward only frame
forward only frame
and forward only
than VID=1
other than VID=1
egress direction
with VID=1 that
with VID=1 that
frame with VID=1
configured by FW
configured by FW
that configured
acquiescently
acquiescently
by FW
VID=1
N/A
N/A
Remove VID
and
Tagged Frame
Remove VID
and
Remove VID
acquiescently
Drop
Pass
Untagged
through
Discard
Discard
Forward only VID=1
Forward only VID=1
Discard
Discard
Discard Frame with
Discard Frame with
undefined VID other
undefined VID
than VID=1
other than VID=1
Forward only VID=1
Forward only VID=1
Frame
Enable All
Pass
through
Disable All
Pass
add VLAN tag
change VID to
through
with Port
Port VID=1
VID=1
Untagged
Forward
IF VID=x
Match VID
Discard
Remove and
Remove and
Remove and
VID Frame
forward only
forward only
forward only
Forward only
Forward only
configured VID
configured VID
configured VID
configured VID frame
configured VID
frame
frame
frame
add VLAN tag
change VID to
Discard undefined
Discard undefined
with Port
Port VID=x
VID Frame
VID=x
Discard
N/A
N/A
frame
Drop
Pass
Untagged
through
Frame
Discard
Discard
Forward only
Forward only
configured VID
frame
( Next Page Continued )

2-17
F5259_B05
Frame on Ingress Direction(Figure
Port Configuration
2-14)
Frame on Egress Direction(Figure
Tagged/
In Filter
Tagged
Untagged
Priority
Priority Tagged
Untagged
Setting
Frame
Frame
Tagged Frame
Frame
(VID is 0)
(VID is not 0)
Discard
Discard undefined
Discard undefined
VID Frame
(VID=1)
Untagged
Enable All
Discard
Discard
IF VID=x
Tagged Frame
2-14)
Tagged Frame
Untagged
Priority Tagged
Priority Tagged
Tagged Frame with
(VID=1)
Frame
Frame
Frame
PVID
(VID is 0)
(VID is not 0)
N/A
Remove and
Remove and
Remove and
VID Frame
forward only
forward only
forward only
Forward only
Forward only
configured VID
configured VID
configured VID
configured VID
frame
frame
frame
forward only
forward only
forward only
Discard
N/A
Tagged Frame
frame
Disable All
Pass
add VLAN tag
change VID to
Forward only
Forward only
through
with Port
Port VID=x
configured VID
VID=x
Tagged
frame
N/A
Pass
add VLAN tag
change VID to
Discard undefined
Discard undefined
Remove VID1 and
Match VID
through
with Port
Port VID=1
VID Frame
VID Frame
forward frame to
configured VID
configured VID
configured VID
Forward only
Forward only
egress direction
frame
frame
frame
configured VID
VID=1
frame
Drop
Pass
Untagged
through
Discard
Discard
Forward only
Forward only
configured VID
Frame
Enable All
frame
Pass
Discard
Discard
through
Discard undefined
Discard undefined
VID Frame
VID Frame
Forward only
Forward only
configured VID
frame
Disable All
Pass
add VLAN tag
change VID to
Forward only
Forward only
through
with Port
Port VID=1
configured VID
VID=1

2-18
N/A
Forward
frame
F5259_B05
2.2.7.2.3
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Overview
1. Default VLAN
The IEEE802.1Q VLAN mode has the default VLAN in the bridge that is
defined by FW. See Figure 2-15below:
Figure 2-15
When specifying a VLAN with Untagged to some ports, these ports will be
excluded from the default VLAN, where other ports with Tagged setting are
taken as the default VLAN. See Figure 2-16 below:
Figure 2-16
When specifying a VLAN with Untagged to some ports, these ports will be
excluded from the default VLAN, where other ports with Tagged setting are
taken as the default VLAN. See Figure 2-17 below:

2-19
F5259_B05
Figure 2-17
VLAN Setting: LAN1-a-U, WAN1-a-T
2. IEEE802.1Q VLAN
Figure 2-18
VLAN Setting:
LAN1-a-U, WAN1-a-U
LAN2-b-U, WAN2-b-T
LAN3-c-T, WAN3-c-T
LAN4-d-T, WAN4-d-U
LAN4-e-U
There are six VLANs in bridge included for the default VLAN.
3. Port Filtering Application Overview
3.1 Untagged Frame processing
3.1.1 Ingress Filter: Disable All or Forward Match VID on all ports
Figure 2-19
NOTE: UF denotes Untagged Frame, and TFx denotes Tagged Frame

2-20
F5259_B05
with VID x(here x represents characters a ,b ,c, etc.).

See Figure 2-19 above. If an untagged frame is received from LAN1, this frame,
after a VID a is added at the ingress direction, is forwarded to WAN1 only,
then the VID is removed at the egress direction.
If an untagged frame is received from LAN2, this frame, after a VID b is
added at the ingress direction, is forwarded to WAN2 only, but the VID is not
removed at the egress direction.
3.1.2 Ingress Filter: Enable All or Drop Untagged Frame on all ports
Figure 2-20
See Figure 2-20 above. If an untagged frame is received from LAN1, this frame
will be dropped by ingress filter on LAN1.;
If an untagged frame is received from LAN2, this frame will be dropped by
ingress filter on LAN2.
3.1.3 Ingress Filter: Disable All or Forward Match VID on all ports
Figure 2-21
will be dropped by ingress filter on LAN3.

2-21
F5259_B05
3.1.4 Ingress Filter: Enable All or Forward Match VID on all ports
Figure 2-22
Figure 2-23
3.1.6 Ingress Filter: Enable All or Drop Untagged Frame on all ports
Figure 2-24

2-22
F5259_B05
3.2 Tagged Frame processing

3.2.1 Ingress Filter: Disable All or Drop Untagged Frame or Enable All or
Forward Match VID on all ports
Figure 2-25
See Figure 2-25 above. If a tagged frame (VID = a) is received from LAN1,
this frame belongs to VLANa, so that the frame is forwarded to WAN1 only,
then the VID is rmoeved at the egress direction.
If a tagged frame (VID = b) is received from LAN2, this frame belongs to
VLANb, so that the frame is forward to WAN2 only, but the VID is not
removed at the egress direction;
If a tagged frame (VID = c) is received from LAN3, this frame belongs to
VLANc, so that the frame is forwarded to WAN3 only, but the VID is not
removed at the egress direction;
If a tagged frame (VID = d) is received from LAN4, this frame belongs to
VLANd, so that the frame is forwarded to WAN4 only, then the VID is
removed at the egress direction.

2-23
F5259_B05
3.2.2 Ingress Filter: Disable All or Drop Untagged Frame or Enable All or
Forward Match VID on all ports.
Figure 2-26
See Figure 2-26 above. Iif a tagged frame(VID = e) is received from LAN4,
this frame belongs to VLANe, so that the frame is dropped at the egress
direction.
3.2.3 Ingress Filter: Disable All or Drop Untagged Frame on all ports
Figure 2-27
See Figure 2-27 above. If a tagged frame (VID = b) is received from LAN1,
this frame is dropped by ingress filter on LAN1.
If a tagged frame (VID = e) is received from LAN3, this frame is dropped by
3.2.4
Ingress Filter: Enable All or Forward Match VID on all ports
Figure 2-28
See Figure 2-28 above. If a tagged frame (VID = b) is received from LAN1,
this frame is dropped by ingress filter on LAN1.
If a tagged frame (VID = e) is received from LAN3, this frame is dropped by

2-24
F5259_B05
3.2.5 Ingress Filter: Disable All or Drop Untagged Frame on all ports
Figure 2-29
See Figure 2-29 above. If a tagged frame (VID is not specified; x a, b, c, d, e,
or 1) is received from LAN1, this frame will be dropped.
If a tagged frame (VID is not specified; x a, b, c, d, e, or 1) is received from
LAN2, this frame will be dropped.
Figure 2-30
See Figure 2-30 above. If a tagged frame (VID is not specified in this port; x
a) is received from LAN1, this frame will be dropped by ingress filter on
LAN1;
If a tagged frame (VID is not specified in this port; x b) is received from
LAN2, this frame will be dropped by ingress filter on LAN2;
If a tagged frame (VID is not specified in this port; x c, or 1) is received
from LAN3, this frame will be dropped by ingress filter on LAN3;
If a tagged frame (VID is not specified in this port; x d, or e) is received
from LAN4, this frame will be dropped by ingress filter on LAN4.

2-25
F5259_B05
2.2.8 Spanning-Tree Protocol

2.2.8.1 STP Configuration
V-Node supports STP (Spanning-Tree Algorithm and Protocol) that is a link
management protocol, which prevents undesirable loops in the Ethernet network.
2.2.8.2 STP protocol configuration
Use STP Config option box in the Layer 2 Configuration dialog box to specify
STP protocol parameter and to display the related information on STP protocol.
An example of the STP Config option box is shown below:
Figure 2-31
Following are the items to be specified:
1. STP Action
Specify to enable/disable the STP protocol. (default: Enable)
2. Bridge Hello Time
Specify the output interval of BPDU that should be sent by the root network
bridge. A range is from 1s to 10s. (default: 2s)
NOTE: BPDU denotes the Bridge Protocol Data Unit.
3. Bridge Forward Delay Time
Specify a period for the timer used by STP port in the Learning and Listening
2-26
F5259_B05
state. When the port status changes from blocking to forwarding, both Learning
and Listening status need to be passed. A range is from 4s to 30s. (default: 15s)
4. Bridge Max Age
Specify the Maximum Age timer that measures the age of received protocol
information to ensure if or not to discard it. A range from 6s to 40s. (default:
20s)
5. Bridge Priority
Specify the Bridge (switch) Priority that can assign the root bridge to any bridge.
This priority is used for a part of Bridge ID. The bridge with highest priority
(the least number) serves as a root bridge. A range is from 0 to 65535. (default
is 32768)
Following are the items to be displayed:
The corresponding STP protocol information displayed in the middle of STP
Config is listed below:
1. STP Action
Current protocol enable status.
2. Bridge Hello Time
The time interval of BPDU configuration sent by root Network Bridge.
3. Bridge Forward Delay Time
The learning and listening time used by STP port.
4. Bridge Max Age
Maximum survived time of BPDU configuration.
5. Bridge Priority
Network Bridge priority.
6. STP Standard
The currently selected protocols standard. This selection cannot be changed.
7. Bridge Address
MAC address of the Network Bridge (factory adjusted). Each network bridge is
designated to have unique address. The address is part of Bridge ID that
identifies the network bridge.
8. Root Bridge ID

2-27
F5259_B05
The currently registered ID for the root Network Bridge. The Root Bridge ID
contains both Bridge Priority and Bridge Address.
Each network bridge is designated to have unique address. The ID is used for
identifying the root network bridge. The ID of root Network Bridge is made of
two parts, the first part indicates the priority of the Network Bridge, and the
second part is the MAC address of the Network Bridge.
2.2.8.3 STP port configuration
Use STP Port option box in the Layer 2 Configuration dialog box to view/edit the
specified STP protocol parameter and the related information on STP protocol. An
example of STP Port option box is shown below:
Figure 2-32
Following are the items to be displayed:
1. STP Control
Shows/Modifies Enable(d)/Disable(d) state for the STP protocol of the target
port. The port specified to disable does not manage any BPDU and is not related
to any STP action. Default on LAN port is Disable, default on WAN port is
Enable.
2. Link Cost
Shows/Modifies the ports link cost. A range is from 0 to 255. (default: 128)
3. Port Priority
2-28
F5259_B05
Both the port priority and the No. of the port are form the port ID. Each port of
the network bridge has unique port ID. The least numbered ID has the higher
the priority. A range is from 0 to 255. (default: 128)
4. Port Status
The STP status of the port:
The port has five statuses: forwarding, learning, listening, blocking, and
disabled. When the STP control is set to Disable, port has two statuses:
forwarding and disabled, which is defined by STP algorithm.
2.2.8.4 STP basic principle
Once Spanning-Tree Algorithm and Protocol has been carried out, the dynamic
tree topologic structure will be formed, which prevents undesirable loops among
any two NEs, hence it manages to provide no broadcast storms caused by the
loops. At the same time, the Spanning-Tree Algorithm reconfigures the
spanning-tree topology and reestablishes the link by activating the standby path. if
a failure occurs in the tree structure.
2.2.8.5 Principal and algorithm
1. The term definition:
Root bridge: the bridge with the highest priority:
Root link cost: the summation of the link cost on all hops from the bridge to
the root bridge.
Root port: the port with the lowest root link cost in the bridge; among the
ports with the same root link cost, the one with highest priority will be the
root port.
Designated bridge: the bridge with the lowest root link cost in the network
Designated port: the port between the network and designated bridge; if more
than one port is on the line, the one with highest priority will be the
designated port.
The ports status is ruled by Spanning-Tree algorithm, which includes five
statuses: forwarding, learning, listening, blocking and disable.
2-29
F5259_B05
2. The Spanning-Ttree algorithm is based on the following:

The unique group address identifies all bridges in a specific network.
Each bridge has a unique bridge identifier:
Each bridges port has a unique port identifier
3. The configuration management for the Spanning-Ttree requires:
Coordinate a relative priority for each bridge;
Coordinate a relative priority for each bridges port;
Coordinate a link cost for each port.
4. BPDU coding:
BPDU frame is sent periodically among the bridges to exchange the
Spanning-Tree configuration information, responding the change of network
topology, cost or priority quickly.
Two kinds of BPDU are used: the configuration BPDU that covers
configuration information, and the topology-change notification BPDU that is
output when the topology structure changes. Following shows the coding of
both the configuration BPDU and the topology-change notification BPDU:
(Change notification BPDU)

2-30
F5259_B05
(Configuration BPDU)
5.
Following are the necessary key elements to form a Spanning-Tree:

Decide root bridge
a. At the beginning, all bridges take themselves as a root bridge;
b. The bridge sends the configuration BPDU with the same root ID and bridge
ID to the network connected.
c. The frame of its own is discarded if the value of the received root ID is
greater than its own, otherwise, the parameter, such as bridges root id, root
link cost, are updated, and output the broadcast configuration BPDU with
new value continually.
Decide root port
The port with lowest root link cost in a bridge is called root port. Among the

2-31
F5259_B05
ports with same lowest root link cost, the port with highest priority is called
root port. Among the ports with the same lowest root link cost and highest
priority, the port with least numbered port is called root port.
Decide networks designated bridge
a. At the beginning, all bridges take themselves as the networks designated
bridge.
b. The bridge would not affirm itself as designated bridge when the bridge
receives the BPDU with lower root link cost (in the same network) from other
bridge. If in the network, among the bridges with the same root link cost, the
bridge with highest priority will be the designated bridge, and other bridges
ports connected with root is set to block status.
c. If the designated bridge receives a configuration BPDU from other bridge
competing for the designated bridge, the designated bridge outputs a response
configuration BPDU to declare being the designated bridge again.
Decide designated port
The designated port is the one connected with the network in the designated
bridge. If designated bridge has two or more ports connected with this
network, the one with least numbered ID will be the designated port. Except
the root port and designated port, other ports will be set into the block status.
Thus, a Spanning-Trees topology structure is configured when the root
bridge, the bridges root port, as well as each networks designated bridge and
designated port are specified.
6.
Topology change
Topology information transmitted in the network is limited by time; the time
information is included in the each configured BPDU, which is called
message time. Each bridge stores the protocol information of the designated
port from the network, and monitors the time of this information buffered. In
both normal and stable status, root bridge sends configuration message to
ensure that the topology information is not expired. If root bridge invalid, the
protocol information in the other bridges will be expired, the now topology
structure will be transmitted in the network quickly.
When a bridge detects the change of the topology, it will send BPDU of
topology-change notification to the designated bridge in the root bridge
direction periodically according to the time interval in the topology-change
notification timer ( the confirmation information is configured in the BPDU
and called topology change flag), at the same time, the designated bridge

2-32
F5259_B05
repeat the above procedure, continue to send BPDU of topology-change

notification to the bridge along the direction to the root bridge. The
notification could be transmitted to the root bridge finally. Once the root
bridge receives a notification, or itself changes the topology structure, it will
send configuration BPDU for a period of time, the topology change flag in
the configuration BPDU is set. All bridges would receive one or more
configuration messages, and age the address in the filtering database by the
forwarding delay parameter. All bridges would choose again the root bridge,
the root port of the bridge and designate bridge and designated port in each
network; the Spanning-Trees topology structure is reconfigured.
2.2.8.6 STP application overview

See Figure 2-33 for an example regarding the STP application.
Bridge 1&10:
VLAN X: LAN1 (Tag),WAN1(Tag),WAN2(Tag)
VLAN Y: LAN3 (Tag),WAN4(Tag)
VLAN 1: LAN1(Untag), WAN1 (Untag), WAN2(Untag), LAN3(Untag),
WAN4 (Untag)
Bridge 2~9 & X:
VLAN X: LAN1 (Tag),WAN1(Tag),WAN2(Tag)
VLAN Y: LAN3 (Tag),WAN3(Tag),WAN4(Tag)
VLAN 1:
LAN1 (Untag),WAN1(Untag),WAN2(Untag),LAN3(Untag),
WAN3(Untag), WAN4(Untag)

2-33
F5259_B05
Figure 2-33
2.2.8.6.1
VLAN
Because the STP based on 802.1D is global STP, and it is not limited in the
VLANs broadcast field, the STP cant be working on the whole network when the
service is transmitted through multiple fields divided by the VLAN. The part
ports STP function is required to close, and the closed ports STP protection is
invalid, when these ports present on the ring, the service would be flood and the
network result in the paralysis finally.
As the Figure 2-34 shows, STP is effective in the VLAN xs broadcast field,
VLAN y s field is not protected. The formed tree topology shows as below:
Figure 2-34

2-34
F5259_B05
2.2.8.6.2
Ring preventing
To avoid the ring, STP function must be combined with VLAN function. Many
potential rings exist, as shows below:
Figure 2-35
1. Ring Loop1 in the VLAN X
The ring is prevented by STP function
2. Loop210 in the default VLAN 1
The VLAN entrance filtering function is required to configure for the ring
preventing as the VLAN1 broadcast field is not protected by the STP function.
The filtering rule on the WAN port can be set as Enable All to avoid
Untagged frame is transmitting on the network; the filtering function on the
LAN port is configured according to external subscribers equipment or
network. If VLAN is supported at the subscriber side, the filtering rule on the
LAN port entrance may be set as Enable All, the data input from the
subscriber side carry the designated VLAN ID to avoid Untagged data frame
enter network completely; otherwise, to avoid the data frame with VID = 1
enters the network, LAN port is required to assign to designated VLAN by
Untagged mode, and entrance filtering rule is set as Forward Matched VID.
3. The ring Loop X networked by LAN port

2-35
F5259_B05
Since networking directly, and any subscriber equipment is not passed, the
entrance filtering rule on the LAN port is set as Enable All.
4. The ring Loop A in the VLAN Y
It can not be protected for the ring of the VLAN Y broadcast field formed by
the false connection. For example, the ring formed by the WAN3 of the
bridge2 and WAN4 of the bridge3 by false connection. When the case is
happened, it only can be found and recovered manually.
5. The ring formed by the external subscriber network
The case is not caused by the V-NODE equipment, it is out of protection.
2.2.8.6.3
Root bridge
STP spanning tree is based on the root node, the stability of the root node affect
the one of whole networks STP function. Hence there are some basic rules on the
choice of root node. The root bridge can be decided by the bridge priority.
We usually choose the NE as the root node, which is located in the center node
(such as aggregative node), and has the most abundant network resource. Take the
Figure 2-36 as instance, since it is located in the cross point between the ring and
the link network, it is more suitable that the Bridge 2 is considered as root node.
Except the above, we can optimize the network load according to the final network
data flow. For example, at the beginning, the Bridge 2 is set as root, suppose that
blocking is happened at the port between the Bridge 6 and Bridge 7, if there are a
large numbers of service flows to Bridge 6 on the Ethernet shared ring, at the same
time, there is service to Bridge 6 from the branch, the root ports load of the
Bridge 6 becomes more heavier, the link along this direction would congest more.
At this moment, changing the network bridges priority make Bridge 6 root
become the network bridge, at the same time, make the blocking happened at the
port between Bridge 1 and Bridge 2, The network flow of the brdige1 and
bridge7-10 will be distributed, the bandwidth requirement from the Bridge 2 to
Bridge 6 is relaxed.

2-36
F5259_B05
Figure 2-36
2.2.8.6.4
Network Diameter
The default of the STPs network diameter is 7. STP protocol parameter needs to
be changed for greater network.
Changing STP protocol parameter is required to satisfy the formula as below:
1.
Bridge Max Age >= 4*Bridge Hello Time + 2*Maximum Bridge Diameter 2
2.
Bridge Forward Delay >= (4*Bridge Hello Time + 3*Maximum Bridge

Diameter)/2
Maximum Bridge Diameter means maximum network diameter.

Take the Figure 2-36 as instance, there are 10 NEs in the Ethernet ring, the
network diameter is 9, when Bridge Hello Time is set as 2s:
1.
Bridge Max Age >= 24
2.
Bridge Forward Delay >= 18
By the above formula, we can get the maximum network diameter 17 when set
Bridge Max Age=40s, Bridge Forward Delay=30s, while the Bridge Hello Time is
set as 2s.

2-37
F5259_B05
2.2.9 Trunk
Trunk function is called as link aggregation in other word.
Figure 2-37
Both the LANm and the LANn can be configured as the TRUNK Group1, and both
the WANx and the WANy can be configured as the TRUNK Group2, which is
shown as Figure 2-37, then the switch chip processes each trunk group as a logical
port. The Ethernet data frame from both the LANm and the LANn will be forwarded
to both the WANx and the WANy averagely according to the source address as well
as the destination address and the port ID, for example, the data frame from both the
LANm and the LANn can be divided into many kinds according to the source
address as well as the destination address and the port ID, the first kind will be
forwarded to the WANx, the second kind to the port WANy, the third kind to the port
WANx, and the fourth kind to the port WANy , and so on; and same thing happens
along the opposite direction. Since the data frame is almost forwarded to the ports of
the trunk group randomly, the maximum effective bandwidth via trunk group should
be according to the actual situation.
For example, when the Ethernet data frame from both the LANm and the LANn is
forwarded to both the ports WANx and WANy, when the bandwidth of the WANx is
not equal to the one of the WANy, and the bandwidth of the WANx is A, the
bandwidth of the WANy is B (A>B), the effective bandwidth range of TRUNK
Group2 is from 2*B to A+B.
Instance:
when the Ethernet data frame from both the LANm and the LANn is forwarded to
both the ports WANx and WANy, when the bandwidth of the WANx is not equal to
the one of the WANy, and the bandwidth of the WANx is 42*vc12, the bandwidth of
the WANy is 21*vc12:

2-38
F5259_B05
1.
If the traffic forwarded to the port WANx is 21*vc12, and the traffic forwarded
to the port WANy is 42*vc12, the maximum effective bandwidth of TRUNK
Group2 should be the minimum: 2*21*vc1242*vc12, which shown as the
Figure 2-38 below.
Figure 2-38
the maximum effective bandwidth is: 2*21*vc12=42*vc12
2.
If the traffic forwarded to the port WANx is 42*vc12, the traffic forwarded to
the port WANy is 21*vc12, the maximum effective bandwidth of TRUNK
Group2 should be the maximum: 42*vc12+21*vc12=63*vc12, which shown as
the Figure 2-39 below.
Figure 2-39
the maximum effective bandwidth is: 42*vc12+21*vc12=63*vc12
To increase transmission bandwidth, trunk function is useful. When WAN #1 and
WAN #2 are in the trunk group and each VC of WAN is VC12xV, x=21, in this case,
maximum transmission bandwidth reaches to more than 60Mbps.
In the same VLAN group, trunk port group can be configured.
To use trunk function, L2SW at the opposite side should be accommodated by FE
boardof V-NODE because frame distribution algorithm should match with each other
2-39
F5259_B05
at local side and remote side.

In NE management dialog Box, Select LAN-InterfaceLayer 2 Configuration
Trunk, the popup window Figure 2-40 is CIDs Trunk function interface. Its
used to set Trunk parameters.
Figure 2-40 Trunk Function Interface
2.2.10 Port monitor configuration

The port monitor function can monitor both the input and the output data over the
service port by the idle port. The function configuration is introduced chiefly as
below:
2.2.10.1
Monitor configuration
The corresponding information of the monitor configuration is located at the monitor

part of page Bridge in the Layer 2 Configuration configuration menu; the
configuration interface is shown as below:

2-40
F5259_B05
Figure 2-41
The items to be configured and queried:
1. Monitor Mode
Configure the monitor mode. The choices include Disable, Ingress,
Egress and Both. Default is Disable
Disable indicates close monitor function.
Ingress indicates monitor the data in input direction.
Engress indicates monitor the data in output direction.
Both indicates monitor the data in both input and output direction.
2. Monitoring Port
Configure the port for monitoring. Ranges from LAN1 to LAN6.
3. Monitored Port
Configure the port monitored. Ranges from LAN1 to LAN6 or from WAN1 to
WAN4

2-41
F5259_B05
2.2.10.2
Monitor function
The monitor function is that forward the service in certain direction from the
monitored port to the monitoring port by which observes users data.
Figure 2-42
Some points need to be pay attention to use the monitor function:
1. Both the monitored port and monitoring port are required to be in the same
VLAN.
2. The flow control frame cant be monitored.
3. The trunk port cant be monitored.
2.2.11 MAC filtering

According to configured information, action to incoming frame can be set. When
the frame with specified MAC address as destination is incoming, if the customer
wants to discard this frame and this MAC address is configured as discard frame,
this frame is discarded in L2SW. For forwarding action, almost the same way is
required.
This function is used as filtering database with manual operation also.

2-42
F5259_B05
In NE management dialog Box, Select LAN-Interface Layer 2 Configuration Mac Table, the popup window Figure 2-43 is CIDs Mac Filtering
function interface. Its used to set Mac filtering parameters.
Figure 2-43
Mac Filtering Function Interface
The MAC Table configuration is shown as the Figure 2-44, and the Figure 2-45
shows the mechanism of the data frame A with the destination address
00-00-00-00-00-11 processed by the L2SW, when A is input from the LAN1, it is
discarded, which is shown as red line; when A is input from the other port with the
same VLAN, it is forwarded to the LAN1, which is shown as the blue line.

2-43
F5259_B05
Figure 2-44
Figure 2-45
The MAC table configuration is shown as the Figure 2-46, the Figure 2-47 shows
the mechanism of the data frame A with the destination address 00-00-0000-00-11 processed by the L2SW, regardless A is input from any port of the
VLAN, it is discarded, which is shown as red line.

2-44
F5259_B05
Figure 2-46
Figure 2-47
MAC table is used to define static route and special valuable when Security item
of LAN-Interface port configuration is enabled. Following table describes all
kinds of frames how to input or output L2SW taking LAN#1 and WAN#1 for
example.
Figure 2-48

2-45
F5259_B05
1. When Security is disabled:

PORT ACTION (SECURITY = DISABLE)
Frame with Destination Address
LAN#1 PORT
Input
Output
WAN#1 PORT
Forward
Discard
Forward
Discard
00:00:00:00:00:01
00:00:00:00:00:01
00:00:00:00:00:01
00:00:00:00:00:01
MAC:00-00-00-00-00-01
Discard
Discard
Discard
Discard
Other MAC address
Forward
Forward
Forward
Forward
MAC:00-00-00-00-00-01
Forward
Discard
Forward
Discard
Other MAC address
Forward
Forward
Forward
Forward
2. When Security is enabled (No Security enabling function for WAN port):
PORT ACTION (SECURITY = ENABLE)
Frame with Destination Address
LAN#1 PORT
Input
Forward
Discard
Forward
Discard
00:00:00:00:00:01
00:00:00:00:00:01
00:00:00:00:00:01
00:00:00:00:00:01
Discard
Discard
Discard(Note3)
Discard
MAC:00-00-00-00-00-01
Forward
Discard
Other MAC address
Forward
Forward
MAC:00-00-00-00-00-01
Other MAC address
Output
WAN#1 PORT
NOTE:
1) Input and Output directions are based on L2SW (Layer 2 Switch).
2) Meaning of three results is shown below:
Forward
Forward the frame only to the port which the MAC address be set in MAC table.
Forward
Forward the frame on the port.
Discard
Discard the frame on the port.
3) When the frame with the source MAC address same as the MAC address set in MAC
table (in above case, the source MAC address is 00-00-00-00-00-01), this frame will
be forwarded on the port.

2-46
F5259_B05
2.2.12 Service priority configuration

Service priority has three modes: FIFO (First-In First-Out), SP (Strictly Priority),
WRR (Weighted Round Robin). We will introduce the function chiefly:
2.2.12.1
Priority configuration
Used for the configuring and querying the service queue, it is located at the queue
part of the page Bridge in the Layer 2 Configuration menu. The configuration
interface is shown as below:
Figure 2-49
The items to be configured and queried:
1.
Queue Mode
Configure service queue mode. The choices include FIFO(First-In
First-Out),SP(Strictly Priority),WRR(Weighted Round Robin). Default is
FIFO.
2. WRR High Weight

This item only used for the FE board.
The weight of high priority service queue under WRR queue mode. A range from
1 to 7, default is 1.
3. WRR Low Weight
This item only used for the FE board.
The weight of low priority queue under WRR queue mode. A range from 1 to 7,

2-47
F5259_B05
default is 1.
4.
User Priority
Configure the frame with user priority to process as high or low priority in the
bridge of V-NODE FE package. The frame with user priority has 8 types
priority from 0 to 7, which is carried in "VLAN Header" field of the frame.
For the FE board can process two type priorites:"0" and "1", and the 8 types
user priority should be specified as "0" or "1". "0" indicates processing the
frame with user priority as low priority frame in bridge of V-NODE FE unit,
and "1" indicates processing the frame as high priority. Default is 0 for the
user priority from 0 to 3, and 1 for the user priority from 4 to 7.
Each L2SW chip on the FE package has two priority queues: one high priority
queue, and another low priority queue. All switchs port shares the two queues,
the input data frame from the all ports enters the corresponding queue for
forwarding according to the configured priority control strategy.
Figure 2-50

2-48
F5259_B05
First-In First-Out (FIFO)

The data frame from each port is forwarded according to the order entering
the queue not the priority.
Strict priority (SP)
The frame with high priority configuration is input to the high priority queue,
the frame with low priority configuration is input to the low priority queue,
the data frame without priority configuration is processed as low priority.
The data in the low priority queue only can be sent after the data in the high
priority queue.
Weighted Round Robin(WRR)
For FE package, the frame with high priority configuration is input to the
high priority queue, the frame with low priority configuration is input to the
low priority queue, the data frame without priority configuration is
processed as low priority. The proportion between the output bandwidth of
the high priority queue and the one of the low priority queue is assigned by
the configured high priority weight and low priority weight.
Notice the points below on how to use priority service function:
Since the priority service is based on the frame with priority, the data is
required to carry priority information, the equipment only carry out the
classification of priority not addition of the priority for data.
The priority service needs to be cooperated with the flow control, it requires
the external subscriber equipment support flow control, thereby suppress
data sending.
Since the priority service is carried out by suppressing the data sending by
the flow control, the granularity of the frame affects the precise of flow
control. For example: the flow control for the frame with 64 bytes is far
more precise than the one with 1518 bytes.

2-49
F5259_B05
2.3 Encapsulation and LCAS Function

V-Node can accommodate Encapsulation and LCAS function by using FE board. In this
section, these functions are introduced.
2.3.1 Encapsulation
V-Node supports two kinds of encapsulations: GFP and LAPS.
2.3.1.1 GFP Function
GFP provides a generic mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over a
transport network. Client signals may be PDU-oriented (such as IP/PPP or Ethernet
MAC), block-code oriented constant bit rate stream (such as Fibre Channel or
ESCON/SBCON).
2.3.1.1.1
Frame Format
The GFP frame format is as following diagram:

2-50
F5259_B05
Core head
The four octets of the GFP Core Header consist of a 16-bit PDU Length Indicator field
and a 16-bit Core Header Error Check (cHEC) field. This header allows GFP frame
delineation independent of the content of the higher layer PDUs.
PDU Length Indicator (PLI)

The two-octet PLI field contains a binary number representing the number of octets
in the GFP Payload Area. The absolute minimum value of the PLI field in a GFP
client frame is 4 octets. PLI values 0-3 are reserved for GFP control frame usage
Core HEC (cHEC)
The two-octet Core Header Error Control field contains a CRC-16 error control code
that protects the integrity of the contents of the Core Header by enabling both
single-bit error correction and multi-bit error detection. The cHEC sequence is
calculated over the octets of the Core Header as defined in G(x) = x16 + x12 + x5 + 1.
GFP Payload Area
The GFP Payload Area, which consists of all octets in the GFP frame after the GFP Core
Header, is used to convey higher layer specific protocol information. This variable length
area may include from 4 to 65 535 octets. The GFP Payload Area consists of two
common components: a Payload Header and a Payload Information field. An optional
Payload FCS (pFCS) field is also supported.

2-51
F5259_B05
GFP Payload Header

The Payload Header is a variable-length area, 4 to 64 octets long, intended to support data
link management procedures specific to the higher-layer client signal. The structure of the
GFP Payload Header is illustrated in the figure.
GFP Type field

The GFP Type field is a mandatory two-octet field of the Payload Header that indicates
the content and format of the GFP Payload Information field
Payload Type Identifier (PTI)

A 3-bit subfield of the Type field identifies the type of GFP client frame. Two kinds
of client frames are currently defined, User Data frames (PTI = 000) and Client
Manage- ment frames (PTI=100).

2-52
F5259_B05
Payload FCS Indicator (PFI)

A one bit subfield of the Type field indicating the presence (PFI=1) or absence
(PFI=0) of the Payload FCS field.
Extension Header Identifier (EXI)
A 4-bit subfield of the Type field identifies the type of Extension Header GFP.
Three kinds of Extension Headers are currently defined, a Null Extension Header
(0000), a Linear Extension Header (0001), and a Ring Extension Header (0010).The
other is reserved.
User Payload Identifier (UPI)
An 8-bit field identifying the type of payload conveyed in the GFP Payload
Information field. Interpretation of the UPI field is relative to the type of GFP client
frame as indicated by the PTI subfield.
Type HEC (tHEC)
The two-octet Type Header Error Control field contains a CRC-16 error control code that
protects the integrity of the contents of the Type Field by enabling both single-bit error
correction and multi-bit error detection. The Type header consists of the Type field and
the tHEC.
Extension HEC (eHEC)
The two-octet Extension Header Error Control field contains a CRC-16 error control code
that protects the integrity of the contents of the extension headers by enabling both
single-bit error correction (optional) and multi-bit error detection.
Payload Frame Check Sequence (pFCS)
The GFP Payload FCS is an optional, four-octet long, frame check sequence. It
contains a CRC-32 sequence that protects the contents of the GFP Payload Information
field. The FCS generation process is defined in G(x)=x32 + x26 + x26 + x23 + x22 +
x16 + x12 + x11 + x10 + x8 + x7 + x5 + x4 + x2 + x1 + 1 where x32 corresponds
to the MSB and x0 corresponds to the LSB.

2-53
F5259_B05
2.3.1.1.2
Extension Header
The extension header is including the three types: Null extension, Linear and Ring.
Null Extension
The mode is not support extension header. This is for the point to point application.
Linear frame extension header
It is for the linear application.Now dont support
Ring frame extension header
Now it is not support.

2-54
F5259_B05
2.3.1.1.3
Frame-Mapped GFP (Payload-Dependent)
2.3.1.2 LAPS Function

LAPS describes an HDLC-like framing structure to encapsulate IEEE 802.3 Ethernet
MAC frame as shown as below, provide a point-to-point full-duplex simultaneous
bidirectional operation. The relationship between LAPS and Ethernet and SDH physical
layer is shown as below:

2-55
F5259_B05
2.3.1.2.1
Frame Format
LAPS link entity accepts frames from the MAC layer through the reconciliation sublayer
and an equivalent MII (Media Independent Interface). No address filtering function is
used here. The format of LAPS information field is defined in the shaded region of
Figure 6. Figure 7 presents the format of LAPS frame after encapsulating MAC field. The
order of those octets and bits (shaded area as shown in Figure 7) is kept intact. The FCS
computations of LAPS and MAC refer to ITU-T X.85/Y.1321 and IEEE 802.3 standard
respectively. The function unit of Ethernet over LAPS forwards all incoming LAPS
information field to its peer connected link except the originating link port, and is
permitted to buffer one or more incoming frames before forwarding them. Figure 8 shows
the relationship between the reconciliation sublayer/MII and LAPS/SDH.

2-56
F5259_B05
2.3.1.2.2
Rate adaptation
If the Rate Adaptation is needed in the LAPS transmit processing, transmit entity adds the
rate-adaptation octet(s) "0xdd" within the frame by sending sequence(s) of {0x7d, 0xdd}.
This function is performed just after transparency processing and before the end flag is
added. In receive direction, receive entity will remove the Rate Adaptation octet(s)
"0xdd" within the LAPS frame when detecting sequence(s) of {0x7d, 0xdd}. This
function will be done just before transparency processing and after the end flag is
detected.

2-57
F5259_B05
NOTE: The difference between LAPS and GFP-F are shown as bellow:
Item
LAPS
GFP-F
frame delineation
Use special octet7E for

LAPS frame delineation, the
starting octet and ending
octet of the LAPS frame is
7E
scrambling
/descrambling
x43 + 1
GFP frame delineation is

performed based on the
correlation between the first
two octets of the GFP
frame and the embedded
two-octet cHEC field.
x43 + 1
FCS
CRC-32
0x7e -> 0x7d, 0x5e;0x7d ->
0x7d, 0x5d;
Fill octet 7E
Point to Point
The utilization ratio of the
bandwidth would be
decreased if the Ethernet
data include 0x7e or
0x7d,the available bandwidth
would be half especially if
the Ethernet data is all 0x7e
or 0x7d.
Narrow application, only very
few users are using. The
internetworking of the
equipments may have
problems because the
equipment manufacturers
haven't passed the
internetworking test.
Payload Process
Inter-Frame-Gap
Protocol coverage
Bandwidth
Compatibility
CRC-32 selected by CID

Normal
GFP idle Frame
Point to Point, Linear,Ring
The utilization ratio of the
bandwidth doesn't connect
with the Ethernet data; it
would not be decreased
because some special data is
transmitted.
Widely applied over the

world. GFP is recommended
when the internetworking of
the equipments is required, if
the equipment manufacturers
have passed the
internetworking test strictly.
In NE management dialog Box, Select LAN-Interface Encapsulation Configuration,

the popup window Figure 2-51. is CIDs Encapsulation Configuration and LCAS
function interface. Its used to set Encapsulation configuration and LCAS function.

2-58
F5259_B05
Figure 2-51 Encapsulation Configuration and LCAS Function Interface
2.3.2 LCAS
LCAS(Link capacity adjustment scheme) provides a control mechanism to hitless
increase or decrease the capacity of a VCG(Virtual Concatenation Group) link in SDH
network. It will automatically decrease the capacity if a member experiences a failure in
the network, and increase the capacity when the failure is repaired. The LCAS assumes
that the capacity initiation, increase or decrease of is carried out by Network and Element
Management Systems. The scheme is applicable to every member of the Virtual
Concatenation group.
LCAS defines the member status and control information, which exchanged between the
source and sink side to enable the flexible resizing capacity of a VCG link. The member
status and control information are carried by the multiframe of the path overhead byte
H4 (in VC3/VC4 virtual concatenation case) or K4 (in VC12 virtual concatenation case).
The multiframe of H4 or K4 are shown as below:

2-59
F5259_A05B05
H4 byte
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
MS nibble
CRC-8
Member status MST
Member status MST
0
0
0
RS Ack
Reserved ("0000")
Reserved ("0000")
Reserved ("0000")
Sequence indicator SQ MSBs (bits 1-4)
Sequence indicator SQ MSBs (bits 5-8)
**
2 multiframe indicator MF12 MSB (bits 1-4)
**
2 multiframe indicator MF12 MSB (bits 5-8)
CTRL
0
0
0
GID
Reserved ("0000")
Reserved ("0000")
CRC-8
CRC-8
Member status MST
Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8

*
1 multiframe indicator
MF11 LS nibble (bit 1-4)
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Figure 2-52 VC3/VC4 H4 Multiframe Structure
Figure 2-53

2-60
VC12 K4 Multiframe Structure
1 multi- 2 multiframe
frame
no.
no.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
n+
F5259_B05
LCAS Signaling
In addition to the Multiframe Indicator (MFI) and Sequence Indicator used for virtual
concatenation, LCAS adds the following fields. Refer to
Figure 2-52 and Figure 2-53.
a) Member status (MST)
b) Re-sequence Acknowledge (RS-Ack)
c) Control (CTRL)
d) Group Identification (GID)
These fields (along with the MFI and Sequence Indicator) are sent in messages which are
protected by a CRC. This allows validation of the received LCAS/VC overhead within a
single control message instead of using a multiframe validation. Any control messages
for which the CRC indicates errors are discarded
MST
Member status for each member path of a VCG is transmitted on all members of a VCG
simultaneously.
This information is sent on each member path in 32 consecutive control messages.
Current member status is continuously updated from control messages received on all
healthy member paths.
RS-Ack
RS-Ack is toggled to acknowledge a request for a change to member status which
involves re-ordering/ changing of Sequence Indicators. These requests are for adding or
removing member paths to a VCG. They are transmitted on all members of a VCG every
control frame. RS-Ack is updated from all received member paths.
GID
The GID is a group id field which contains a serialized polynomial which is used to
verify that all received member paths of a VCG originate at the same transmitter. This is
transmitted in all member paths every control message and compared for all received
member paths every 512 ms. Any detected discrepancies are alarmed.

2-61
F5259_B05
LCAS Command
a) Addition of member(s)
When a member is added it shall always be assigned a sequence number greater than the
currently highest sequence number that has EOS in the CTRL code. Following an ADD
command the first member to respond with MST OK shall be allocated the next highest
sequence number and shall change its CTRL code to EOS coinciding with the currently
highest member changing its CTRL code to NORM.
NOTE: When the CTRL=ADD is sent to initiate the addition of a new member, it shall
be sent continuously until the MST=OK is received.
Example: Add two members after last one in the group of n.
Figure 2-54 Add two members after last one

Figure 2-54 above shows an example of adding two members after the current last
member. The example shows new member (n) responding with MST OK before new
member (n 1). This is arbitrary and the first member to respond with MST OK shall be
allocated the SQ n, then the next new member to respond with MST OK shall be
allocated SQ n 1 etc. If for any reason a member being added does not respond with
MST OK within the time-out period then the LCASC shall report a fail for that
member.
2-62
F5259_B05
b) Deletion of member(s)
When members are deleted, the sequence numbers and corresponding member status
number of the other members shall be renumbered. If the deleted member contains the
highest sequence number of that group, the member containing the next highest sequence
number shall change its control word to EOS in its control packet coinciding with the
deleted member s control packet with the IDLE control word. If the member deletion
occurs somewhere other than at the highest end of the sequence, then the other members
with sequence numbers between the newly deleted member and the highest sequence
number shall update their sequence indicators in their control packets coinciding with the
control packet changing the status of the deleted member.
Example: Remove members 4 and 5 from a VCG with n
6 members.
Figure 2-55 Remove two members in a VCG

The example above shows two members being removed with a simultaneous IDLE
command from the LCASC (Source). Reassembly at the sink ceases to use the removed
members immediately upon receipt of the IDLE command.
The response, however, from the Sink may not be simultaneous. This does not affect the
Sink since the IDLE commands will have the same Frame No. The response from the
Sink to the Source is, of course, simply acknowledgement that the member is no longer in
use at the sink end and the NMS may proceed with de-provisioning of that member, if
desired.

2-63
F5259_B05
LCAS to non-LCAS interworking

a) LCAS transmitter and non-LCAS receiver
An LCAS transmitter can inter-work with a non-LCAS receiver in non-LCAS mode
without any special consideration. The LCAS transmitter will place the MFI and SQ
as designated in ITU-T Recs. G.707 [1] and G.709 [2]. The receiver will ignore all
other bits, i.e. the LCAS overhead information.
The member status returned from sink to source will always be MST = OK.
b) Non-LCAS transmitter and LCAS receiver
An LCAS receiver expects a CTRL word that is not 0000 and a correct CRC. A
non-LCAS transmitter will transmit 0000 in the LCAS CTRL field as well as the
CRC field. Therefore when an LCAS receiver is interworking with a non-LCAS
transmitter and receives both CTRL word AND CRC equal to 0000, it shall:
Ignore all information (except MFI and SQ);
Use MFI and SQ defect detection as defined for virtual concatenation.

2-64
F5259_B05
2.4 Cross connection

Virtual Concatenation is for the several VC-N payload communications together
(VC-N-Xv).
2.4.1 Matrix structure

Table 2-1.
Matrix Structure
Cross-connect level
Size
VC-4
152*152
VC-3
96*96
VC-12
2016*2016
2.4.2 Cross-connect level

In condition of SDH, the equipment can support VC12 /VC3 /VC4 cross-connect
level. Table 2-2 shows the relationship between interface unit and cross-connect
level.
Table 2-2. Cross-connect Level for Each Interface
Interface Unit
Cross-connect level
STM-16
VC-4 / 3 / 12
STM-4
VC-4 / 3 / 12
STM-1o/STM-1e
VC-4 / 3 / 12
E31/E32
VC-3
E1
VC-12
FE
VC-12m/3n/4k
NOTE: m=1-63, n=1-3, k=1
2.4.3 Cross-connect type

V-NODE supports the following cross-connect type:
1 way
2 way
Broadcast
Drop & Continue

2-65
F5259_B05
2.4.3.1 One way

Add
Aggregate
Tributary
Limitation:
a) Connection between aggregate side and tributary side has no
limitation
b) One action can set the connection from CID
c) Connection limitation:
Table 2-3.
Connection between aggregate and tributary

Tributary
SDH
Aggregate
No SLA
SLA
West
East
West (W)
West (P)
East (W)
East (P)
NOTE:O: Connection is available.

2-66
PDH
F5259_B05
Drop
Aggregate
Tributary
Limitation:
a) Connection between aggregate and tributary side has no
limitation.
b) One action can set the connection from CID.
c) Connection limitation is specified according to Table 2-3.
Through
Aggregate
Output
Input
Tributary
Limitation:
a) When system mode is set as 2F/ Ms-Spring, connection
between west and east is on the same timeslot.
b) One action can set the connection from CID.
c) Connection limitation:

2-67
F5259_B05
Table 2-4.
Connection limitation between aggregate and tributary

Output
No SLA
West East
Input
SLA
West (P)
East (W)
West (W)
East (P)
No
SLA
West
East
SLA
West (W)
West (P)
East (W)
East (P)
O: Available
-: Unavailable
Loop back
Aggregate
Input
Output
Tributary
Limitation:
a) Dont support Loop back action between working and
protection side of SLA path;
b) Dont support Loop back action when system works at 2F
MS-Spring mode;
c) One action can set it from CID.
Table 2-5.
Connection limitation between aggregate and tributary
Input
Output
No SLA
SLA
W
W
P
O
-
No SLA
SLA
O: Available at the same timeslot

X: Dont support
-: Not exist
2-68
F5259_B05
Hairpin
Aggregate
Input
Output
Tributary
Limitation:
a) Connection is available between any two tributary
b) One action can set it from CID
Path selector
Input1
Input2
PS
Output
Table 2-6.
1 way Path selector

Input2
No SLA
Input1
SLA
No SLA
SLA
O: Available
-: Unavailable

2-69
F5259_B05
Service selector
Output
Input1
SS
Input2
Table 2-7. 1 way Service selector
Output
No SLA
Input1
No SLA
SLA
O: Available
-: Unavailable
2.4.3.2 Two way

Add/Drop
Aggregate
Tributary
Limitation: Same as 1 way Add/Drop.
Through
2-70
SLA
F5259_B05
Aggregate
Tributary
Limitation: Same as 1 way through
Loop back
Aggregate
Tributary
Limitation: Same as 1 way Loop back, but cannot Loop back at the same
timeslot.
Hairpin
Aggregate
Tributary
Limitation: Same as 1 way hairpin, but it is unavailable at the same SDH
timeslot or PDH channel.

2-71
F5259_B05
Path selector
Input1
PS
Input2
Output
Limitation: Same as 1 way path selector.
Service selector
Input3
Output
Input2
SS
Input1
Limitation: Output of SS is the work channel of aggregate side.
One action can set it from CID.

2-72
F5259_B05
2.4.3.3 Broadcast
This system doesnt support 1 way Loop back broadcast, 1 way Hairpin
broadcast.
1 way Add Broadcast/Bridge
Broadcast
Aggregate
Bridge
Input
Tributary
1 way Drop Broadcast
Aggregate
Tributary

2-73
F5259_B05
1 way Path selector Broadcast
PS
PS
Output
Output
1 way Service selector Broadcast
SS
Limitation: Output of SS is the work channel of aggregate side.

One action can set it from CID.

2-74
F5259_B05
2.4.3.4 Drop & Continue

1 way Drop & Continue
Aggregate
Tributary
1 way Path selector Drop & Continue
PS
2.4.3.5 Mix carrier

The equipment can carry mixed VC-3 and VC-12 signal in one VC-4.
A
VC-3
VC-4
VC-3
VC-12

2-75
F5259_B05
2.4.3.6 MSP+SNCP
STM-N
MSP
MSP
PS
STM-N
SNCP
STM-N
2.4.3.7 SNCP+Broadcast
(1) VC-4/3/12
PS
(2) VC-4/3/12
PS
(3) VC-4/3/12
2.4.3.8 CrossConnect for Multi-ring
Path 1
Path 2
Path 3
PS
Path 3
Path 1
Path 2

2-76
Path 4
PS
Path 4
F5259_B05
2.5 Protection
V-NODE supports four kinds of protections: MSP (multiplex section protection),
MS-SPRing (multiplex section shared protection ring), SNCP (sub-network connection
protection) and hardware protection.
2.5.1 MSP
2.5.1.1 Action mode
V-NODE supports MSPs working mode: 1+1 Uni-directional Non-revertive Linear
Protection. The following illustration shows 1+1 Unidirectional Linear Protection.
Only receive side is switched in case of the line failure.
Figure 2-56 1+1 Unidirectional Linear Protection Operation

2-77
F5259_B05
2.5.1.2 Configuration mode

The boards in same level can be configured as protection in V-NODE, for example,
the following figure shows the protection among the STM-1, among STM-4, among
STM-16 without slot limitation.
STM-4/16
E12_INF
E12_INF
P_INF
V-Node
P_INF
D_INF
W
V-Node
CS
CS
E12
E12
STM-4/16
STM-4/16
FE
MCP
2M( No TPS)
100Base-T
Figure 2-57 MSP Configuration
2.5.1.3 Switching criterion
Item
B2ERR_HIGH
B2ERR_LOW
LOS
LOF
MS-AIS
RS-TIM*
Switching
requirement
SF
SD
SF
SF
SF
SF
Monitor place
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
*: J Byte must be enabled in order to make TIM function be a switch criterion.

2-78
F5259_B05
2.5.1.4 External commands

Command
Term
Content
Lockout of
protection
LKOP
Protection line is forbidden to use unconditionally.
Lockout of working
LKOW
Working line is forbidden to use unconditionally.
Forced switch to
protection
FSP
If the command is set on working line, the traffic will be

switched to protection line unconditionally.
Forced switch to
working
FSW
If the command is set on protection line, the traffic will be

switched to working line unconditionally.
Manual switch to
protection
MSP
If the command is set on working line and protection line is in

normal status, the traffic will be switched to protection line.
Manual switch to
working
MSW
If the command is set on protection line and working liner is in

normal status, the traffic will be switched to the working line.
2.5.1.5 Command priority

LKOP>LKOW>FSW>FSP>SF on Prot>SF on Work>SD on Prot>SD on Work>
MSW>MSP
2.5.1.6 Switch time
Switch time is the interval from the decision to switch to the completion of the
switch and switch operation at a switching node initiating the switch request. When
Hold Off time is set as 0sec, switch time must be less 50msec.

2-79
F5259_B05
2.5.2 MS-SP Ring

2.5.2.1 Action mode
This section is referring to ITU-T G.783/G.841 MS-SPRING protection is for the
STM-4/ STM-16 optical interface.
OPTICAL INTERFACE
MODE
SPECIFICATION
STM-16
2 Fiber MS-SP Ring
ITU-T G.841
STM-4
2 Fiber MS-SP Ring
ITU-T G.841
In addition, the mode (Transoceanic Application) of operation based on ITU-T G.841

Annex A decides not to support for the time being.
the following figure shows the protection among the STM-4, and among the STM-16
without slot limitation.
V-Node
STM-16
MS-Spring
V-Node
V-Node
TPS_E12P
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
P_INF
P_INF
D_INF
V-Node
CS
CS
Figure 2-58 MS-SP Ring Configuration

2-80
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
STM-4/16
STM-4/16
FE
MCP
2M(With TPS)
100Base-T
F5259_B05

Table 2-8. Switching Factor
Switching
requirement
Item
B2EXC
B2DEG
LOS
LOF
MS-AIS
J0-TIM
SF
SD
SF
SF
SF
SF
Monitor place
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Table 2-9.
Optical Interface Factor

Switching
requirement
Monitor place
Item
SF
SF
SF
EQPT FAIL
PKG-REMOVE
PKG-TYPE
Package (Work / Prot)

Command
Term
Content
Lockout of
protection
LKOP
This command prevents using ring switches anywhere

in the ring. If any ring switches exist in the ring, this
command causes the switches to drop. Thus, all ring
switching is prevented (and pre-empted). It used for
whole subnet.
Forced Switch
Ring
FSR
This command performs the ring switch of normal

traffic from working channels to the protection
channels for the span between the node at which the
command is initiated and the adjacent node to which
the command is destined. It used for one port of the
specifically node.
Manual Switch
Ring
MSR
This command performs the ring switch of the normal

traffic from the working channels to the protection
specifically node.
Exercise Ring
EXR
This command exercises ring protection switching of

the requested channel without completing the actual
bridge and switch. It used for one port of the
specifically node.

2-81
F5259_B05

LKOP>FS-S>FS-R>SF-S>SF-R>SD-P>SD-S>SD-R>MS-S>MS-R>WTR>EXER-S
>EXER-R>RR-S>RR-R>NR
2.5.2.6 Switch time
2.5.3 SNCP
2.5.3.1 Action mode
V-NODE supports SNCP in action methods: 1+1 Uni-directional Non-Revertive/
Revertive and monitor methods: SNC/I (Sub-Network Connection Protection with
Inherent Monitoring) and SNC/N (Sub-Network Connection Protection with
Non-intrusive Monitoring).
NOTE: V-NODE supports both SNC/N and SNC/I in SNCP ring configuration.

2-82
F5259_B05

STM-16 without slot limitation
Figure 2-59
SNCP Configuration
2.5.3.3 Witching criterion

For SNC/N
Switching
requirement
Item
HOP
LOP
AU-LOP
SSF (Server Signal Fail)
AU-AIS
HP-UNEQ
TSF (Trail Signal Fail)
HP-TIM
HP-EXC
HP-DEG
TSD (Trail Signal Degrade)
TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-UNEQ
LP-EXC
LP-DEG
LOM
NOTE: LOM is only for VC-12 but not for VC-3.

2-83
F5259_B05
For SNC/I
Switching
requirement
Item
HOP
AU-LOP
AU-AIS
TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LOP

Command Term
Content
Revertive
Nonrevertive
Lockout of
protection
LKOP
If the command is set, the protection channel

will be forbidden to use unconditionally.
Forced
switch
FSP
If the command is set, the traffic will be

switched to protection channel unconditionally.
Manual
switch
MSP
If the command is set and protection channel is

in normal status, the traffic will be switched to
protection channel.

LKOP> FSP> SF on Prot>SF on Work> SD on Prot> SD on Work> MSP>
Wait-to-restore> No request
2.5.3.6 Command value
Wait for restore time: 0min ~12min, step=1 min
Hold-off time: 0ms ~ 10 sec, step=50ms
2.5.4 Hardware Protection

2.5.4.1 TPS
TPS carries out 2M electronic interface protection with 1:4 mode, The five slots
located in the most left and most right can be installed with TPS board. TPSs
working principle shows as figure below:

2-84
F5259_B05
Normal Working Mode
Switch Working Mode

TPS system is made of standby interface board, working interface board and TPS
switch board. When system is normal, both the standby interface board and working
board can transmitting service separately without interference. And the service
transmitted by standby interface board is called ALS service.
When one of the working boards fails, system send the commands about both time
slot cross connection switch and TPS board switch. In one hand, the system let the
CS board switch the timeslot and replace the failed boards bus time slot with the
standby interface boards bus time slot; in other hand, control the TPS board
physical interface switch, switch the input single of the failed electronic interface
2-85
F5259_B05
board to standby board. By these two steps, the service can be transmitted when the
board is fail; and the TPS function with 1: N is carried out.
The above figure only indicates the principle of the transmitting direction; it is the
same as the receiving direction.
The switches on the switch board can be made of the relays, which is controlled and
switched by CS board.
2.5.4.1.1
Switching criterion
Item
Switching requirement
SF
SF
SF
EQPT FAIL
CPU FAIL
PKG_REMOVED
2.5.4.1.2
Command
Lockout of
protection
Monitor place
External commands
Term
Content
LKOP
Protection line is forbidden to use unconditionally.
Forced switch to
protection
FSP
If the command is set on working line, the traffic will be

switched to protection line unconditionally.
Manual switch to
protection
MSP
If the command is set on working line and protection line is in

normal status, the traffic will be switched to protection line.
Clear
CLR
It is a command for canceling the following command according to the starting demand from NE outside:
LKOP,FSP,FSW,MSP,MSW
Moreover, in addition to the above, the WTR state is canceled
when mode of operation is revertive.

2-86
F5259_B05
2.5.4.2 CS Board Protection

In V-Node, there are 2 CS boards in 8# and 9#, they detect their own status and
transfers it to each other. the 8# CS board analyze its own status and the 9# CS
boards status and decide which board should be in work-status and which should
be in protect-status and control the switch process, the 9# CS board accept the 8#
CS boards signal and control its status. The CS board reports their status and the
cause of the switch.
2.5.4.2.1
Switching criterion
Item
Switching requirement
SF
SF
SF
EQPT FAIL
CPU FAIL
PKG_REMOVED
2.5.4.2.2
Command
Monitor place
External commands
Term
Content
Forced switch to
protection
FSP
If the command is set on 8#, the traffic will be switched to 9#

unconditionally.
Forced switch to
working
FSW
If the command is set on 9#, the traffic will be switched to 8#

unconditionally.
Manual switch to
protection
MSP
If the command is set on working line and 8# is in normal

status, the traffic will be switched to 9#.
Manual switch to
working
MSW
If the command is set on 9# and working package is in normal

status, the traffic will be switched to the 8#
Clear
CLR
It is a command for canceling the following command according to the starting demand from NE outside:
LKOP,FSP,FSW,MSP,MSW
Moreover, in addition to the above, the WTR state is canceled
when mode of operation is revertive.

2-87
F5259_B05
2.6 Synchronization
2.6.1 Timing source
Internal Free run: +4.6ppm~-4.6ppm
Internal Holdover: +0.37ppm~-0.37ppm / 1 day
STM-N Line (any port):
2Mbps PDH Line (only #1 channel port)
External port: 2Mbps or 2MHz selectable (75ohms/120ohms)
1 port: standard
Another port:
enhanced by Fan unit option (only 2MHZ)
Pull-in Lock in range: 9.2 ppm
2.6.2 Timing source control

2.6.2.1 Quality Level
Timing source is selected by following Quality Level of S1 byte specified in ITU-T
Standards. Also, the selection without specifying QL value is available.
Four methods of Quality Level setting are applicable:
Quality Level conveyed from SSM
Support or not support SSM
Forced QL Setting
Timing Source Failure
2.6.2.2 Priority Level Setting
The priority level can be specified to all timing sources. Priority level for each timing
source must be unique.
2.6.2.3 SSM Control
The following interfaces support SSM as timing source control:
STM-N aggregate
STM-N Tributary
External 2Mbps interface
2-88
F5259_B05
The definition of S1 byte and San bit is shown in below table.

S1/San Byte Signal
Bits (5 thru 8) in S1/San Byte Timing Source Quality and Grade
0000
Quality unknown
0001
0010
Reserved
G.811
0011
0100
Reserved
G.812 Transit
0101
0110
Reserved
Reserved
0111
1000
Reserved
G.812 Local
1001
1010
Reserved
Reserved
1011
1100
G.813 (SETS)
Reserved
1101
1110
Reserved
Reserved
1111
SETS: Synchronous Equipment Timing Source

S1/San byte signal selection order:
G.811> Quality unknown> G.812 Transit> G.812 Local> G.813 (SETS)
In order to avoid timing loop, SSM control should conform below rules.
1) Selected timing source from STM-N
The selected time source is STM-N, so the self out SSM=DNU. And the other direction output
SSM=selected timing source =G.811.

2-89
F5259_B05
2)
Selecting timing source is External timing source which slave to NE External

output timing source.
The QL of NE and extended clock is same levelG.811.

3)
Selecting timing source is External timing source which is free running and
dose not salve to NE External output timing source

2-90
F5259_B05
2.6.3 Timing source selection

Lockout>FS> SF>MS
Quality/SSM> Priority
SF (STM-N): LOS, LOF, MS-AIS, AND RS-TIM
SF (2Mbps tributary): LOS
SF (2Mbps external): LOS, LOF, AIS
SF (2MHz external): LOS
NOTE: Users can operate priority setting whether quality level selection mode is
used or not.

2-91
F5259_B05
2.6.3.2 System/Bypass
System clock source is the clock source for the whole equipment to synchronize after
system PLL processing.
Bypass clock source is the clock source for 2M EXTCLK module to output clock
signal without system PLL processing.
2.6.3.3 Hold-off Time
Hold-off Time is the duration to hold executing the timing source switch, in order to
determine whether a signal failure is the momentary status or not.
Hold-off Time: 0~1800ms, step=300ms
2.6.3.4 Wait-to-Restore Time
Wait-to-Restore Time is the duration to hold executing the timing source switch, in
order to determine whether the recovery is the momentary status or not.
Wait-to-Restore Time: 0~12min, step=60s
2.6.3.5 Revertive /non revertive
Fixed to be Revertive.
2.6.3.6 Report to NMS items
All timing source's status (QL, failure), Selected Timing Source and its QL can
report to NMS.
2.6.3.7 2M BPS frame format
G.704 7/95
With CRC/without CRC selectable
TS1~TS31= all 1
TS 0 =frame word
2.6.3.8 Squelch
When Quality level of working timing source is lower than user setting Quality level
threshold, namely Squelch value, 2M bps EXTCLK output is squelched and AIS
alarm occurs in far-end equipment and 2MHz EXTCLK output is squelched and
LOS alarm occurs in far-end equipment.

2-92
F5259_B05
2.6.4 DNU Group

When connect several optical ports between two equipments, it maybe bring
abnormal phenomena: the clock source locked each other as a ring or the oscillator
switching. For avoiding these phenomena, when the origin of the several known time
sources is the same, you can configure the DNU GROUP ID of these time sources
as the same (non-zero). When the time source module use one of these time sources,
the other time source port with the same DNU GROUP ID send the DNU
synchronously.
1.
No configuration of the DNU_GROUP_ID
Figure 2-60. No Configuration of the DNU_GROUP_ID

According to the above configuration, when the SSU is failed, the NE01s time
source would be switched from PORT2, and locked by the NE02s clock source as a
ring.
2.
Configuration of the DNU_GROUP_ID
Figure 2-61. Configuration of the DNU_GROUP_ID

According to the above configuration, when the SSU is failed, the NE01s time
source will not be switched from the PORT2, thereby, the clock ring is avoided.

2-93
F5259_B05
2.7 Trace/signal label function

Trace label function is used for receiving end to confirm that it is connected the
designated transmission end. V-NODE uses SOH byte: J0 and POH bytes: J1 and J2
to fulfill this function. J byte has 16 bits. The first bit is used for verifying, so user
can only configure 15 byte in CID window. For J byte, available character is listed
below table.
Available Character of J byte
SP
&
<
>
NOTE:
1)
SP means: space bit.
2)
(null): When there is no input value, the system will auto insert
(null).
Setting value: The sended value of J byte. Default value is null.

Expected value: The received value which are expected. Default value is none.
Signal label function is used to indicate such information as path status, traffic type.
V-NODE uses path overhead bytes: C2 and V5 to fulfill this function. The C2 and
V5 Byte Codes are shown as below:

2-94
F5259_B05
C2:
S/A send Value
CID monitor value
0x00
UNEQUIPPED
0x01
RESERVED
0x02
TUG_STRUCTURE
0x03
LOCKED_TU
0x04
ASYNC_V3
0x05
UNDER_DEVELOP
0x12
ASYNC_V4
0x13
ATM
0x14
DQDB
0x15
FDDI
0x16
HDLC/PPP
0x17
SDL_SSS
0x18
HDLC/LAPS
0x19
SDL_SRS
0x1a
10GBE
0x1b
FTDL
0xcf
RESERVED
0xe1-0xfc
0xfe
0xff
others
RESERVED_NU
TS_O181(VC4)
VC_AIS(VC4)
UNKNOWN
V5:
S/A send Value
CID monitor value
0b000
UNEQUIPPED
0b001
RESERVED
0b010
ASYNC
0b011
BIT_SYNC
0b100
BYTE_SYNC
0b101
EXTENDED_SIGNAL_LABEL
0b110
TS_O181
0b111
VC_AIS
NOTE: If enable the J byte, the AIS will be insert when J byte mismatch.

2-95
F5259_B05
2.8 Configuration Management

Configuration management includes port registration setup, working parameter setup
for NE, configuration of board required for NE operation, effective timing source
setup, equipment and resource control and traffic management.
NE equipment management is mainly to configure attributes for NE and boards.
Attributes for NE equipment are equipment types, NE interface, protection switching
group, NE timing source setting, etc.
Traffic management includes the management of transmission, end users and cross
connection.
Configuration management also provides the management of network topology,
which can control and communicate the topology objects within the network
management area.
Below table shows the package installation limitation in release 2.10.

2-96
F5259_B05
Y: Can be equipped.
NOTE:
1) The slot 24 and 25 is not used.
2) TPS_S1E, TPS_E3 packages occupy 2 slots
3) The TPS_E1W/TPS_E1P/THR_E12W board can't be inserted in the up row slot
without the E1 board in the down row slot.

2-97
F5259_B05
2.9 Performance monitor

2.9.1 The Definition of PM item
SDH PM
(1of2)
monitor types
RST
MST
MST
(Far
End)
HPT
HPT(Far
End)
LPT
LPT(Far
End)
Definition
BBE
Near end background block error
ITU-T G.826 G.784
ES
Near end errored seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
SES
Near end severely errored seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
OFS
Out of frame seconds
ITU-T G.784
UAS
Unavailable seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
BBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
ES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
SES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
UAS
Unavailable seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEBBE
Far end background block error
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEES
Far end errored seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FESES
Far end severely errored seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEUAS
Far end unavailable seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
BBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
ES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
SES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
UAS
Unavailable seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEBBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FESES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEUAS
ITU-T G.826 G.784
BBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
ES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
SES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
UAS
Unavailable seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEBBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FESES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEUAS
ITU-T G.826 G.784

2-98
Spec.
F5259_B05
(2of2)
monitor types
MSA
Definition
Spec.
PJE-P (see NOTE)
Pointer justification event
ITU-T G.783,G.784
PJE-N (see NOTE)
ITU-T G.783,G.784
HPA
PJE-P (see NOTE)
ITU-T G.783,G.784
ITU-T G.783,G.784
MSP
PJE-N (see NOTE)

PSC
PSC
Protection switching counts

(Only for 1+1 APS)
ITU-T G.783
Protection switching duration

(Only for 1+1 APS)
ITU-T G.783
PSD
NOTE:
1. PJE is the pointer justification event, and justification because of AU pointer stuff:
AU pointer positive stuff=>PJE-P
AU pointer Negative stuff=>PJE-N
No AU pointer stuff=>No PJE counter

2-99
F5259_B05
Ethernet PM
(1of3)
MONITOR TYPES
ETH-Drop
Pkts
ETH-RxAli
gnmentErr
orFrames
ETH-RxBr
oadcastPkt
s
A count of frames received on a

particular interface that are not an
integral number of octets in length and
do not pass the FCS check
RFC1643
Number of good broadcast packets

received
particular interface that are an integral
number of octets in length but do not
pass the FCS check.
ETH-RxMu
lticastPkts
Number of good multicast packets

received(excluding broadcast packets)
ETH-RxOc
tets
The total number of octets received on

the
interface,
including
framing
characters.
ETH-RxPkt
1024toMax
Number of packets received that were

between 1024 and the Mac_Pkt_Len
octets in length (including error packets)
ETH-RxPkt
128to255

between 128 to 255 octets in length
(including error packets)
ETH-RxPkt
256to511

ETH-RxPkt
512to1023

ETH-RxPkt
64

64 octets in length (including bad
packets)
ETH-RxPkt
65to127

ETH-TxCol
lision
Number of collisions on this Ethernet

segment
ETH-TxDel
ayTransmi
ssions
A count of frames for which the first

transmission attempt on a particular
interface is delayed because the
medium is busy.
SPEC.
A count of drop packets.
ETH-RxFC
SErrorFra
mes
LAN
2-100
DEFINITION
RFC1643
RFC1213
RFC1643
F5259_B05
(2of3)
MONITOR TYPES
LAN
SPEC.
ETH-TxExt
CollisionFr
ames
A count of frames for which

transmission on a particular interface
fails due to excessive collisions.
RFC1643
The number of times that a collision is

detected on a particular interface later
than 512 bit-times into the transmission
of a packet.
RFC1643
ETH-TxLat
eCollision
ETH-TxMul
tiCollisionF
rames
A count of successfully transmitted

frames on a particular interface for
which transmission is inhibited by more
than one collision.
RFC1643
RFC1213
ETH-TxNU
castPkts
The total number of packets that

higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted to a non-unicast (i.e., a
subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork
-multicast) address, including those that
were discarded or not sent.
ETH-TxOct
ets
The total number of octets transmitted

out of the interface, including framing
characters.
RFC1213
ETH-TxSin
gleCollisio
nFrames
A count of successfully transmitted

frames on a particular interface for
which transmission is inhibited by
exactly one collision.
RFC1643
RFC1213
ETH-TxUc
astPkts

higher-level protocols requested to be
transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast
address, including those that were
discarded or not sent.
ETH-Drop
Pkts
ETH-RxAli
gnmentErr
orFrames
WAN
DEFINITION
ETH-RxBr
oadcastPkt
s
ETH-RxFC
SErrorFra
mes

particular interface that are not an
integral number of octets in length and
do not pass the FCS check
RFC1643
Number of good broadcast packets

received
particular interface that are an integral
number of octets in length but do not
pass the FCS check.
RFC1643

2-101
F5259_B05
(3of3)
MONITOR TYPES
SPEC.
ETH-RxMu
lticastPkts

ETH-RxOc
tets
The total number of octets received on

the
interface,
including
framing
characters.
ETH-RxPkt
1024toMax

ETH-RxPkt
128to255

ETH-RxPkt
256to511

ETH-RxPkt
512to1023

ETH-RxPkt
64

64 octets in length (including bad
packets)
ETH-RxPkt
65to127

RFC1213
ETH-TxNU
castPkts

ETH-TxOct
ets
The total number of octets transmitted

out of the interface, including framing
characters.
RFC1213
ETH-TxUc
astPkts
The total number of packets that higher

level protocols requested to be
transmitted to a subnetwork.
RFC1213
WAN

2-102
DEFINITION
RFC1213
F5259_B05
Encapsulation PM
MONITOR TYPES
GFP_RxE
XIErrorPkt
s
DEFINITION
SPEC.
A count of received frame with HEAD

errors.
GFP_RxF A count of received frame with FCS

CSErrorPkt errors.
s
GFP
GFP_RxO
ctets
A count of received octets.
GFP_RxPk A count of received frame.

ts
GFP_TxOc A count of transmitted octets.
tets
GFP_TxPk
ts
A count of transmitted frame.
LAPS_RxF A count of received frame with FCS

CSErrorPkt errors.
s
LAPS_Rx
Octets
LAPS
LAPS_RxP A count of received frame.

kts
LAPS_TxO A count of transmitted octets.
ctets
LAPS_TxP
kts

2-103
F5259_B05
2.9.2 Performance Counter Range

SDH PM Counter Range
PM TYPES
15m PM COUNTER RANGE
24h PM COUNTER RANGE
MEMORY
RANGE
MEMORY
RANGE
OFS
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
BBE
4 Byte
0-16777215
4 Byte
0-1610612640
ES
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
SES
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
UAS
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
FE-BBE
4 Byte
0-16777215
4 Byte
0-1610612640
FE-ES
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
FE-SES
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
FE-UAS
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
PSC
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
PSD
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
PJE-P
4 Byte
0-113184
4 Byte
0-10865664
PJE-N
4 Byte
0-113184
4 Byte
0-10865664

2-104
F5259_B05
Ethernet PM Counter Range

PM TYPES
15m PM COUNTER RANG
24h PM COUNTER RANG
MEMORY
RANGE
MEMORY
RANGE
ETH-TxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxFCSErrorFrames
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxAlignmentErrorFrames
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxUcastPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxNUcastPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxMulticastPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxBroadcastPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxSingleCollisionFrames
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxMultiCollisionFrames
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxDelayTransmissions
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxExtCollisionFrames
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxLateCollision
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxCollision
4 Byte
0-46875000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt64
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt65to127
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt128to255
4 Byte
0-76014000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt256to511
4 Byte
0-40760970
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt512to1023
4 Byte
0-21146400
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt1024toMax
4 Byte
0-10775700
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-DropPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294

2-105
F5259_B05
GFP PM Counter Range

PM TYPES
15m PM COUNTER RANG
24h PM COUNTER RANG
MEMORY
RANGE
MEMORY
RANGE
GFP_TxPkts
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
GFP_TxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
GFP_RxPkts
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
GFP_RxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
GFP_RxFCSErrorPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
GFP_RxEXIErrorPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
LAPS PM Counter Range

PM TYPES
15m PM COUNTER RANG
24h PM COUNTER RANG
MEMORY
RANGE
MEMORY
RANGE
LAPS_TxPkts
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
LAPS_TxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxPkts
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxFCSErrorPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
NOTE: when the PM value exceeds the maximum value in the range showed in all above
tables, the PM will be regarded as overflow and showed in PM monitor screen of CID.

2-106
F5259_B05
2.9.3 SES
Two conditions cause SES defect. One is the ratio of error code in one second is 30%
or more, the other is that one or more defects occur(s), which are shown in below
table.
The Defects Causing Near End SES
PATH LAYER
NEAR END DEFECT CONDITION
LO path layer
LP UNEQ
LP TIM
TU LOP
TU AIS
HP LOM
HP PLM
HO Path layer
HP UNEQ
HP TIM
AU LOP
AU AIS
MST layer
MS AIS
RST layer
RS TIM
STM LOS
STM LOF
The Defects Causing Far End SES

PATH LAYER
LO path layer
LP RDI
HO Path layer
HP RDI
MST layer
MS RDI
SES PM threshold is shown in below table.

Facility
SES Threshold Value
VC12
600
VC3
2400
VC4
2400
RS
2400
MS
2400

2-107
F5259_B05
2.9.4 Invalid condition

Invalid condition means that PM does not correctly count.
Time modified(>30s)
All PM are unbelievable.
Loopback(for the unit)
Near end PM (Not include down stream PM) are unbelievable.
Facility alarm occur
Near end alarm
Far end PM (Not include down stream PM) are unbelievable.
F/W Reset
H/W Reset
NOTE: The detail information about invalid PM is shown as the attachment file:
B05_Attachment_Invalid PM.
2.9.5 Register management

2.9.5.1 Type of register
Period
Current
History
15min
maximum count is 32, more is deleted
1day
maximum count is 1, more is deleted
NOTE: Sometimes CID will not show performance value, but show over flow which
means that the performance value exceeds its maximum counter value.

2-108
F5259_B05
2.9.6 PM reset function

CID supports PM reset function. It restores PM count value to 0.
For SDH and PDH interface, you can select any PM to reset it, and for Ethernet PM,
all PM of the same port must be reset at the same time.
2.9.7 TCA
The equipment provide (or support) the Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) function
that issues an alert if the value of monitored PM type reaches or exceeds that of the
specified threshold. The values are accumulated for every 15 minutes at 00, 15, 30,
and 45 minutes of each hour (15Min) or for every 24-hour at 0:00 am (1Day).
2.9.7.1 TCA report action
TCA
TCA
Threshold
Count period 15min /1 day
Count period 15min /1 day
CcCount period 15min /1 day
2.9.7.2 TCA threshold

The TCA value of each parameter can be customized. The TCA report can be
disabled as well, by setting the value to 0.

2-109
F5259_B05
SDH TCA
(1of2)
LAYER
RS
MS
PM TYPES
AU-4
VC-4
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
65535
0-16777215
6291360
0-1610612640
ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
OFS
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
BBE
65535
0-16777215
6291360
0-1610612640
ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
65535
0-16777215
6291360
0-1610612640
FE-ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
FE-SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
FE-UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
PSC
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
PSD
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
PJE-P
113184
0-113184
10865664
0-10865664
PJE-N
113184
0-113184
10865664
0-10865664
BBE
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
FE-ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
FE-SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
FE-UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
BBE
FE-BBE

2-110
24h TCA THRESHOLD
DEFAULT
FE-BBE
MSP
15m TCA THRESHOLD
F5259_B05
(2of2)
LAYER
VC-3
PM TYPES
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
FE-ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
FE-SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
FE-UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
FE-ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
FE-SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
FE-UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
PJE-P
113184
0-113184
10865664
0-10865664
PJE-N
113184
0-113184
10865664
0-10865664
BBE
BBE
FE-BBE
TU
24h TCA THRESHOLD
DEFAULT
FE-BBE
VC-12/VC11
15m TCA THRESHOLD

2-111
F5259_B05
Ethernet TCA
(1of2)
LAYER
LAN
PM TYPES
24h TCA THRESHOLD
DEFAULT
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
ETH-TxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxFCSErrorF
rames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxAlignment
ErrorFrames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxUcastPkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxNUcastPkt
s
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxMulticastP
kts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxBroadcast
Pkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxSingleColli
sionFrames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxMultiCollisi
onFrames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxDelayTran
smissions
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxExtCollisio
nFrames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxLateCollisi
on
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxCollision
46875000
0-46875000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt64
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt65to12
7
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt128to2
55
76014000
0-76014000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt256to5
11
40760970
0-40760970
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt512to1
023
21146400
0-21146400
4294967294
0-4294967294

2-112
15m TCA THRESHOLD
F5259_B05
(2of2)
LAYER
LAN
WAN
PM TYPES
15m TCA THRESHOLD
24h TCA THRESHOLD
DEFAULT
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
ETH-RxPkt1024to
Max
10775700
0-10775700
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-DropPkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxFCSErrorF
rames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxAlignment
ErrorFrames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxUcastPkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxNUcastPkt
s
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxMulticastP
kts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxBroadcast
Pkt
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt64
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt65to12
7
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt128to2
55
76014000
0-76014000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt256to5
11
40760970
0-40760970
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt512to1
023
21146400
0-21146400
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt1024to
Max
10775700
0-10775700
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-DropPkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294

2-113
F5259_B05
GFP TCA
LAYER
Encapsula
tion
PM TYPES
15m TCA THRESHOLD
24h TCA THRESHOLD
DEFAULT
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
GFP_TxPkts
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
GFP_TxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
GFP_RxPkts
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
GFP_RxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
GFP_RxFCSError
Pkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
GFP_RxEXIErrorP
kts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
LAPS TCA
LAYER
Encapsulatio
n
PM TYPES
24h TCA THRESHOLD
DEFAULT
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
LAPS_TxPkts
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
LAPS_TxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxPkts
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxFCSErro
rPkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294

2-114
15m TCA THRESHOLD
F5259_B05
2.10 Fault management

2.10.1 Fault monitor items
SDH Alarm
(1of6)
INDICATION CATEGORY DESCRIPTION
AIS
(only
2Mbps)
Facility
AU-AIS
Facility
AU-LOP
Facility
FAULT LOCATION
Alarm indication
signal
EXT CLK IN
Alarm indication
signal
MSA
Loss of pointer
MSA
DEFAULT CLASS
MN
External timing source

MJ
MSA function in upstream

equipment
MJ
MSA function in upstream

equipment
BUS_ERR
OR
Equipment
CLKFAIL
Facility
BUS defect
BUS
MJ
BUS_ERROR
Clock fail
SETS
MN
Clock module
CLKDRIF
T
Facility
COMMUN
ICATE_F
AIL
Equipment
HKAn
(n = 1 thru
8)
HP-DEG
HP-EXC
HP-PLMF
Frequency drift
SETS
MN
Clock sending function in

upstream equipment
out of
communicate
PKG
Environme
nt
House keeping
alarms
Environment
Facility
VC-4 B3 byte
error(10-5)
HPT
VC-4 B3 byte
error(10-3)
HPT
Payload
mismatch
HPA
Facility
Facility
MN
can not communicate with

PKG(eg.HDLC bus
error,CPU reset)
MN
Environment device
MN
HPT in upstream
equipment or optical fiber
and connector
MJ
HPT in upstream
and connector
MJ
Configuration in upstream
equipment

2-115
F5259_B05
(2of6)
INDICATION CATEGORY
HP-RDI
HP-TIM
Facility
Facility
DESCRIPTION
FAULT LOCATION
Remote defect
indicate
HPT
Trace mismatch
HPT
DEFAULT CLASS
MJ
Upstream equipment
detecting HP alarm
MJ
J1 setting or upstream
equipment setting
HP-UNEQ
Facility
Unequipped
HPT
MJ
No crossconnect setting
in upstream equipment
HP_PPS_
FAIL
Facility
LINK-FAIL
ED
Network
LINK_DO
WN
Network
LOF
Facility
PPS failed
HPC
CR
Both not receiving

signals
LAPD
communication
fail
DCC
F port link failed
DCC
MN
Upstream equipment
DCC failure
WN
Ethernet port(F) is
active,but it 's link down
Loss of frame
RST
CR
Upstream equipment
LOF (only
2Mbps)
Facility
LOM
Facility
LOS
Loss of frame
EXT CLK IN
MN
External timing source
Facility
Los of
multi-frame
HPA
No signal input
SPI
MJ
HPA function in upstream

equipment
CR
Optical fiber or upstream

equipment
LOS
Facility
No signal input
45M
CR
45M input cable or

upstream equipment
LOS
Facility
No signal input
34M
34M input cable or
upstream equipment

2-116
CR
F5259_B05
(3of6)
INDICATIO CATEGORY
N
LOS
Facility
DESCRIPTION
No signal input
FAULT LOCATION
DEFAULT CLASS
2M
CR
2M input cable or
upstream equipment
LOS
(2Mbps)
Facility
LOS
(2MHz)
Facility
LOS
(electrical
INTF)
Facility
LP-DEG
Facility
LP-EXC
LP-PLMF
LP-RDI
LP-TIM
No signal input
EXT CLK IN
MN
Input cable or external

timing source
No signal input
EXT CLK IN
MN
Input cable or external

timing source
No signal input
SPI
CR
Cable or upstream
equipment
Facility
Facility
Facility
Facility
VC-4 B3 byte
error(10-5)
VC12 BIP-2
error(10-5)
LPT
VC-4 B3 byte
error(10-3)
VC12 BIP-2
error(10-3)
LPT
Payload
mismatch
LPA
Remote defect
indicate
LPT
Trace mismatch
LPT
MN
LPT in upstream
and connector
MJ
LPT in upstream
and connector
MJ
Configuration in
upstream equipment
MJ
Upstream equipment
detecting LP alarm
MJ
equipment setting
LP-UNEQ
Facility
Unequipped
LPT
MJ
No crossconnect setting
in upstream equipment
LP_PPS_
FAIL
Facility
PPS failed
LPC
CR
Both not receiving

signals

2-117
F5259_B05
(4of6)
INDICATION CATEGORY
LTI
Facility
MEM_FAI
L
Equipment
MS-AIS
Facility
MS-DEG
MS-EXC
MS-RDI
PKG_FAIL
DESCRIPTION
FAULT LOCATION
Los of External
timing source
SETS
Memory defect
MEM
DEFAULT CLASS
MJ
All the timing source

MJ
Memory fail
Facility
Facility
Facility
Equipment
Alarm indication
signal
MST
MS B2 byte
error(10-5)
MST
MS B2 byte
error
MST
Remote defect
indicate
MST
Package defect
PKG (see NOTE)
CR
Upstream equipment
MN
Optical fiber or connector

MJ
Optical fiber or connector

MJ
Upstream equipment
detecting alarm
MN
Cant be identified board

PKG_RE
MOVED
Equipment
PKG_TYP
E
Equipment
PORT_RE
MOVED
Equipment
Remove board
PKG
CR
Not install board

Wrong PKG
install
PKG
Remove port
PORT
CR
Wrong configuration
CR
Not install port
(STM_1(O)
)
PORT_TY
PE
Equipment
Wrong port
install
PORT
Remove port
PORT
CR
Wrong configuration
(STM_1(O)
)
PORT_RE
MOVED
Equipment
(STM_4(O)
)

2-118
Not install port
CR
F5259_B05
(5of6)
INDICATION CATEGORY
PORT_TY
PE
Equipment
DESCRIPTION
FAULT LOCATION
Wrong port
install
PORT
Remove port
PORT
DEFAULT CLASS
CR
Wrong configuration
(STM_4(O)
)
PORT_RE
MOVED
Equipment
CR
Not install port
(STM_16(
O) )
PORT_TY
PE
Equipment
Wrong port
install
PORT
Remove port
PORT
CR
Wrong configuration
(STM_16(
O) )
PORT_RE
MOVED
Equipment
CR
Not install port
(E1/VC12)
PORT_RE
MOVED
Equipment
Remove port
PORT
CR
Not install port
(EXTCLK
IN)
PORT_TY
PE
Equipment
Wrong port
install
PORT
Remove port
PORT
CR
Wrong configuration
(EXTCLK
IN)
PORT_RE
MOVED
Equipment
CR
Not install port
(EXTCLK
OUT)
PORT_TY
PE
Equipment
Wrong port
install
PORT
Remove port
PORT
CR
Wrong configuration
(EXTCLK
OUT)
PORT_RE
MOVED
Equipment
CR
Not install port
(V.11_Port
)

2-119
F5259_B05
(6of6)
INDICATION CATEGORY
PORT_TY
PE
Equipment
DESCRIPTION
FAULT LOCATION
Wrong port
install
PORT
Remove port
PORT
DEFAULT CLASS
CR
Wrong configuration
(V.11_Port
)
PORT_RE
MOVED
Equipment
CR
Not install portv
(100BT_LA
N_PORT)
PORT_TY
PE
Equipment
Wrong port
install
PORT
Remove port
PORT
CR
Wrong configuration
(100BT_LA
N_PORT)
PORT_RE
MOVED
Equipment
CR
Not install port
(100BT_W
AN_PORT)
PORT_TY
PE
Equipment
Wrong port
install
PORT
PDH AIS
PPI
CR
Wrong configuration
(100BT_W
AN_PORT)
PPI_AIS
Facility
MN
Frame all "1"

REF_FAIL
Facility
SSM failure
SETS
MN
Upstream equipment
RS-TIM
Facility
Trace mismatch
RST
CR
equipment setting
TU-AIS
TU-LOP
Facility
Facility
Alarm indication
signal
HPA, LPA
Loss of pointer
HPA

equipment

equipment

2-120
MJ
MJ
F5259_B05
Ethernet Alarm
(1of2)
INDICATION CATEGORY
DESCRIPTION
FAULT
LOCATION
DEFAULT
CLASS
Loss of Client Signal
Ethernet
(WAN)
MJ
Loss of Client Character

Synchronization
Ethernet
(WAN)
MJ
Facility
Facility
Remote end Loss of Client

Signal
Ethernet
(WAN)
MN
CSF_R_LCS
CSF_R_LCS
ync
Remote end Loss of Client

Character Synchronization
Ethernet
(WAN)
MN
Facility
DropPkts_EX
C
Facility
Ethernet
MJ
LINK_DOWN
Facility
CSF_LCS
Facility
CSF_LCSyn
c
(LAN&WAN)
Alarm for the link status.
Ethernet
CR
(LAN&WAN)
RxAlignment
ErrorFrames
_EXC
Facility
RxFCSError
Frames_EXC
Facility
TxCollision_
EXC
Facility
TxDelayTran
smission_EX
C
Facility
TxExtCollisio
n_EXC
Facility
A count of frames received

on a particular interface that
are not an integral number of
octets in length and do not
pass the FCS check
Ethernet
A count of frames received

on a particular interface that
are an integral number of
octets in length but do not
pass the FCS check.
Ethernet
Number of collisions on this

Ethernet segment
Ethernet

the first transmission attempt
on a particular interface is
delayed because the
medium is busy
Ethernet

transmission on a particular
interface fails due to
excessive collisions.
Ethernet
MJ
(LAN&WAN)
MJ
(LAN&WAN)
MJ
(LAN)
MJ
(LAN)
MJ
(LAN)

2-121
F5259_B05
(2of2)
INDICATION CATEGORY
TxLateCollisi
on_EXC
Facility
WAN_PORT
_SD
Facility
WAN_PORT
_SF
Facility
FAULT
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
The number of times that a
collision is detected on a
particular interface later than
512 bit-times into the
transmission of a packet
Ethernet
WAN port DEG
Ethernet
DEFAULT
CLASS
MJ
(LAN)
MN
(WAN)
WAN port fail
Ethernet
MJ
(WAN)
NOTE:
1. CR: Critical, MJ:Major, MN:Minor, WN:Warning.
2. There are some EXC alarms in above Ethernet Alarm table. They are converted from
corresponding performances once the performances exceed the thresholds which are
shown in below.
Performance EXC Alarm
ALARM
PERFORMANCE
DEFAULT
THRESHOLD
DropPkts_EXC
ETH-DropPkts
4294967294
RxAlignmentErrorFrame
s_EXC
ETH-RxAlignmen
tErrorFrames
4294967294
RxFCSErrorFrames_EX
C
ETH-RxFCSErrorFram
es
4294967294
TxCollision_EXC
ETH- TxCollision
4294967294
TxDelayTransmission_E
XC
ETHTxDelayTransmissions
4294967294
TxExtCollision_EXC
ETH-TxExtCollisionfra
mes
4294967294
TxLateCollision_EXC
ETH- TxLateCollision
4294967294

2-122
THRESHOLD
SETTING RANGE
0~4294967294
0~4294967294
0~4294967294
0~4294967294
0~4294967294
0~4294967294
0~4294967294
F5259_B05
Encapsulation Alarm
INDICATION
CATEGORY
DESCRIPTION
FAULT
LOCATION
DEFAULT
CLASS
SSF_LGS
Facility
Loss of GFP frame

Synchronization
WAN
MJ
LAPS_FAIL
Facility
LAPS Layer Fail
WAN
MJ
Virtual Concatenation Alarm

INDICATION
CATEGORY
DESCRIPTION
FAULT
LOCATION
DEFAULT
CLASS
LP-Xv-LOA
Facility
Loss of Alignment
VC12/VC3
MJ
LP-Xv-LOM
Facility
Loss of Multi-frame defect
VC12/VC3
MJ
LP-Xv-PLM
Facility
Extended signal label

mismatch
VC12
MJ
LP-Xv-SQM
Facility
Loss of Sequence defect
VC12/VC3
MJ
HP-Xv-LO
M
VC4
MJ
Facility
Loss of Multi-frame defect
HP-Xv-SQ
M
Facility
Loss of Sequence defect
VC4
MJ
HP-Xv-LOA
Facility
Loss of Alignment
VC4
MJ

2-123
F5259_B05
2.10.2 Alarm management

The alarm severity of each failure is indicated by the following alarm level and alarm
class. Alarm classes can be modified. Modification is done by using Alarm Severity
Assignment
2.10.2.1
Alarm Class
CR Critical: service-affecting condition has occurred and an immediate corrective

action is required, such as when a managed object becomes totally out of service and
its capability must be restored.
MJ Major: service-affecting condition has developed and an immediate corrective
action is required, such as when there is a severe degradation in the capability of the
managed object and its full capability must be restored.
MN Minor: existence of non-service-affecting fault and a corrective action should be
taken to prevent a more serious (i.e., service-affecting) fault. This severity can be
used, for example, when the detected alarm is not currently degrading the capacity of
the managed object.
WN Warning: existence of non-service-affecting fault and a corrective action should
be taken to prevent a more serious (i.e., service-affecting) fault. All alarms in
V-NODE don't belong to this class by default.
2.10.2.2
Delay/Stretch Time
The following describes the functions of Delay and Stretch Time. Delay and stretch
are only applied on alarm report function and they are not effective alarm action, for
example, when AIS inserts at LOS detection:
Delay Time
Delay Time is a specific period for the process to determine if the detected failure is
an alarm to be reported.
Delay Time: 0 to 2.5 seconds, step=0.5
Stretch Time
Stretch Time is a specific period for the process to determine if the alarm has been
cleared.
Stretch Time: 0 to 10 seconds, step=0.5

2-124
F5259_B05
2.10.3 Alarm report

When an alarm is detected, alarm notification is made to the user by lighting up the
LEDs on the rack, and reporting the alarm to user interface (for example, the
Equipment CID display). The alarm notification is also made to the user by an Office
alarm, such as the station alarm bell and lamps.
2.10.3.1
LED Process
LED on front of rack lights up/turn off when alarm is generated/cleared to report the
alarm to the user.
Detail LED indication rule refer to 11_04 of the OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE manual.
2.10.3.2
Report to User Interface
The Time, location etc information should be report to CID/NMS.

Alarm is automatically reported to User Interface when alarm is
generated/cleared;
Alarm report includes time information when equipment confirms alarm
occurrence and recovery;
Alarm report include the alarm location information which board and section the
alarm locates;
User can set whether automatic report is on or off to each user port. All the alarm
status in NE can be read collectively.
2.10.3.3
Office Alarms
V-NODE has four types of office alarms output: Alarm output for Bell (AB), Alarm
Lamp (AL), Prompt Maintenance (PM), Differed Maintenance (DM) and LED on
front of Rack.
Following table lists the relationship of alarm class and office alarm.

2-125
F5259_B05
RANK OF ALARM
REPORT TO OS
PM
CR (Critical)
MJ (Major)
MN (Minor)
WN (Warning)
ACO function
DM
AB
AL
LED
NOTE:
1)
V denotes corresponding office alarm in the column will report when

corresponding class alarm in the row occurs.
2)
LED means each package fail LED.
2.10.3.4
ACO Function
If you execute ACO (Alarm Cut Off) during alarm occurrence (AB/AL output), the
audible alarm (AB) is silenced; however, AB will be output if another alarm occurs
later.

2-126
F5259_B05
2.11 Maintenance Management

Maintenance management provides convenient equipment maintenance operation for
users and helps them to find out the failure rapidly and clear it in time to ensure the
normal operation of SDH sub-network. Main function of the maintenance
management is unit reset, loopback control, software download online, simple
upgrade, EMS memory management, automatic laser shutdown, overhead access,
house keeping, and security:
Unit reset
Equipment initialization function
Loopback control
Loopback control for each tributary.
Software upgrade
Configuration download /upload
Automatic laser shutdown
Overhead function
House keeping
Security
The software can be downloaded via online and the current version can be obtained
(updated) smoothly without influence of running traffic.
2.11.1 Unit Rest

When reset the unit, the service signal, current switch status, performance, alarm and
clock would not be influenced.
During the reset, both the alarm and the performance count would not be recorded.
And the first 15 minutes performance after reset is invalid.
Reset function availability of all the units is shown as following:

2-127
F5259_B05
Table 2-10.
2.11.1.1
Reset Function of Units
Hot start reset
The unit should startup using the backup data after reset action. Within this period
the main signal should not be interrupt, and the network communication should be
normal. This type of reset should be issued from NMS/CID (local or remote), and
also possible from a push button.
2.11.1.2
Cutover reset
Cutover is issued manually; only available for the units, which obtain the backup
F/W, the equipment uses the backup data to startup. This action should not interrupt
the main signal, and the network communication should be normal. It is issued from
NMS/CID (local or remote).
2.11.1.3
System initialization
If this action is operated, the system should cold start. It is only available from CID
(local)
2.11.2 Equipment Initialization

The equipment initialization operation would clear all database records, and recover
the default users account. When finish the initialization, the equipment would reset
automatically, and you need to log in the CID again. (For the IP addresses are cleared
from the database, you must log in CID by the default users account through the f
port).then the equipments configuration before the delivery is recovered.

2-128
F5259_B05
2.11.3 Loopback
NOTE: In remote login loopback for SDH interface is forbidden, but that for PDH
interface is allowed.
2.11.3.1
Facility loopback
STM-N optical signal

When Facility loopback is operated AIS signal shall be sent to cross connect side.
STM-1/4 o and STM-16
MST
RST
SPI
OPT OUT
FAC LPB
SA
MST
RST
OPT IN
SPI
MS-AIS
STM-1e signal
When Facility loopback is operated AIS signal shall be sent to cross connect side.
STM-1 e
MST
RST
SPI
OUT
FAC LPB
SA
MST
RST
SPI
IN
MS-AIS
PDH signal
The signal which is at instant behind the PDH signal input side is returned to
opposite end. In facility loopback action, the AIS signal is sent to SDH side in
mapping PDH signal.

2-129
F5259_B05
2.11.3.2
AIS
PDH
PI
LPA
LPT
HPA
INTF
PI
LPA
LPT
HPA
Terminal loopback
STM-N signal
The signal sent to opposite end is same as the signal returned to local end (cross
connect)
STM-1/4 o and STM-16
MST
RST
SPI
OPT OUT
TRM LPB
SA
MST
RST
SPI
OPT IN
STM-1e Signal
The signal sent to opposite end is same as the signal returned to local end (cross
connect).
STM-1e
MST
RST
SPI
OUT
TRM LPB
SA

2-130
MST
RST
SPI
IN
F5259_B05
PDH signal
The 2M/34M/45M signal which is at instant before the PDH signal output side of
the electronic signal sent out port is returned to local end. In Terminal loop back
action no handling with the returned signal. The signal sent to the PDH line side
in loop back action is AIS signal.
2.11.4 Software Download

F/W is the software program for CPU on the PKG. In order to upgrade or downgrade
the NE, the F/W needs to be downloaded from CID to NE firstly.
Download object:
PKG Name
MCP
F/W or FPGA
FW
FPGA
CS
FW
FPGA A
FPGA B
STM-16
FPGA
STM-1/4
FPGA
S1E
FPGA
E1
FPGA
E31/E32
FPGA
FE
FW
FPGA

2-131
F5259_B05
Download trace
1. CID -> MCP download (F/W and FPGA)
Download F/W:
CID -> MCP temporary memory -> MCP Flash ROM.
Download FPFA: CID -> MCP temporary memory -> MCP Flash ROM ->
initial FPGA.
2. CID -> CS download (F/W and FPGA)
Download F/W:
CID -> MCP agent -> CS temporary memory -> CS

Flash ROM.
Download FPFA: CID -> MCP agent -> CS temporary memory -> CS
Flash ROM -> initial FPGA.
3. CID -> SDH board download
Download F/W: CID-> MCP agent -> CS temporary memory -> CS Flash
ROM -> initial FPGA.
4. CID -> FE download
Download F/W: CID -> MCP agent -> FE temporary memory -> FE Flash
ROM.
Download FPGA: CID-> MCP agent -> FE temporary memory -> FE Flash
ROM -> initial FPGA.
F/W download sequence
The following is an example for downloading the F/W of the MCP board. The
procedures about downloading the F/W of the other boards are similar.

2-132
F5259_B05
Procedure 2-1.
Downloading the F/W of the MCP Board
2.11.5 Software Upgrade

FW upgrade does not influence the service.
FW upgrade files can be saved to 2 copies in the equipment which can be served as
the active or the standby. The current running version is served as the active and
another version as the standby.
FW upgrade means that save the new version file to the standby area, and it would
not influence the running version.
After FW upgrade, the system would take the new FW version trial running in the 5
minutes, if reset or power off-on the equipment, the system will run the FW version
before upgrade.
The operation of the FPGA upgrade would influence the service and DCC
communication. When upgrade FPGA, there is not a trial running period, that is to
say, the system would download the FPGA file to the hardware immediately.

2-133
F5259_B05
2.11.6 Configuration Download/Upload

Configuration uploading will upload the configuration data in the equipment to the
directory which specified by user, and save it as the file.
Configuration download operation will download the configuration file to the
equipment. When user makes this configuration effective, the equipment will save it
to the Flash, and reconfigure the system according to the configuration. Otherwise,
this configuration would not be used, and only saved in the DRAM of the equipment,
if reset or power off-on is happened on the equipment, these configuration data
would be lost, and the equipment would run with the configuration data in Flash
before.

2-134
F5259_B05
2.11.7 Automatic Laser Shutdown

ALS function is described in ITU-T G.958 appendix II. When optical fiber breaks, in
order to prevent the personnel from damage with the laser signal, it is need to shut down
the output signal from optical transceiver, called ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)
function. For this system, ALS is required only for STM-16 interface.
2.11.7.1
ALS Action Criteria
When signal LOS occurs at the optical input port of unit, if it last over 500 50 msec
from unit detecting the LOS, unit start to operate the command of shut down the optical
signal, unit stop outputting optical signal within 700 msec from signal LOS occurs.
Following is the time sequence from signal LOS occurs to stopping optical signal.
Figure 2-62.
The time sequence from signal LOS occurs to stopping optical signal.

2-135
F5259_B05
Figure 2-63.

2-136
ALS release
F5259_B05
2.11.7.2
ALS release criteria
Auto-restart:
The unit should output optical signal last 2sec 0.25sec and 9sec 0.5sec period,
which is controlled by a timer. If the fault restore, the ALS status will be released
automatically. The timer is set with every single interface, the setting range is:
60sec / 180 sec / 300sec.
Manual restart:
Command of manual restart can be sent from CID/NMS to make unit interface
output optical signal, release the ALS status. The parameter of this command is:
Short-on: 2sec 0.25sec (9sec 0.5sec)
Long-on: 90sec 10sec
ALS release restrain
The response time from input port receive the optical signal to output port starting
send optical signal should be within 0.85sec.
Following is the ALS auto-release sequence:

2-137
F5259_B05
Figure 2-64.
2.11.7.3
ALS release steps
ALS Function enable/disable
ALS enable/disable setting can be designated from CID/NMS, with every single
interface.
2.11.7.4
Force optical signal shut down
The optic signal can be forced shut down by the command from CID/NMS, with
every single interface. The forced shut down status can be released by the command.
2.11.7.5
ALS status
ALS status indicating the state of whether output optic signal or not, with every
single interface. ALS status can be acquired from CID/NMS

2-138
F5259_B05
2.11.7.6
ALS setting items

Table 2-11.
Items
ALS setting items
General
Command
ALS
enable/disable
setting
Output optic signal

command
(long/short)
Force optic
signal shut
down
ALS
status
acquire
CID
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NMS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
UI
2.11.8 Overhead Function

The OH function extract E2 or F1 byte from optical/electric interface to user
channel (V.11), and insert them along the opposite direction.
2.11.8.1
OH Cross Connection/OH Through
Bypass the E2 or F1 byte from the different direction and different user data
channel. Please pay attention: The bypass operation can not be performed
between E2 and F1.
2.11.8.2
Accessible OH kind
The OH byte of the user data channel includes the E2 and F1 byte which can be
configured by CID.
2.11.8.3
Co/Contra Direction
The co/contra direction function means the working mode of the user channel.
Co-direction: the data receiving direction is the same as the clock output/input
direction.
Contra direction: the data receiving direction is different from the clock output/
input direction.

2-139
F5259_B05
2.11.9 House Keeping

2.11.9.1
HKA function
The system must support the housekeeping alarm function. This function supply
users a way to monitor other assistant equipments statusand keep both the station
and system suitable and safe.
Input port:
Port number: 8
Alarm logic:
CloseLoop
Alarm
Open Default
Normal
Alarm logic can be changed and selectable by user for each port from NMS/CID.
Alarm name setting:
External alarm can be named for each HKA port (max character number is 32).
The characters can be used refer to the table character code table.
The HKA name can be changed when this HKA is occurring. The new name will
display after the name is changed. And then the history of old name clear, remain
the history of new name HKA.
2.11.9.2
HKC function
This function is used to operate a command issued from NMS/LCT to control

external equipment remotely.
HKC Ports:
Port number: 4
Control Logic:
HKC alarm polarity and duration time can be set per port. Default is
CLOSED"
Control signal Setting
Controlling signal name can be set for each HKC port via NMS/LCT. (Max
number is 20). The characters can be used in name refer to the table
character code table.

2-140
F5259_B05
Control time
Table 2-12. Control Time Setting
Control time
Note
Momentary
0min
2sec (by eye)
1c
Continually
254min
Infinity
Default
- Momentary timer setting: 0 to 254min with 1 min step

- When the setting is 0, no any pulse is generated.
2.11.10
Security management
Security Management provides security environment for user, which permits only
registered user, for example, to configure NE, to monitor alarm and status from NE,
and to download firmware to NE.
Usable functions for each user are limited according to user level of each user.
Below table shows the detail information of user authority.
NOTE:
1)
O: means the permission of operation

X: means the denial of operation
*: means the user only have the right to operate the lower level user
2)
Level 4 System Administrator (Highest)

Level 3 System Maintenance
Level 2 System Operator
Level 1 System Watcher (Lowest)

2-141
F5259_B05
(1of3)
User Level
Function List
Level4 Level3 Level2 Level 1

PM
Browse Current Performance (including of 15M and 24H)
Browse History Performance (including ,of 15M and 24H)
Reset the performance counters
Set the performance threshold (including of 15M and 24H)
Inhibit the reporting of the performance
Set the switch state of reporting zero value
Set the switch state of recording zero value
Set the switch state of reporting event of performance
Browse the attributes of all kinds of performance
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
ALM
Retrieve and browse the current Alarm
Retrieve and browse the history alarm
Inhibit the alarm reporting
Set the delay time of reporting alarm generation
Set the stretch time of reporting alarm disappear
Set the alarm severity
Browse the attributes of all kinds of alarm
Retrieve and browse a variety of events (including protection switch,
time source switch,)
Configuration
Modify NE's attributes
Browse NE's attributes
Install panel
Uninstall panel
Set the attributes of network administration port(Ethernet)
Browse the attributes of network administration Port (Ethernet)
Set the attributes of environment ports
Browse the attributes of environment ports
Set the attributes of out environment ports
Browse the attributes of out environment ports
Set the orderwire numbers of broadcasting, group and individual
Browse the orderwire numbers of broadcasting, group and individual
Set the sending and expecting value of J byte (including J0/ J1 / J2)

2-142
F5259_B05
(2of3)
User Level
Function List

Browse the J value (including J0,J1 and J2)
Browse the C2/V5 value
Set terminal and facility loopback
Cancel the loopback
Install Cross-Module
Uninstall Cross-Module
Download firmware
Upgrade firmware
Browse the version information and working state of firmware
Establish Cross-Connect
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
Set Cross-Connect attributes (including path label, path attribute,

direction, restore, switch holdoff time, restore delay time, switch
condition (such as EXEC,SD, TIM and Extra Command) and support
of extra command (such as Lockout, Force, Manual, Exercise))
Browse Cross-Connect attributes (including path label, path
attribute, direction, restore, switch holdoff time, restore delay time,
switch condition (such as EXEC, SD, TIM and Extra Command),
support of extra command (such as Lockout, Force, Manual,
Exercise) and working state)
Delete Cross-Connect
Delete All Cross-Connect
Modify Cross-Connect Attribute
Set SNCP
Set the attributes of system clock source (including priority,
restorable, lockout threshold, switch holdoff time, delay time of
restore, the forced sending SSM value, the switch state of sending
forced SSM value, and support of extra command (such as Lockout,
Force, Manual))
Browse the attributes of system clock source (including priority,
restore, the forced sending SSM value, receiving SSM value, the
switch state of sending forced SSM value and support of extra
command (such as Lockout, Force, Manual))

2-143
F5259_B05
(3of3)
User Level
Function List

Set the attributes of pass through clock source (including priority,
restore, the forced sending SSM value, the switch of sending forced
SSM value and support of extra command (such as Lockout, Force,
Manual))
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O*
O*
O*
O*
O*
O*
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Browse the attributes of pass through clock source (including

priority, restorable, lockout threshold, switch holdoff time, delay time
of restore, the forced sending SSM value, the switch of sending
forced SSM value, receiving SSM value and support of extra
command (such as Lockout, Force, Manual))
Set NE time
Browse NE time
Database up/download
Security
Create user
Delete user
Change password
Modify the user level
Set the life of user
Browse the user information
Browse the log of operation

2-144
F5259_B05
2.12 Memory Management

Database includes all the configuration information of system and software save
the database in Flash ROM. Then even if system is power off and on, software
can resume all traffic based on the database.
2.12.1 Database Distribution

In this system the MCP unit, Cross-connection unit have Flash ROM to save
database. In MCP unit, the working and protection CS unit, the Flash ROM save
all the databases of the system. In the FE unit only that databases relate to FE are
saved to the DRAM.
Table 2-13. Database distribution table
MCP unit
Primary CS unit
Protection CS unit
FE Unit
All databases in
Flash ROM
All databases in
Flash ROM
All databases in Flash

ROM
Databases relate to FE
in DRAM
The database in working CS unit is the core. Database in MCP, protection CS unit,
FE units are got from the working CS unit and is checked whether keeping with
working CS unit periodically.
2.12.2 Database Action

2.12.2.1
Database Cycle Synchrony
When write each database into flash, the working CS unit record the current date
and save it into flash too. This is called Time flag.
MCP unit retrieves the Time flag of all databases from the working CS unit
every 10 seconds. If there are some Time flag of databases differing to itself,
then MCP unit send database upload command to the working CS and CS will
send the indicated database and Time flag to MCP. So MCP can keep the
database same as the working CS.

2-145
F5259_B05
Figure 2-65.
Database cycle synchrony between MCP and working CS
The working CS unit sends the Time flag of all databases to the protection CS
unit every 10 seconds. If all of the Time flag of databases are same as
protection CS, protection CS send success result to the working CS. If there are
some differences, protection CS will send the database ID which has different
Time flag to working CS and working CS will send the indicated database and
Time flag to protection CS.
Figure 2-66.
Database cycle synchrony between working CS and protection CS
NOTE: Database cycle synchrony for FE unit is same as for protection CS.

2-146
F5259_B05
2.12.2.2
Download Database
When LCT/EMS download database, MCP receive it and send to working CS unit.
In working CS unit database is send to the protection CS Unit then written into
Flash ROM of working CS unit. And MCP writes the database into itself Flash
ROM after working CS unit save database and responds the success to MCP unit.
Please the following Figure 2-67.
Figure 2-67. Database download

2.12.2.3
Upload Database
When CID uploads system database, MCP will send the command to working CS
unit and databases in the Flash ROM of working CS unit are reported to CID.

2-147
F5259_B05
Figure 2-68.
2.12.2.4
Database upload
System Power On
After system power on, the working CS will start up with itself database.
MCP unit start up as the following.
Figure 2-69.

2-148
MCP unit start up
F5259_B05
Figure 2-70.
Protection CS unit start up

2-149
F5259_B05
For FE unit, it use itself database to initial MIB and HW after power. After the
working CS finish initialization, it will start cycle synchrony database for FE unit.
If there are some database with different time flag, working CS will send database
to FE and then the FE unit unit initialize the database to MIB and HW.
2.12.2.5
Unit Replace
Unit replacing is same as power on.

2.12.2.6
Database Restore from MCP
In V-Node design, the database in the working CS unit is the core. Database in
other boards is from the working CS unit. It calls Online Mode. The descriptions from 2.12.2.1 to 2.12.2.5 are under Online Mode.
Sometime without CS unit, customer want to configure something to NE (with
MCP) at first and once CS unit inserting the configuration in MCP can be saved
to the working CS unit. So in this system, Offline Mode is supplied to
implement it. In MCP unit, there is a switch with 8 switch points. If the 5th switch
point is set to ON, it means Offline Mode. OFF means Online Mode
The following is to describe the Offline Mode.
First, without CS unit insertion:
Secondly, inserting CS unit, MCP will retrieve the DB time flag in CS unit and
download DB to CS unit if there are some time flags difference between MCP and
CS unit.

2-150
F5259_B05
Offline Mode is useful in some cases. For example, NE is installed with one CS
unit only and this CS unit is failed now. Customer need replace a new CS unit and
expect all of the previous configurations of this NE are saved into new CS unit
automatically and do not need do all settings from LCT again. Then customer can
poll out MCP unit and set it into Offline Mode and insert again. Continuously
insert new CS unit. After CS unit normal lighter blinking and waiting more than
30 seconds for DB synchrony between MCP and CS, then customer can restore
the MCP to Online Mode again.
The following figure is describing the flowchart of MCP unit with Offline
Mode after power on or resetting.

2-151
F5259_B05

2-152
F5259_B05
2.13 OW Function
Figure 2-71
The OW Overlap Module
The function of OW OVERLAP module is overlap local OW and multi-way OWs

from tributary into 64k PCM digital signal, then send it to tributary and realize
re-connection without loss.
2.13.1 OW interface
TEL set is used for OW, RJ11 interface is specific, and both the E1 and E2 OH
byte is used for OW.
2.13.2 OW function
Coding law: A law/ law
Calling method: the equipment must support the following calling type:
all-call; selective-call; group-call.
Calling number consists of three-digit number
User setting: User can do the setting to select the coding law, calling number;
and the group-call ID of the every single equipment on CID.

2-153
F5259_B05
2.13.3 Calling method

All-Call
Send code: Default 000(DTMF);
General Spec: 000(DTMF)
Receive code: If receive the code of 000 (DTMF), the buzzer rings.
Selective-Call
At call-originating station, connect the telephone set to TEL SET terminal, and
dial the number (call ID) of the NE that you want to communicate with. Only the
dialed station is called.
NOTE: Because the codes of 0,00,000 are used in all call, so they cannot be used
here.
Group-Call
At call-originating station, connect telephone set to the TEL SET terminal, and
dial the number (group call ID) of NE that you want to communicate with. Dialed
station(s) that has (have) same group call ID in the network is (are) called.
NOTE: The Group ID can be set in CID.
2.13.4 Branch function

In order to communicate with the branches (Up to 6 orderwire branches are
available at the same time though up to 26 optical ports are provided in VNODE.), the tone signal of each order wire interface will synthesize branch. The
branch is synthesized by digital way.
Figure 2-72. OW branch process

NOTE: In the digital circuit not connected, insert idle code.
Call sequence description
Voltage level
Tx: -3 ~ -10 dBm
Rx: -2 ~ -25 dBm

2-154
F5259_B05
2.13.5 Sequence description

Tx:
Tone: 100ms
Interval: 100ms
Ring tone: one-second ring; two seconds silence
Rx:
Tone time: 500msec ~ 1000msec
Interval: 150msec ~ 2s
2.13.6 Idle code

Fault
When optical input failed, E1 byte is sent to STM-N line as idle code
Not-used
Optical output (E1 byte) is:
A law: 55h
law: FFh

2-155
F5259_B05
2.14 LAPD/Network /Routing Protocol

Data Link Layer : IEEE 802.3, LAPD
IEEE 802.3IEEE LAN protocol can carry out the MAC sub-layer of between the
physical layer and the data link layer. The IEEE 802.3s CSMA/CD is used with
different speed on many physical mediums. The expansion version of the IEEE
802.3 protocol specifies the fast Ethernet. The changes of the original IEEE 802.3
protocol on the physics cover 10Base2, 10Base5, 10BaseF, 10BaseT and
10Broad36. The changes of the fast Ethernet cover 100BaseT, 100BaseT4 and
100BaseX.
LAPD (link access protocol on D channel): ISDN data link layer protocol on D
channel. LAPD is originated from LAPB protocol, mainly designed for the
signaling of the primary rate ISDN. It is specified by the ITU-T Q.920 and Q.921.
Network Layer : IP
IP (internet protocol): network layer protocol in the TCP/IP stack, it provides a
connection-less internet service. IP provides addressing function, rule of service
type, segment store and re-united, and security. It is recorded in the document
RFC 791.
Transport Layer: TCP, UDP
TCP (transport control protocol): connection oriented transport layer protocol,
which provides reliable, full duplex data transmission. TCP is part of TCP/IP
protocol stack.
UDP (user datagram protocol): connection-less transport protocol in the TCP/IP
protocol stack. User datagram protocol is a simple protocol, exchange message
under non-confirmation and guaranteed transmission, both error process and
re-transmitted are processed by other protocols,. User datagram protocol is
specified in the RFC 768.
Network Layer: RIP
RIP V1 is on the UDP layer, but it should be described into Network Layer
RIP (route information protocol): a kind of IGP (inter gateway protocol) provided
by the UNIX BSD system, which is the most popular IGP in the internet. Route
information protocol use hops of network segment as measure unit.
2-156
F5259_B05
PFC socket and RM Interface should be over TCP layer.

PFC socket: PFC Socket is the socket supporting send buffer status management
function, confirmation for arrival status of transmitted data function, and
Health-check function.
2.15 Real Time Clock System

The Real Timer is used to provide Equipment with accurate time. After equipment reset or power on, the time of Real Timer is accurate.
2.15.1 Features
Real Time Clock/Calendar
Tracks time in Hours, Minutes, and Seconds
Day of the Week, Day, Month, and Year
Battery Switch
After equipment power down, the battery is power supply.
High Reliability
Data Retention: 100 years
Endurance: 100,000 cycles per byte
Low Power CMOS
1.25A Operating Current (Typical)

2-157
F5259_B05
2.15.2 Block Diagram
Figure 2-73
Block Diagram of Real Timer
2.16 Equipment Cooling System

The fan would adjust its speed according to the temperature changing of the
corresponding board slots.
2.16.1 The threshold of the fan speed

Under 60C: low speed
60C ~ 80C: middle speed
Up 80C: high speed
2.16.2 The LED Status of FAN Board

Table 2-14. LED Status of the FAN Board
LED
PWR

2-158
STAUS
DESCRIPTION
ON
The fan is working
OFF
The fan stop
F5259_B05
2.17 Power Management System

The equipment adopts two power boards to protect the power supply interface
system and the each board adopts the fusing type fuse to protect its internal
circuit.
2.18 Retiming Buffer

2.18.1 Functional Description and Block Diagram
The retiming buffer is used for retiming function in E1 board. Its block diagram is
shown as below:
Figure 2-74
The Retiming Function Diagram
The part closed in the dash line carries out retiming function. The key part is a 256
bits FIFO, a writing pointer producing circuit and a reading pointer producing
circuit. The three part circuits function is described as below:
FIFO: The part of circuit provides a retiming buffer memory; the capacity for
2Mbit/s service retiming is 256 bits. It is separated as two 128 bits, one avoiding
reading empty, another avoiding FIFO overflow. Hence the available depth is
128 bits (the capacity is 62.5us for 2Mbit/s service).

2-159
F5259_B05
Writing pointer producing circuit: The part of circuit is mainly used for
producing pointer for data written into FIFO. The clock for producing the
pointer is the clock sent from E1 side by Mapper. The part also compares
whether the reading pointer and writing pointer are same or not, if same, the
writing pointer is adjusted 128 bits to avoid FIFO overflow or empty.
Reading pointer producing circuit: The part of circuit is mainly used for
producing pointer for data read from FIFO. The clock for producing the pointer
is local system clock which is SEC of SDH network and provided by system
clock module.
2.19 LOG
A list of the operation logs and event logs of the NE can be recorded.
Event Log: max 500 items for each event log (TCA,PPS 3000)
Command Log: max 500 items.

2-160
F5259_A05B05
3. EXTERNAL INTERFACES
3.1 User channel
Physical interface: V.11, 64kb/s
Mode: Co- directional/Contra-directional
Max Cable length: 1KM
Connector: RJ45
Interface control: Add/Drop or Bypass
Accessible OH Byte: F1, E2
Maximum user data channel interface:6
3.2 Orderwire
Level Diagram: Rx: 2 dBm
Tx 0 dBm
DTMF Tone Level:
Rx 10 dBm
Tx: 10 dBm
Impedance: 600ohm
Signal Instruction Mode: dual tone multi-frequency mode (DTMF)
Single Tone:
Frequency:
450Hz
Dialing tone:
long continuous tone
Ring back tone:
1 second connecting, 2 seconds disconnecting
Busy tone:
0.4 seconds disconnecting and continuing
Notice mode:
buzzer-producing tone
Station addresses: up to 999
External Interfaces
3-1
F5259_B05
Operation mode: All call/ Group call/Selective call

All call:
All NEs whose orderwire channel(s) is (are) opened and

corresponding optical port(s) connected by fibers are called.
Group call:
The NEs whose orderwire channel(s) is (are) opened and

corresponding optical port(s) connected by fibers and group
calling number is matched are called.
Selective call:
The NEs whose orderwire channel(s) is (are) opened and

corresponding optical port(s) connected by fibers and selective
calling number is matched are called.
Connector: RJ11
Accessible OH Byte: E1,E2
Up to 6 orderwire branches are available at the same time though up to 26 optical
ports are provided in V-NODE.
NOTE: At least one direction of one port must be close to prevent OW loop in a ring
network.
3.3 User Interface

3.3.1 CID Interface
Physical Layer:
f port: RS232C
F port: 10BaseT
Protocol:
TCP/IP
Connector:
f port: the pin assignment between RJ45 and D-sub 9pin

F port: the pin assignment between RJ45 and RJ45
(Shown as below figure)
Connection:
f port:RS232C Cable (Detail refers to Chapter 8)

F port: UTP Straight cable (via HUB)
External Interfaces
3-2
F5259_A05B05
GND
Rx
Tx
Figure 3-1.
RJ45 connector of f port
Figure 3-2.
4 5
D-sub 9pin connector of f port
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
RXD-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Keep
Figure 3-3.
RJ45 connector of F port
3.3.2 NMS
Physical Layer:
10Base-T (Half/10M)
Connector:
RJ-45 (by F port)
Connection:
UTP Straight cable (via Hub)
Protocol:
TCP/IP
External Interfaces
3-3
F5259_B05
3.4 Physical Specification

3.4.1 V-NODE Subrack Dimensions
Height:
487.6 mm
Width:
524.4 mm (with rack ear)
Depth:
272.3 mm
Weight:
11 Kg (backpanel and filter box are included, but rearpanel is excepted)
NOTE:
1. Above dimension includes any projection of subrack.
2. The rearpanel means the PCB board in the back of the V-Node equipment,
and the backpanel is a steel board on the back of the V-Node equipment
subrack.
3.
External Interfaces
3-4
LAPS-RxFCSErrorPkts
ETH-TxOctets
ETH-RxOctets
ETH-TxUcastPkts
ETH-TxNUcastPkts
ETH-RxMulticastPkts
ETH-RxBroadcastPkts
ETH-TxLateCollision
ETH-TxCollision
ETH-RxPkt64
ETH-RxPkt65to127
ETH-RxPkt128to255
ETH-RxPkt256to511
ETH-RxPkt512to1023
ETH-RxPkt1024toMax
ETH-DropPkts
ETH-RxUndersizePkts
ETH-RxOversizePkts
PSC
PSD
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LP-FEUAS
GFP-TxPkts
GFP-TxOctets
GFP-RxPkts
GFP-RxOctets
GFP-RxFCSErrorPkts
LAPS-RxOctets
X
X
X
LAPS-RxPkts
X
X
X
LAPS-TxOctets
X
X
X
LAPS-TxPkts
X
X
X
GFP-RxEXIErrorPkts
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LP-FEBBE
LP-FEES
LP-FESES
MS-ES
MS-SES
MS-UAS
MS-FEBBE
MS-FEES
MS-FESES
MS-FEUAS
AU-PJE-P
AU-PJE-N
HP-BBE
HP-ES
HP-SES
HP-UAS
HP-FEBBE
HP-FEES
HP-FESES
LP-SES
MS-BBE
LP-ES
RS-UAS
LP-BBE
RS-SES
TU-PJE-N
RS-ES
TU-PJE-N
RS-BBE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Section
PKG name
HPA
PDH
SPI(O)
STM-N
SPI(E)
RST
MST
MSA
Point
X
X
X
Device
PKG-REMOVED
PKG-TYPE
PKG-FAIL
BUS-FAIL
CPU Restart
STM-N Facility-LPBK
Terminal-LPBK
LOS
STM-1e LOS
STM-N LOF
STM-N MS-AIS
AU4
AU-AIS
AU-LOP
TU12
TU-AIS
TU-LOP
LOM
RS-OFS
HP-FEUAS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LP-UAS
Alarm/
Event/
Command
MSP
L2SW
LAPS
GFP
LP
TU
HP
AU
MS
Performance
RS
Status
F5259_B04
SpectralWave V-NODE
RELEASE 2.10
GENERAL INFORMATION
NEC Corporation
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION

1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONTENTS
1. OVERVIEW
1-1
2. REFERENCE STANDARDS
2-1
3. EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTIC
3-1
4. NETWORK DESIGN USING V-NODE
4-1
4.1 Mounting Configuration of Interface Board and Modules............. 4-1

4.1.1
Package Configuration......................................................................... 4-3
4.1.2
Mounting Configuration ....................................................................... 4-4
4.2 Example of Network Configuration ............................................... 4-12

4.2.1
Point-to-Point ...................................................................................... 4-12
4.2.2
Linear ................................................................................................... 4-12
4.2.3
MS-SPRing........................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.4
Multi-Ring ............................................................................................ 4-14
5. SPECIFICATION
5-1
5.1 System Design Specifications......................................................... 5-1

5.1.1
System Parameters............................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2
Matrix type ............................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.3
Max NE connection number................................................................. 5-1
5.1.4
Crossconnect ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.5
Interface ................................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.6
Protection .............................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.7
Synchronization .................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.8
Performance Monitoring ...................................................................... 5-6
5.1.9
Fault management ................................................................................ 5-8
5.1.10 Alarm report ........................................................................................ 5-10

5.1.11 Loopback ............................................................................................. 5-10
5.1.12 HKA ...................................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.13 HKC ...................................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.14 User interface ...................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.15 Remote access by CID ........................................................................5-11
5.1.16 F/W and FPGA download ....................................................................5-11
Contents
i
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.1.17 Data download/ data upload ...............................................................5-11

5.1.18 Layer 2 switch ..................................................................................... 5-12
5.1.19 FE ........................................................................................................ 5-12
5.1.20 Security................................................................................................ 5-13
5.1.21 LOG ...................................................................................................... 5-13
5.1.22 Inventory.............................................................................................. 5-13
5.2 Optical Signal Interface.................................................................. 5-14

5.2.1
STM-1: 155M Optical Interface........................................................... 5-14
5.2.2
STM-4: 622M Optical Interface........................................................... 5-15
5.2.3
STM-16: 2.5G Optical Interface .......................................................... 5-16
5.2.4
Eye Diagram of Optical Transmission .............................................. 5-17
5.3 Electrical Signal Interface .............................................................. 5-18

5.3.1
Basic Parameters of Electric Interface ............................................. 5-18
5.3.2
2M interface ......................................................................................... 5-18
5.3.3
34M Interface ....................................................................................... 5-20
5.3.4
45M Interface ....................................................................................... 5-22
5.3.5
STM-1 Electrical Interface .................................................................. 5-24
5.4 Ethernet Interface ........................................................................... 5-28

5.4.1
10Base-T interface specification ....................................................... 5-28
5.4.2
100Base-T interface specification ..................................................... 5-28
5.4.3
GBE interface specification ............................................................... 5-29
5.5 The Jitter Index of Interface........................................................... 5-31

5.5.1
Input Jitter and Wander Tolerance .................................................... 5-31
5.5.2
Jitter Generation ................................................................................. 5-33
5.5.3
Jitter Generation by Mapping ............................................................ 5-34
5.5.4
Combined Jitter and Wander ............................................................. 5-34
5.6 External Interface ........................................................................... 5-38

5.6.1
Orderwire ............................................................................................. 5-38
5.6.2
User Channel....................................................................................... 5-38
5.6.3
Office Alarm......................................................................................... 5-38
5.6.4
Housekeeping Alarm/Control ............................................................ 5-39
5.7 Environmental Conditions ............................................................. 5-40

5.7.1
Temperature ........................................................................................ 5-40
5.7.2
Humidity............................................................................................... 5-40
5.7.3
Vibration .............................................................................................. 5-40
5.8 Power Distribution.......................................................................... 5-41

5.8.1
Contents
ii
Power Interface ................................................................................... 5-41
F5259_A04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.8.2
Power Consumption ........................................................................... 5-42
5.9 User Interface.................................................................................. 5-43

5.9.1
CID Interface........................................................................................ 5-43
5.9.2
NMS ...................................................................................................... 5-44
5.10 Physical Specification.................................................................... 5-44

5.10.1 V-NODE Subrack Dimensions............................................................ 5-44
Contents
iii
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
1. OVERVIEW
NECs SpectralWave Versatile Node Multiplexer (V-NODE) offers various types of
traffic interfaces such as PDH, SDH and Fast Ethernet with flexible network
configurations of linear, ring, multiple rings, etc. The V-NODE is also well suited for
implementation in customer premises. V-NODE has been developed as a part of
NECs SpectralWave family products. V-NODE also has the following features:
Conforms to the correlative proposal of ITU-T and related SDH technical

criteria of the country.
Full time slot crossconnect functions, having powerful, convenient Add and
Drop traffic functions and modes.
Compliant system design: The equipment can configure either TM

(Terminal Multiplexer) or ADM (Add Drop Multiplexer) mode flexibly.
Offers system configuration for STM-1/STM-4/STM-16, with the methods

of easy upgrading and reconfiguring networks.
Provides multi-type tributary interfaces with excellent cost performance.
Offers perfect network management system; flexible network configuration.
Realizes a number of traffic protection modes.
Provides multi-function orderwire telephone system.
Offers electromagnetic compatibility performances (EMC and EMI) with

appropriate measures.
Well maintained; high-reliable operation.
Overview
1-1
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
2. REFERENCE STANDARDS
ITUT G.703
Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interface.
ITUT G.707
Network node interface for the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

(SDH).
ITUT G.781
Synchronization layer functions.
ITUT G.783
Characteristics of the SDH equipment functional blocks.
ITUT G.784
SDH management.
ITUT G.803
Architectures of transport networks based on the SDH.
ITUT G.811
Timing requirements at the outputs of primary reference clocks.
ITUT G.813
Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks.
ITUT G.823
The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are
based on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy.
ITUT G.825
The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are
based on the SDH.
ITUT G.826
Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate.
ITUT G.841
Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures.
ITUT G.957
Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the SDH.
ITUT G.958
Digital line systems based on the SDH for use on optical fiber
cables.
ITUT G.7041/Y.1303
Generic framing procedure.
ITUT G.7042/Y.1305
Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) for virtual

concatenated signals.
IEEE 802.1D-1998
Part 3: Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges.
IEEE 802.1Q-1998
Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks.
IEEE 802.3-1998
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection

(CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications.
IEEE 802.3ad-1998 Port Trunk
Reference Standards
2-1
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
IEEE 802.1p-1998
Quality of Service
ITU-T X.86
Link Access Procedure - SDH(LAPS)
RFC1213
RFC1058
CISPR22 (11/97)
CISPR24 (09/97)
ETSI prETS 300-386-2-2 (09/96)
prEN50082-1 (1994)
ETS 300 019-1-3
EN60825-2
Reference Standards
2-2
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
3. EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTIC
11U-height compact-size designation.
Provides 2016*2016 VC-12 level, or 96*96 VC-3 level, or 152*152 VC-4 level
non-blocking crossconnection, supporting uni-directional, bi-directional and
broadcasting.
Provides sub-network connection protection (SNCP), multiplex section shared
protection ring (MS-SPRing) and 1+1 multiplex section protection (MSP),
supporting traffic communication between them.
Applicable for a number of network configurations: point-to-point, linear, ring, star,
tree, multi-ring, ring crossing, etc.
Provides E12 (2M), E31 (34M), E32 (45M), FE (10M/100M Ethernet), STM-1e,
STM-1/4, STM-16 traffic interfaces.
Provides three levels of VC-4, VC-3 and VC-12 cross connect for FE board,
supporting both LAPS and GFP EOS encapsulation and LCAS standard.
Provides virtual concatenation function for FE, and the maximum virtual
concatenation quantity for FE: VC-3 level is 3, and VC-12 level is 63.
Capacity for interfaces:
E12 interface: up to 352 channels
FE Ethernet interface: up to 78 channels
STM-16 optical interface: up to 6 channels
Equipment Characteristic
3-1
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION

STM-1 electrical interface: up to 20 channels
Either way for the use of traffic: independent or protecting each other among optical
interfaces.
Configurations of complicated SNC-P network, such as 2.5G-622M Multi-Ring,
622M-155M Multi-Ring, 155M-155M Multi-Ring, etc.
Allows configuring STM-1 system to/from STM-4 system only by replacing
interface modules; simply upgrading.
Provides orderwire interface (2-wire interface), with the functions of all-call, group
calling and selected calling.
Up to 6 channels of 64 kbit/s V.11 user data interface (on D_INF unit) per subrack.
Provides timing synchronous interface:
2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz external clock
2048 kbit/s tributary
STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 timing source inputs
2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz external timing source output
SSM function
Provides DCC channel of D1 to D3 and D4 to D12; Using TCP/IP communication
protocol.
Provides F (10Base-T) and f (RS232) network management interfaces for
configuration, alarm, performance, maintenance and security functions of ITU-T
definition.
Provides ports for eight Housekeeping Alarms, four Housekeeping Controls, and a
set of Alarm Output interfaces.
Provides local/remote firmware download: in-service upgrading is available for easy
maintenance.
3-2
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
Allows upgrading hardware configuration data without replacing equipment.

Provides the network management for remote connection via serial interface or LAN,
which allows monitoring remote NE.
Supports the following application of fiber transmission:
Super Long-Distance (80km)
Long-Distance (40km)
Short Distance (15km)
Provides layer 2 switch function:
Supports 802.3x flow control for full-duplex mode and collision-based backpressure for half-duplex mode.
Supports broadcast storm filtering
Supports port-based VLAN and 802.1Q tag-based VLAN with IVL
Supports 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol
Supports static priority and 802.1p Class of Service with 2-level priority
queuing
Supports static port trunking
Supports by-port Egress/Ingress rate control
Support Static MAC filter database
Provides fans to disperse heat forcibly; provides the fans controlling temperature and
inspecting their own status to guarantee the equipment running stably.
3-3
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
4. NETWORK DESIGN USING V-NODE

4.1 Mounting Configuration of Interface Board and
Modules
This section provides mounting configuration of interface packages and modules.
Slot positions for each interface package are shown in Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 .
Figure 4-1 V-Node Front View
Network Design using V-NODE

4-1
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
Figure 4-2 Slot-Position View

4-2
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
4.1.1
Package Configuration
Several kinds of packages are available as shown below:

STM-16: 1* STM-16 optical interface and SDH Signal termination
STM-1/4: 1* STM-4 or 2*STM-1 optical interface and SDH Signal termination
S1E: 2*STM-1electrical interface and SDH Signal termination
E12: 32*2M PDH signal to/from VC-12 SDH signal mapping/demapping
E31: 3*34M PDH signal to/from VC-3 SDH signal mapping/demaping
E32: 3*45M PDH signal to/from VC-3 SDH signal mapping/demaping
FE_2: 6*10/100M bit Ethernet (2 WAN)
FE_4: 6*10/100M bit Ethernet (4 WAN)
CS: Cross-connect + timing source unit
TPS_S1E: 155M TPS Unit
TPS_E3: 34M/45M TPS unit
TPS_E12W: 2M TPS unit (for work slot)
TPS_E12P: 2M TPS unit (for protection slot)
THR_E12W: 2M through unit
MCP: System control and communication
P_INF: Power and clock interface unit
D_INF: Data through interface unit (6 ports )
FAN: Fans

4-3
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
4.1.2
Mounting Configuration
Following table shows mounting configuration in Interface Packages.
Y: Yes (an available slot for the package)

NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
The slot #24 and #25 are not used.

TPS_S1E, TPS_E3 packages occupy 2 slots.
When using a package which needs TPS, the dedicated TPS must be used.(When using E12,
TPS_E12W or TPS_E12P must be used. When using E31 or E32, TPS_E3 must be used. And
when using S1E, TPS_S1E must be used.)

4-4
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
4.1.2.1 STM-16 Configuration

Regardless of the use of Line Protection, TPS Package (Upper Row) is not required. The
configuration of STM-16 is shown below:
STM-16
STM-16
STM-16
STM-16
STM-16
STM-16
26
P_INF
22
10
11
12
23
P_INF
21
27
28
Figure 4-3 STM-16 Configuration
4.1.2.2 STM-1/4 Configuration

Regardless of the use of Line Protection, TPS Package (Upper Row) is not required. The
configuration of STM-1/4 is shown below:
32
STM-1/4
STM-1/4
6
31
STM-1/4
STM-1/4
5
30
STM-1/4
STM-1/4
4
29
STM-1/4
STM-1/4
3
28
STM-1/4
STM-1/4
2
27
STM-1/4
22
STM-1/4
21
23
26
P_INF
20
STM-1/4
19
P_INF
18
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4-4 STM-1/4 Configuration

4-5
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
4.1.2.3 FE Configuration
TPS Package (Upper Row) is not required. The configuration of FE is shown below:
32
FE
FE
6
31
FE
FE
5
30
FE
FE
4
29
FE
FE
3
28
FE
FE
2
27
FE
22
FE
21
23
26
P_INF
20
FE
19
P_INF
18
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4-5 FE Configuration

4-6
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
4.1.2.4 S1E Configuration

When there are Package Protections, TPS_S1E Package (Upper Row) is necessary.
The type of Package Protection is 1:1, and up to 5 Groups can be configured.
The slot of Work and Prot is fixed in the each group.
Group1
Slot2: Work, Slot3: Prot
Group2
Group3
Group4
Group5
18
20
27
29
31
TPS_S1E
TPS_S1E
TPS_S1E
TPS_S1E
TPS_S1E
S1E (W)
S1E (P)
S1E (W)
S1E (P)
S1E (W)
S1E (P)
S1E (W)
S1E (P)
S1E (W)
S1E (P)
11
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4-6 S1E (with TPS)

4-7
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
4.1.2.5 E31 Configuration

When there are Package Protections, TPS_E3 Package (Upper Row) is necessary.
Group1
Group2
Group3
Group4
Group5
Figure 4-7 E31 (with TPS)

4-8
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION

When there are Package Protections, TPS_E3 Package (Upper Row) is necessary.
Group1
Group2
Group3
Group4
Group5
Figure 4-8 E32 (with TPS)

4-9
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION

4.1.2.7.1
E12 (without TPS)
Where the Package Protection is not configured, THR_E12W Package (Upper Row) is
required.
Figure 4-9 E12 Configuration (without TPS)

4-10
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
4.1.2.7.2
E12 (with TPS)
Where the Package Protection is configured, TPS_E12P Package (Upper Row) for
Prot, and TPS_E12W Package (Upper Row) for Work are required.
The type of Package Protection is 1: N (N=1~4), and up to 2 Groups can be
configured. The value of N differs depending on the number of mounted packages on
Work-side.
The slots of Work and Prot are designated in the each group.
Group 1: Slot #2 = Prot, Slots #3 thru #6 = Work
Group 2: Slot #16 = Prot, Slots #12 thru #15 = Work
18
19
20
21
22
28
29
30
31
32
TPS_E12P
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12P
E12 (P)
E12 (W)
E12 (W)
E12 (W)
E12 (W)
E12 (W)
E12 (W)
E12 (W)
E12 (W)
E12 (P)
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4-10 E12 Configuration (with TPS)

4-11
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
4.2 Example of Network Configuration

4.2.1
Point-to-Point
Figure 4-11 Point-to-Point Network Configuration
4.2.2
Linear
Figure 4-12

4-12
Linear Network Configuration
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
4.2.3
MS-SPRing
V-Node
STM-16
MS-SPRing
V-Node
V-Node
TPS_E12P
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
P_INF
P_INF
D_INF
V-Node
CS
CS
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
Figure 4-13
STM-4/16
STM-4/16
FE
MCP
2M(With TPS)
100Base-T
Multi-Ring

4-13
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
4.2.4
Multi-Ring
V-Node
V-Node
V-Node
V-Node
Figure 4-14

4-14
Multi-Ring
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
STM-4
STM-4
V-Node
STM-16
STM-16
STM-4
SNCP
P_INF
CS
CS
2M(With TPS)
100Base-T
FE
MCP
V-Node
P_INF
D_INF
V-Node
TPS_E12P
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
STM-16
MS-SPRing
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5. SPECIFICATION
5.1 System Design Specifications
5.1.1
System Parameters
Transmission Level:
STM-16, STM-4 , STM-1o/e
Bit Error Rate: <1 10-10

Type of Tributary Interfaces:
Crossconnect Level:
5.1.2
2.048 Mbit/s, 34.368 Mbit/s

44.736 Mbit/s ( CEPT TU-3 mapping )
10/100Base-T Fast Ethernet
VC-4, VC-3, VC-12
Matrix type
One way (includes hairpin)
Two way
Broadcast
Drop & Continue
5.1.3
Max NE connection number
63 NEs
5.1.4
Crossconnect
Cross-connect level
Size
VC-4
152*152
96*96
2016*2016
VC-3
VC-12
Specification
5-1
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.1.5
Interface
STM-16 (I-16.1/S-16.1/L-16.1/L-16.2)(1ch/SLOT)
STM-4 (S-4.1/L-4.1/L-4.2)(1ch/SLOT)
STM-1 (S-1.1/L-1.1/L-1.2) (2ch/SLOT)
S1E (2ch/SLOT)
2M (75 ohms / 120 ohms)(32ch/SLOT)
34M (3ch/SLOT)
45M (3ch/SLOT)
FE (100Base-TX) (6CH/SLOT)
5.1.6
Protection
2F MS-SPRing
1) STM-4/16 interface
2) Bi-directional direction revertive (See ITU-T G.841)
3) Switch time: < 50msec
4) switch criterion: SF/SD/MSW/FSW/LKOP
SF: LOS, LOF, MS-AIS, RS-TIM, B2-EXC
SD: B2DEG
MSP (linear protection)
1) Optical interface
2) 1+1 Uni-directional Non-Revertive (See ITU-T G.841)
1+1 Bi-directional Non-Revertive
1:1 Bi-directional Revertive
3) switch time:< 50msec
4) switch criterion: SF/SD/MSW/FSW/LKOP
SF: LOS, LOF, MS-AIS, RS-TIM, B2-EXC
SD: B2DEG
Specification
5-2
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
SNC-P (path protection)

1) Protection unit: HOPath:VC-4
LOPath:VC-3/VC-12
2) 1+1 Uni-directional Non-Revertive/1+1 Uni-directional Revertive
3) switch time:< 50msec (SNC/N: when 504 path switch, switch time is less than
200ms)
4) switch criterion:SF/SD/MSW/FSW/LKOP
SNC/I SSF(Server signal fail)
a)
VC-4
AU-LOP,AU-AIS
b) VC-3/12
TU-LOP,TU-AIS
SNC/N TSF(Trail signal fail) TSD(Trail signal Degrade)

a)
VC-4
SF
AU-LOP, AU-AIS
HP-UNEQ, HP-TIM, HP-EXC
b)
VC-3/VC-12
SD
HP-DEG
SF
TU-LOP, TU-AIS, LOM(VC12)

LP-UNEQ, LP-TIM, LP-EXC
SD LP-DEG
5) Non-revertive/revertive selectable
PKG protection
1) CS: 1+1 non-revertive protection
2) 2M TPS: 1:4 revertive protection
3) 34M/45M TPS: 1:1 revertive protection
4) STM-1e TPS: 1:1 revertive protection
Specification
5-3
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
Timing source protection

1) Revertive/Non-Revertive
2) Switch time: timing source selected time 200msec + timing source switch time
300msec
3) Switch criterion: SF/MSW/FSW
(Priority/Quality/SSM selectable)
5.1.7
Synchronization
Timing source
1) Internal Free run
2) Internal Holdover
3) STM-N Line (any port)
4) 2 MHz PDH Line (any slot channel 1)
5) External port: 2 Mbps or 2 MHz (75 ohms / 120 ohms)
Following table shows the basic parameter of all kinds of timing sources.
2MHz EXTCLK
Line Rate
2.048 MHz
Frame Format
NA
Line Code
NA
Impedance
75 ohms unbalanced / 120 ohms balanced
2Mbps EXTCLK
Line Rate
2.048 Mbps
Frame Format
G.704
Line Code
HDB3
Impedance
75 ohms unbalanced / 120 ohms balanced
2M PDH
Line Rate
2.048 Mbps
Frame Format
NA
Line Code
HDB3
Impedance
75 ohms unbalanced /120 ohms unbalanced
Specification
5-4
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
STM-1o
Line Rate
155.520 Mbps
Frame Format
G.707
Line Code
Impedance
STM-1e
Line Rate
155.520Mbps
Frame Format
Line Code
CMI
Impedance
75 ohm unbalanced
STM-4
Line Rate
622.080 Mbps
Frame Format
G.707
Line Code
Impedance
STM-16
Line Rate
2,488.320 Mbps
Frame Format
G.707
Line Code
Impedance
Specification
5-5
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.1.8
Performance Monitoring
PM Items
SDH PM
RST
BBE, ES, SES, OFS, UAS
MST
BBE, ES, SES, UAS, FE-BBE, FE-ES, FE-SES, FE-UAS
MSA/HPA PJE-P, PJE-N

MSP
MS-PSC, MS-PSD
HPT
LPT
Ethernet PM
LAN
ETH-DropPkts, ETH-RxAlignmentErrorFrames, ETH-RxBroadcastPkts,

ETH-RxFCSErrorFrames, ETH-RxMulticastPkts, ETH-RxOctets,
ETH-RxPkt1024toMax, ETH-RxPkt128to255, ETH-RxPkt256to511,
ETH-RxPkt512to1023, ETH-RxPkt64, ETH-RxPkt65to127, ETH-TxCollision,
ETH-TxDelayTransmissions, ETH-TxExtCollisionFrames,
ETH-TxLateCollision, ETH-TxMultiCollisionFrames, ETH-TxNUcastPkts,
ETH-TxOctets, ETH-TxSingleCollisionFrames, ETH-TxUcastPkts
WAN
ETH-DropPkts, ETH-RxAlignmentErrorFrames, ETH-RxBroadcastPkts,

ETH-RxFCSErrorFrames, ETH-RxMulticastPkts, ETH-RxOctets,
ETH-RxPkt1024toMax, ETH-RxPkt128to255, ETH-RxPkt256to511,
ETH-RxPkt512to1023, ETH-RxPkt64, ETH-RxPkt65to127,
ETH-TxNUcastPkts, ETH-TxOctets, ETH-TxUcastPkts
Encapsulation PM
GFP
GFP_RxEXIErrorPkts, GFP_RxFCSErrorPkts, GFP_RxOctets, GFP_RxPkts,

GFP_TxOctets, GFP_TxPkts
LAPS
LAPS_RxFCSErrorPkts, LAPS_RxOctet, LAPS_RxPkts, LAPS_TxOctets,

LAPS_TxPkts
Specification
5-6
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
PM register
1) 15min register
2) 1day register
NOTE:
1. 15min register capacity: 32
1day register capacity: 1
2. The guaranty performance value is referring to 2.9 Performance monitor
ofB05. FUNCTIONAL manual.
3. Sometimes CID will not show performance value, but show over flow
which means that the performance value exceeds its maximum counter
value.
TCA function
Specification
5-7
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.1.9
Fault management
Alarm Items
SDH Alarm
SPI
LOS
RST
LOF, RS-TIM
MST
MS-AIS, MS-RDI, MS-EXC, MS-DEG
MSA
AU-AIS, AU-LOP
HPC
HP-PPS-FAIL
HPT
HP-TIM, HP-UNEQ, HP-RDI, HP-EXC, HP-DEG
HPA
TU-AIS, TU-LOP, LOM, HP-PLMF
LPC
LP-PPS-FAIL
LPT
LP-TIM, LP-UNEQ, LP-RDI, LP-EXC, LP-DEG
LPA
LP-PLMF, AIS
HPOM
HP-TIM, HP-UNEQ, HP-EXC, HP-DEG, VC-AIS
LPOM
LP-TIM, LP-UNEQ, LP-EXC, LP-DEG, VC-AIS
2M
LOSAIS
SETS
LTI, CLKFAIL, REF_FAIL, CLKDRIFT
EXT CLK IN
LOS, AIS(2Mbps), LOF(2Mbps)
PKG
PKG_REMOVED, PKG_TYPE, PKG_FAIL, COM_FAIL
PORT
PORT_REMOVED, PORT_TYPE
NETWORK
LINK-FAILED, LINK_DOWN
ENVIRONMENT
HKAn
EQUIPMENT
BUS_ERROR,MEM_FAIL
Specification
5-8
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
Ethernet Alarm
LAN
WAN
DropPkts_EXC, LINK_DOWN, RxAlignmentErrorFrames_EXC,

RxFCSErrorFrames_EXC, TxCollision_EXC,
TxDelayTransmission_EXC, TxExtCollision_EXC,
TxLateCollision_EXC
CSF_LCS, CSF_LCSync, CSF_R_LCS, CSF_R_LCSync,
DropPkts_EXC, LINK_DOWN, RxAlignmentErrorFrames_EXC,
RxFCSErrorFrames_EXC, WAN_PORT_SD, WAN_PORT_SF
Encapsulation Alarm
GFP
SSF_LGS
LAPS
LAPS_FAIL
Virtual Concatenation Alarm

Virtual
Concatenation
Layer
LP-Xv-LOA, LP-Xv-LOM, LP-Xv-SQM, LP-Xv-PLM,

HP-Xv-LOA, HP-Xv-LOM, HP-Xv-SQM
Equipment alarm item

1) PKG failure
2) Bus failure (backboard bus error)
3) Memory failure
4) PKG removal
5) PKG type mismatch
Network alarm
1) link failure (LAPD, LAN)
2) access failure
Alarm severity
Critical/Major/Minor/Warning
Delay/ stretch report
Specification
5-9
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.1.10 Alarm report

LED (ALARM)
Office alarm: PM, DM, AB, AL
ACO
5.1.11 Loopback
Terminal loopback
Applicable to STM-N, 2M,
Facility loopback
Applicable to STM-N, 2M
5.1.12 HKA
Built in 8 port ( in MCP)
Alarm logic (Loop/ Open) selectable
Alarm standard
Loop: <50 ohm
Open: >20k ohm
MAX current: 100mA
5.1.13 HKC
Built in 4 ports
Control logic (Loop < 2 ohms, Open > 500 kohms) selectable
Max current/voltage: 0.3 A / 72 V
5.1.14 User interface

f interface: RS-232C
f interface is used only CID.
F interface: LAN (10 Base-T)
F interface is used by NMS and CID mutually
Specification
5-10
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.1.15 Remote access by CID

Operation response within 90 sec from any CID.
Implement through DCC function of V-NODE.
Loopback function is not available for SDH interface; is available for PDH
interface.
5.1.16 F/W and FPGA download

Performance:
PKG Name
MCP
CS
STM-16
STM-1/4
E1
FE
F/W or FPGA
FW
(SF221-0001-A01)
FPGA
(SF221-0001-F01)
FW
(SF226-0003-A01)
FPGA
(SF226-0003-F01)
FPGA
(SF226-0003-F02)
FPGA
(SF226-0003-F03)
FPGA
(SF226-0003-F05)
FW
(SF208-0007-A01)
FPGA
(SF208-0007-F01)
FPGA
(SF208-0007-F02)
Port
F
f
F
f
F
f
F
f
F
f
F
f
F
f
F
f
F
f
F
f
Cost Time
33s
280s
12s
110s
40s
330s
35s
310s
5s
25s
5s
25s
5s
25s
30s
300s
10s
85s
18s
135s
5.1.17 Data download/ data upload

Performance: Using CID and f port download data: 18 sec per NE
Using CID and f port upload data: 17 sec per NE
Using CID and F port download data: 14 sec per NE
Using CID and F port upload data: 12 sec per NE
Specification
5-11
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.1.18 Layer 2 switch

Port Line-rate: max 148,810 packets/sec
MAC Table: 10K
VLAN Table: 2K
Priority Queue: 2-level
VID Range:
port-based VLAN: 2 thru 255
802.1Q VLAN: Untaged 2 thru 255
Taged 2 thru 4094
Egress/Ingress Rate Control: 10 K/step
Max Ethernet Frame Length: 1568 (includes VID 4 bytes)
5.1.19 FE
Port Line-rate: max 148,810 packets/sec
MAC Table: 10K
VLAN Table: 2K
Priority Queue: 2-level
VID Range:
port-based VLAN: 2 thru 255
802.1Q VLAN:
Untagged 2 thru 255

Tagged 2 thru 4094
Egress/Ingress Rate Control: 10 K/step

Trunking: max 4-trunk groups
Max Ethernet Frame Length: 1568 (includes VID 4 bytes)
Max VCAT Number: VC-12-Xvx=163., VC-3-Xvx=13.
Specification
5-12
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.1.20 Security
User Authorization Management: Level 1 to Level 4
5.1.21 LOG
Event Log: max. 500 items for each event log (TCA, PPS 3000)
Command Log: max. 500 items
5.1.22 Inventory
PKG name (either from OS and package label)
PKG Code (from package label)
Serial Number (from package label)
Manufactured date (from package label)
PKG (H/W & F/W) Version (either from OS or package label)
Repair record (from package label)
Specification
5-13
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.2 Optical Signal Interface

The transmission performance between S (Sending side) and R (Receiving side)
meets the requirement of section 5 in ITU-T G.957.
5.2.1
STM-1: 155M Optical Interface

ITEM
SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal Bit Rate

Application Code
G. 707, G.958;
155520 Kbit/s
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
1261 ~ 1360 nm
1280 ~ 1335 nm
1480 ~ 1580 nm
MLM
SLM
SLM
Maximum RMS width
7.7 nm
Maximum 20 dB width
1 nm
1 nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio
30 dB
30 dB
Maximum
8 dBm
Minimum
15 dBm
5 dBm
5 dBm
8.2 dB
10 dB
10 dB
Attenuation Range
0 ~ 12 dB
10 ~ 28 dB
10 ~ 28 dB
Maximum Dispersion
96 ps/nm
N/A
N/A
Minimum Optical Return Loss of Cable

Plant at S (including any connectors)
N/A
N/A
20 dB
Maximum Discrete Reflectance between

S Point and R Point
N/A
N/A
25 dB
Minimum Sensitivity (at BER = 10E10)
28 dBm
34 dBm
34 dBm
Minimum Overload (at BER = 10E10)
8 dBm
10 dBm
10 dBm
Maximum Optical Path Penalty
1 dB
1 dB
1 dB
Maximum Reflectance of Receiver

(measured at R)
N/A
N/A
25 dB
Operating Wavelength Range

Transmitter at Reference Point S
Source Type
Spectral Characteristics
Mean Launched Power
Minimum Extinction Ratio

Main Optical Path Between S and R
Receiver at Reference Point R
Specification
5-14
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.2.2
STM-4: 622M Optical Interface

ITEM
SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal Bit Rate
G. 707, G.958; 622080 kbit/s
Application Code
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
1293 ~ 1334
nm
1274 ~ 1356
nm
1280 ~ 1335
nm
1480 ~ 1580
nm
MLM
MLM
SLM
SLM
4 nm
2.5 nm
Maximum 20 dB width
1 nm
<1 nm
30 dB
30 dB
Maximum
8 dBm
8 dBm
2 dBm
2 dBm
Minimum
15 dBm
15 dBm
3 dBm
3 dBm
8.2 dB
8.2 dB
10 dB
10 dB
Attenuation Range
0 ~ 12 dB
0 ~ 12 dB
10 ~ 24 dB
10 ~ 24 dB
Maximum Dispersion
46 ps/nm
74 ps/nm
N/A
1640 ps/nm

N/A
N/A
20 dB
24 dB

S Point and R Point
N/A
N/A
25 dB
27 dB
28 dBm
28 dBm
28 dBm
28 dBm
8 dBm
8 dBm
8 dBm
8 dBm
1 dB
1 dB
1 dB
1 dB

(measured at R)
N/A
N/A
14 dB
27 dB

Source Type
Maximum RMS width
Mean Launched Power

Specification
5-15
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.2.3
STM-16: 2.5G Optical Interface

ITEM
SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal Bit Rate

Application Code
G. 707, 2488320 kbit/s

I-16.1
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
1260~1360
nm
1260~1360
nm
1280~1335
nm
1500~1580
nm
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
4nm
Maximum 20 dB width
1 nm
1 nm
<1 nm
30 dB
30 dB
30 dB
Maximum
3 dBm
0dBm
3 dBm
3 dBm
Minimum
10dBm
5 dBm
2 dBm
2 dBm
8.2 dB
8.2 dB
8.2 dB
8.2 dB
0 ~ 7 dB
0 ~ 12 dB
10 ~ 24 dB
10 ~ 24 dB
12
N/A
N/A
1200~1600
ps/nm

24 dB
24 dB
24 dB
24 dB

S Point and R Point
27 dB
27 dB
27 dB
27 dB
18 dBm
18 dBm
27 dBm
28 dBm
3 dBm
0 dBm
9 dBm
9 dBm
1 dB
1 dB
1 dB
2 dB
27 dB
27 dB
27 dB
27 dB

Source Type
Maximum RMS width
Mean Launched Power

Attenuation Range
Maximum Dispersion

(measured at R)
Specification
5-16
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.2.4
Eye Diagram of Optical Transmission

Following diagram shows the regulations of G.957, using a filter specified in
appendix A of G.957 to measure.
1+y1
1
STM-1 interface
Scope
y2
0.5
0.15/0.85
x2/x3
0.35/0.65
y1/y2
0.20/0.80
STM-4 interface
y1
x1/x4
0.25/0.75
x2/x3
0.40/0.60
y1/y2
0.20/0.80
STM-16 interface
-y1
x1/x4
x1
x2
x3
x4
x3-x2
0.20
y1/y2
0.25/0.75
Time
Specification
5-17
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.3 Electrical Signal Interface

5.3.1
Basic Parameters of Electric Interface

Item
Bits rate
2M (E12)
34M (E31)
45M (E32)
STM-1e
2048 kbit/s
34368 kbit/s
44736 kbit/s
155520 kbit/s
50ppm
20ppm
20ppm
20ppm
HDB3
HDB3
B3ZS
CMI
G.703(10/98)
Section 9.2/9.3
G.703(10/98)
Section 11.2/11.3
G.703 (10/98):
Section 8
G.703(10/98)
Section 15.2/15.3
Bits rate tolerance

Code
Interface template
and return loss
5.3.2
2M interface
5.3.2.1 Waveform of Output Port
Item
75 interface
120 interface
Line pairs in every transmission direction
Co-axis
Symmetric
Impedance of testing load
75
120
Peak voltage of a mark
2.37 V
3V
Peak voltage of a space
0 0.237 V
0 0.3 V
Standard pulse width
244 ns
244 ns
At the center of
the pulse inter
Ratio of the amplitudes of positive and negative pulses
0.95 thru 1.05
0.95 thru 1.05
Ratio of the width of positive and negative pulse
0.95 thru 1.05
0.95 thru 1.05
G.703 Figure 15
G.703 Figure 15
Mask of the pulse
Specification
5-18
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
Pulse mask at 2048 kbit/s interface (Figure15/G.703)

5.3.2.2 Return Loss of Input Port
The attenuation of this pair should be assumed to follow a f law and the loss of a
frequency of 1024 kHz should be in the range 0 thru 6 dB.
The return loss at the input port should have the following provisional minimum
values:
Frequency (kHz)
Return Loss (dB)
51 thru 102
12
102 thru 2048
18
2048 thru 3072
14
Specification
5-19
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.3.3
34M Interface
Item
Pulse shape (rectangular when standard)
All marks of valid signal should conform to

figure 17/G.703 template in spite of the symbols
Line pairs in every transmission direction
A co-axis line pairs
Impedance of testing load
75, resistance
Nominal peak voltage value (having pulse)
1.0V
Peak voltage value (no pulse)
00.1V
Standard pulse width
14.55ns
Ratio of the amplitudes of positive and negative

pulses at the center of the pulse interval
0.95 to 1.05
Ratio of width of positive and negative pulses at

the nominal half amplitude
0.95 to 1.05
Mask of pulse
G.703 figure 17
Specification
5-20
Waveform
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
Pulse mask at the 34 368 kbit/s interface (Figure17/G.703)

5.3.3.2 Return Loss of Input Port
The attenuation of this cable should be assumed to follow approximately a
and the loss at a frequency of 17184 kHz should be in the range 0 to 12dB.
f law
The return loss at the input port should have the following provisional minimum
values:
Frequency (kHz)
Return Loss (dB)
860 thru 1720
12
1720 thru 34368
18
34368 thru 51550
14
Specification
5-21
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.3.4
45M Interface
ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Basic SPEC
Conforms to G.703 (10/98) Section8 (same as GR-499-CORE)
Bit rate
44.736 Mbit/s 20 ppm

Conforms to G.703 (10/98) Section 8.1 Table 6
Code
B3ZS
Conforms to G.703 (10/98) Section 8.1: Table 6
Frame constructor

required to meet G.752 (6M mapping) only
Conforms to GR-499-CORE (1995) Section10.5 (no frame)
Output pulse mask
G.703 (10/98) Section 8/

Table6/Fig.14 conformity
Impedance
75 5%
Connect cord
75 imbalance Coaxial cable

(GR-253-CORE Issue2 (12/95) conformity)
Transmit distance
450 feet (137.2m)

[Conforms to GR-253-CORE Issue2 (12/95)]
Pulse amplitude
0.36 V thru 0.85 V

Power level
LPF (200 MHz): 4.7 dBm thru +3.6 dBm

(225~450 feet, including cable )
or
It requires that the power in a 3 kHz 1 kHz band centered at 22368 kHz be between
1.8 dBm and +5.7 dBm. It further requires that the power in a 3 kHz 1 kHz band
centered at 44736 kHz be at least 20 dB below that at 22368 kHz.
Pulse imbalance
NA
Jitter tolerance
Conforms to G.752 (1988): Fig 4

Conforms to G.824 (03/93): Fig. 3, Table 2 (f110Hz) as well
Output jitter
Conforms to G.783 (04/97) Section 10.2.3
Mapping jitter
BPF (10 Hz thru 400 kHz): 0.40 UIp-p

BPF (30kHz thru 400 kHz):0.10 UIp-p
Conforms to G.783 (04/97) Table 10-1
(BPF: 30 kHz thru 400 kHz is in further study, according to G.783PR (10/00) Table
15-3)
Specification
5-22
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
(Continued)
ITEM
Combined jitter
SPECIFICATION
1: BPF (10 Hz thru 400 kHz): 0.40 UIp-p
2: BPF (10 Hz thru 400 kHz): 0.75 UIp-p
3: BPF (30 kHz thru 400 kHz): 0.075 UIp-p
Refer to 34M specification; G.783 (04/97) Table 10-2 conformity requires further study
1, 2 are different because of different pointer sequence
1: Fig. 10-2a), b), c) action
2: Fig. 10-2d) action
Conforms to G.783 (10/00)
Jitter transfer
Conforms to G.755 (11/88): Fig. 1
Jitter tolerance
Conforms to GR-499-CORE (12/95): Fig 7-1

Conforms to G.824 (03/93) Section 3.1.1: Fig. 3, Table 2
Parameter modify: f1 10Hz to conform both the above specification
Wander generation
Conforms to G.783 (04/97) Section 10.2.3

Conforms to G.783 PR (10/00) Section 15.2.3.3.1/15.2.3.3.2
Specification
5-23
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.3.5
STM-1 Electrical Interface

ITEM
SPECIFICATION
Pulse shape
Nominally rectangular and conforming to the

masks shown in Figures 22 and 23
Pair(s) in each direction
One coaxial pair
Test load impedance
75 ohms resistive
Peak-to-peak voltage
1 0.1 V
Rise time between 10% and 90% amplitudes

of the measured steady state amplitude
2 ns
Transition timing tolerance referred to the

mean value of the 50% amplitude points of
negative transitions
Negative transitions: 0.1 ns

Positive transitions at unit interval boundaries:
0.5 ns
Positive transitions at mid-unit intervals: 0.35 ns
Return loss
15 dB over frequency range 8 MHz to 240 MHz
Maximum peak-to-peak jitter at an output port
Refer to 4.2/G.825
The waveform of output port can be tested to G.703 reference.

T = 6.43 ns
V
0 . 60
0 . 55
0 . 50
0 . 45
0 . 40
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
1 ns
0 .1 n s
1.608 ns
0 .1 n s
1 ns
( N o te 4 )
N o m in al
z e ro
le v e l
( N o te 2 )
0.35 ns
N om in al
p u ls e
1.608 ns
0.35 ns
1 ns
0.1 n s
0 .1 n s
0 . 05
0 .0 5
1 ns
0 .4 0
0 .4 5
0 .5 0
0 .5 5
0 .6 0
1 ns
1 ns
1 .6 0 8 ns
1.608 ns
(Note 1)
(N o te 1)
T1 8 18 9 3 0 -9 2
N e g a ti ve transitions
Positive transition at mid-unit i nt e rva l
Mask of a pulse corresponding to a binary 0
Specification
5-24
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
NOTE:
1. The maximum "steady state" amplitude should not exceed the 0.55 V limit. Overshoots
and other transients are permitted to fall into the dotted area, bounded by the
amplitude levels 0.55 V and 0.6 V, provided that they do not exceed the steady state
level by more than 0.05 V.
2. For all measurements using these masks, the signal should be AC coupled, using a
capacitor of not less than 0.01 mF, to the input of the oscilloscope used for
measurements. The nominal zero level for both masks should be aligned with the
oscilloscope trace with no input signal. With the signal then applied, the vertical
position of the trace can be adjusted with the objective of meeting the limits of the
masks. Any such adjustment should be the same for both masks and should not exceed
0.05 V. This may be checked by removing the input signal again and verifying that the
trace lays within 0.05 V of the nominal zero level of the masks.
3. Each pulse in a coded pulse sequence should meet the limits of the relevant mask,
irrespective of the state of the preceding or succeeding pulses, with both pulse masks
fixed in the same relation to a common timing reference, i.e. with their nominal start
and finish edges coincident.
The masks allow for HF jitter caused by intersymbol interference in the output stage,
but not for jitter present in the timing signal associated with the source of the interface
signal.
When using an oscilloscope technique to determine pulse compliance with the mask, it
is important that successive traces of the pulses overlay in order to suppress the effects
of low frequency jitter. This can be accomplished by several techniques [e.g. a]
triggering the oscilloscope on the measured waveform or b) providing both the
oscilloscope and the pulse output circuits with the same clock signal.
4. For the purpose of these masks, the rise time and decay time should be measured
between 0.4 V and 0.4 V, and should not exceed 2 ns.
Specification
5-25
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
Mask of a pulse corresponding to a binary 1
NOTE:
1. The maximum "steady state" amplitude should not exceed the 0.55 V limit. Overshoots
and other transients are permitted to fall into the dotted area, bounded by the
amplitude levels 0.55 V and 0.6 V, provided that they do not exceed the steady state
level by more than 0.05 V.
2. For all measurements using these masks, the signal should be AC coupled, using a
capacitor of not less than 0.01 F, to the input of the oscilloscope used for
measurements. The nominal zero level for both masks should be aligned with the
oscilloscope trace with no input signal. With the signal then applied, the vertical
position of the trace can be adjusted with the objective of meeting the limits of the
masks. Any such adjustment should be the same for both masks and should not exceed
0.05 V. This may be checked by removing the input signal again and verifying that the
trace lays within 0.05 V of the nominal zero level of the masks.
Specification
5-26
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
3. Each pulse in a coded sequence should meet the limits of the relevant mask,
irrespective of the state of the preceding or succeeding pulses, with both pulse masks
fixed in the same relation to a common timing reference, i.e. with their nominal start
and finish edges coincident. The masks allow for HF jitter caused by intersymbol
interference in the output stage, but not for jitter present in the timing signal associated
with the source of the interface signal. When using an oscilloscope technique to
determine pulse compliance with the mask, it is important that successive traces of the
pulses overlay in order to suppress the effects of low frequency jitter. This can be
accomplished by several techniques [e.g. a] triggering the oscilloscope on the
measured waveform or b] providing both the oscilloscope and the pulse output circuits
with the same clock signal].
4. For the purpose of these masks, the rise time and decay time should be measured
between 0.4 V and 0.4 V, and should not exceed 2 ns.
5. The inverse pulse will have the same characteristics, noting that the timing tolerance at
the level of the negative and positive transitions are 0.1 ns and 0.5 ns respectively.
5.3.5.2 Return Loss

The attenuation of the coaxial pair should be assumed to follow an approximate f
law and to have a maximum insertion loss of 12.7 dB (for STM-1) at a frequency of
78MHz. The return loss of output port is equivalent to that of input port.
Specification
5-27
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.4 Ethernet Interface

5.4.1
10Base-T interface specification

Parameter
Criterion
Output Signal Level
2.2V-2.8V
Output Signal Waveform
ISO8802-3 Table 14-1
TP_IDL Start Output Signal Waveform
ISO8802-3 Figure14-10
Link Test Pulse Waveform
ISO8802-3 Figure14-12
Output Timing Jitter
ISO8802-3 Table 14-1
Allowable Cable Length
100m
5.4.2
100Base-T interface specification

Parameter
Specification
AOI Template
Waveform Overshoot
Criteria
ANSI X3.263-1995 : Annex J AOI Template
<5%
ANSIX3.263-1995 : 9.1.3 Waveform

Overshoot
UTP different Output
950mV Vout1050mV
Voltage (zero-peak)
Rising Time(tR) and Falling
Time(tF)
Signal amplitude symmetry
ANSI X3.263-1995 : 9.1.2.2 UTP different

Output Voltage
tR/tF; 3.0nsec to 5.0nsec
ANSI X3.263-1995 : 9.1.6 Rise/fall times
|tR-tF|=<0.5nsec
Va : 0.98 to 1.02
Va=+Vout/-Vout
ANSI X3.263-1995 : 9.1.4 Signal amplitude

symmetry
Jitter
<1.4ns
ANSI X3.263-1995 : 9.1.9 Jitter
Duty cycle distortion
<500PS (+/-250 PS)
ANSI X3.263-1995 : 9.1.8 Duty cycle
(peak-peak)
Return loss
distortion (DCD)
2MKz~30 MHz16dB
ANSI X3.263-1995 : 9.1.5 Return loss
30MHz~60MKHz(16-20
log(f/30MKz))dB
60 MKz~80MHz10dB
FLP Burst
Specification
5-28
width = 2ms(typical)
IEE802.3-2000
interval=16ms(typical)
Table 28.2.1.1.2
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.4.3
GBE interface specification

1000BASE-LX
Parameter
1000BASE-SX
62.5m
50m
10m
62.5m
50m
MMF
MMF
SMF
MMF
MMF
Transmitter Type
Unit
Longwave Laser
Shortwave Laser
1.25100ppm
1.25100ppm
GBd
1270~1355
770~860
Nm
Trise/Tfall (max;20%-80%;>830nm)
0.26
Ns
Trise/Tfall (max;20%-80%; >830nm)
0.21
Ns
0.26
Ns
RMS spectral width(max)
0.85
Nm
Average launch power(max)
-3
See footnote (a)
dBm
-9.5
dBm
-30
-30
dBm
dB
-120
-117
dB/Hz
9<CPR
dB
1.25100ppm
1.25100ppm
GBd
1270~1355
770~860
Nm
Average receive power(max)
-3
dBm
Receive sensitivity
-19
-17
dBm
Return loss(min)
12
12
dB
Signaling speed (range)

Wavelength (, range)
Trise/Tfall (max,20%-80% response time)
Average launch power(min)
-11.5
-11.5
Average launch power of OFF

transmitter(max) (b)
Extinction Rate(min)
RIN(max)
Coupled Power Ratio(CPR) (c) (d)
28<CPR
12<CPR
<40
<20
Signaling speed
Wavelength(range)
-11.0
N/A
Stressed receive sensitivity((a1) (b1)
-14.4
-12.5
-13.5
dBm
Vertical eye-closure penalty(c1)
2.60
2.60
2.20
dB
Receive electrical 3 dB upper cutoff
1500
frequency(max)
Target Distance
2~550
Type of fiber
Connector Type
2~550
1500
2~5000
2~275
MHz
2~550
Rec.G.652
Rec.G.652
SC
SC
Notes of a table: IEEE 802.3-2000
Specification
5-29
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notes of the 1000BASE-SX transmit characteristic:

a: The 1000BASE-SX launch power shall be the lesser of the class 1 safety limit
as defined by 38.7.2 or the average receive power (max) defined by Table 38-4
b: Examples of an OFF transmitter are: no power supplied to the PMD, laser
shutdown for safety conditions, activation of a transmit disable or other
optional module laser shut down conditions. During all conditions when the PMA
is powered, the ac signal (data) into the transmit port will be valid encoded
8B/10B patterns (this is a requirement to the PCS layers ) except for short
durations during system power-on-reset or diagnostics when the PMA is placed in
a loopback mode.
c: Radial overfilled launches as described in 38A.2, while they may meet CPR
ranges, should be avoided.
Notes of the 1000BASE-LX transmit characteristic:
d: Due to the dual media (single-mode and multimode) support of the LX
transmitter, fulfillment of this specification requires a single-mode fiber
offset-launch mode-conditioning patch cord described in 38.11.4 for MMF
operation. This patch cord is not used for single-mode operation.
Notes of the 1000BASE-CX and 1000BASE-LX receive characteristic:
a1: Measured with conformance test signal at TP3 (see 38.6.11) for BER=10-12 at
the eye center.
b1: Measured with a transmit signal having a 9 dB extinction ratio. If another
extinction ratio is used, the stressed receive sensitivity should be corrected for the
extinction ratio penalty.
c1: Vertical eye-closure penalty is a test condition for measuring stressed receives
sensitivity. It is not a required characteristic of the receiver.
Specification
5-30
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.5 The Jitter Index of Interface

5.5.1
Input Jitter and Wander Tolerance

5.5.1.1 PDH Interface
The input jitter and wander tolerance of PDH interface are shown below:
Interface
Maximum
Peak-Peak
Value (UIp-p)
Frequency
2048 kbit/s
34368 kbit/s
44736 kbit/s
A0
36.9
137.5
805.4
A1
1.5
1.5
5.0
A2
0.2
0.15
0.1
A3
18
34.4
f0
1.2 10 Hz
0.01Hz
1.2 105 Hz
f10
4.88 103 Hz
0.032Hz
f9
0.01 Hz
0.13Hz
f8
1.667 Hz
4.4Hz
f1
20 Hz
100 Hz
10 Hz
f2
2.4 kHz
1 kHz
600 Hz
f3
18 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
f4
100 kHz
800 kHz
400 kHz
2 1
2 1
220 1
Pseudo Random Signal
15
23
Characteristic of classic regulator
A0
slope-20dB/10
A3
A1
A2
f0
f10 f9
f8 f 1
f2 f3
f4
Jittering frequency (log)
Specification
5-31
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.5.1.2 SDH Interface

The input jitter and wander tolerance of SDH interface are shown below:
Interface
Maximum
Peak-Peak
Value
(UIp-p)
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
A0 (18 s)
2800
11200
44790
A1 (2 s)
311
1244
4977
A2 (0.25 s)
39
156
622
A3
1.5
1.5
1.5
A4
0.15
0.15
0.15
f0
1.2 105 Hz
1.2 105 Hz
1.2 105 Hz
f12
1.78 104 Hz
1.78 104 Hz
1.78 104 Hz
f11
1.6 103 Hz
1.6 103 Hz
1.6 103 Hz
f10
1.56 102 Hz
1.56 102 Hz
1.56 102 Hz
f9
0.125 Hz
0.125 Hz
0.125 Hz
f8
19.3 Hz
9.65 Hz
12.1
f1
500 Hz
1 kHz
5 kHz
f2
6.5 kHz
25 kHz
100 kHz
f3
65 kHz
250 kHz
1M Hz
f4
1.3 MHz
5 MHz
20M Hz
Frequency
A0
Slope -20dB/10
(log)
Peak-p jitter and wander
A1
A2
A3
A4
0
f0
f12 f11
f10 f9
f8 f1
Frequency ( log)
Specification
5-32
f2 f3
f4
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.5.2
Jitter Generation
5.5.2.1 PDH Interface
Frequency of band-pass filter for examination, and the maximum jitter for allowable
values in PDH network are shown below.
As to SDH equipment, the PDH interface jitter measured over a 60 second interval
shall not exceed these values. On the edge of SDH and PDH system, jitter accepts
these values.
Interface Rate
Maximum Peak-Peak
Value (UIp-p)
Frequency of
Band-pass Filter
2048 kbit/s
34368 kbit/s
44736 kbit/s
f1 thru f4
1.5
1.5
5.0
f3 thru f4
0.2
0.15
0.1
f1
20 Hz
100 Hz
10 Hz
f3
18 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
f4
100 kHz
800 kHz
400 kHz
5.5.2.2 SDH Interface

When inputting no jitters, the jitter measured at output port on SDH relay with
high-pass filter is not greater than 0.01 UIrms. While no jittering in synchronous
input port, the jitters produced at terminal equipment interface should conform to
values in the table below, for measuring time surpass 60 seconds.
Interface
Tester Filter
Maximum Peak-Peak Value (UIp-p)
STM-1e
500 Hz thru 1.3 MHz
0.50
65 kHz thru 1.3 MHz
0.075
500 Hz thru 1.3 MHz
0.50
65 kHz thru 1.3 MHz
0.10
1 kHz thru 5 MHz
0.50
250 kHz thru 5 MHz
0.10
5 kHz thru 20 MHz
0.50
1 MHz thru 20 MHz
0.10
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
Specification
5-33
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.5.3
Jitter Generation by Mapping

When PDH is mapped into SDH, a mapping jitter is generated. The testing values are
smaller than values listed in table below:
G.703 2048
kbit/s
G.703 34368
kbit/s
G.703 44736
kbit/s
50 ppm
20 ppm
20 ppm
f1
20 Hz
100 Hz
10 Hz
f3
18 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
f4
100 kHz
800 kHz
400 kHz
f1 thru f4
0.4
0.4
Further study
f3 thru f4
0.075
0.075
0.075
Tolerance
Filter
Characteristic
-20 dB/dec
Maximum Peak-Peak Value

for Mapping Jitter (UIp-p)
5.5.4
Combined Jitter and Wander

Generally, SDH system provides mapping jitter and pointer adjusting jitter whose
combinations are called combined jitter. As for combined jitter, four types of the
testing series temporarily designated by ITU-T, can basically represent number of
conditions for combined jitter.
5.5.4.1 Testing Series
Single pointer with opposite polarity:
T1
Regular single pointer adding a double pointer: T20.75s T3=2ms

T3
T2
b
NOTE: T2 and T3 are defined f only for 2M. Definition for 34M/45M is further
study.
Specification
5-34
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
Regular single pointer that leaks a pointer: T2>0.75s
T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 2*T2
c
Double pointer with opposite polarity: T3=2ms
interval>=10s
T3
T3
d
5.5.4.2 Criterion of Combined Jitter
Tolerance
G.703 2048
kbit/s
G.703 34368
kbit/s
G.703 44736
kbit/s
50 ppm
20 ppm
20 ppm
High-Through Filter
f1
20 Hz
100 Hz
10 Hz
20 dB/dec
f3
18 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
f4
100 kHz
800 kHz
400 kHz
Maximum Peak-Peak Value
f1 thru f4
0.4*
0.4/0.75
0.4/0.75
for Combined Jitter(UIp-p)
f3 thru f4
0.075
0.075
0.075
*: The extreme value 0.4 UI corresponds to pointer testing series shown in a, b

and c; the extreme value 0.75 UI corresponds to pointer testing series shown in
d, while the extreme value 0.075 UI corresponds to pointer testing series shown
in a, b, c and d.
5.5.4.3 MTIE and TDEV
MTIE and TDEV are measured through an equivalent 10 Hz, first-order, low-pass
measurement filter, at a maximum sampling time 0 of 1/30 seconds. The minimum
measurement period for TDEV is twelve times the integration period (T = 12).
Specification
5-35
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
When the SEC is in the locked mode of operation, the MTIE measured using the
synchronized clock configuration defined in Figure 1a/G.810 should have the limits
in Table 5-1, if the temperature is constant (within 1 K):
Table 5-1. Wander Generation (MTIE) with Temperature Stable
MTIE limit
Observation interval
40 ns
0.1 < 1 s
40
0.1
25.25
1 < 100 s
ns
0.2
100 < 1000 s
ns
The resultant requirement is shown by the thick solid line in Figure 5-1.
When temperature effects are included, the allowance for the total MTIE contribution
of a single SEC increases by the values in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2. Additional Wander Generation (MTIE) with Temperature Affecting
Additional MTIE allowance
0.5 ns
100 s
50 ns
> 100 s
The resultant requirements are shown by the thin solid line in Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1.
Specification
5-36
Wander Generation (MTIE)
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
When the SEC is in the locked mode of operation, the TDEV measured using the
synchronized clock configuration defined in Figure 1a/G.810 should have the limits
in Table 5-3, if the temperature is constant (within 1 K):
Table 5-3. Wander Generation (TDEV) with Temperature Stable
TDEV limit
3.2 ns
0.1 < 25 s
0.64
0.5
6.4 ns
ns
25 < 100 s
100 < 1000 s
The resultant requirements are shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2.
Wander Generation (TDEV) with Temperature Stable
Specification
5-37
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.6 External Interface

5.6.1
Orderwire
E1 OH (overhead): Handset
600 balanced
Rx: 2 dBm
Tx: 0 dBm
E2 OH (overhead): Handset
600 balanced
Rx: 2 dBm
Tx: 0 dBm
Connector: RJ-11
5.6.2
User Channel
Accessible OH: F1 or E2; one per SDH interface
Logical Interface:
64 kbit/s V.11
Contra-directional
Co-directional
Connector: RJ-45
5.6.3
Office Alarm
Accessible Output: One per equipment
Output: PM
DM
AB
AL
Type: Relay contact; Open/Loop
Maximum Current: AB/AL: 1A
PM,DM: 500 mA
Connector: RJ-45
Specification
5-38
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.6.4
Housekeeping Alarm/Control
Accessible port: Eight for Housekeeping Alarm
Four for Housekeeping Control
Type: HKA [photo-coupler], HKC [relay contact]
Open/Loop
Connector: RJ-45
Maximum Current/Voltage: (HKC) 0.5 A / 200 V
Specification
5-39
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.7 Environmental Conditions

5.7.1
Temperature
Intra-Station Range: 0 to +45C
Intra-Station Short Time: 5 ~ +50C
(within 72 consecutive hours; within 15 days a year)
Storage:
5 to +50C
Transportation: 5 to +50C
5.7.2
Humidity
Intra-Station Range: 5 to 95 %
Storage:
5 to 95 %
Transportation:
5 to 95 %
5.7.3
Vibration
Intra-Station Use:
1.5 mm/s2
2-9 Hz
5 m/s2
9-200 Hz
40 m/s2
peak
Storage:
1.5 mm/s2
2-9 Hz
2
5 m/s
9-200 Hz
40 m/s2
peak
Transportation:
3.5 mm/s2
2-9 Hz
10 m/s2
9-200 Hz
15 m/s2 200-500 Hz
300 m/s2
peak
Specification
5-40
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.8 Power Distribution

5.8.1
Power Interface
Input Voltage:
38.4 V DC thru 60V DC
Power Input:
100 ~ 350W
Protection:
Fuse (15 A DC)
Ground:
FG/BG
NOTE: FG: Frame ground; or protected ground

BG: Battery return ground
Maximum Power Supply:
Less than 350 W per system
Specification
5-41
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.8.2
Power Consumption
Total Equipment Power Consumption: 100 to 350W
PWR Board Capacity:
10A (DC)
The board consumption is shown as below:

Board
Amount
Total Power
Consumption(W)
33
66
6.6
6.6
14.7
88.2
6.8
13
88.4
S1E
9.7
10
97
STM4
7.2
13
93.6
E12
9.7
11
106.7
E31
6.4
10
64.0
E32
6.4
10
64.0
FE-2
13
13
169
FE-4
16
13
208
THR_E12W
11
TPS_E12
12
10
120
TPS_S1EW
0.75
3.75
TPS_S1EP
0.75
3.75
TPS_E3W
0.98
4.9
TPS_E3P
0.98
4.9
15
45
CS
MCP
STM16
STM1
FAN
Specification
5-42
Max Power
Consumption(W)
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.9 User Interface

5.9.1
CID Interface
Physical Layer:
f port: RS232C
F port: 10BaseT
Protocol:
TCP/IP
Connector:
f port: the pin assignment between RJ45 and D-sub 9pin

Connection:
f port: RS232C Cable (Detail refers to Chapter 8)

GND
Rx
Tx
6
Figure 5-3.
RJ45 Connector for f Port
4 5
Figure 5-4. D-sub 9-pin Connector for f Port
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
RXD-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Keep
Figure 5-5.
RJ45 Connector for F Port
Specification
5-43
F5259_B04
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.9.2
NMS
Physical Layer:
F port: 10BaseT (Half/10M)
Protocol:
TCP/IP
Connector:

Connection:
5.10Physical Specification
5.10.1 V-NODE Subrack Dimensions
Height:
487.6 mm
Width:
524.4 mm (with rack ear)
Depth:
272.3 mm
Weight:
11 Kg (with back panel and filter box, without rear panel)
NOTE:
1. Above dimension includes any projection of subrack.
2. The rearpanel means the PCB board in the back of the V-Node equipment,
and the backpanel is a steel board on the back of the V-Node equipment
subrack.
Specification
5-44
E
F5259_B03
SpectralWave V-NODE
RELEASE 2.10
RELEASE NOTES
NEC Corporation
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
Windows Me/2000/XP and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft.
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
CONTENTS
1. SUMMARY
1-1
2. VERSION INFORMATION
2-1
2.1 Hardware ........................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1
SUBRACK .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2
D_INF Package ...................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3
P_INF Package ...................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.4
CS Package ........................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.5
MCP Package ........................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.6
STM-16 Package.................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.7
STM-1/4 Package................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.8
S1E Package.......................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.9
E12A Package ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.10 E12B Package ....................................................................................... 2-3

2.1.11 E31 Package .......................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.12 E32 Package .......................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.13 FE_2 Package........................................................................................ 2-3
2.1.14 FE_4 Package........................................................................................ 2-4
2.1.15 STM-16 Optical Modules ...................................................................... 2-4
2.1.16 STM-1/4 Optical Modules ..................................................................... 2-4
2.1.17 Extension clock module (2 MHz, 120 ohms) ...................................... 2-4
2.1.18 TPS_E12W Package.............................................................................. 2-5
2.1.19 TPS_E12P Package............................................................................... 2-5
2.1.20 TPS _E3 Package .................................................................................. 2-5
2.1.21 TPS _S1E Package................................................................................ 2-5
2.1.22 THR_E12 Package................................................................................. 2-5
2.1.23 FAN Package ......................................................................................... 2-5
2.1.24 MCP Package (FPGA) ........................................................................... 2-5
2.1.25 CS Package (FPGA and EPLD) ............................................................ 2-6
2.1.26 FE Package (FPGA and EPLD) ............................................................ 2-6
2.1.27 STM-16 Package (EPLD)....................................................................... 2-6
2.1.28 STM-1/4 Package (EPLD)...................................................................... 2-6
2.1.29 S1E Package (EPLD)............................................................................. 2-6
Contents
i
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
2.1.30 E12 Package (EPLD) ............................................................................. 2-7

2.1.31 E31 Package (EPLD) ............................................................................. 2-7
2.1.32 E32 Package (EPLD) ............................................................................. 2-7
2.1.33 TPS-S1E Package (EPLD) .................................................................... 2-7
2.1.34 TPS-E12 Package (EPLD)..................................................................... 2-7
2.1.35 TPS-E3 Package (EPLD)....................................................................... 2-7
2.2 Firmware............................................................................................ 2-8

2.2.1
MCP Package ........................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.2
CS Package ........................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.3
FE Package............................................................................................ 2-8
2.3 CID Application Software ................................................................. 2-9

2.3.1
Version ................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.2
Operating System ................................................................................. 2-9
3. FEATURES
3-1
4. PRECAUTIONS
4-1
4.1 Boards and Modules ........................................................................ 4-1

4.2 CID and CID Operations ................................................................... 4-1
Contents
ii
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
1. SUMMARY
This document provides information regarding the SpectralWave V-NODE Release
2.10.
This information includes some restrictions that should be considered, in order to
avoid causing failures while V-NODE is in service.
Summary
1-1
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
2. VERSION INFORMATION
This section provides version information for hardware, firmware and CID application
software used in V-NODE Release 2.10.
2.1 Hardware
2.1.1
SUBRACK
Name
Code
SUBRACK
GRP
Note
PKG Version
Old Subrack and old BWB
V01A
0A00
Old Subrack and new BWB
V02A
(NOTE1)
New Subrack and old BWB
V01B
New Subrack and new BWB
V02B
Old Subrack and old BWB
V01A
0B00
Old Subrack and new BWB
V02A
(NOTE2)
New Subrack and old BWB
V01B
New Subrack and new BWB
V02B
E32-145-NA940
NOTE1: The angle size of this group subrack (0A00) is 23 inches.

NOTE2: The angle size of this group subrack (0B00) is 19 inches.
2.1.2
D_INF Package
Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
D_INF
E32-214-UD011
0A00
Data through interface unit
V01A
GRP
Note
PKG Version
0A00
Power and clock interface unit
V01A
0A10

(EMC improvement)
V02A
2.1.3
P_INF Package
Name
Code
P_INF
E32-014-UD006
Version Information
2-1
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
2.1.4
CS Package
Name
CS
2.1.5
Code
GRP
E32-465-UD012
0A00
E32-465-UD012
0B00
E32-465-UD012
0C00
E32-465-UD012
0D00
E32-465-UD012
0E00
Note
cross-connect and synchronization
unit (without clock)
unit (with 2 MHz clock 75 ohms)
unit (with 2 Mbps clock 75 ohms)
unit (with 2 MHz clock 120 ohms)
unit (with 2 Mbps clock 120ohms)
V03CX
V03CX
V03CX
V03CX
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
E32-001-UD010
0A00
message communication
processor (with V11)
V03BX
E32-001-UD010
0B00
message communication
processor (with RS232C)
V03BX
MCP
STM-16 Package
Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
STM-16
E32-852-UD030
0A00
2.5G single Optical interface

unit without any optical
module
V01A
2.1.7
STM-1/4 Package
Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
STM-1/4
E32-852-UD031
0A00
155/622M Optical interface

unit without any optical
module
V01A
Version Information
2-2
V03CX
MCP Package
Name
2.1.6
PKG Version
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
2.1.8
S1E Package
Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
S1E
E32-852-UD014
0A00
155M dual electrical interface

unit
V01A
2.1.9
E12A Package
Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
E12A
E32-484-UD017
0A00
2M interface unit (75 ohms)
V01A
2.1.10 E12B Package

Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
E12B
E32-484-UD017
0B00
2M interface unit (120 ohms)
V01A
GRP
Note
PKG Version
2.1.11 E31 Package

Name
Code
E31
E32-484-UD015
0A00
34M interface unit
V01A
2.1.12 E32 Package

Name
Code
E32
E32-484-UD016
GRP
0A00
Note
45M interface unit
PKG Version
V01A
2.1.13 FE_2 Package

Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
FE_2
E32-484-UD018
0A00
FE interface unit (6LAN,

2WAN)
V01AX
Version Information
2-3
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
2.1.14 FE_4 Package

Name
Code
GRP
FE_4
E32-484-UD019
0A00
Note
FE interface unit (6LAN,
4WAN)
PKG Version
V01AX
2.1.15 STM-16 Optical Modules

Name
STM-16(see
NOTE)
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
E32-852-J9287
0A00
STM-16 interface unit (S-16.1)
V01A
E32-852-J9287
0B00
STM-16 interface unit (L-16.1)
V01A
E32-852-J9287
0C00
V01A
E32-852-J9287
0D00
STM-16 interface unit (I-16.1)
V01A
NOTE: Optical module supports hot swap.
2.1.16 STM-1/4 Optical Modules

Name
STM-1/4(see
NOTE)
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
E32-852-J9331
0A00
V01A
E32-852-J9331
0B00
V01A
E32-852-J9331
0C00
V01A
E32-852-J9332
0A00
V01A
E32-852-J9332
0B00
V01A
E32-852-J9332
0C00
V01A
NOTE: STM-1 and STM-4 only differ in optical module. STM-1 can be upgraded to STM-4
by changing its optical module.
2.1.17 Extension clock module (2 MHz, 120 ohms)

Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
E32-484-J9333
0A00
Extension clock Module

(2MHz,120ohms)
V01A
E32-484-J9333
0B00
Extension clock Module

(2Mbit/s,120ohms)
V01A
E32-484-J9333
0C00
Extension clock module

(2MHz,75ohms)
V01A
E32-484-J9333
0D00
Extension clock module

(2Mbit/s,75ohms)
V01A
CLK SUB
Version Information
2-4
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
2.1.18 TPS_E12W Package

Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
TPS_E12W
E32-112-UD028
0A00
2M TPS unit (for work slot)
V01A
2.1.19 TPS_E12P Package

Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
TPS_E12P
E32-112-UD029
0A00
2M TPS unit (for protection

slot)
V01A
2.1.20 TPS _E3 Package

Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
TPS_E3
E32-112-UD026
0A00
34M/45M TPS unit
V01A
2.1.21 TPS _S1E Package

Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
TPS_S1E
E32-112-UD025
0A00
155M TPS Unit
V01A
2.1.22 THR_E12 Package

Name
Code
GRP
Note
PKG Version
THR_E12
E32-214-UD033
0A00
2M through unit
V01A
Note
PKG Version
FAN
V01A
FAN (for new subrack)
V02A
2.1.23 FAN Package

Name
Code
GRP
FAN
E32-004-UD032
0A00
2.1.24 MCP Package (FPGA)

PKG Name
Type
ROM Type
Version
MCP
FPGA
Flash ROM
0.14
Note
File name: SF221-0001-F01014.ups
Version Information
2-5
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
2.1.25 CS Package (FPGA and EPLD)

PKG Name
CS
Type
FPGA
EPLD
ROM Type
Version
Flash ROM
Note
0.25
0.15
0.21
0.05
0.13
0.04
File name: SF226-0003-E01004.jed
2.1.26 FE Package (FPGA and EPLD)

PKG Name
FE
Type
ROM Type
Version
Note
EPLD
0.04
FPGA
Flash ROM
0.07
4.01
2.1.27 STM-16 Package (EPLD)

PKG Name
Type
ROM Type
Version
STM-16
EPLD
Flash ROM
0.05
Note
2.1.28 STM-1/4 Package (EPLD)

PKG Name
Type
ROM Type
Version
STM-1/4
EPLD
Flash ROM
0.05
Note
2.1.29 S1E Package (EPLD)

PKG Name
Type
ROM Type
Version
S1E
EPLD
Flash ROM
0.05
Version Information
2-6
Note
File name:SF212-0002-E01005.jed
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
2.1.30 E12 Package (EPLD)

PKG Name
Type
ROM Type
Version
E12
EPLD
Flash ROM
0.05
Note

PKG Name
Type
ROM Type
Version
E31
EPLD
Flash ROM
0.07
Note

PKG Name
Type
ROM Type
Version
E32
EPLD
Flash ROM
0.07
Note
2.1.33 TPS-S1E Package (EPLD)

PKG Name
Type
ROM Type
Version
TPS-S1E
EPLD
Flash ROM
0.04
Note
2.1.34 TPS-E12 Package (EPLD)

PKG Name
Type
ROM Type
Version
TPS-E12
EPLD
0.03
Note
2.1.35 TPS-E3 Package (EPLD)

PKG Name
Type
ROM Type
Version
TPS-E3
EPLD
0.04
Note
Version Information
2-7
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
2.2 Firmware
Following are the newly supported packages for Release 2.10.
2.2.1
MCP Package
PKG Name S/W Type

MCP
2.2.2
APL
2.2.3
APL
APL
Version Information
2-8
Note
Flash ROM
2.53
File name:
SF221-0001-A01253.ups
ROM Type
S/W Version
Note
Flash ROM
2.60
File name:
SF226-0003-A01260.ups
ROM Type
S/W Version
Note
Flash ROM
2.06
File name:
SF208-0007-A01206.ups
FE Package
PKG Name S/W Type

FE
S/W Version
CS Package
PKG Name S/W Type

CS
ROM Type
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
2.3 CID Application Software

2.3.1
Version
Following version is the appropriate CID for Release 2.10.

Name
Code
S/W Version
Note
CID
E32-006-FB749-0A00
7.11
CID Application S/W for Release

2.10
2.3.2
Operating System
CID application software for this release of V-NODE runs on the following operating
system(OS is supported only English version. the system must support TCP/IP protocol.):
Windows 98
Windows 2000
Windows NTwith NT 4.0, Service Pack 6a or later version
Windows XP
Version Information
2-9
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
3. FEATURES
This section provides information regarding operation setup/configuration, mode and
functions supported by V-NODE Release 2.10.
Function
Category
SDH
Interface
PDH
Release
Detail Item
Remark
STM-1o
S1.1/L1.1/L1.2
STM-1e
STM-4
S4.1/L4.1/L4.2
STM-16
S16.1/L16.1/L16.2
E12(2M)
75ohm/120ohm
E31(34M)
E32(45M)
FE_2
2 WAN ports
FE_4
4 WAN ports
STM-1o
STM-1e
STM-4
STM-16
2M
34M
45M
EXT CLK
2 MHz
EXT CLK
2 Mbps
STM-4
S4.1/L4.1/L4.2
STM-16
S16.1/L16.1/L16.2
E12(2M)
75 ohms / 120 ohms
2.00
Note
LAN
SDH
Timing
PDH
Interface
Others
PDH
Features
3-1
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
Function
Category
Detail Item
Remark
Release
Note
2.00
f
RS232C
LAN
LAN
DCCr D1-D3
CID
NMS
Management
DCCm
Interface
D4-D12
Routing
Level
Capacity
Cross Connect
Mode
Line Protection
Path Protection
Features
3-2
Default
Routing
RIP Stop
Static
Routing
RIP V1
VC12
VC3
VC4
152 x 152
96 x 96
2016 x 2016
Add/Drop
1way/2way
PPS
Through
Hairpin
Multicast
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
SNC/N
SNC/I
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
Function
Category
Detail Item
Remark
Release
Note
2.00
E12(2M)
E31/E32
TPS
(34M/45M)
S1E
(STM-1e)
Hardware
protection
Security
Timing Source
Protection
CS
Power
User ID
4 levels
Password
SSM
except EXT CLK
SSM
Priority
Holdover
Squelch
Terminal
STM-16/4/1o 1+0 TERM
Terminal
Linear BUS
STM-16/4/1o 1+0 ADM
Linear BUS
Single Ring
Multi Ring
Holdover
Squelch
Terminal
Terminal
Linear BUS
STM-16/4/1o 1+0 ADM
Linear BUS
CID
Linear
Network
Configuration
Star
Ring
Network
Configuration
Linear
Features
3-3
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
Function
Category
Detail Item
Remark
Release
Note
2.00
Alarm
Current
History
Mask
HKA
Port 1-8
Output
PM/DM/AB/AL
Current
15min/24h
History
15min/24h
TCA
Overflow
All Call
Group Call
Selective Call
Event
Command
STM-1o
Aggregate
STM-1o
Tributary
STM-1e
Aggregate
STM-1e
Tributary
STM-4
Aggregate
STM-4
Tributary
STM-16
Aggregate
STM-16
Tributary
2M
34M
45M
PM
Order Wire
Maintenance
Log
Loopback
Features
3-4
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
Function
Category
Loopback
Release
Detail Item
Remark
STM-1o
Aggregate
STM-1o
Tributary
STM-4
Aggregate
STM-4
Tributary
STM-16
Aggregate
STM-16
Tributary
2M
APS Switch
PPS Switch
T/S Switch
HKC
ALS
TPS Switch
H/W Switch
Local
f port (CID)
Local
F port (CID, NMS)
Remote
F port (NMS)
Local
f port (CID)
Local
F port (CID, NMS)
Remote
F port (NMS)
Local
f port (CID)
Local
F port (CID, NMS)
Remote
F port (NMS)
2.00
Note
Maintenance
Control
Firmware
Download
Data
Download
Utility
Data
Upload
Time
Setting
NE Reset
Features
3-5
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
Function
Category
Detail Item
Remark
Release
Note
2.00
Maintenance
Control
Firmware
Download
Data
Download
Utility
Data
Upload
APS Switch
PPS Switch
T/S Switch
HKC
ALS
TPS Switch
H/W Switch
Local
f port (CID)
Local
F port (CID, NMS)
Remote
F port (NMS)
Local
f port (CID)
Local
F port (CID, NMS)
Remote
F port (NMS)
Local
f port (CID)
Local
F port (CID, NMS)
Remote
F port (NMS)
Time
Setting
NE Reset
Features
3-6
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
4. PRECAUTIONS
This section provides guidelines and restrictions regarding V-Node equipment operation.
Improper equipment operation may cause damage to the traffic and/or equipment.
In order to use V-Node equipment at its best performance, all information provided here must
be read through and fully understood.
4.1 Boards and Modules

(1) If the power LEDs of the STM-1/4, STM-16 and E12boards do not blink but stay on,
the CS board should be disengaged and re- inserted again. This state may occur if the
FPGA has failed to be downloaded to the equipment.
(2) If a PCB should be placed on the left of the power board, install it before the power
board; otherwise, the front cover of the power board may be interfered with the left
side PCB. In this case, the self screw (PEM) of left side PCB is not fixed to the
subrack.
(3) Installing/Removing the power board on the right side of subrack may be complicated,
since its handle is located near the wall of the subrack.
(4) The self screw (PEM) of the power board on the left side of subrack is not easy to
turn.
(5) In the power board, the CLK connecter and Fuse may be interfered for each other.
(6) The location of ESD caution label is on top of the V-Node subrack.
(7) In an MSPring, when you pull out an optical interface unit which is adding or
dropping service, the service could be switched from the working path to protect path.
However, if you pull out or insert this unit slowly, the switch time could exceed
standard.
(8) For SFP modules, make sure dont touch the interface pins directly by hand.
4.2 CID and CID Operations

(1) If Data Synchronization failure is detected, the target data should be sent out again.
If this operation fails repeatedly, check whether the FE BORAD works properly.
Precautions
4-1
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
(2) Under the following alarm condition, switching operation may require more than
50ms to be carried out: HP-EXC (STM16), HP-DEG (STM16), LP-EXC, LP-DEG,
HP-UNEQ (STM1/4).
(3) TU LOM cannot be the trigger for TU-12 PPS.
(4) For this release of F/W, PDH port cannot be specified as PPS source point.
(5) This release of F/W does not detect the LP_PPS_FAIL where the PPS is configured
for SDH to/from SDH or for FE to/from SDH.
(6) The FE BORAD does not support alarm filter for the upper section alarm in AGG
BORAD such as STM-N.
(7) The version switching of FPGA on all boards does not be supported.
(8) Because the service board FPGA saved in two CS boards, if FPGA requires the
upgrade, upgrade the master CS first, then switch the two CS boards, lastly, upgrade
the remaining one.
(9) When upgrade the FPGA or F/W of CS boards using cutover time mode, make sure
that the cutover time of the two CS boards are different, and the difference should be
not less than 5mins best.
(10) It maybe leads to COMMUNICATE_FAIL alarm that inserting CS board while
another CS board runs in the normal condition.
(11) Where the installed CS board runs in the normal condition, execute the switch test
command before inserting another CS board to another slot, in order to avoid causing
the switching error during the slave board is powered up.
(12) While CS switch occurring, it maybe leads to B2 error on optical boards and then
PM MS-DEG on opposite terminals. Since MS-DEG is the switch condition of
MSPring, so the program enter into switch protocol. For the emerging time of B2 and
MS-DEG are both very short, the program detect that the main service path is
recovered before the switch occurring, so the program come into the process of WTR.
Overview there arent any switch occurring, but the extra service path would be
broken off during WTR.
(13) While the busy lamp on a board lights, do not remove or power off the board. The
data may be lost.
(14) The alarm delay time may not be accurate if more than certain numbers of alarms
exist for multiple boards. For the state less than 200 alarms from less than 5 boards
(with CPU), the delay time is 500ms. If the condition exceeds this state, the delay time
may stretch within 2 seconds.
Features
4-2
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
(15) When traffic on E31/E32 board is switch to protect board, make the protect board
power off, the traffic would be recovered, but the recover time maybe longer than
50ms, the longest is 2s.
(16) When install and inset a new E32 board, PKG_TYPE alarm will be reported. But
after upgrade the FPGA of the E32 board, the alarm disappear.
(17) The FE board may lose the frames when its F/W is reset.
(18) STP is not supported for the uni-directional traffic.
(19) Changing the state for enable/disable LCAS protocol may lose the packet.
(20) For LCAS in the uni-directional configuration, if the speed for one of directions is
higher than 100M, and that of the other is lower than 100M, the higher rate direction
may not reach its line rate.
(21) Switching between the uni-directional and bi-directional on the working side of the
LCAS mode may lose the packet.
(22) The FE board does not support loop back functions.
(23) For the FE board, the PM counter cannot be reset by selecting an item. The counter
reset is carried out for all the items at a time.
(24) MCP and FE boards do not provide H/W reset button; use S/W reset by CID.
(25) For CS boards, CID retrieves the CS clock status from the online side only.
(26) This release of V-Node does not support OW protection function under MSP.
(27) For E1 boards, loopback function is available for the board in working side. If TPS
occurs where the E12 board has been switched to its protection side, LPBK check
label do not appear on the panel.
(28) CID does not retrieve and display the current alarm status automatically. The display
should be updated occasionally by retrieving the current alarms.
(29) When use the CID to configure the switch command (the corresponding functions
include PPS, MSP and BLSR), please pay attention, the system only support one
switch command at one time. For instance, if FSW command is performed, and then
modify the switch command as MSW, FSW command will be cleared at once.
(30) When you installed two CS units into the V-Node subrack, and registered only one
unit in the CID, for example: slot#9, and then pulled out the unit of slot#9, the service
will be switched to slot#8.
(31) The PPI-AIS of E31/E32 is not supported.
(32) At link aggregation mode, this isnt protection, which means: if the status of one port
Precautions
4-3
F5259_B03
RELEASE NOTES
is link down, the Ethernet frames distributed to the port cant be distributed to
another port again.
(33) There are two error times when CSs PKG protection switching.
(34) For STM-16 PKG, when J1 received value differs from an expected value, HP_RDI
will be sent to far end even if J1 trace message is disable.
(35) When MSP is used, if the value of J0 Trace is set as work line, the same value as
work line will be set as protection line.
(36) In Operation Log of CID, the sort function is not supported.
(37) RINGSW-FAIL alarm isn't supported in this version.
(38) Only online CS is confirmed H/W version.
Features
4-4
F5259_B07
SpectralWave V-NODE
STM16/STM4/STM1 Multiplexer
RELEASE 2.10
UNIT INSTALLATION
NEC Corporation
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION

1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
CONTENTS
1. SUMMARY
1-2
2. PACKAGE DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION
2-1
3. BOARDS, MODULES DESCRIPTIONS
3-1
3.1 MCP..................................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1
Features ................................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.2
Functional Description and Block Diagram ....................................... 3-3
3.1.3
Physical Description............................................................................. 3-4
3.1.4
Controls and Indicators........................................................................ 3-4
3.1.5
Strap Settings........................................................................................ 3-6
3.2 P_INF .................................................................................................. 3-8

3.2.1
Features ................................................................................................. 3-8
3.2.2
Functional Description and Block Diagram ....................................... 3-8
3.2.3
Physical Description............................................................................. 3-8
3.2.4
Controls and Indicators........................................................................ 3-9
3.2.5
Strap Settings........................................................................................ 3-9
3.3 CS...................................................................................................... 3-10

3.3.1
Features ............................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.2
Functional Description and Block Diagram ......................................3-11
3.3.3
physical Description........................................................................... 3-12
3.3.4
Controls and Indicators...................................................................... 3-12
3.3.5
Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-14
3.4 STM16 ............................................................................................... 3-20

3.4.1
Features ............................................................................................... 3-20
3.4.2
Functional Description and Block Diagram ..................................... 3-20
3.4.3
Physical Description........................................................................... 3-21
3.4.4
3.4.5
Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-24
3.5 STM1/4 .............................................................................................. 3-25

3.5.1
Features ............................................................................................... 3-25
3.5.2
CONTENTS
-i-
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-28
3.6 S1E.................................................................................................... 3-30

3.6.1
Features ............................................................................................... 3-30
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-33
3.7 E12 .................................................................................................... 3-35

3.7.1
Features ............................................................................................... 3-35
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
3.7.5
Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-38
3.8 THR_E12W ....................................................................................... 3-39

3.8.1
Features ............................................................................................... 3-39
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-40
3.9 E31/E32............................................................................................. 3-41

3.9.1
Features ............................................................................................... 3-41
3.9.2
3.9.3
3.9.4
3.9.5
Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-44
3.10 FE ...................................................................................................... 3-46

3.10.1 Features ............................................................................................... 3-46
3.10.2 Functional Description and Block Diagram ..................................... 3-47
3.10.3 Physical Description........................................................................... 3-48
3.10.4 Controls and Indicators...................................................................... 3-48
3.10.5 Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-50
3.11 TPS_S1E ........................................................................................... 3-52

3.11.1 Features ............................................................................................... 3-52
CONTENTS
-ii-
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION

3.11.5 Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-55
3.12 TPS_E12 ........................................................................................... 3-56

3.12.1 Features ............................................................................................... 3-56
3.12.5 Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-59
3.13 TPS_E3 ............................................................................................. 3-60

3.13.1 Features ............................................................................................... 3-60
3.13.5 Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-63
3.14 D_INF ................................................................................................ 3-65

3.14.1 Features ............................................................................................... 3-65
3.14.5 Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-66
3.15 FAN ................................................................................................... 3-67

3.15.1 Features ............................................................................................... 3-67
3.15.5 Strap Settings...................................................................................... 3-68
4. BOARDS INSTALLATION
4-1
4.1 Install Board To Subrack................................................................... 4-2

4.2 Extract Board ..................................................................................... 4-4
4.3 Install or Replace FAN Board............................................................ 4-6
4.3.1
Procedure .............................................................................................. 4-6
4.3.2
Cleaning of the FAN.............................................................................. 4-6
4.3.3
Cleaning of the Air Filter ...................................................................... 4-7
CONTENTS
-iii-
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
1. SUMMARY
This manual provides the following information:
Description on the boards, and modules.
Physical information including strap settings.
Install/Remove boards.
CONTENTS
-1-1-
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
2. PACKAGE DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION

The V-Node consists of one MCP, two P_INF, two CS, three FAN and some interface boards.
Following shows the detail description of these boards:
Name
Function
MCP
System control and communication
P_INF
CS
FAN
Cross-connect + timing source unit

FAN
STM16
1* STM16 optical interface and SDH Signal termination
STM1/4
1* STM4 or 2*STM1 optical interface and SDH Signal termination
S1E
2*STM-1electrical interface and SDH Signal
E12
32*2M PDH signal to/from VC-12 SDH signal mapping/demaping
E31
E32
FE_2
6*10/100M bit Ethernet (2 WAN)
FE_4
6*10/100M bit Ethernet (4 WAN)
TPS_E12W
2M TPS unit (for work slot)
TPS_E12P
2M TPS unit (for protection slot)
TPS_E3W
34M/45M TPS unit (for work slot)
TPS_E3P
34M/45M TPS unit (for protection slot)
TPS_S1EW
S1E TPS unit (for work slot)
TPS_S1EP
S1E TPS unit (for protection slot)
THR_E12W
D_INF
termination
2M through unit
Data through interface unit ( 6 ports )
Package description and installation

2-1
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3. BOARDS, MODULES DESCRIPTIONS

This section provides the following information:
boards / module identification
List of each parts features
Physical description of a package and an illustration of the physical layout
Strap settings
Boards, Modules Descriptions

3-1
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.1 MCP
The MCP board consist management and communication module, orderwire module,
overhead module, and user interface module.
3.1.1
Features
MCP module
1.
Exchange the data with the board which has CPU.
2.
Exchange the data with EMS or CID via F/f port.
3.
External alarm input and control output
4.
Real time clock function.
5.
ECC function.
6.
Data storage
Orderwire module
1.
Digit accumulation function.
2.
Signaling process function.
3.
Signaling tone and prompt tone
4.
Call forwarding, belling and communicating function, etc.
Overhead function
1.
Extract and insert overhead
2.
Forward and terminate the overhead
3.
Change the overhead data interface
User interface:
1.
F/f interface: one F interface and one f interface. F port is Ethernet interface;
f port is RS232 interface whose connector is RJ-45 type.
2.
Two wire telephone interface: orderwire interface, it can support 40 paths of

communication for E1 and E2 whose connector is RJ-11.
3.
Alarm input/output interface: provide 8 paths of both alarm input and output,
which connect to the backboard.
4.
Monitor interface: debug interface, RS232 voltage, and RJ-45 connector.

3-2
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.1.2
Functional Description and Block Diagram

The MCP board consist management and communication module, orderwire module,
overhead module, and user interface module. The management and communication
module is responsible for the management function, communication function with
the network management, communication function with the boards in this NE, and
communication among NEs via ECC. It receives the command from the network
management, and sends it to the relative board to executive, and collects the
information from this NE, and reports it to the network management, if the received
command doesnt belong to itself, it would be forwarded to the next NE. The order
wire block is used for the order wire telephone communication among the NEs. The
overhead block is in charge of the extraction, insertion and termination of the
overhead. The user interface block provides many kinds of user interface.
FLASH
CPU
OH process
SDRAM
F port
OW
port
DATA
port
f port
Power
HDLC

3-3
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.1.3
Physical Description
The board consists of an epoxy-glass printed circuit board (PCB). One side of the
PCB has multi-pin connectors that plug into the shelf backplane.
3.1.4
Controls and Indicators

The view of MCP board is shown below:
Figure 3-1.

3-4
View of MCP
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
MCP has the following controls and indicators.

PWR :LED indicators (green)
FAIL :LED indicators (red)
OW :LED indicators (yellow)
BUSY :LED indicators (yellow)
ACO,RESET button
6+1 RJ-45 interface (see NOTE)
One RJ-11 interface (OW) (see NOTE)
NOTE: The detail decibel of MCP board interface refer to B08_Cable section
6.2 MCP board Connectors.
Table 3-1. LED condition on front panel
Name
STATUS
Blink
DESCRIBE
CONTROL
Normal Operation
The period between power
on and excute command
Abnormal operation
On
PWR
FW
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal operation
FAIL
OW
BUSY
On
There is some alarm in the NE
Off
There is no any alarm in the NE
Blink
Calling /Be Called status
On
Off-hook or Line busy status
Off
Free
On
Off
Flashrom burning or FPGA

downloading
MCP synchronize database
FW and HW
OW and FPGA
FW
Normal Operation
Button descibel
ACO button means: Alarm cut off.
Reset button means: reset MCP board.

3-5
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.1.5
Strap Settings
BIT
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
Default setting
BIT
BIT
ON
Default strap settings of Switch S1 are shown below:
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Setting
On (offline)
Off (online)
On (Download)
Off (Upload)
Bit7
Bit8
NOTE:
On(Force Default)
Off(Normal)
On(Backup)
Off(Main)
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Let the configured data of CS board as the central
Configure the data of MCP board when there is no CS board
Let the configured data of MCP as the central, and then send
it to CS board.
Take effect the configured data of CS board and let it as the
central, then upload it to the MCP board.
The data of flash recovered to default configuration forcibly.
User configures the data.
FW work in backup area (FW can judge it automatically)
FW work in main area (FW can judge it automatically)
Switch S1 is only used for factory adjustment. Never change its default
setting.

3-6
Mean
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
Default setting
3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
BIT
ON
BIT
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NOTE:
1) Switch S751 is used for user adjustment. You can change its default
position according to you need.
2) Switch S751 only use Bit1~Bit6, and both the Bit7 and Bit8 are not be used.
Bit1~Bit6 control the channel1~channel6 on D_INF board respectively.
The detail description of the configurations are shown as below:
Channel1 co-direction
contra-direction
contra-direction
contra-direction
contra-direction
contra-direction
contra-direction
BIT5
BIT6
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

3-7
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.2 P_INF
3.2.1
Features
Provide -48V/-60V power for V-Node.
Provide 2M EXT CLK I/O interface.
3.2.2

P_INF board provides one path of 2M EXT CLK I/O interface and -48V power
interface, The Power includes EMI wave filter, overcurrent protection, power
indication (light on :-48 is working normally).
2M External clock EXT CLK
connector
( DB9)
- 48 V
PGND
- 48 V GND
Power
connect
plug
EMI
wave
filter
Switch
FU
SE
Rear
board
connector
Front of
power board
Indictor
Front of power board
3.2.3

3-8
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.2.4

P_INF boards have no any control and indicator. The view of P_INF board is shown
below:
Figure 3-2.
3.2.5
The view of P_INF board
Strap Settings
P_INF board has no any strap.

3-9
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.3 CS
This board carries out the functions such as the service cross-connection, clock
process, management and control, and warm switch protection, etc.
3.3.1
Features
The main functions:
1.
Access the LVDS bus
2.
96*96 VC-3 low order cross-connection
3.
152*152 VC-4 high order cross-connection
4.
2016*2016 VC-12 low order cross-connection
5.
Switch control for the TPS board.
6.
Detection for the service cross-connection, and warm switch protection

Clock process
1.
Clock phase locking, keeping and fixed oscillating; the clock sources switches.
2.
Clock leading out
3.
SSM processing
4.
System clock source
5.
Clock detection and warm switch protection

CPU management and control
1.
Management and control for the board without CPU
2.
Management and control for itself.
3. Exchange the data with MCP

4.
Exchange the data between the cross-connection boards, and warm switch
protection for the board without CPU
Switch protection
1.
Detect the board working state, and control protection switch.
2.
Protection for both the system and the working board when insert or pull out the
board.
3.
Reports switch information and switch according to the command.
4.
Service cross-connection.

3-10
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.3.2
FLASH
Clock Module
CPU
A/D BUS
Time
Source
SDRAM
Control
Add
BUS
DROP
BUS
VC4
Cross Connect
VC3/VC12
Cross Connect
Figure 3-3.
Power
CS board function diagram

3-11
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.3.3
physical Description
3.3.4

The view of CS board is shown below:
Figure 3-4.

3-12
View of CS board
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
CS board has the following controls and indicators.

ONLINE : LED indicators (green)
BUSY :LED indicators (yellow)
RESET : reset button
RS232,100Base-T :2 RJ-45 interface
NOTE: The detail decibel of CS board interface refer to B08_Cable section
6.5 CS board Connectors.
LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR
DESCRIBE
Control
Normal operation
The period between power on and
normal operation
FW
Abnormal
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
FAIL
ONLINE
BUSY
On
Board failure
Off
Normal operation
On
In working mode
Off
In standby mode
On
HW
Flashrom burning or FPGA

downloading
Off
FW and HW
FW
Normal Operation
Button descibel
Reset button means: reset CS board.

3-13
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.3.5
Strap Settings
CS board strap setting:

3-14
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
EXTCLK module strap setting:

3-15
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.3.5.1 Jumper setting for data interface

The jumper setting in CS board:
These jumpers are only used for factory adjustment; therefore there is no need for
users to adjust them. Note never change these jumpers settings.
STRAP
DEFAULT SETTING
XJ2
XJ3
2 3
NOTE: XJ2, XJ3, XJ9, XJ10
are used for MON port

to communicate with
CPU.
XJ9
XJ10
The jumper setting of the XJ2, XJ3, XJ9, XJ10:

JUMPER
RS-232 interface used for
communication with CPU
RS-232 interface used for
communication with clock
XJ2
XJ3
Short pin 2,3 Short pin 2,3
XJ9
XJ10
No short
No short
Short pin 1,2 Short pin 1,2 Short pin 1,2
Short pin 1,2
module
CPU communicate with the
clock module
default
No short
No short
Short pin 2,3 Short pin 2,3
Short pin 2,3
Short pin 2,3
No short
No short
NOTE: The XJ2, XJ3, XJ9 and XJ10 are used for factory adjustment. Dont change
their default position.

3-16
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
The jumper setting in EXTCLK module:

EXTCLK module can control the characteristic of the interface impedance smartly
by adjusting the jumpers. The detail description is shown as below:
The jumper setting of the 2Mbit:
JUMPER
XW3
XW4
75
Short
Short
120
No short
No short
Default
Short
Short
The jumper setting of the 2MHZ:

JUMPER
XW3
XW4
75
Short
Short
120
No short
No short
Default
Short
Short
NOTE: The above jumpers setting only include two statuses: short or no short.

3-17
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.3.5.2 Default switch settings
3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
Default setting
BIT
BIT
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Backup
Main
Definition Of Switch S1
BIT
Function
Default
BIT 1~ 5
reserve
OFF
BIT 6- 7:
DB Mode
OFF
BIT 8
Version SW
OFF
DB Mode The DB mode means the database loading mode.

Version SW Switch the primary F/W version and the backup F/W version.

3-18
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
Definition of DB Mode
NO
BIT7
BIT6
OFF
OFF
Normal
OFF
ON
Keep
ON
OFF
Run Default
ON
ON
Force Default
Normal:
Download database from the flash.
Run Default:
Do not download database from the flash, and use the default
configuration.
Force Default: Write the default configuration to the flash.

NOTE: Switch is used for factory adjustment. Dont change its default position.

3-19
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.4 STM16
3.4.1
Features
Carry out the STM16 O/E conversion function
Recovery and production the clock,
Serial/parallel conversion
Multiplexing/de-multiplexing
Pointer processing
Overhead extraction and insertion.
Laser auto switch on/off
Detection of the laser transmitting optical power
Optical interface line loop back and terminal loop back.
Providing the software fault detection to help the board self-checking.
3.4.2

This boards mainly carries out the STM16 optic/electric conversion, clock recovery,
clock production, serial/parallel conversion, multiplexing/de-multiplexing, pointer
processing; changes from the STM16 optical signal to the STM4 LVDS bus signal;
regeneration section, multiplexing section and high order path overhead extraction
and insertion. The function diagram shows as bellow:

3-20
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.4.3
The board consists of an epoxy-glass printed circuit board (PCB).
One side of the

3-21
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.4.4

The view of STM16 board is shown below:
NOTE: The STM16 board just uses single optical board, so it with only one group of
optical interface.
Figure 3-5.

3-22
View of STM16 board
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
STM16 board has the following controls and indicators.

ONLINE :LED indicators (green)
TX,RX :optical interface
LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR
DESCRIBE
Control
Normal operation
normal operation
Abnormal
FW
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
On
Board failure or the service path report

alarm (MS-AIS, LOS etc.)
FW and HW
Off
Normal operation
On
Operation at working port
FAIL
(MS1+1,MS1:1and MS ring)
ONLINE
Off
FW
Operation at standby port

Optical Interface:
TX means: transmit the optical single.
RX means: receive the optical single.

3-23
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.4.5
Strap Settings

STM16 board has no any strap.

3-24
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.5 STM1/4
3.5.1
Features
Perform O/E and E/O conversion of STM1/4 optical signals
Perform code type conversion for electric interface
Restore line clock
Scramble or descramble signals
Process regenerator section terminal (RST) and multiplex section terminal (MST)
Process AU-4 pointer
Manages VC-4 higher order path termination (HPT)
3.5.2
This board mainly carries out the STM1/4 optic/electric conversion, clock recovery,
clock production, serial/parallel conversion, multiplexing /de-multiplexing, pointer
processing; changing from the STM1/4 signal to the STM4 LVDS bus signal;
regeneration section, multiplexing section and high order path overhead extraction and
insertion; processing serial overhead and providing the data interface.
This board can configure as STM4Os, STM1Os, and STM1Od according to the
different module, and can configure different transmission distance module for the
optical interface. The function diagram shows as bellow:

3-25
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.5.3
3.5.4

The view of STM-1/4 double optical interface board is shown below:
Figure 3-6.
View of STM1/STM4 board
STM1/STM4 double optical board has the following controls and indicators.
ONLINE1,2 :LED indicators (green)
TX,RX :optical interface
3-26
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR
DESCRIBE
Control
Normal operation
normal operation
Abnormal
FW
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
On

FW and HW
Off
Normal operation
On
FAIL
ONLINE1,2
Off
FW

Optical Interface:
TX means: transmit the optical single.
RX means: receive the optical single.

3-27
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.5.5
Strap Settings

STRAP
DEFAULT SETTING
NOTE: XW1 are used for
XW1

3-28
CPLD configuration by
cable, its only prepared
for the engineer of the
manufactory.
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
STRAP
DEFAULT SETTING
XW2
FPGA configuration by
cable, its only prepared
for the engineer of the
manufactory.
XW3
selecting the FPGA

download mode, if short,
downloading by cable
through XW2; if open,
downloading by MCU.
The mode is reserved.

3-29
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.6 S1E
3.6.1
Features
Perform code type conversion for electric interface
Restore line clock
Scramble or descramble signals
Process regenerator section terminal (RST) and multiplex section terminal (MST)
Process AU-4 pointer
Manages VC-4 higher order path termination (HPT)
3.6.2
This board mainly carries out the STM1e code type conversion, clock recovery, clock
production, serial/parallel conversion, multiplexing /de-multiplexing, pointer processing; changing from the STM1e signal to the STM4 LVDS bus signal; regeneration
section, multiplexing section and high order path overhead extraction and insertion;
processing serial overhead and providing the data interface.
The function diagram shows as bellow:

3-30
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.6.3
3.6.4

The view of STM-1e board is shown below:
Figure 3-7.
View of STM_1e board

3-31
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
STM1e board has the following controls and indicators.

IN, OUT :electric interface
LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR
DESCRIBE
Control
Normal operation
normal operation
Abnormal
FW
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
On

FW and HW
Off
Normal operation
On
FAIL
ONLINE
Off

Electric Interface:
OUT means: transmit the electric single.
IN means: receive the electric single.

3-32
FW
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.6.5
Strap Settings

Jumper Setting:
Jumper
XW1
XW2
XW3
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
XJ9~XJ16
Function
Used for downloading the EPLD (D11)
Used for downloading the FPGA (D2), if not necessary, you can
select not jointing it.
Used for selecting the FPGA download mode,
XW3 are used for selecting the FPGA download mode, if short,
downloading by cable through XW2; if open, downloading by
MCU. The mode is reserved.
STM-1e CH1 RX
STM-1e CH1 TX
STM-1e CH2 RX
STM-1e CH2 TX
Used for fixing the 155M signal connection lines.

Used for fixing the 155M connection lines.
XJ9 connect with XJ11;
XJ14 connect with XJ16.

3-33
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
Switch Setting:
Switch
S5,S7
S6,S8
S2,S4
Function
Used for routing the STM-1e cable from the front panel.
Used for routing the STM-1e cable from the rear panel.
Used for controlling the range of the 155 signal.
Switch
Routing the cable from the front panel
Routing the cable from the rear panel

3-34
S5,S7
ON
OFF
S6,S8
OFF
ON
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.7 E12
3.7.1
Features
Mapping /demapping, multiplexing / de-multiplexing between 32 * 2Mb/s and VC4
Payload signal flattening and de-jitter process
2M HDB3 coding and decoding
TPS protection function
Re-timing for the 2Mb/s from 1to 8.
E12 including E12A(75 interface) and E12B(120 interface)
Support board reliability detection and system self examination
3.7.2

This board mainly carries out mapping /demapping, multiplexing / de-multiplexing
between 32 * 2Mb/s and VC4
3.7.3

3-35
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.7.4

The view of E12 board is shown below:
Figure 3-8.
View of E12 board
E12 board has the following controls and indicators.


3-36
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR
DESCRIBE
Control
Normal operation
normal operation
Abnormal
FW
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
On

FW and HW
Off
Normal operation
FAIL
On
ONLINE
Off
In TPS switching status
FW
Not in TPS switching status

3-37
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.7.5
Strap Settings
STRAP
DEFAULT SETTING
NOTE: XJ13 are used for
XJ13

3-38
selecting the FPGA

download mode, if short,
downloading by cable
through XJ8; if open,
downloading by MCU.
The mode is reserved.
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.8 THR_E12W
3.8.1
Features
Connect the 2 M signal to E1 board through back board.
3.8.2

The function of THR_E12W board is transmitting E1 electric signal from the back
baord to the E1 interface. The function diagram shown as bellow:
3.8.3

3-39
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.8.4

THR_E12W board has no any controls and indicators.
The appearance of the THR_E12W board is shown as below:
Figure 3-9.
3.8.5
View of THR_E12W board
Strap Settings
THR_E12W board has no any strap.

3-40
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.9 E31/E32
3.9.1
Features
Mapping /demapping, multiplexing / de-multiplexing between 3 * 34Mb/s and VC4,
or 3*45Mb/s and VC4.
Payload signal flattening and de-jitter process
34M/45M HDB3 coding and decoding
1+1TPS protection function
Support board reliability detection and system self examination
3.9.2

This board mainly carries out mapping /demapping, multiplexing / de-multiplexing
between 3 * 34Mb/s and VC4, or 3*45Mb/s and VC4.
3.9.3

3-41
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.9.4

The view of E31/E32 board is shown below:
Figure 3-10. View of E31 (Left)/E32 (Right) board

3-42
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
E31/E32 board has the following controls and indicators.

LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR
DESCRIBE
Control
Normal operation
normal operation
Abnormal
FW
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
On

FW and HW
Off
Normal operation
FAIL
On
ONLINE
Off
In TPS switching status
FW
Not in TPS switching status

3-43
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.9.5
Strap Settings

3-44
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
STRAP
DEFAULT SETTING
2 3
NOTE: It
is used to control work

mode of E31/E32: when
connected pin 1 to pin 2, the
package works in E31 mode,
and when connected the pin 3
to pin 2, the package works
in E32 mode.
XJ4
XJ9: It is used to configure the EPLD (D13).

XJ8: It is used to configure the FPGA (D14).
SW1-3: It is used to control LIU, see following table:
SW
CH
PIN1
PIN2
PIN3
SW1
CH 2
LOSTHR2
REQEN2
TXLEV2
SW2
CH 3
LOSTHR3
REQEN3
TXLEV3
SW3
CH 1
LOSTHR1
REQEN1
TXLEV1
The control method description:

LOSTHR: place at off
REQEN: place at on
TXLEV: When the package works inE31 mode, it should be placed at off.
When the package works in E32 mode and the transmission distance of
E32 is less than 225 feet, it should be placed at off;
When the package works in E32 mode and the transmission distance of
E32 is more than 225 feet, it should be placed at on.

3-45
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.10FE
This board mainly carry out mapping from the 10/100Mb/s Ethernet interface signal
to VC signal and de-mapping along the opposite direction.
3.10.1 Features
CPU block:
Carry out the communication with MCP board and management and process for
the board.
PHY block:
10/100M PHY: change between the input Ethernet analog signal and SMII
interface signal required by the switch part.
Switch block
1.
Carry out the control and management over the 10/100PHY and 1000M PHY
2.
Carry out the second layers store-and-forward switching.
3.
Support the second layers function such as VLAN/STP/port security/Priority

queue, etc.
Ethernet Mapping block:
1.
FE including FE_2(2 WAN) and FE_4(4 WAN).
2.
Encapsulation the SMII interface data format in the switch part into the GFP or
LAPS format over the WAN.
3.
Map the data with GFP/LAPS format into VC12 or VC3 or VC4. Low order path
adopt virtual cascade mode and LCAS mode, the number of virtual cascade
supported by the VC12 mode ranges from 0 to 63, the one supported by the VC3
ranges from 0 to 3, it doesnt support virtual cascade mode under VC4 mode.
4.
Flow control management function.

Bus processing block
Map from the 622Mb/s bus signal in the backplane to 38Mb/s bus signal, and
process pointer and some path overhead.

3-46
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION

This board mainly carry out mapping from the 10/100Mb/s Ethernet interface signal to
VC signal and de-mapping along the opposite direction. It contains CPU block, PHY
block, Switch block, Ethernet Mapping block and Bus processing block. The CPU block
is responsible for the communication with MCP board and management and process for
the board. PHY block can change between the input Ethernet analog signal and SMII
interface signal required by the switch part. And we can use the Switch block to control
and management over the 10/100PHY and 1000M PHY; Carry out the second layers
store-and-forward switching; Support the second layers function such as VLAN/STP/
port security/Priority queue, etc. Ethernet Mapping block is used to carry out
encapsulating the SMII interface data format in the switch part into the GFP or LAPS
format over the WAN and carry out the function of the flow control. The function
diagram shown as bellow:

3-47
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.10.3 Physical Description

3.10.4 Controls and Indicators

The view of FE board is shown below:
Figure 3-11.

3-48
View of FE board
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
FE board has the following controls and indicators.

8 RJ-45 interface (with indicators) (see NOTE)
NOTE: The detail decibel of FE board interface refer to B08_Cable section 6.3
FE board Connectors
LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR
DESCRIBE
Control
Normal operation
normal operation
Abnormal
FW
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
FAIL
On
Board failure
Off
Normal operation
FW and HW

3-49
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.10.5 Strap Settings
ON
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8
BIT
BIT
Default setting
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Definition of Switch S1
Function
Default
BIT 1~ 5
Keep
OFF
BIT 6- 7:
DB Mode
OFF
BIT 8
Version SW
OFF
ON
OFF
Backup
Main
DB Mode The DB mode means the database loading mode.

Version SW Switch the primary F/W version and the backup F/W version

3-50
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
Definition of DB Mode
No
BIT7
BIT6
OFF
OFF
Normal
OFF
ON
Keep
ON
OFF
Run Default
ON
ON
Force Default
NormalDownload database from the flash.

Run DefaultDo not download database from the flash, and use the default data.
NOTE: The switch is used for factory adjustment. Dont change its default position.

3-51
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.11TPS_S1E
3.11.1 Features
Select the 155 M signal to S1E board through backplane.
Select the 155 M signal to other TPS_S1E board through backplane.
Assist the S1E board to carry out the most service protection with 1:1 mode

TPS_S1E board carries out 155M electronic interface protection with 1:1 mode, the
five slots located in the most right can be installed with TPS_S1E board. TPS_S1Es
Normal Working Mode
Switch Working Mode

TPS_S1E system is made of standby interface board, working interface board and
TPS switch board. When system is normal, both the standby interface board and
working board can transmitting service separately without interference.

3-52
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
board is fail; and the TPS function with 1: 1 is carried out.

NOTE: TPS_S1E consists of one set of work and protection PKG. When exchanging
one PKG (work or protection) because of failure etc., it must exchange both work
and protection.

3-53
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION

The view of TPS board is shown below:
Figure 3-12. View of TPS board
TPS board has the following controls and indicators.

SW :LED indicators (yellow)
NOTE: The detail decibel of TPS board interface refer to B08_Cable section 6.6
TPS_S1E board Connectors.

3-54
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
LED
STATUS
DESCRIBE
Power runs normal
On
PWR
Power off
Off
SW
Control
FW
Power failure
On
TPS protection working status
Off
TPS protection standby status
FW and HW

TPS board has no any strap

3-55
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.12TPS_E12
3.12.1 Features
Select the 2 M signal to E12 board through backplane.
Select the 2 M signal to other TPS_E12 board through backplane.
Assist the E12 board to carry out the most service protection with 1:4 mode

TPS_E12 carries out 2M electronic interface protection with 1:4 mode, the five slots
located in the most left and most right can be installed with TPS_E12 board.
TPS_E12s working principle shows as figure below:
Normal Working Mode

3-56
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
Switch Working Mode

TPS_E12 system is made of standby interface board, working interface board and


3-57
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION

Figure 3-13. View of TPS board

I/O :192 pin interface connector
NOTE: The detail decibel of TPS board interface refer to B08_Cable section 6.4
TPS_E12 board Connectors.
3-58
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
LED
STATUS
DESCRIBE
Power runs normal
On
PWR
Power off
Off
SW
Control
FW
Power failure
On
Off
FW and HW

TPS board has no any strap.

3-59
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.13TPS_E3
3.13.1 Features
Select the 34 M/45M signal to E31/E32 board through backplane.
Select the 34M/45 M signal to other TPS_E3 board through backplane.
Assist the E31/E32 board to carry out the most service protection with 1:1 mode

TPS_E3 carries out 34M/45M electronic interface protection with 1:1 mode, the five
slots located in the most left and most right can be installed with TPS_E3 board.
TPS_E3s working principle shows as figure below:
Normal Working Mode
Switch Working Mode

TPS_E3 system is made of standby interface board, working interface board and

3-60
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION


NOTE: TPS_E3 consists of one set of work and protection PKG. When exchanging
one PKG (work or protection) because of failure etc.; it must exchange both work
and protection.

3-61
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION

Figure 3-14. View of TPS_E3 board

NOTE: The detail decibel of TPS board interface refer to B08_Cable section 6.5 TPS
_E3board Connectors.

3-62
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
LED
STATUS
DESCRIBE
Power runs normal
On
PWR
Power off
Off
SW
Control
FW
Power failure
On
Off
FW and HW

3-63
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.13.5.1
Jumper setting
STRAP
XP2
XJ10~XJ18
X2~X4
XJ1
XCS5,7,9
XCS6,8,10
DEFAULT SETTING
Each pin of XP2 on the working TPS board would be

connected to corresponding pin of XP2 on the standby TPS
board.
Connect working TPS board to standby TPS board with
coaxial cable.
Used for fixing the coaxial cable between the working
board and standby board.
Used for downloading the EPLD (not used for user)
Output interface
Input interface
NOTE: The jumper is only used for factory adjustment. Dont change its default position.

3-64
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.14D_INF
3.14.1 Features
Carry out data channel add/drop.

D_INF board provide 6 channel of data interface I/O, providing a connector with a 6 x 8
core crystal plugs

The board consists of an epoxy-glass printed circuit board (PCB). One side of the PCB has
multi-pin connectors that plug into the shelf backplane.

3-65
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION

The view of D_INF board is shown below:
Figure 3-15. View of D_INF board
D_INF board has the following controls and indicators.

DATA 1~6 :6 RJ-45 interfaces
NOTE: The detail decibel of D_INF unit interface refer to B08_Cable section
6.11D_INF board Connectors.

D_INF board has no any strap.

3-66
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
3.15 FAN
3.15.1 Features
Control equipment temperature
Automatically rotate or not according to equipment temperature
Report alarm when defects occur
NOTE: FAN has 2 types: one is for -48V another is for -60V.

Rotate speed of FAN controlled by FAN control signal of CS board. In front of the FAN
board, the PWR LED shows the working status of FAN. If the indicator light up, it shows
the FAN works in normal working status, else it shows the FAN not work.

The board consists of an epoxy-glass printed circuit board (PCB). One side of the PCB has
multi-pin connectors that plug into the shelf backplane.

3-67
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION

The view of FAN board is shown below:
Figure 3-16. The view of FAN board
FAN board has the following control and indicator.

Table 3-12.
LED condition on front panel
LED
STAUS
DESCRIPTION
PWR
On
The fan is working
Off
The fan stop

FAN board has no any strap.
Note: Blink speed of LED quicken as rotation speed quicken.

3-68
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
4. BOARDS INSTALLATION
CAUTION
To prevent the equipment from getting damages, be sure to wear
anti-static wrist strap connected to the ESD terminal.
-
Put on gloves when touching boards.
When storing a spare board, put it into an antistatic bag and

place it in an antistatic environment.
Ensure that all testing equipment, instrument, computer, etc., are

connected to shielded ground and static ground reliably
Guide the board along the slot carefully; otherwise the board
would be gone to the wrong position possibly while inserted, if
no board is installed beside.
Boards Installation
4-1
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
4.1 Install Board To Subrack

When taking the operation of installing board, follow the steps below:
Procedure: Install Board

1. Outspread the handles of the board.
2. Place the board on the guide, and push the board gently along the guide until the
board hook (shown in Figure 4-2) locked the subrack.
3. Fold the handles and push the board into the subrack.
4. Apply screws and fasten them to lock the board tightly.
Insert boards to subrack

The handle of board
Figure 4-1. Insert the board to subrack
Boards Installation
4-2
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
The hook of board
Figure 4-2.
Lock the board hook to the subrack
Fix the board

Apply screws and fasten them to lock the board tightly.
NOTE: Please use the screw driver to fix the boards to the subrack, especially P_INF
board, because there is no enough room to turn it by hand.
Fasten the Screws
Boards Installation
4-3
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
4.2 Extract Board

When taking the operation of extracting board, follow the steps below:
NOTE: Hold handles on the board and keep even force, when dismounting them.
Procedure: Install Board

1. Use the screwdriver to loose the screws of board.
2. Outspread the handles of the board.
3. Extract the board gently along the guide.
1. Unscrew the screws of the board
Figure 4-3.
Boards Installation
4-4
Unscrew the Screws of the Board
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
2. Extract board
Figure 4-4. Extract board
Boards Installation
4-5
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
4.3 Install or Replace FAN Board

The V-Node equipment has three FAN boards.
Attention!
Since there is no finger guard on the vomit side of the FAN, please keep your finger
away the board during the operation period.
NOTE:
1. For preventive maintenance action, replacement of FAN board within five years
is recommended.
2. When Fan alarm occurs during operation, prompt replacement action of FAN
board is required.
3. If you want to replace/clear the FAN board, the time from pulling out of board to
inserting it again is not more than 20 minutes.
4. FAN GRP -48V should not use under -60V environment.
4.3.1
Procedure
1. Confirm that the FAN unit board to be installed has no damage.

2. Place the FAN board on the fan slot of the shelf, and push it gently until it is engaged
to the rear connector.
3. Fasten the FAN board by screws.
Figure 4-5.
4.3.2
Push FAN Board and Screw on the Screw
Cleaning of the FAN
1. Remove the FAN board.

2. Clean away the dust around fan component.
3. Insert and fasten the FAN board by screws.
Boards Installation
4-6
F5259_B07
UNIT INSTALLATION
4.3.3
Cleaning of the Air Filter
1. Remove the air filter from the bottom of the subrack.

2. For light dirty, you should wash the dust down by clean water, and for heavy dirty,
you should wash it by clean water and brush it with a soft brush.
3. Give the air filter an airing naturally.
4. Then insert the air filter to the subrack.
Boards Installation
4-7
F5259_B08
SpectralWave V-NODE
RELEASE 2.10
CABLE INSTALLATION
NEC Corporation
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLTION
METRALTM is a registered trademark of FCI.


1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLTION
CONTENTS
1. SUMMARY
1-1
2. CABLE ROUTING METHODS
2-1
2.1 Routing within the Rack................................................................... 2-3

2.2 Routing to/from Outside of the Rack .............................................. 2-6
3. POWER CABLES
3-1
3.1 Prepare Power Cable........................................................................ 3-2

3.1.1
Apparatus .............................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.2
Assemble Procedure ............................................................................ 3-2
3.2 Connect Power Cable to Station Power Supply............................. 3-3

3.3 Check Input Voltage ......................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Connect Power Cable to V-NODE.................................................... 3-5
4. EXTERNAL CABLES
4-1
4.1 HKA/HKC Cables .............................................................................. 4-2

4.1.1
Apparatus .............................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.2
Connection Points ................................................................................ 4-2
4.2 f Cables.............................................................................................. 4-3

4.2.1
Apparatus .............................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.2
4.3 ALM Cables ....................................................................................... 4-4

4.3.1
Apparatus .............................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.2
4.4 EXTCLK Cables ................................................................................ 4-5

4.4.1
Apparatus .............................................................................................. 4-5
4.4.2
4.5 Orderwire Cables.............................................................................. 4-6

4.5.1
Apparatus .............................................................................................. 4-6
4.5.2
4.6 User Channel .................................................................................... 4-7

Contents
i
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLTION
4.6.1
Apparatus .............................................................................................. 4-7
4.6.2
4.7 NMS Cables....................................................................................... 4-8

4.7.1
Apparatus .............................................................................................. 4-8
4.7.2
5. TRAFFIC CABLE CONNECTION
5-1
5.1 Optical Fibers.................................................................................... 5-2

5.1.1
Optical Connectors Used in V-NODE .................................................. 5-4
5.1.2
Inspecting/Cleaning Optical Connectors............................................ 5-4
5.1.3
Routing Method of Optical Cables ...................................................... 5-5
5.1.4
Procedure: Connect Optical Cable...................................................... 5-6
5.2 S1E Interface Cables ........................................................................ 5-8

5.2.1
Apparatus .............................................................................................. 5-9
5.2.2
Routing Method of Electrical Cables .................................................. 5-9
5.2.3
Procedure: Connect Electrical Cable.................................................. 5-9
5.3 E12 Interface Cables ...................................................................... 5-10

5.3.1
Terminal Pin Assignment ................................................................... 5-10
5.3.2
Pin Assignment (Reference for Cables 75 ohms) ....................... 5-12
5.3.3
Pin Assignment (Reference for Cables 120 ohms) ..................... 5-13
5.3.4
Apparatus ............................................................................................ 5-14
5.4 E31/E32 Interface Cables ............................................................... 5-30

5.4.1
Apparatus ............................................................................................ 5-31
5.4.2
Routing Method of Electrical Cables ................................................ 5-31
5.4.3
Procedure: Connect Electrical Cable................................................ 5-31
5.5 LAN Interface Cables ..................................................................... 5-32

5.5.1
Apparatus ............................................................................................ 5-33
6. CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT
6-1
6.1 Terminals on Subrack ...................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1
V-NODE Appearance............................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2
V-NODE Slot Configuration.................................................................. 6-2
6.2 MCP board Connectors.................................................................... 6-3
Contents
ii
6.2.1
f interface............................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.2
ALM interface ........................................................................................ 6-5
6.2.3
HKC interface ........................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.4
HKA1/ HKA2 interface .......................................................................... 6-7
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLTION
6.2.5
F interface.............................................................................................. 6-8
6.2.6
OW Interface.......................................................................................... 6-8
6.3 FE board Connectors ....................................................................... 6-9

6.3.1
FE board Connector Pin Assignment ............................................... 6-10
6.4 TPS_E12 board Connectors ...........................................................6-11

6.4.1
E12 Connector Pin Assignment ........................................................ 6-12
6.5 TPS_E3 Board Connectors ............................................................ 6-13

6.5.1
TPS_E3 Connector Pin Assignment.................................................. 6-14
6.6 TPS_S1E Board Connectors.......................................................... 6-15

6.6.1
TPS_S1E Connector Pin Assignment ............................................... 6-16
6.7 CS board Connectors..................................................................... 6-17

6.7.1
RS232 Interface ................................................................................... 6-18
6.7.2
10Base-T Interface .............................................................................. 6-18
6.8 Double Optical interface board Connectors................................. 6-19

6.9 Single Optical interface board Connectors .................................. 6-20
6.10 P_INF Board Connector ................................................................. 6-21
6.10.1 P_INF board Connector Pin Assignment.......................................... 6-22
6.11 D_INF Board Connector ................................................................. 6-23

6.11.1 D_INF board Connector Pin Assignment.......................................... 6-24
Contents
iii
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
1. SUMMARY
This manual provides information and procedures for cable installation.
Descriptions regarding cable connections that are required for user operation, such as
CID cable connection, handset connection, etc., are excluded from this manual.
These descriptions are provided as follows:
CID cable connection is in the CID Operating Guide manual.
Handset connection is in the Operation and Maintenance manual.
Summary
1-1
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
2. CABLE ROUTING METHODS

Cable routing methods may differ with the station condition. The following are
recommended examples.
Recommended Cable Routing on the Subrack
Location
Slot
Routing Direction
MCP
SLOT #1
FE
SLOT #2~ SLOT #7
Route the FE cable to bottom left side
SLOT #10~ SLOT #16
Route the FE cable to bottom right side
Route the MCP cable to bottom left side
D_INF
SLOT #17
Route the DATA cable to upside and fix it

with the cable fastener.
P_INF
SLOT #23, SLOT #26
Route the POWER cable to upside and fix it

STM-16
SLOT #5~ SLOT #7
Route the optical fiber to underside and let

it in the tray.
SLOT #10~ SLOT #12
STM-1/4
SLOT #2~ SLOT #7
NOTE: Youd better keep the optical fiber

away the other cables.
SLOT #10~ SLOT #16
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12P
TPS_E3
SLOT #19~ SLOT #22
Route the TPS_E12W cable to top left and

fix it with the cable fastener.
SLOT #28~ SLOT #31
Route the TPS_E12W cable to top right and

SLOT #18
Route the TPS_E12P cable to top left and

SLOT #32
Route the TPS_E12P cable to top right and

SLOT #18 and SLOT #19

Route the TPS_E3 cable to top left and fix it

NOTE:
TPS_E3

One TPS_E3 board (include a

TPS_E3W board and a TPS_E3P
board) occupy two slots.
Route the TPS_E3 cable to top right and fix

it with the cable fastener.
Cable Routing Methods

2-1
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Location
TPS_S1EW
Slot
Routing Direction
Route the TPS_S1E cable to top left and fix
it with the cable fastener.
NOTE:


2-2
One TPS_S1E board (include a

TPS_S1EW board and a
TPS_S1EP board) occupy two
slots.
Route the TPS_S1E cable to top right and

F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
2.1 Routing within the Rack

Tie cables to the cable support on the shelf:
The position where the cables routed to is according to where the closest cable
support is located from the connection points.
Case 1: Only One V-Node Equipment in the NEC V-Rack
When there is only one V-Node subrack in the NEC V-Rack, the cables of the up row
slots can be routed both from the top of the V-Node subrack (shown as Figure 2-1)
and from the side of the V-Node subrack (Figure 2-2). The default method is routing
the cable from the top of the V-Node subrack.
Figure 2-1.
The default Cable routing method (one subrack)
NOTE: For the hemming bend intensity of the fiber tray, it only used for fiber or FE
cables, and do not press the tray with hand.

2-3
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Case 2: More Than One V-Node Equipments in the NEC Rack

When there are several V-Node subracks in the NEC V-Rack, the cables of the up
row slots can be routed from the side of the V-Node subrack, the detail picture is
shown as below:.
NOTE: There are four V-Node equipments can be inserted into NEC rack.
Figure 2-2.

2-4
Cable routing method (multi-subrack)
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Tie cables to the cables supports installed in the rack:

When the cables routed out of the V-Node subrack, it will be fixed to the cables
supports which installed in the inside of the NEC V-Rack, the situation is shown as
below:
Figure 2-3.
Tie the cables in the rack

2-5
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
2.2 Routing to/from Outside of the Rack

Cables are routed to the top before leading to outside.
Figure 2-4.

2-6
Rout the Cable Out of the Rack
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
3. POWER CABLES
This section provides the following procedures:
Prepare power cable
Connect power cable to station power supply
Check input voltage
Connect power cable to V-NODE
Power Cables
3-1
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
3.1 Prepare Power Cable

To connect power and frame ground to V-NODE, Power Cable is necessary.
This section provides the cable assemble procedure for V-NODE side. Regarding
processing procedure for opposite side, it should be processed according to
installation document of station power supply or power distribution panel which is
used in the station.
3.1.1
Apparatus
Connector: D-sub connector,

equivalent.
Cable:
DA2S1P3dJS
(E32-087-J8916-0A00)
or
AWG16 to AWG18 or equivalent

For frame ground, stripe colored cable with green/yellow is
recommended.
Others:
Soldering Tool
Flat-blade or Phillips screwdriver
Wire cutter
Wire stripper
3.1.2
Assemble Procedure
1. Unassembled D-Sub connector
2. Solder cables according to the drawings shown below
Figure 3-1.
Power Cables
3-2
Solder the Cables
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
3. Assemble D-Sub connector.

4. Process opposite side according to installation manual of station power supply or
power distribution panel.
3.2 Connect Power Cable to Station Power Supply

According to installation manual of station power supply or power distribution panel,
connect power cable, after processing opposite side to D-Sub connector side.
WARNING
Keep station power supply turn off, during connecting power cable
CAUTION
To prevent unexpected electrical shock, frame ground should be
connected to appropriate grounding position which has low resistance to
earth ground.
Power Cables
3-3
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
3.3 Check Input Voltage

Before connect power cable to V-NODE, input voltage from station power supply
should be confirmed by using digital multi-meter or equivalent.
WARNING
Be careful to measure voltage between BAT terminal and BG terminal.
If short circuit occurs, any circuit may have serious damage.
Figure 3-2.
The Structure of the Power Interface
CAUTION
Input voltage should be in the following range
38.4V to 60V
Power Cables
3-4
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
3.4 Connect Power Cable to V-NODE
WARNING
Keep station power supply and switch on P_INF board being turned off
during connecting power cable.
1. Confirm the connector direction.

2. Insert the cable connector to the connector on P_INF board.
3. Fix the connection with the screw.
Power Cables
3-5
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
4. EXTERNAL CABLES
This section provides information for the following cable connections:
Housekeeping Alarm, Housekeeping Control
Office Alarm
External Clock
VF Orderwire
User Channel
NMS
External Cables
4-1
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
4.1 HKA/HKC Cables

4.1.1
Apparatus
Cable:
8 core UTP-C5 or equivalent
Plug:
RJ45 (equipment side)
Max length
5m
4.1.2
Connection Points
Connect the cable according to the following figure.
Figure 4-1.
External Cables
4-2
The Connection Point of the HKA/HKC Interface
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
4.2 f Cables
4.2.1
Apparatus
Cable:
Plug:
Max length
20m
4.2.2
Connection Points
Since the connector of f port is the same as the connector of HKA/HKC (shown
in 4.1.2), there only shown the position of f port.
Figure 4-2.
The Connection Point of the f Interface
External Cables
4-3
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
4.3 ALM Cables

4.3.1
Apparatus
Cable:
Plug:
Max length
5m
4.3.2
Connection Points
Since the connector of F port is the same as the connector of HKA/HKC (shown
Figure 4-3.
External Cables
4-4
The Connection Point of the ALM Interface.
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
4.4 EXTCLK Cables

4.4.1
Apparatus
Cable:
75ohm coaxial cable: 2.5C-EXBV (Z32-178-01302-001) or equivalent
120 ohm twisted-pair cable; conductor diameter is 0.32mm to 0.5mm.
Plug:
DB9 (equipment side)
4.4.2
Connection Points
Connect the clock cable to the P_INF board according to the following figure:
Figure 4-4.
The Connection Point of the EXTCLK Interface
NOTE: Please use the AMP connector, or use the connector we provide.
Otherwise, the CLK connecter may interfere with Fuse.
External Cables
4-5
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
4.5 Orderwire Cables

4.5.1
Apparatus
Cable:
2 wire telephone cable
Plug:
Max length
20m
4.5.2
Connection Points
Connect the cable to OW port according to the figure shown as bellow:
Figure 4-5.
External Cables
4-6
The Connection Point of the Orderwire Interface
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
4.6 User Channel

4.6.1
Apparatus
Cable:
Plug:
Max length
1000m
4.6.2
Connection Points
Connect the cable to Data1~Data6 ports in D_INF board according to the figure
shown as bellow:
Figure 4-6.
The Connection Point of the User Channel Interface
External Cables
4-7
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
4.7 NMS Cables

4.7.1
Apparatus
Cable:
Plug:
Max length
100m
4.7.2
Connection Points
NMS connects V-NODE F interface through UTP Straight cable via HUB, if
necessary.
Since the connector of F port is the same as the connector of HKA/HKC (shown
Figure 4-7.
External Cables
4-8
The Connection Point of the NMS Cable Interface
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5. TRAFFIC CABLE CONNECTION

This section provides information on and procedures for connecting/disconnecting
traffic cable to/from interface boards listed below.
STM-1o
STM-4o
STM-16
STM-1e
E12 board
E31/E32 board
FE/GE board
CAUTION
ESD
Electrostatic-Sensitive Devices are installed

in packages. To prevent them from being
damaged, WEAR AN ANTISTATIC WRIST
STRAP and CONNECT the other end to the
ESD terminal whenever you handle packages or equipment.
CAUTION
Preparing the cable needs skill worker. If assembly
has problem, it may cause traffic down
Traffic Cable Connection

5-1
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.1 Optical Fibers

This subsection provides procedures to connect optical fiber cables, and the routing
methods for connected cables.
The target boards are STM-1o/STM-4/STM-16.
CAUTION
Class 1 Laser Product
LASER LIGHT
NEVER look directly into the laser source
CAUTION
Fiber cable should be conformed to G.652 (ITU-T). Recommended
fiber cable diameter is 2 millimeters.
CAUTION
The curve radius of an optical fiber cable must
not be less than 30 mm (1.2 inches).

5-2
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Do not twist or stress optical fiber cables. Do not apply a
weigh of more than 5 kg (11 lb.) on the optical fiber cables.
The fiber cable may break.
CAUTION
To prevent fiber cables from becoming entangled in the
fiber cable supports, each cable should be separated from
the bundle before being routed.
Do not separate them within the rack.
CAUTION
Optical connectors should always be:
covered by protective caps.
or
connected to the appropriate fiber.
CAUTION
Optical connectors must be cleaned before they are
connected to any equipment. Using optical connectors
contaminated with dirt and dust particles may adversely
affect the quality of the optical signal and/or damage the
equipment.

5-3
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.1.1
Optical Connectors Used in V-NODE
For the V-NODE, optical cables with the following types of optical connectors are
used:
OPTICAL INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
STM-1o
LC/PC-LC/PC-xM-2.9-SM
STM-4
STM-16
NOTE: x stands for length of fiber.
Figure 5-1.
5.1.2
The LC Optical Connector
Inspecting/Cleaning Optical Connectors

Optical connectors must be cleaned before they are connected to any equipment.
Refer to the Operation and Maintenance manual for the methods of inspecting/
cleaning optical connectors.

5-4
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.1.3
Routing Method of Optical Cables

When you route the optical fiber, you must keep them in the tray and route the
optical fiber to the bottom left side or bottom right side randomly.
NOTE: Youd better keep the optical fiber away the other cables.
Figure 5-2.
Route the Fiber from the Fiber tray

5-5
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.1.4
Procedure: Connect Optical Cable
1. Wear the antistatic wrist strap, and connect the other end to the ESD terminal on the
shelf.
2. Remove the protective caps from the LC plug.
3. Remove the protective caps from the LC receptacle on the board. Protective cap is
shown below.
Figure 5-3.
The Procedure for Connecting the Optical Cable
4. Conform that the plug (cable side) and receptacle (board side) are clean and not
damaged. Refer to the Operation and Maintenance manual for inspecting/cleaning
optical connectors.
5. Insert the LC plug into LC receptacle slot, sliding it in until it clicks into prominent
baffle.

5-6
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Figure 5-4.
Insert the LC plug into LC receptacle slot
6. Secure cables by using any cable clamp on the rack.

This step is the end of the procedure.

5-7
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.2 S1E Interface Cables

This subsection provides procedures to connect S1E interface cables, and the routing
NOTE: S1E interface cable is connected with the TPS board.
Adopt the coaxial cable to the interfaces of the expansion board, among which, OUT
is for the sending terminal and IN for the accepting one.
Figure 5-5.

5-8
TPS_S1E board interface
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.2.1
Apparatus
Cable:
Plug:
Mini DIN Plug: IEC (DIN) 1.0/2.3 (A32-0CB0788-04) or equivalent
5.2.2
Routing Method of Electrical Cables

IN and OUT connectors of each electrical port are coaxial connector. Coaxial cable,
with IEC 1.0/2.3 plug or equivalent, is connected to them. Recommended Cable
routing is shown below.
Location
Routing direction
Top left side
Top right side
5.2.3
Procedure: Connect Electrical Cable
shelf.
2. Remove the protective caps from the mini DIN plug on the board
3. Confirm that the plug (cable side) and receptacle (board side) are not damaged.
4. Insert the mini DIN plug of the cable into DIN plug of board, sliding it in until it
clicks into place

5-9
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.3 E12 Interface Cables

This subsection provides procedures to connect E12 interface cables, and the routing
NOTE: E12 interface cable is connected with the TPS board.
5.3.1
Terminal Pin Assignment

E12 IN/OUT
Regarding interface of E12 board, refer to the following figures and tables.
Figure 5-6.

5-10
The interface of E12
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Figure 5-7.
Layout of E12 Interface
The nominal impedance of required signal should be 75 ohms (in the case of
coaxial-pair interface) or 120 ohms (in the case of symmetrical-pair interface).Table
5-1 and Table 5-2 are port wire-connection tables of 2M board with nominal
impedance of 75 ohm and 120 ohm.
Table 5-1. Port wire-connection of 75-ohm signal
7T
5R
5T
3R
3T
1R
7R
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
1T
8R
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
2T
8T
6R
6T
4R
4T
2R
1
2
3
*: In output port, 1-8R (Ring) is connected together, and in input port, they are
isolated.
Table 5-2. Port wire-connection of 120-ohm signal
7T
5R
5T
3R
3T
1R
7R
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
1T
8R
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
2T
8T
6R
6T
4R
4T
2R

5-11
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.3.2
Pin Assignment (Reference for Cables 75 ohms)
Figure 5-8.
Table 5-3. Pin Assignment (Reference for Cable 75 ohms)

PIN ASSIGNMENT (REFERENCE FOR CABLE)
6
d
1R
3T
3R
5T
5R
7T
BLUE (DRAIN)
PALE PINK
PALE PINK
PINK x WHITE
PINK x WHITE
ORANGE
(DRAIN)
(DRAIN)
c
1T
7R
BLUE
ORANGE
(DRAIN)
2T
8R
-
RED
BALCK
(DRAIN)
2R
4T
4R
6T
6R
8T
RED (DRAIN)
YELLOW
YELLOW
GREEN
GREEN
BALCK
(DRAIN)
(DRAIN)
NOTE: T: means TIP, the center line of cable, R: means RING, the GND for cable.

5-12
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.3.3
Figure 5-9.
Table 5-4. Pin Assignment (Reference for Cables 120 ohms)

PIN ASSIGNMENT (REFERENCE FOR CABLE)
6
d
1R
3T
3R
5T
5R
7T
PINK
ORANGE
ORANGE
BLUE (red-D)
BLUE
GREEN
(black-S)
(red-S)
(black-S)
(black-D)
(red-D)
1T
7R
PINK (red-S)
GREEN
(black-D)
2T
8R
-
BLUE (red-S)
PINK
(black-D)
2R
4T
4R
6T
6R
8T
BLUE
GREEN
GREEN
GRAY (red-S)
GRAY
PINK (red-D)
(black-S)
(red-S)
(black-S)
(black-S)
black-S: single dash, color black
red-S: single dash, color red
black-D: double dash, color black
red-D: double dash, color red
NOTE: T: means TIP, the line A, R: means RING, the line B.

5-13
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.3.4
Apparatus
Cables
2M Interface cable needs its end for DDF side prepared.
75 type(for 2M 75):
8-core coaxial cable; Z32-178-01854 or equivalent.
120 type(for 2M 120):
8-twisted-pair cable; conductor diameter is 0.32mm to 0.5mm.
NOTE: When using a cable obtained locally, also board side of the cable requires
process to attach a METRAL-type plug.
Plug (DDF Side)

Use an appropriate plug in the following:
DIN Jack (NEC standard):
A32-4CC1138-02
DIN plug type:
A32-4CC1138-01
BNC plug type:
A32-4CC1138-03
Plug (Package Side)

METRAL-type plug kit:
Tools for Trimming Cable Ends

wire stripper
forceps, plier or tweezer
solder and soldering iron

5-14
A32-4CB1134-03
(JFB-CSR-16(24)-A or equivalent)
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE: PREPARE 2M INF 75-OHM CABLE END (DDF SIDE)

1. Prepare appropriate length of coaxial cable, and remove insulators carefully; do not
damage the cable:
Figure 5-10. The Procedure One
2. Cut the remaining threads of insulator off carefully:
Figure 5-11.
The Procedure Two
3. Place the shrink tube to wrap the gap between insulator and core cables:
Figure 5-12. The Procedure Three
4. Using a heat gun, shrink the tube to wrap and hold the wires tightly:
Place the heat gun, keeping its nozzle 10 to 20 mm away from the tube.
Apply heat around the tube for 5 to 10 seconds until the tube is shrunk down to
hold the wires tightly.

5-15
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Figure 5-13. The Procedure Four
5. Perform the following for each polyvinyl chloride insulated wire:

Remove tinfoil coat carefully; do not damage the conductor and drain wire:
Figure 5-14. The Procedure Five (1)
Apply a boot and bolt to the cable, and attach the bolt by rotating it clockwise:
Put the conductor and drain wire through the clamp, rotating the cable carefully.
Be sure not to damage the drain wire:

5-16
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Bend the drain wire back along the clamp:
Adjust the length of the conductor and drain wire as shown below. Be sure not to
damage the central conductor:
Put the central conductor through the contact, and apply heat to the contact (see
below) using a soldering iron to join the central conductor to the contact:

5-17
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Attach the casing block to the cable block:
Rotate the clamp by hand till it stops:
Use a 8-mm wrench (spanner) for the casing block, and 10-mm wrench for the
bolt side, fasten the bolt and casing block together tightly:

5-18
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Check the following:

Parts are attached with no breaks, shorts.
Wire is not damaged.
Length of wire is properly adjusted (required length depends on the system).
6. Repeat Step 5 for the remaining polyvinyl chloride insulated wires.
7. Connect the cables to the DDF side connector.

5-19
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE: PREPARE 2M INF CABLE END (BOARD SIDE)

1. Prepare appropriate length of coaxial cable.
2. Put a shrink tube (large) and lock-housing of the plug on the cable in advance:
Figure 5-23. The Procedure Two
3. Remove insulators carefully; do not damage the cable:
Figure 5-24. The Procedure Three
4. Perform the following for each insulated wire:

For 2M 120-ohm Cable:
Remove polyvinyl chloride coat from a pair of wires carefully and strip the wire for
approximately 2.0 mm; do not damage the wire. Go to Step 5.

5-20
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Figure 5-25. The Procedure Four (For 2M 120-ohm Cable)
For 2M 75-Ohm Cable:

Remove the tinfoil coat for 9.0 mm or shorter carefully; do not damage the
conductor and drain wire:
Figure 5-26. The Procedure Four (For 2M 75-ohm Cable) (1)
Put a shrink tube (small) on the discreet cable before starting trimming:

5-21
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Strip the conductor for approximately 2.0 mm carefully.
Cut insulation tube for a stripped drain wire (must be shorter than 9.0 mm), and
apply it on the drain wire:
5. Prepare a set of crimp-contacts, and place the conductor and drain wire respectively
in each contact (do not separate a contact from the set):
Figure 5-30. The Procedure Five

5-22
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6. Use forceps (or pliers, tweezers, etc.), pinch and fasten denticles to hold the wire
within the contact. When using pliers, it is recommended that its head be smaller
than 2 mm; ensure not to transform the crimp-contact:
Figure 5-31. The Procedure Six
7. Solder the core wire to the crimp-contact:
Figure 5-32. The Procedure Seven
8. When both wires of a cable are fixed, take them off the set. Crimp-contacts can
easily be off at the notch:

5-23
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Figure 5-33. The Procedure Eight
9. 120-ohm cable (100 ohm cable) is not required this step. Go to Step 10.
For 75-ohm cable, place the shrink tube (small) to cover the gap between polyvinyl
chloride coat and wires:
Figure 5-34. The Procedure Nine (for 75-ohm cable)(1)
Using a heat gun, shrink the tube to wrap and hold the wires tightly:
Apply heat around the tube for 5 to 10 seconds until the tube is shrunk down to
hold the wires tightly.

5-24
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Figure 5-35. The Procedure Nine (for 75-ohm cable)(2)
10. Repeat Steps 4. thru 8. (for 120-ohm cable) or thru 9. (for 75-ohm cable) for the
remaining wires of the cable.
11. Prepare the base-housing facing its rough (rear) side to you:
Figure 5-36. The Procedure Eleven
12. By referring to Pin Assignment (Reference for Cables 75 ohms) or Pin

Assignment (Reference for Cables 120 ohms), insert the fixed wires:
Check color of the wire, and/or printed marks on the wire, and confirm its assigned
position.
Hold the wire showing the contacts latch on top:
Figure 5-37. The Procedure Twelve (1)
Insert it into the assigned position, and slide it in until it clicks.

5-25
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Confirm that the latch can be seen through the lock hole so that the wire is engaged:
Repeat Steps 11. thru 12. for the remaining wires of the cable.
13. When all the wires are set, place the shrink tube to cover the unsheathed wires:
Using a heat gun, shrink the tube to wrap and hold the wires tightly:
Apply heat around the tube, until the tube is shrunk down to hold the wires and
the cable tightly.
Figure 5-40. The Procedure Thirteen (1)

5-26
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
14. Slide the lock-housing to the base-housing, and engage them together.
Figure 5-41. The ProcedureFourteen
15. Apply cable-tie around the cable, along the guide on the lock-housing, and secure
the cable and housings; cut surplus of the tie when fastened.
Figure 5-42. The Procedure Fifteen
16. Attach face-housing to the other side of the base-housing;

Align keys on the rear side of the face-housing to each key way on the base-housing.
Push the face-housing until it clicks into place:

5-27
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Figure 5-43. The Procedure Sixteen

5-28
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE: CONNECT TPS CABLES

shelf.
18. Insert the METRALTM plug into the connector on TPS board:

5-29
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.4 E31/E32 Interface Cables

This subsection provides procedures to connect E31/E32 interface cables, and the
routing methods for connected cables.
NOTE: E31/E32 interface cable is connected with the TPS board.
Adopt the coaxial cable to the interfaces of the expansion board, among which, OUT
is for the sending terminal and IN for the accepting one.
TPS
E3P
TPS
E3W
PWR
SW
PWR
SW
Figure 5-44. TPS_E3 board interface

5-30
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.4.1
Apparatus
Cable:
Plug:
Mini DIN Plug: IEC (DIN) 1.0/2.3 (A32-0CB0788-04) or equivalent
5.4.2
Routing Method of Electrical Cables

IN and OUT connectors of each port are coaxial connector. Coaxial cable, with IEC
1.0/2.3 plug or equivalent, is connected to them. Recommended Cable routing is
shown below.
Location
Routing direction
Top left side
Top right side
5.4.3
Procedure: Connect Electrical Cable
shelf.
2. Remove the protective caps from the mini DIN plug on the board
3. Confirm that the plug (cable side) and receptacle (board side) are not damaged.
4. Insert the mini DIN plug of the cable into DIN plug of board, sliding it in until it
clicks into place

5-31
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
5.5 LAN Interface Cables

This subsection provides procedures to connect LAN interface fibers, cables, and the
routing methods for connected cables.
Ethernet interface adopts RJ45, which is the same as F interface on the MCP board.
Figure 5-45. The interface of FE board

5-32
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
The procedures to connect LAN interface cables and routing methods for connected
cables are same as HKA/HKC cable.
5.5.1
Apparatus
1000 BASE-SX: 62.5m multimode fiber (MMF)

1000 BASE-LX: 10m single-mode fiber (SMF)
Cable:
Plug
Max length
100m

5-33
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6. CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT

6.1 Terminals on Subrack
6.1.1
V-NODE Appearance
Figure 6-1.
V-NODE Appearance view
Connector Pin Assignment

6-1
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.1.2
V-NODE Slot Configuration
Figure 6-2.
V-NODE Slot Configuration
NOTE: The slot 24 and 25 is not used.

6-2
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.2 MCP board Connectors
Figure 6-3.
Interface of MCP board

6-3
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
See the following table for explanation of those interfaces:

Table 6-1. Description of Data Interface
Interface
Description
RS232, generally for craft interface device (CID).
ALM
Four groups of alarm output: alarm bell, alarm light, critical alarm and minor
alarm.
HKC
Four House Keeping Controls output
HKA1
Four House Keeping Alarms input port1
HKA2
Four House Keeping Alarms input port2
MON
For Debug, reserved.
10Base-T Ethernet interface, for network management (NMS) and craft

interface device (CID).
OW
For order wire control

6-4
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.2.1
f interface
The condition of f cable is shown in 4.2 Summary

Table 6-2. The Description for the Connector Pin of the f Interface
Connector Pin Order
NO
RXD
TXD
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Description
(Not used)
RXD
TXD
(Not used)
GND
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
NOTE: Electrical level is RS232C.
6.2.2
ALM interface
The condition of ALM cable is shown in 4.3 ALM Cables

Table 6-3. The Description for the Connector Pin of the ALM Interface
Connector Pin Order
1A
1B 2A
AB
2B
AL
3A 3B 4A
PM
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
DM
NO
4B
Description
AB A
AB B
AL A
AL B
PM A
PM B
DM A
DM B

6-5
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.2.3
HKC interface
The condition of HKC cable is shown in 4.1 HKA/HKC Cables

Table 6-4. The Description for the Connector Pin of the HKC Interface
Connector Pin Order
1A
1B 2A
2B
3A 3B 4A
NO
4B
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
Description
1A
1B
2A
2B
3A
3B
4A
4B
NOTE: Reference circuit is shown below.
HKC reference circuit

NOTE: Control logic can be selectable. In default case, on is short, and off is open.

6-6
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.2.4
HKA1/ HKA2 interface
The condition of HKC cable is shown in 4.1 HKA/HKC Cables

Table 6-5. The Description for the Connector Pin of the HKA/HKC Interface
Connector Pin Order
1A
1B 2A
2B
3A 3B 4A
NO
4B
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
Description
1A
1B
2A
2B
3A
3B
4A
4B
NOTE: Reference circuit is shown below.

Table 6-6. HKA Reference Circuit
5.1koh
+3.3
1
HKA
3
4.7kohm
4N36
4
2
4.7koh
B
4.7koh
BG
4.7koh
4.7koh
DG
-48V

6-7
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.2.5
F interface
The condition of F cable is shown in 4.7.

NOTE:
The electrical level is IEEE802.3

Table 6-7. The Description for the Connector Pin of the F Interface
Connector Pin Order

TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
RXD-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Keep
6.2.6
No.
Description
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
(Not used)
(Not used)
RXD-
(Not used)
(Not used)
OW Interface
The condition of OW cable is shown in 4.5 Orderwire Cables.

Table 6-8. The Description for the Connector Pin of the OWInterface
Connector Pin Order
Line-
Line+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

6-8
NO
Description
(Not used)
(Not used)
Line-
Line+
(Not used)
(Not used)
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.3 FE board Connectors
Figure 6-4.
Interface of FE board

6-9
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.3.1
FE board Connector Pin Assignment

Local interface:
There are 6 local interfaces in this board; they support 10M/100M/ automatic negotiation/full duplex /half duplex mode.
FE board including FE_2(2 WAN) and FE_4(4 WAN).
Console interface:
This interface left for management FE board
Table 6-9. The Description for the Connector Pin of the FE Board
Connector Pin Order
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Keep

6-10
RXD-
No.
Description
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
(Not used)
(Not used)
RXD-
(Not used)
(Not used)
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.4 TPS_E12 board Connectors
Figure 6-5.
Interface of TPS_E12 board

6-11
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.4.1
E12 Connector Pin Assignment
Figure 6-6. E12 connector pin assignment
Table 6-10. TX (equipment send E12 signal to 2M extension unit)
Table 6-11.
RX (2M extension unit send E12 signal to equipment)

6-12
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.5 TPS_E3 Board Connectors
Figure 6-7.
Interface of the TPS_E3W
NOTE: Since the interface of the TPS_E3P is the same to the TPS_E3W, there only
show the interface of the TPS_E3W.

6-13
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.5.1
TPS_E3 Connector Pin Assignment
Figure 6-8.
Figure 6-9.
RX (E31/E32 extension unit send 34/45M signal to equipment)
Figure 6-10.
TX (equipment send 34/45M signal to E31/E32 extension unit)

6-14
TPS_E3 Connector Pin Assignment
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.6 TPS_S1E Board Connectors
Figure 6-11.
NOTE:
Interface of the TPS_S1E
Since the interface of the TPS_S1EP is the same to the TPS_S1EW, there
only shows the interface of the TPS_S1EW.

6-15
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.6.1
TPS_S1E Connector Pin Assignment
Figure 6-12. TPS_S1E Connector Pin Assignment
Figure 6-13. RX (S1E extension unit send 155M electrical signal to equipment)
Figure 6-14.
TX (equipment send 155M electrical signal to S1E extension unit)

6-16
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.7 CS board Connectors
Figure 6-15. Interface of CS board

6-17
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
Table 6-12. Description of Data Interface

Interface
Description
RS232
RS232, generally for craft interface device (CID).
100Base-T
For order wire control
6.7.1
RS232 Interface
Table 6-13. The Description for the Connector Pin of the RS232 Interface
Connector Pin Order
NO
RXD
TXD
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6.7.2
Description
(Not used)
RXD
TXD
(Not used)
GND
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
10Base-T Interface
Table 6-14. The Description for the Connector Pin of the 10Base-T Interface
Connector Pin Order

TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Keep

6-18
RXD-
No.
Description
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
(Not used)
(Not used)
RXD-
(Not used)
(Not used)
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.8 Double Optical interface board Connectors

Double Optical interface board has no any interface connectors. The appearance is
shown below:
Figure 6-16. Interface of Double Optical interface board

6-19
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.9 Single Optical interface board Connectors

Single Optical interface board has no any interface connectors. The appearance is
shown below:
Figure 6-17. Interface of Single Optical interface board

6-20
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.10P_INF Board Connector
Figure 6-18.
Layout of P_INF board connector

6-21
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.10.1 P_INF board Connector Pin Assignment

Power connector pin assignment
Figure 6-19. Power Connector Pin Assignment

Table 6-15. The Description for the Connector Pin of the P_INF Board
Indication
Description
BG
Ground (Return)
Frame ground
BAT
- 38.4V to - 60V
NOTE: Positive ground is used.

EXTCLK Connector Pin Assignment
Table 6-16. The Description for the Connector Pin of the EXTCLK Interface
Connector Pin Order
EXT CLK
EXT CLK
IN+
OUT +
FG
FG FG
FG FG
EXT CLK
EXT CLK
INOUT -

6-22
No.
Description
EXT CLK IN +
FG
FG
EXT CLK OUT +
FG
EXT CLK IN -
FG
FG
EXT CLK OUT -
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.11D_INF Board Connector
Figure 6-20. Interface of D_INF board

6-23
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION
6.11.1 D_INF board Connector Pin Assignment

Table 6-17. The Description for the Connector Pin of the D_INF Board
Connector Pin Order
TXD+ TXD-TXC+TXC-RXD+RXD-RXC+RXC-
1 2 34 5 678
RXD
TXD

6-24
GND
No.
Description
V.11
RS232
TXD+
TXD-
RXD
TXC+
TXD
TXC-
RXD+
GND
RXD-
RXC+
RXC-
F5259_B08
CABLE INSTALLATION

6-25
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Contents
1. SUMMARY
1-1
2. ABOUT CID
2-1
2.1 Main Function of CID .............................................................................2-1

2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
Configuration Management....................................................................... 2-1

Alarm Management .................................................................................... 2-2
Performance Management ........................................................................ 2-2
Maintenance Management ........................................................................ 2-3
Security Management ................................................................................ 2-3
2.2 Requirements .........................................................................................2-4

2.2.1
2.2.2
Hardware..................................................................................................... 2-4
Software ...................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Example Displays in Manuals...............................................................2-5

2.4 While Operating CID ..............................................................................2-5
3. CID INSTALLATION
3-1
3.1 Preparation Required before CID Installation......................................3-1

3.1.1
3.1.2
Preparation ................................................................................................. 3-1

Procedure ................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Install CID ...............................................................................................3-5

3.2.1 Task Flow .................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Procedure ................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2.1 Startup Installation Program ............................................................ 3-5
3.2.2.2 Operate with CID Installation Wizard .............................................. 3-7
3.2.2.3 Finish CID Installation .................................................................... 3-12
4. SETUP CID
4-1
4.1 Connect CID to V-NODE Equipment.....................................................4-1

4.1.1
4.1.2
Serial Port Connection (f Interface).......................................................... 4-2

Ethernet Communication (F Interface)..................................................... 4-2
4.2 Startup CID .............................................................................................4-3

4.3 Setup Communication Port...................................................................4-4
4.3.1
4.3.2
Serial Port Connection (f Interface).......................................................... 4-4

Ethernet Communication (F Interface)..................................................... 4-5
5. LOGIN/LOGOUT/EXIT
5-1
Contents
i
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
5.1 Things to Know Prior to Login .............................................................5-1

5.1.1 CIDs Role ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Accessing Restrictions ............................................................................. 5-1
5.1.3 Remote Login ............................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.4 User ID Restrictions................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.4.1 Use of User ID ................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.4.2 User Account Expiration .................................................................. 5-2
5.1.5 Password Restrictions .............................................................................. 5-2
5.1.5.1 Password Aging Function................................................................ 5-2
5.1.5.2 Invalid Password............................................................................... 5-2
5.1.6 Performance Restrictions ......................................................................... 5-2
5.1.7 Automatic Logout ...................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Login to NE.............................................................................................5-4

5.2.1 Local NE and Remote NE .......................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 Login to Local NE and Remote NE ........................................................... 5-5
5.2.2.1 Login to Local NE ............................................................................. 5-5
5.2.2.2 Login to Remote NE.......................................................................... 5-6
5.3 Logout of NE ..........................................................................................5-8

5.4 Exit CID ...................................................................................................5-8
5.4.1
Exit CID After Logged Out .................................................................... 5-8
5.4.2
Exit CID Without Logged Out ............................................................... 5-8
6. REGISTER USER
6-1
6.1 User Account Registration....................................................................6-1

6.1.1 User ID......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Password .................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.3 User Levels ................................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.3.1 Level1 (Lowest) User ........................................................................ 6-2
6.1.3.2 Level2 (Normal) User ........................................................................ 6-2
6.1.3.3 Level3 (High) User ............................................................................ 6-2
6.1.3.4 Level4 (Highest) User ....................................................................... 6-3
6.1.4 Waiting Time ............................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.5 Life Time ..................................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.6 No Time Limitation ..................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.7 Start Time.................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 User Management ..................................................................................6-4

6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
Display User Management Dialog Box..................................................... 6-4

Register User Account............................................................................... 6-5
Edit User Account ...................................................................................... 6-7
Delete User Account .................................................................................. 6-9
6.3 Change Password................................................................................6-10
7. WORKING WITH CID

Contents
ii
7-1
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
7.1 CID Main Window...................................................................................7-1

7.1.1
Items in CID Main Window ........................................................................ 7-2
7.2 NE Management Dialog Box .................................................................7-3

7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
Menu............................................................................................................ 7-4
Shortcut Buttons........................................................................................ 7-4
Close ........................................................................................................... 7-5
8. CID MENUS
8-1
8.1 CID Main Window...................................................................................8-1

8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
Menu Bar..................................................................................................... 8-1

File ............................................................................................................... 8-1
View ............................................................................................................. 8-1
Help ............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 NE Management Dialog Box .................................................................8-2

8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.2.9
Menu Bar..................................................................................................... 8-2

File ............................................................................................................... 8-2
Communication .......................................................................................... 8-2
Configuration.............................................................................................. 8-3
Alarm ........................................................................................................... 8-3
Performance ............................................................................................... 8-4
Maintenance ............................................................................................... 8-4
Security ....................................................................................................... 8-4
LAN-Interface.............................................................................................. 8-4
Contents
iii
E
F5259_B09
SpectralWave V-NODE
RELEASE 2.10
Craft Interface Device

(CID)
Operating Guide
NEC Corporation
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.

1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
1. SUMMARY
The CID Operating Guide is an instruction manual that gives necessary and basic
information in order to start operating NECs Craft Interface Device (CID). The
information contains approaches to the setup, connection, and login/logout (to/from an
NE) for CID.
Information on operating the V-Node by using the CID, such as setting up parameters,
maintaining equipment, retrieving reports, and more, is provided in other manuals:
Provisioning manual and Operation and Maintenance manual.
Summary
1-1
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
7. WORKING WITH CID

7.1 CID Main Window
After starting up the CID and logging in to an NE successfully, the CID main window
shown in Figure 7-1 below is displayed:
Menu Bar
Toolbar
Network Topology
Network Tree
Status Bar
Message window
Figure 7-1.
CID Main Window
The CID main window consists of menu, toolbar, status bar, network topology view,
network tree view and message window. All the functions can be operated conveniently
by mouse and keyboard operation.
Working with CID

D
7-1
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
7.1.1 Items in CID Main Window

The functions of the items in the CID main window are as follows:
Menu bar (consisting of File, View and Help)

File: Takes operation of Exit from the CID application software.
View: Specify whether to hide or show the toolbar, status bar, network tree view and
message view.
Help: Obtain help introduction and version information of the CID.
Toolbar (consisting of Quit and About, as shown in Figure 7-2 below:)
Figure 7-2.
Toolbar
Status Bar
Displays the information concerning to the running status of the CID operation.
Network Topology
This is the main operation platform. It displays all connection information on the
equipment.
In this window, NEs in normal operation are displayed in green. If an error occurs to
an NE, the corresponding NE is displayed in red for alarming. For such NEs, it is
possible to activate the further operation by double-clicking it in this window. After
the failures are cleared, the NE will be displayed in green again.
Network Tree
Also called as Guidance. This displays the network tree structure when configuring
network with several NEs. It is also possible to activate the further operation for an
NE by double-clicking the NE in the network tree.
Message Window
display the information of the current and objects as the function of guidance. For
example, when the OS sends commands down to the equipment or the equipment
reports its relevant messages up to the OS, these commands or messages will be
shown in the Status Bar.
Working with CID

7-2
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
7.2 NE Management Dialog Box

The CID retrieves the configuration information data on the equipment during logging in.
To manage or modify the NE, double-click the NE in Network Tree or click the NE in
Network Topology in the CID main window. A dialog box for the selected NE
management shown in Figure 7-3 appears. Users can see the information about the target
NE: type of equipment, working mode and alarm conditions, as well as they can take the
corresponding setting from this dialog box.
Figure 7-3.
NE Management Dialog Box
Working with CID

7-3
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
7.2.1 Menu
By using the menu (see Figure 7-4 below) on the NE Management dialog box,
configuration, alarm, performance and maintenance operation for the NE can be
performed.
Figure 7-4.
Menu Bar on NE Management Dialog Box
7.2.2 Shortcut Buttons

In order to provide convenience for user, the CID adopts shortcut mode and shortcut
buttons corresponding menu commands are provided under the menu bar.
Clock
Loopback
Alarm
Install
Attribute
Pm.
Timing
Log
Close
Figure 7-5.
Shortcut Buttons on NE Management Dialog Box
The following table lists the shortcut buttons supported by the CID, with their
corresponding menu command and function:
Working with CID

7-4
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Button
Menu Command
Function
File menu =>

Exit
Quits CID.
Configuration menu =>

Set NE Attribute
Modifies the installation configuration

information of NE.

Physical Slot Configure
Modifies the board configuration information

of NE.

Timing Source Configure
Modifies the timing source information of NE.

Adjust NE Time
Modifies the time setting of NE.
Alarm menu =>

Current Alarm
Views current alarm information of NE.
Performance menu =>

Current PM
Views current performance information of NE.
Maintenance menu =>

Loopback Control
Modifies the loopback setting of NE.
Security menu =>

Operation Log Browse
Views the operation log of NE.
7.2.3 Close
The CID closes the NE Management dialog box by selecting Close from the File menu.
Working with CID

7-5
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
6. REGISTER USER
This section provides a brief description about user accounts, procedures to add new
users, and edit/delete registered users.
6.1 User Account Registration

Registering a user account requires the following three main entries and four kinds of
operational periods:
User ID
Password
User Level
Waiting Time
Life Time
No Time Limitation
Start Time
This assignment can be performed only by (a) user(s) whose user level is Level3 or
higher. Refer to the section 6.1.3 User Levels for the user level.
6.1.1 User ID
All the valid ASCII can be used as user ID.
Character numbers of User ID is from 3 to 16 characters.
6.1.2 Password
All the valid ASCII can be used as password and from 8 to 16 characters can be set as
password.
Register User
6-1
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
6.1.3 User Levels

To protect the V-NODE from an unauthorized access, there are four user account levels
in the system: Level4 (Highest), Level3 (High), Level2 (Normal) and Level1 (Lowest).
The authority level for these users is as follows:
Lower
Level1(Lowest)
Authority Level
Level2 (Normal)
Level3 (High)
Higher
Level4 (Highest)
Figure 6-1. Authority Level of Users

The user level must be assigned when registering a new user. The following paragraphs
describe the definitions for these users.
6.1.3.1 Level1 (Lowest) User

Level1 (Lowest) User can take the operations such as NE attribute browsing, current
alarm browsing, alarm history browsing, performance (PM data) browsing, browsing
of properties such as kinds of events, cross connect configuration, version
information and alarm, J1 value browsing, and browsing external clock, line clock,
system clock, NE clock.
6.1.3.2 Level2 (Normal) User

In addition to the functions allowed for Level1 (Lowest) User, Level2 (Normal) User
can take the operations such as performance counter reset, the zero-value reporting
setting, mask alarm setting, alarm level modification, loopback modification, clock
status settings/canceling and cross connect.
6.1.3.3 Level3 (High) User

In addition to the functions allowed for Level2 (Normal) User, Level3 (High) User
can take the operations such as software updating, data uploading and downloading,
adding/deleting Level1 (Lowest) User and Level2 (Normal) User, as well as the
operations of level modifying, password setting and expiration setting (life time and
effective time) for Level1 (Lowest) User and Level2 (Normal) User.
Register User
6-2
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
6.1.3.4 Level4 (Highest) User

In addition to the functions allowed for Level3 (High) User, Level4 (Highest) User
can take the management (adding, deleting, modifying) for Level1 (Lowest) User,
Level2 (Normal) User, and Level3 (High) User. Level4 (Highest) User can also
browse operation log.
6.1.4 Waiting Time

Waiting time is an each users operational period, mainly aiming to log out the user
automatically from the NE when no operation has been performed by the user for the
period specified as Waiting Time. For example, if the user has not performed any
operations for more than one hour while 0 Date, 1 Hour is specified as Waiting Time,
the user will be logged out automatically from the NE. Once the user is logged out, it is
necessary to log in again
6.1.5 Life Time

Life Time is an expiration period that the user can exist in the NE. After the specified
period elapses, the user is automatically deleted from the NE.
6.1.6 No Time Limitation

When this function is attained, a user can exist in the NE without time limitation.
6.1.7 Start Time

Start Time is the time when the user starts up the equipment.
Start time should be current NE time or later.
Register User
6-3
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
6.2 User Management

The user management operations, such as adding/deleting of users and updating user
attributes, can be taken via the User Management dialog box. Perform the following
procedure to open the User Management dialog box.
6.2.1 Display User Management Dialog Box

Procedure
1. Start up the CID, and login to the NE with Level3 User or Level4 User.
2. In the CID main window, double-click the NE in Network Tree or in Network
Topology. A dialog box for the selected NE management appears.
3. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Security
User Management. The User Management dialog box appears.
Figure 6-2 shows an example:
Figure 6-2. User Management Dialog Box
Register User
6-4
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
In this dialog box:

Click the Retrieve button to report the information on all users in the NE to
the CID.
Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
For the desired management setting, go to the corresponding section as follows:
To register (add) new user accounts: 6.2.2 Register User Account.
To edit (modify) registered user accounts: 6.2.3 Edit User Account.
To delete registered user accounts: 6.2.4 Delete User Account.
6.2.2 Register User Account

Registration (addition) of users, including the setting of user name, password, authority
and expiration period (Waiting Time, Life Time, Start Time), is allowed for Level3 (High)
User and Level4 (Highest) User only. Note that the Level3 (High) User can add Level2
(Normal) User and Level1 (Lowest) User only, while the Level4 User (Administration
User) can add any type of users.
NOTE: Up to 27 Users can be registered to V-NODE
To add (register) users, perform the following:
Procedure
1. Open the User Management dialog box by referring to the section 6.2.1
Display User Management Dialog Box.
2. Click the Add button on the User Management dialog box (see Figure 6-2).
The User Information dialog box is displayed.
Figure 6-3 below shows an example:
Register User
6-5
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Figure 6-3. User Information Dialog Box (for User Addition)

3. Enter a User ID to be registered in the User ID text field.
NOTE:
The entry is case-sensitive.
4. Enter a password to be registered in the Password text field. Your entry here
will be indicated by asterisk (*) for security reasons.
NOTE:
The entry is case-sensitive.
5. Enter the same password again in the Confirm Password text field.
6. Select User Level by clicking a radio button in the User Level field.
7. Specify Waiting Time in the Waiting Time entry field.
8. Specify Life Time in the Life Time entry field, if necessary.
9. Click the check box No Time Limitation, if necessary.
NOTE:
When this box is checked, Life Time box is masked.
10. Specify the Start Time in the Start Time entry field.
NOTE:
Register User
6-6
Start time indicates the EMS time when open "User Information"
interface, user can adjust it according to the your need.
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
11. Confirm the settings and click the OK button. The User Information dialog
box is closed and the User Management dialog box will be displayed again
with the specified user added to its user list.
NOTE:
If the Cancel button on the User Information dialog box is clicked

instead of the OK button, the User Information dialog box is
closed ignoring all the setting specified in this dialog box, and the
User Management dialog box will be displayed again.
6.2.3 Edit User Account

Edition (modification) of user attributes, including the setting of password, authority and
effective time, is allowed for Level3 (High) User and Level4 (Highest) User only. Note
that the Level3 (High) User can modify user attributes for Level1 (Lowest) User and
Level2 (Normal) User only, while the Level4 (Highest) User can manage any type of
users.
To edit (modify) user attributes, perform the following procedure:
Procedure
2. In the User Management dialog box (see Figure 6-2), select the user for which
user attributes should be modified from the user list.
3. Click the Modify button on the User Management dialog box. The User
Information dialog box will be displayed.
Register User
6-7
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
6-1
Figure 6-4. User Information Dialog Box (for User Attribute Modification)
4. Specify the parameters to be modified in the User Information dialog box. For
the function of the items in this dialog box, refer to the section 6.1 User Account
Registration.
box is closed and the User Management dialog box will be displayed again.
NOTE:

Register User
6-8
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
6.2.4 Delete User Account

Deletion of users is allowed for Level3 (High) User and Level4 (Highest) User only. Note
that the Level3 (High) User can delete Level1 (Lowest) User and Level2 (Normal) User
only, while the Level4 (Highest) User can delete any type of users.
To delete users, perform the following:
Procedure
user attributes should be deleted from the user list.
3. Click the Delete button on the User Management dialog box. A confirmation
dialog box as shown in Figure 6-5 is displayed, asking whether to delete the
selected user.
Figure 6-5.
Confirming Dialog Box for User Deletion
4. Click the OK button to delete the selected user. To cancel user deletion, click the
Cancel button.
This step is the end of procedure.
Register User
6-9
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
6.3 Change Password

To edit (modify) user password, perform the following:
Procedure
user attributes should be modified from the user list.
3. Click the Modify button on the User Management dialog box. The User
Figure 6-6 below shows an example:
6-2
Figure 6-6. User Information Dialog Box (for User Attribute Modification)
4. Specify the password to be modified in the User Information dialog box. For
the function of the items in this dialog box, refer to the section 6.1 User Account
Registration.
NOTE:
Register User
6-10
Before password input, click key mark in the screen.
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
box is closed and the User Management dialog box will be displayed again.
NOTE:

Register User
6-11
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
5. LOGIN/LOGOUT/EXIT
Perform the steps in this procedure to login/logout to a local or remote network element
(NE).
5.1 Things to Know Prior to Login

5.1.1 CIDs Role
When using the CID, commands are issued to the NE to which the CID is currently
logged in. The CID is an application software that sets up and maintains each NE
individually.
5.1.2 Accessing Restrictions

Maximum eight users can access the same NE at the same time.
5.1.3 Remote Login

When the equipment communicates with the CID by direct connection, the equipment
can be defined as Local NE. When the equipment communicates with the CID through
optical transmission path and intermediate equipment, the equipment is defined as
Remote NE.
User can select local or remote login. Two kinds of login procedures are just same, but
note that some settings for NEs and CID running PC must be done before login to a
remote NE. Detail information for remote login is described in the section 5.2.2.2 Login
to Remote NE.
5.1.4 User ID Restrictions

5.1.4.1 Use of User ID
User ID should be the unique representative identification of a user; different users
cannot use a same user ID to login the NE at the same time. All the valid ASCII code can
be used as user ID and its range from 3 to 16 characters.
Login/Logout/Exit
5-1
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
5.1.4.2 User Account Expiration

User can set Life Time as user account expiration. The user account expiration can start
from 1980-01-01 to 2037-01-01, the lifetime can be set as 49710 days and 6 hours at
most. User account expiration means when the current time is over the specified life time,
the user will be logged out from the NE automatically. And when Level 4 user is selected,
this setting is masked.
5.1.5 Password Restrictions

5.1.5.1 Password Aging Function
Password is valid unless user account exceeds the Life Time. When the NE is initialized,
only the default user ID can remain.
5.1.5.2 Invalid Password

All the valid ASCII code can be used as password and its range from 8 to 16 characters.
5.1.6 Performance Restrictions

If the equipment communicates with the CID through optical transmission path and
intermediate equipment, the equipment is defined as Remote NE. When select Remote at
login, loopback function becomes disabled.
CAUTION
DO NOT REMOVE CID CONNECTION CABLE
WHILE IN THE CID OPERATION
If removed, the CID may be terminated forcibly, or another
session be rejected at login when connection is recovered.
To clear these problems, if happen, start CID again or
restart your PC.
5.1.7 Automatic Logout

When waiting time which set for the user ID in user management is expired, the user is
automatically logged out from NE.
Login/Logout/Exit
5-2
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
For example , if the waiting time is set as 1hour for one user ID ,and the user doesnt do
any operation in 1hour , then the users is automatically logged out from NE.
Login/Logout/Exit
5-3
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
5.2 Login to NE
5.2.1 Local NE and Remote NE
When the equipment communicates with the CID by direct connection, the equipment
can be defined as Local NE.
When the equipment communicates with the CID through optical transmission path and
intermediate equipment, the equipment is defined as Remote NE. When login remote NE,
loopback function for SDH interface is forbidden, but loopback for PDH interface is
allowed.
NOTE: CID operation via f interface supports only local management. The first login
after initializing for V-NODE is only made by f port. Only after setting IP
addresses of F port and DCC port through login to NE by f port is login to NE
by F port possible.
Figure 5-1 shows a connection image of Local and Remote NEs:
Local
Remote
CS
CS
MCP
5-4
P_INF
D_INF
CS
CS
MCP
Login/Logout/Exit
P_INF
P_INF
Local and Remote NEs
P_INF
D_INF
Figure 5-1.
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
5.2.2 Login to Local NE and Remote NE

5.2.2.1 Login to Local NE
Procedure
1. Confirm that the proper connection between the CID and NE is made.
2. Start up the CID and open the NE Login dialog box by referring to the section
4.2 Startup CID.
3. In the NE Login dialog box, enter user ID and password.
Figure 5-2.
NE Logon Dialog Box
The default User ID and password are shown below:
USER ID
PASSWORD
Life Time
Default User Setup
Spwv_Vnode
cMPCT_sdh
Unlimited
NOTE: For security purpose, it is recommanded to delete default user ID and

password.
4. Confirm the entered user ID and password, then select Local by clicking the
radio button for local NE, or select Remote by clicking the radio button for
remote NE.
NOTE: When clicking Remote button, the loopback function from CID is rejected.
Login/Logout/Exit
5-5
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
5. Click the OK button to login. During logging in operation, the following window
(Figure 5-3) will be displayed. This window will be disappeared after login is
finished completely.
Figure 5-3.
Wait Window (During Logging-In)
NOTE: When registered User ID is already expired, error message: This user
id has invalidated appears.
6. After successful login, CID will collect the NE data and enter network manager
interface after collecting completely.
5.2.2.2 Login to Remote NE

Login to remote NE is only made by F port. The procedure of login to remote NE is as
same as that of login to local NE, but before login to a remote NE , some settings must be
done. An example including two NEs and one PC is given to illustrate these settings.
In the example, the settings for two NEs include two items: IP address settings of F
interface and DCC and the settings for CID running PC also include two items: IP address
setting and gateway address setting.
Figure 5-4 shows the NEs and PCs network connection and an example of theirs IP
settings.
Login/Logout/Exit
5-6
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Figure 5-4.
NE IP Setting (for example )
Table below gives the corresponding IP parameter setting.

DCC PORT
OBJECT
Local
Remote
PC
PORT
IP PARAMETERS
PORT
POSITION
PORT
ALLOCATION
IP
SUBNET
ADDRESS
MASK
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
Port 1
STM-16-E
Network
192.1.1.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.1.255
LAN
Port 1
STM-16-W
User
LAN
192.254.1.1 255.255.255.0
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.254.1.255
192.1.1.255
192.254.2.1 255.255.255.0
192.254.2.255
192.254.1.2 255.255.255.0
192.254.1.255
NOTE: PCs gateway must be set as local NEs IP address. In the example it should be
set as 192.254.1.1
Please refer to the section 7.2 IP Parameter Setup and7.3 DCC Link Layer Setup in
Provisioning manual for IP settings and DCC settings.
After these settings are finished, please refer to the section 5.2.2.1 Login to Local NE for
the rest procedures of remote login.
NOTE: The communication for the CID logging on remotely might be interrupted when
the network's routing switch happens, please close the CID and log on again.
Login/Logout/Exit
5-7
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
5.3 Logout of NE
To logout the NE, perform the following procedure:
Procedure
1. Confirm the modifications that user had done should be set or canceled.
2. Close the window under operation.
3. Logout from the NE on CID.
5.4 Exit CID

To close the CID application and to terminate communication between CID and the NE,
perform the following procedure:
5.4.1 Exit CID After Logged Out

Procedure
2. Remove the cable between NE and CID.
3. Exit CID.
5.4.2 Exit CID Without Logged Out

Procedure
2. Logout from the NE on CID
3. Remove the cable between NE and CID.
4. Exit CID.
Login/Logout/Exit
5-8
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
4. SETUP CID
4.1 Connect CID to V-NODE Equipment
The management interfaces of the V-NODE provided to users has F interface (10Base-T
interface) and f interface (RS-232C). Users can choose either of them according to their
demand.
CAUTION
RS-232C cable length should
be less than 15 m (49.2 ft).
CAUTION
For RS-232C connection via f interface, dedicated
cable (E32-033-J8769-xxxx) for V-NODE f interface
should be used.
CAUTION
f interface is not used for remote access. To access
remote V-NODE via local V-NODE, F interface should
be used.
CAUTION
When using F port to remote login and selecting
Remote at Login screen, please don't operate SDH
interface Loopback setting. The setting might not be
relieved because you disconnect to remote and can
not login again.
Setup CID
4-1
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Figure 4-1 shows an example of connection between the CID and V-NODE equipment.
F port CID (CID1 in the figure) can operate V-Node: NE1, NE 2, NE 3, NE 4 and f port
CID (CID2 in the figure) only can operate V-Node NE3 (local NE)
NE 2
NE 1
F
NE 4
CI D1
NE 3
CID2
Figure 4-1. Connection Between CID and V-NODE
4.1.1 Serial Port Connection (f Interface)

Procedure
1. Connect the RJ-45 side of CID cable to f port of V-NODE.
2. Connect the other side of CID cable to serial port of PC.
NOTE: The f port can only access to local.
4.1.2 Ethernet Communication (F Interface)

Procedure
1. Connect one side of RJ-45 cable to F port of V-NODE.
2. Connect the other side of RJ-45 cable to Ethernet port of PC.
Setup CID
4-2
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
4.2 Startup CID

The steps to start up CID are the exactly the same with those of other Windows
applications.
Procedure
1. Confirm that the physical connection between the CID port and a port on
V-NODE equipment is made correctly.
2. Turn on the computer, and wait until Windows is ready.
3. Double-click the startup icon
to start the CID.
4. The Startup Setting dialogue box as shown in the Figure 4-2 appears:
Figure 4-2.
Set Dialog Box (for Connection Configuration)
5. Select the language to be displayed in the CID by clicking a radio button for
English or Chinese.
This step is the end of procedure. Go to the next procedure to set up
communications.
Setup CID
4-3
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
4.3 Setup Communication Port

The information entered by these procedures is saved to the registry, and need not to be
entered again unless a change needs to be made.
Methods for CID communication setup differ depending on the connections as shown
below:
Serial port connection: Communication with f interface. Select COM.
Ethernet communication: Communication with F interface. Select IP Address.
4.3.1 Serial Port Connection (f Interface)

NOTE: The f port can only access to local.
Procedure
1. Start up CID (see the section 4.2 Startup CID), and open the Startup Setting
dialog box.
2. Select the ENGLISH at Language.
3. Click the check box Online (leaving a tick) so that the CID communicates with
SDH equipment.
NOTE: When this check box is not selected, the CID runs on offline. Even if
running on offline, the CID can show the most of the screens. Offline
operation may be used for the training for CID operation.
4. Click the radio box COM.
NOTE: When COM is selected, the text field for IP Address becomes disabled.
5. Enter the corresponding serial port (COM port number).
NOTE: Only 38400 should be set as baud rate.
Setup CID
4-4
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Figure 4-3.
Example of COM Setting
6. Confirm the entered values, then click the Ok button. The NE Login dialog box
will be displayed.
This step is the end of the procedure. Go to the section 5. Login/Logout/Exit to
login.
4.3.2 Ethernet Communication (F Interface)

When the CID manages the V-NODE via the Ethernet communication, the Ethernet port
of equipment, namely F interface, can be connected to PC (including notebook-type PC)
directly or through LAN. Refer to the section 4.1 Connect CID to V-NODE Equipment
for details.
Procedure
1. Start up CID (see the section 4.2 Startup CID), and open the Startup Setting
dialog box.
2. Select the ENGLISH at Language.
3. Click the check box Online (leaving a tick) so that the CID communicate with
SDH equipment.
NOTE: When this check box is not selected, the CID runs on offline. During
running on offline, the CID cannot configure or control the equipment.
Setup CID
4-5
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
4. Click the radio box IP Address.

NOTE: When IP Address is selected, the text field for COM becomes disabled.
5. Enter the corresponding IP address to login.
NOTE: IP address here mentioned here is for F interface of V-NODE, and not
for CID. Inputting Dccr IP also can login, but in order to manage the
V-NODE, please use F port IP.
Figure 4-4.
Example of IP Address Setting
6. Confirm the entered values, then click the Ok button. The NE Login dialog box
will be displayed.
This step is the end of the procedure. Go to the section 5. Login/Logout/Exit to
login.
Setup CID
4-6
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
3. CID INSTALLATION
3.1 Preparation Required before CID Installation
3.1.1 Preparation
In order to avoid unsteady operations, which may cause some failures, the following
preparations are necessary before installing the CID:
1. Check hardware environment
2. Prepare CID installation disk (CD-ROM)
3. Setup display resolution, color number and appearance requirement
4. Install TCP/IP protocol
5. Specify IP address
6. Set PC LAN interface as 10M/Half.
NOTE: If Network equipment is used between PC and NE, Network equipment Ether
interface is change to 10M/half Duplex. When PC or Router connect to
V-NODE F port, the port for PC or Router need set to 10M/half Duplex.
7. Set PC time
8. Install printer (if necessary)
3.1.2 Procedure
1. Check hardware environment (basic system requirements).
2. Check that the hardware environment satisfies the requirements shown in the
section 2. About CID; 2.2 Requirements.
3. Prepare CID installation disk (CD-ROM).
4. Set display resolution, color number and appearance.
Set resolution as 1024 * 768 or more and color number 256 or better.
CID Installation
3-1
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
5. Setup TCP/IP Protocols.

Check that TCP/IP protocol has been installed in the operating system. Select
Start -> Settings -> Control Panel -> Network and Dial-up Connections-> Local
Area Connection to open the Network dialog box (Figure 3-1). When a
Network Neighborhood icon is prepared on the desktop, the Network dialog box
can also be displayed by right-clicking this icon and select Property from the
displayed menu.
If there is no TCP/IP, select Add -> Protocol -> Microsoft -> TCP/ IP then add
the TCP/IP protocol.
Figure 3-1.
Setting Network Connection Protocol
6. Specify IP Address.
You can select TCP/IP and click the Property button (or double-click
TCP/IP) in the Network dialog box. TCP/IP property dialog box (Figure 3-2)
will be displayed. Click IP Address tab and specify the IP address according to
your fact instance.
CID Installation
3-2
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Figure 3-2.
Specify IP address
7. Install Printer (if necessary).

Check that a printer has been installed in the operating system. Select Start ->
Setting -> Printer to open the Printer dialog box (Figure 3-3). If no printer has
been installed, double-click Add Printer then install the printer according to the
printer installation wizard.
CID Installation
3-3
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Figure 3-3.
Install Printer
This step is the end of the procdure.
CID Installation
3-4
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
3.2 Install CID

3.2.1 Task Flow
The CID is installed according to the following procedure:
1. Startup CID installation program.
2. Operate with CID installation wizard.
3. Enter user information.
4. Choose destination location.
5. Select components.
6. Select program folder.
7. Finish the installation and restart the computer.
3.2.2 Procedure
3.2.2.1 Startup Installation Program
1. Turn on the PC and startup the OS.
2. Close all other application programs, including varied tool item and background
program (such as business application software).
3. Insert the installation disk (CID CD-ROM) into the CD-ROM drive. The
installation wizard automatically starts up. Then go to Step 6.
If the installation wizard does not start, perform Steps 4 and 5.
4. Click the Start button to show the menu, and select Run. A dialog box with an
entry field appears.
5. Enter the path in which the CID setup program exists (see the following example),
then click the OK button.
CID Installation
3-5
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Figure 3-4. Run Setup

6. The Setup dialog box shown in Figure 3-5 below appears, showing that all data
required for CID installation is loaded automatically. After preparation is
completed, the Welcome dialog box will appear to start the CID installation
wizard.
Figure 3-5. Setup Diagram (Loading)

CID Installation
3-6
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
3.2.2.2 Operate with CID Installation Wizard

After all the necessary data has been loaded, the CID installation wizard will start
with the Welcome dialog box (Figure 3-6).
1. Click the Next button on the Welcome dialog box to proceed. The User
NOTE: Clicking the Cancel button quits the CID installation.
Figure 3-6.
Welcome Dialog Box
2. In the User Information dialog box (Figure 3-7), enter users name, company
name and the product serial number. Then click the Next button to proceed. The
Choose Destination Location dialog box will be displayed.
The loading program will record your information.
CID Installation
3-7
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Figure 3-7. Users information Dialog Box

3. The Choose Destination Location dialog box (Figure 3-8) shows the
destination folder to which the CID program is to be installed. The default
directory is C:\CID_for_V-NODE V.xxx (xxx means the version of the CID).
Figure 3-8.
CID Installation
3-8
Choose Destination Location Dialog box
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
To change the default destination, click the Browse button to open the Choose
Folder dialog box (Figure 3-9). Enter a desired destination location, then click
the OK button to go back to the Choose Destination Location dialog box.
Figure 3-9.
Choose Folder Dialog box
NOTE: When you entering the destination location, the installation folder
should not more than 3 layers and the characters should not more than
255 byte.
Confirm the destination location you have chosen, then click the Next button on
the Choose Destination Location dialog box. The Select Components
dialog box will be displayed.
4. In the Select Components dialog box (Figure 3-10), select the components to
be installed by clicking the check box on the left of each component (leaving a
tick). After selecting all components to be installed, then click the Next button.
The Select Program Folder dialog box will be displayed.
NOTE: All components should be selected.
CID Installation
3-9
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Figure 3-10.
Select Component Dialog box
5. In the Select Program Folder dialog box (Figure 3-11), select the program
folder in which the shortcut icon of the CID application software should be
created and saved. You can select the default folder (named CID) or another
existing program folder. It is also possible to prepare a new program folder by
entering a new folder name in the Program Folders field.
After selecting (clicking) the program folder, click the Next button. The Setup
Complete dialog box will be displayed.
CID Installation
3-10
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
Figure 3-11.
Select Program Folder Dialog box
NOTE: Program folder means the menu item list, which can be seen by clicking
start -> program on the system. Each program folder contains
many program items, each of them is a functional program, and each
application will be started up by selecting the corresponding the
program in it.
CID Installation
3-11
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
3.2.2.3 Finish CID Installation

Installation program goes to general setting after the replication work of installation
disk finished. Some information will automatically appear and disappear on the
screen, and when all the settings have been completed, the Setup Complete dialog
box (Figure 3-12) will be displayed.
Figure 3-12.
Setup Complete Dialog box
Click the Finish button to complete the CID installation.

CID Installation
3-12
E
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
2. ABOUT CID
CID (Craft Interface Device) is an advanced element management system developed for
the V-NODE, conforming to ITU-T recommendations. It manages the V-NODE in the
light of relevant recommendation requirements and realizes alarm management,
performance management, configuration management, maintenance management and
security management.
2.1 Main Function of CID

The main functions of the CID are as follows:
- NE and network configuration management (including cross connection function)
- Pinpoint alarm management
- Veracious performance monitoring
- Effective maintenance function
- Reliable security management
2.1.1 Configuration Management

Configuration management includes working parameter setup for NE, configuration of
extended board required for NE operation, effective timing source setup, equipment and
resource control and traffic management.
NE equipment management is mainly to configure attributes for NE, main board and
extended boards. Attributes for NE equipment are equipment types, NE interface,
protection switching group, NE timing source setting, etc.
Traffic management includes the management of transmission, end users and cross
connection.
About CID
2-1
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
2.1.2 Alarm Management

Alarm management is a network management function, which is related to equipment
failure management, such as monitoring, diagnosis, renew and eliminate. Its object is to
guarantee so that the network can provide continuous and reliable service. Main function
of alarm management provides alarm monitoring, alarm orientation and alarm analysis:
Alarm monitoring: Provides real-time monitoring of the NE operation status in
network and analysis, estimates the character and severity level
according to the alarm report.
Alarm orientation: Used for failure orientation. In general, failure is to be orientated
after analyzing many NE alarm reports.
Alarm analysis:
Provides an analysis report of the failure.
2.1.3 Performance Management

Performance management can report and evaluate the status of the related transmission
equipment and efficiency of network or network unit. Main function of performance
management is to collect various statistics for monitoring, to revise the status and
efficiency of network, network unit, or equipment, and to assist programming and
analysis.
Performance management provides 15-minute register and 24-hour register for each
performance monitoring. The former one holds accumulated performance monitoring
data of every 15-minute period, and the latter holds accumulated performance monitoring
data of every 24-hour period. Each register can be classified into current register and
history register.
The choice of performance monitoring type can be divided into 15-minute and 24-hour
affair according to cycle area. Monitoring object is one NE, one unit or one interface.
Performance management can possess setting of monitoring object, examination of
performance data, setting of threshold data, performance analysis and mimeograph of
performance report.
About CID
2-2
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
2.1.4 Maintenance Management

Maintenance management provides convenient equipment maintenance operation for
users and helps them to find out the failure rapidly and clear it in time to ensure the
normal operation of SDH sub-network. Main function of the maintenance management
includes unit reset, loopback control, online software download:
- Unit reset
- Equipment can reset its original setting on each unit. Take FE board for example, it can
reset its original setting individually without effecting other packages.
- Loopback control
- Equipment Initialization
- Software upgrade
The software can be downloaded via online and the current version can be obtained
(updated) smoothly without influence of running traffic. But note the traffic will be down
if update FPGA.
2.1.5 Security Management

Security Management provides security environment for user, which permits only
registered user, for example, to configure NE, to monitor alarm and status from NE, and
to download firmware to NE.
Usable functions for each user should be limited according to user level of each user.
About CID
2-3
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
2.2 Requirements
Verify that the system meets the minimum requirements listed below:
2.2.1 Hardware
HARDWARE
SPECIFICATION
CPU
Intel PentiumII/266 or equivalent and above
RAM
64Mbytes or more
Hard Disk available space
40Mbytes or more
Disk Drive
CD-ROM drive (recommended) or 3-inch FD drive
Serial Port
D-Sub 9 pin (operation with CID by f port )
LAN Interface card
(if remote operation or local operation by F port)
Printer
(if necessary)
2.2.2 Software
SOFTWARE
SPECIFICATION
Operating System
Microsoft Windows 98/98SE/2000/XP or Windows NT

(NOTE 1, 2 and 3)
Application
NEC CID for V-NODE
Printer Driver
(if necessary)
NOTE:
1. In addition, the system must support TCP/IP protocol.
2. Regarding Windows NT 4.0, SP6a or later is necessary.
3. OS is supported only English version.
About CID
2-4
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
2.3 Example Displays in Manuals

Examples for CID windows and dialog boxes provided throughout in the V-NODE
USERS MANUAL may look different from those on the actual display.
2.4 While Operating CID
CAUTION
DO NOT REMOVE CID CONNECTION CABLE
WHILE IN THE CID OPERATION
If removed, the CID may be terminated forcibly, or another
session be rejected at login when connection is recovered.
To clear these problems, if happen, start CID again or
restart your PC.
About CID
2-5
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
8. CID MENUS
8.1 CID Main Window
8.1.1 Menu Bar
8.1.3
8.1.2
8.1.4
Figure 8-1.
Menu Bar of CID Main Window
8.1.2 File
Sub Menu
Logout
Dialog Box
Confirm to logout Dialog
8.1.3 View
Sub Menu
Dialog Box
Tools
Status
Net Tree View
Message View
8.1.4 Help
Sub Menu
About CID_for_V-Node
Dialog Box
Copyright Information
CID Menus
8-1
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
8.2 NE Management Dialog Box

8.2.1 Menu Bar
8.2.7
8.2.2
8.2.8
8.2.3
Figure 8-2.
8.2.9
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
Menu Bar of NE Management Dialog Box
8.2.2 File
Sub Menu
Database Upload/Download
Dialog Box
Database Upload/Download
Log off
Close window
8.2.3 Communication
Sub Menu
IP Parameter Setup
IP Parameter Setup
Physical Layer Setup
DCC Link Layer Setup
Route Table
Route Table
CID Menus
8-2
Dialog Box
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
8.2.4 Configuration
Sub Menu
Dialog Box
Setup NE
Setup-NE Attribute
Set NE Attribute
Setup (with Set NE Attribute tab)
Physical Slot Configuration
Setup (with Physical Slot Configuration tab)
Board protect Configuration
Package Protect Configuration
Timing Source Configuration
Setup (with Timing Source Configuration tab)
Timing Source Attribute
Setup (with Timing Source Attribute tab)
Set 2M EXT CLK Output
Set Output-Clock Port
MSP Group Configuration
Set MSP Group
MSP Configuration
Set MSP
MSPring Configuration
MSPring Management
AU Squelch Configuration
AU Squelch Configuration
Cross Connect Configuration
Cross Connect Configuration
Port Configuration
Port Configuration
Port Enable
Port Enable Manager
Set Trace Message
Set Trace message
Set HKA/HKC
Set HKA/HKC
Orderwire
and
Configuration
User
CH
(wizard)
Orderwire and User CH Configuration
Adjust NE Time
Adjust NE Time
Physical Link Configuration
Physical Link Configuration
Laser management
Laser Management
8.2.5 Alarm
Sub Menu
Dialog Box
Current Alarm
Alarm Monitor (with Current Alarm tab)
History Alarm
Alarm Monitor (with History Alarm tab)
Actual Alarm
Alarm Monitor (with Actual Alarm tab)
Alarm Attribute Setup
Alarm Attribute Setup
Event View
Event View
Set HKA/HKC Name
Set HKA/HKC Name
CID Menus
8-3
F5259_B09
CID OPERATING GUIDE
8.2.6 Performance
Sub Menu
Current PM
Dialog Box
Current PM-15m Data
Current PM-24h Data
History PM
History PM-15m Data

History PM-24h Data
PM Counter Reset
PM Counter Reset
PM Item Setup
PM Item Setup
PM Attribute Setup
PM Attribute Setup
8.2.7 Maintenance
Sub Menu
Dialog Box
Loopback Control
Loopback Control
Equipment Reset
Equipment Reset
Erase NE History Data
Erase NE History Data
Set History Data Save Mode
Set History Data Save Mode
Upgrade F/W and FPGA
Upgrade F/W and FPGA
8.2.8 Security
Sub Menu
Dialog Box
Operation Log
Operation Log Browse
User Management
User Management
User Information
8.2.9 LAN-Interface
Sub Menu
Ethernet Port Configuration
Ethernet Port Configuration
Layer 2 Configuration
Encapsulation Configuration
Encapsulation Configuration
Bandwidth Configuration
Bandwidth Configuration
CID Menus
8-4
Dialog Box
F5259_B10
SpectralWave V-NODE
RELEASE 2.10
Provisioning
NEC Corporation
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B10
PROVISING
Contents
1. SUMMARY
1-1
1.1 Tasks.......................................................................................................1-2
2. PRELIMINARY CHECKS
2-1
3. TURN ON THE POWER OF V-NODE
3-1
3.1 Apply Power to Equipment ...................................................................3-2
4. REGISTER NE CONFIGURATION
4-1
4.1 Adjust NE Time ......................................................................................4-2

4.1.1
4.1.2
Parameters ................................................................................................. 4-2

Procedure: Adjust NE Time ...................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Setup NE.................................................................................................4-4

4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
Starting NE Setup (Initialization) .............................................................. 4-4

Setup NE Attribute ..................................................................................... 4-5
Setup Physical Slot Configuration ........................................................... 4-7
Package Protect Configuration .............................................................. 4-13
Setup NE Timing Source ......................................................................... 4-20
Setup Timing Source Switching Type.................................................... 4-28
Setup-Timing Source Attributes ............................................................. 4-30
Complete NE Setup ................................................................................. 4-34
4.3 Set 2M EXT CLK Output ......................................................................4-35

4.3.1
4.3.2
Items and Parameters ............................................................................. 4-35

Procedure: Set Output-Clock Port ......................................................... 4-36
4.4 Setup MSP Configuration....................................................................4-37

4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3

Procedure: Set MSP Configuration ........................................................ 4-38
Check MSP switch status........................................................................ 4-42
4.5 Setup MSPring Configuration.............................................................4-45

4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3

Example Description ............................................................................... 4-47
Procedure: Set MSPring Configuration ................................................. 4-48
4.6 AU Squelch Configuration ..................................................................4-80
Contents
-i-
F5259_B10
PROVISING
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3

Example Description ............................................................................... 4-82
Procedure: Set AU Configuration........................................................... 4-85
4.7 Setup Port Configuration ....................................................................4-90

4.7.1
4.7.2

Procedure: Setup Port Configuration .................................................... 4-92
4.8 Setup Port Enable ................................................................................4-96

4.8.1
4.8.2

Procedure: Setup Port Enable................................................................ 4-98
4.9 Setup Trace Massage ........................................................................4-101

4.9.1
4.9.2
Items and Parameters ........................................................................... 4-101

Procedure: Setup Trace Message ........................................................ 4-101
4.10 Setup HKA/HKC .................................................................................4-103

4.10.1 HKA Setup .............................................................................................. 4-103
4.10.2 HKC Setup .............................................................................................. 4-105
4.11 Laser Management ............................................................................4-107

4.11.1 Attribute setting ..................................................................................... 4-107
4.11.1.1
Items and Parameters................................................................... 4-107
4.11.1.2
Procedure: Laser Attribute setting.............................................. 4-108
4.11.2 Manual Open .......................................................................................... 4-110
4.11.2.1
Items and Parameters................................................................... 4-110
4.11.2.2
Procedure: Laser Manual Open................................................... 4-111
4.12 Setup LAN-Interface Port Configuration.......................................... 4-112

4.12.1 Parameters ............................................................................................. 4-113
4.12.2 Procedure: Setup Port Configuration .................................................. 4-114
4.13 Setup LAN-Interface Layer 2 Configuration .................................... 4-118

4.13.1
4.13.2
4.13.3
4.13.4
4.13.5
4.13.6
Bridge ..................................................................................................... 4-119

STP Config.............................................................................................. 4-125
Trunk ....................................................................................................... 4-127
VLAN ....................................................................................................... 4-131
STP Port.................................................................................................. 4-136
MAC Table .............................................................................................. 4-138
4.14 Setup LAN Interface Encapsulation Configuration.........................4-140

4.14.1 Parameters ............................................................................................. 4-140
4.14.2 Procedure: Setup Encapsulation Configuration................................. 4-141
4.15 Setup LAN Interface Bandwidth Configuration ...............................4-144

4.15.1 Parameters ............................................................................................. 4-144
4.15.2 Procedure: Setup Bandwidth Configuration ....................................... 4-145
5. SPECIFY NETWORK TOPOLOGY

Contents
- ii -
5-1
F5259_B10
PROVISING
5.1 Point to Point .........................................................................................5-2

5.2 Linear ......................................................................................................5-3
5.3 MS-SP Ring ............................................................................................5-4
5.4 Multi-Ring ...............................................................................................5-5
6. SETUP CROSSCONNECT
6-1
6.1 Crossconnection Type ..........................................................................6-1

6.2 Cross Connect Configuration Dialog Box ...........................................6-2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
Open Cross Connect Configuration Dialog Box..................................... 6-2

Items in Cross Connect Configuration Dialog Box ................................ 6-3
Pop-Up Menu for Time Slot Configuration .............................................. 6-5
6.3 Task Flow for Crossconnection Setup.................................................6-8

6.3.1
6.3.2
Task Flow.................................................................................................... 6-8

General Procedure for Crossconnection Setup...................................... 6-8
6.4 Time Slot Connection (without protective TS) .................................. 6-11

6.5 Broadcast Time Slot Connection........................................................6-12
6.6 Protective Time Slot Connection........................................................6-14
6.7 Time Slot Connection Configuration used text interfaces ...............6-18
6.7.1
6.7.2
General Procedure for Crossconnection Retrieve ............................... 6-18

General Procedure for Crossconnection Setup.................................... 6-19
7. SETUP NETWORK CONNECTION
7-1
7.1 Overview.................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1
Network Example....................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 IP Parameter Setup ................................................................................7-2

7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
Open IP parameters Setup Dialog Box .................................................... 7-3

Add/Modify/Delete IP Parameters............................................................. 7-4
Print IP Parameters.................................................................................... 7-5
7.3 DCC Link Layer Setup ...........................................................................7-7

7.3.1
7.3.2
Parameter ................................................................................................... 7-7

Procedure: Setup DCC Link Layer ........................................................... 7-8
7.4 Physical Layer Setup........................................................................... 7-11

7.4.1
7.4.2
Parameters ............................................................................................... 7-11

Procedure: Setup Physical Layer........................................................... 7-14
7.5 Static Route Setting.............................................................................7-23

7.5.1
7.5.2
Parameters ............................................................................................... 7-24

Procedure: Add/Modify/Delete Static and Default Routing.................. 7-25
7.6 Orderwire and User CH Configuration ...............................................7-30

Contents
- iii -
F5259_B10
PROVISING
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.6.4
Parameters ............................................................................................... 7-30

Procedure: Setup Orderwire Attribute ................................................... 7-33
Procedure: Setup Orderwire Channel.................................................... 7-35
Procedure: Setup User Channel............................................................. 7-37
8. ACCEPTANCE TEST
8-1
8.1 Examine Alarm Status ...........................................................................8-2

8.1.1
8.1.2
Apparatus ................................................................................................... 8-2

Procedure: Examine Alarm Status ........................................................... 8-2
8.2 Local Node Acceptance Test ................................................................8-4

8.2.1
LED Test ..................................................................................................... 8-4
8.3 Line Facility Acceptance Test ............................................................. 8-11

8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
Optical Output Level Test........................................................................ 8-11

Optical Line Bit Error Test....................................................................... 8-13
Optical Receiver Sensitivity Test............................................................ 8-14
8.4 Traffic Connectivity Acceptance Test.................................................8-16

8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
Apparatus ................................................................................................. 8-16

Requirements ........................................................................................... 8-16
Procedure: Verify Crossconnect Condition .......................................... 8-16
8.5 Network System Acceptance Test ......................................................8-17

8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
Apparatus ................................................................................................. 8-17

Path Protection Performance Test ......................................................... 8-17
Orderwire Function Test.......................................................................... 8-18
User Channel Connection Test............................................................... 8-19
9. PARAMETER CHANGE
9-1
9.1 Date and Time ........................................................................................9-2

9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
Precautions ................................................................................................ 9-2

Parameters ................................................................................................. 9-2
Steps ........................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 NE Configuration ...................................................................................9-4

9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
9.2.7
9.2.8
9.2.9
Contents
- iv -
Open Setup dialog box.............................................................................. 9-4

NE Attributes .............................................................................................. 9-6
Physical Slot Configuration...................................................................... 9-9
Package Protect Configuration .............................................................. 9-11
Timing Source Configuration ................................................................. 9-17
Timing Source Switching Type............................................................... 9-20
Timing Source Attribute .......................................................................... 9-22
Set 2M EXT CLK Output .......................................................................... 9-24
MSPring Configuration............................................................................ 9-26
F5259_B10
PROVISING
9.2.10
9.2.11
9.2.12
9.2.13
9.2.14
9.2.15
9.2.16
9.2.17
9.2.18
9.2.19
AU Squelch Configuration ...................................................................... 9-29

Port Configuration ................................................................................... 9-30
Setup Port Enable.................................................................................... 9-39
Trace Message ......................................................................................... 9-41
HKA/HKC Name ....................................................................................... 9-43
Laser Management .................................................................................. 9-47
LAN-Interface Port Configuration .......................................................... 9-52
LAN-Interface Layer 2 Configuration ..................................................... 9-55
LAN-Interface Encapsulation and LCAS Configura- tion..................... 9-59
LAN-Interface Bandwidth Configuration ............................................... 9-61
9.3 Crossconnect.......................................................................................9-63
9.4 Network Connection ............................................................................9-64
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
9.4.7
IP Parameter ............................................................................................. 9-64

DCC Link Layer ........................................................................................ 9-65
Physical Layer.......................................................................................... 9-67
Routing ..................................................................................................... 9-77
Orderwire Configuration ......................................................................... 9-79
Orderwire Channel Configuration .......................................................... 9-81
User Channel Configuration ................................................................... 9-83
9.5 Alarm Attributes...................................................................................9-85

9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
9.5.4
Precautions .............................................................................................. 9-85

Parameters ............................................................................................... 9-86
Steps ......................................................................................................... 9-87
Procedure: Modify Alarm Attribute ........................................................ 9-87
9.6 Performance Monitoring .....................................................................9-88

9.6.1
9.6.2
Modifying PM Items ................................................................................. 9-89

Modifying PM Attributes.......................................................................... 9-91
10. RESTRICTIONS IN DELETING
10-1
Contents
-vE
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
1. SUMMARY
This manual provides the explanation of the tasks from the essential registrations, then
parameter changes and additional setups, shown in the table below. The procedures
regarding the V-NODE operations are provided in the Operation and Maintenance
manual.
Summary
1-1
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
1.1 Tasks
TASKS
ESSENTIAL
ADD/MODIFY
Adjust NE Time
4.1
9.1
Setup NE
4.2
Setup NE Attribute
4.2.2
9.2.2
Setup Physical Slot Configuration
4.2.3
9.2.3
Board Protect Configuration
4.2.4
9.2.4
Setup NE Timing Source
4.2.5
9.2.5
Timing Source Switching Type
4.2.6
9.2.6
Timing Source Attributes
4.27
9.2.7
Set 2M EXT CLK Output
4.3
9.2.8
Setup MSP Configuration
4.4
Setup MSPring Configuration
4.5
9.2.9
Setup AU Squelch Configuration
4.6
9.2.10
Setup Port Configuration
4.7
9.2.11
Setup Port Enable
4.8
9.2.12
Setup Trace Massage
4.9
9.2.13
4.10.1
9.2.14.2
4.10.2
Change HKC Name
9.2.14.3
Laser Management
4.11
9.2.15
Set
LAN-Interface
Port Configuration
4.12
9.2.16
4.13
9.2.17
LAN Interface Encapsulation
4.14
9.2.18
4.15
9.2.19
Specify Network Topology
5.
Setup Crossconnect
6.
9.3
Modify NE
Configuration
HKA Setup
Change HKA Name
HKC Setup
Configuration
LAN Interface Bandwidth
Configuration
Summary
1-2
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Setup
Network
Connection
TASKS
ESSENTIAL
ADD/MODIFY
IP Parameter
7.2
9.4.1
7.3
9.4.2
7.4
9.4.3
Static Route Setting
7.5
9.4.4
Setup Orderwire Attribute
7.6.2
9.4.5
Setup Orderwire Channel
7.6.3
9.4.6
Setup User Channel
7.6.4
9.4.7
9.5
Modifying PM Items
9.6.1
Modifying PM Attributes
9.6.2
8.
Alarm Attributes
Specify
Performance
Monitoring
Acceptance
Test
Summary
1-3
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9. PARAMETER CHANGE
This section provides information and precautions required when modifying parameters
that specify the target objects operations. These changes do not affect the registered
configuration.
To Change Parameters that are not modifiable

Some registered parameters are not available to be modified. To change such
parameters, they should be once deleted and then registered again with new values.
Parameter Change
9-1
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.1 Date and Time

9.1.1 Precautions
The date and time for the system should be adjusted and kept same in a network.
Adjusting the NE time affects any performance if it requires a time stamp, such as the
performance monitoring (PM), logging etc.
The system time can be adjusted via the Adjust NE Time dialog box by using CID.
9.1.2 Parameters
The Adjust NE Time dialog box has the following parameters:
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
NE Time
Displays the current date and hour in

reference to the target NE has.
(not a selection)
PC Time
An equipment time will be set to the

time of the PC in which the CID is
running.
(not a selection)
Adjust
Time
Input the expected time,
When click the Set button, the

NE time and the PC time should
be adjusted as the adjust time.
9.1.3 Steps
Changes can be made by overwriting the registered information in the Adjust NE Time
dialog box, which can be obtained by performing one of the followings:
1. Select Configuration Adjust NE Time (refer to Figure 9-1)
2. Click the
shortcut button.
Parameter Change Date and Time

9-2
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-1.
Adjust NE Time
4.1.2 Procedure: Adjust NE Time in 4. Register NE Configuration section provides the

procedures of adjusting NE time
Parameter Change Date and Time

9-3
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2 NE Configuration
This section provides description for modifying the NE configuration that been made
during NE setup (initialization). Modification of NE configuration is performed via the
Setup dialog box.
9.2.1 Open Setup dialog box

9.2.1.1 By Submenu
Modifying NE configuration is performed through the following four submenus
under the Configuration menu: Set NE Attribute, Physical Slot Configuration, Timing Source Configuration, and Timing Source Attribute.
Selecting one of these submenus opens the Setup dialog box with the corresponding
tab selected.
Figure 9-2 shows an example of the Setup dialog box, with Set NE Attribute tab
selected when selecting the Set NE Attribute submenu.
Figure 9-2. Setup Dialog Box
Parameter Change NE Configuration

9-4
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.1.2 By Shortcut Button

The shortcut buttons that correspond to each submenu are also provided. Clicking a
shortcut button opens the Setup dialog box with the corresponding tab selected.
NOTE: There is no shortcut button corresponding to the Configure Clock
Module submenu.
Shortcut buttons
Timing Source Configuration

Physical Slot Configuration
Set NE Attribute
Figure 9-3.
Shortcut Buttons for Configuration Menu
For example, when clicking

, the Setup dialog box will be displayed with the
Set NE Attribute tab selected, shown in Figure 9-2.

9-5
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.2 NE Attributes
9.2.2.1 Parameters
The following parameters can be modified for NE attributes:
PARAMETERS
VALUES
NE ID
4-byte
non-negative
integer
NE ID of private system, consisting of

the 4-byte non-negative integer, is
unique within whole system. Value
ranger is from 2 to 4294967295. For
supporting routing selection based on
private protocol, the NE ID is coded
conforming to some prescribed rules,
and the default identity is set by the NE
program.
Start-up Date
Date
Displays relative seconds to 1970, and

all other time involved in CID is also
expressed in such way. The running
time can be set by selecting using the
pull-down menu. The range is from
1980-01-01 to 2037-01-01.
NE Name
(text field)
A name of NE should be set so that the

CID support multi-language versions.
The default is blank. Maximum
character number is 80.
System Location
(text field)
Enter the geological position of NE. For

example, enter Changping District,
Beijing as the location of NE. The
default is blank. Maximum character
number is 80.
Contact Address
(text field)
A contact address of manufacturer set

by the CID. Maximum character number
is 80.

9-6
DESCRIPTION
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.2.2 Procedure: Modify NE Attributes

To change the NE attributes, perform the following procedure:
1. Open the Setup dialog box with Set NE Attribute tab by performing one of
the following:
2. Select Configuration Configure NE Attribute.
3. Click the
shortcut button.
4. Click the Set NE Attribute tab on the Setup dialog box when this dialog box
has already opened for modifying other NE configurations.
Figure 9-4.
Setup Dialog Box with Set NE Attribute Selected
5. Modify required parameters.

6. After modifying, click the Set button to send the modified data to the NE.
9-7
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7. Click the Retrieve button to send the modified data to the CID.
NOTE: For modifying other NE configurations after this, i.e., physical slot
configuration, timing source configuration and timing source attributes,
click the corresponding tab on the top of the Setup dialog box. The same
result can be obtained by selecting a submenu under the Configuration
menu or by clicking a shortcut button.
8. To finish modifying the NE attributes, click the Close button.

9-8
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.3 Physical Slot Configuration

9.2.3.1 Parameters
The following parameters can be modified for physical slot configuration:
PARAMETERS
VALUES
DESCRIPTION
Select a board to be installed to the

selected slot from the drop-down list.
Management Status
Select the management status from the

drop-down list.
Install/Uninstall
(button)
Add/Delete board on CID.
Required Installed
Board
9.2.3.2 Procedure: Modify Physical Slot Configuration

To change the physical slot configuration, perform the following procedure:
1. Open the Setup dialog box with Physical Slot Configuration tab by
performing one of the following:
2. Select Configuration Configure NE Slot.
3. Click the
shortcut button.
4. Click the Physical Slot Configuration tab on the Setup dialog box when this
dialog box has already opened for modifying other NE configurations.

9-9
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-5. Setup Dialog Box with Physical Slot Configuration Selected
NOTE:
For modifying other NE configurations after this, i.e., NE attributes, timing

source configuration and timing source attributes, click the corresponding
tab on the top of the Setup dialog box. The same result can be obtained by
selecting a submenu under the Configuration menu or by clicking a
shortcut button.
8. To finish modifying the physical slot configuration, click the Close button.

9-10
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.4 Package Protect Configuration

9.2.4.1
Board Protect
9.2.4.1.1 Items and Parameters

The Board Protect dialog box has the following items and parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
Switch Test
Command
VALUES
DESCRIPTION
Switch to 8 slot
let the 8 slot as primary board
Switch to 9 slot
Lockout of protection
When this check box is selected, the selected

CS board is not used.
Forced switch to
protection
When this check box is selected, the current

CS board is forcibly used as the work board
whether it has alarms or not.
Manual switch to
protection
When this check box is selected, the CS board

is used as the work board if it has no alarms.
9.2.4.1.2 Procedure: Package Protect Configuration

1. Select Package Protect Configuration from the Configuration menu to
open the Package Protect Configuration dialog box:

9-11
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
2. Click Board Protect tab (default), if needing modify CS board protect

attribute.
3. Double click target row according to CS board needing to modify from Protect
Group Attributes. Then there will pop-up the Protect Attributes
Configuration windows. It shown as bellow:

9-12
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4. From Switch Test field, you can decide which CS board as the primary board
and which as backup board.
5. If you want to change the status of target CS board, you can select three
commands in list: Lockout of protection, Force switch to protection and
Manual switch to protection.

9-13
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.4.2
TPS Protect

ITEM/PARAMETER
Protect
Group
Attribute
Command
VALUES
Priority
1~255
Display the priority of working board.
WTR
60~720
Display WTR time.
Lockout
protection
of

TPS board is not used.
Forced switch to
protection
When this check box is selected, the current

TPS board is forcibly used as the work board
Manual switch to
protection
When this check box is selected, the TPS

board is used as the work board if it has no
alarms.

9-14
DESCRIPTION
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

open the Package Protect Configuration dialog box:
2. Click TPS Protect tab, if needing modify TPS protect attribute.

3. Double click target row according to TPS protect needing to modify from
Protect Group Attributes. Then there will pop-up the Protect Attributes

9-15
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4. According to you need to modify Priority and WTR.

5. If you want to change the status of target TPS protect, you can select three
commands in list: Lockout of protection, Force switch to protection
and Manual switch to protection.

9-16
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.5 Timing Source Configuration

9.2.5.1 Parameters
The following parameters can be modified for timing source configuration:
PARAMETERS
VALUES
DESCRIPTION
Receive SSM Set Value
Select the QL (quality level) of the

receiving timing source from the
drop-down list. This is valid when the
SSM protocol is selected.
Force/Auto
Select Force or Auto from the dropdown list.
Transmit SSM Mode
When Force is selected, the selected

port will be forced to send QL of the
timing source.
When Auto is selected, the QL of the
timing source sent at the selected port is
that of the current operating reference
clock. In this case, the current operating
reference clock is not the timing source
of the selected port.
Selected port sends forcibly QL value of

the timing source.
Hold off Time
0 thru 1800 (ms)
Set Hold-off time, which is the duration

to hold QL until the operating timing
source switches to be available upon
failure of this timing source. The step is
300 ms.
WTR Time
0 thru 720 (sec)
Set Wait To Restore time, which is the

amount of time to wait before a recovered timing source becomes active
again. The step is 60s.
Force Transmit SSM

Value
Priority
1 thru 254
Set the priority of timing source manually. The highest priority is 1, and the
lowest is 254.

9-17
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.5.2 Procedure: Modify Timing Source Configuration

To change the s timing source configuration, perform the following:
1. Open the Setup dialog box with Timing Source Configuration tab by
performing one of the following:
2. Select Configuration Timing Source Configuration.
3. Click the
shortcut button.
4. Click the Timing Source Configuration tab on the Setup dialog box when
this dialog box has already opened for modifying other NE configurations.
Figure 9-6. Setup Dialog Box with Timing Source Configuration Selected
5. Push the Modify button to change the Timing source. Figure 9-7 shows an
example:

9-18
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-7.
Modify Timing Source

NOTE: For modifying other NE configurations after this, i.e., NE attributes,
physical slot configuration and timing source attributes, click the
corresponding tab on the top of the Setup dialog box. The same result
can be obtained by selecting a submenu under the Configuration menu
or by clicking a shortcut button.
9. To finish modifying the timing source configuration, click the Close button.

9-19
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.6 Timing Source Switching Type

9.2.6.1 Parameters
The following parameters can be modified for timing source configuration:
PARAMETERS
Lockout
VALUES
(Check Box)
DESCRIPTION
When this check box is selected, the

selected timing source is not used as
synchronous signal.
Forced Switch

current reference clock is forcibly used
as the timing source whether it has
alarms or not.
Manual Switch

as the timing source if it has no alarms.
9.2.6.2 Procedure: Modify Timing Source Switching Type

To change the timing source switching type, perform the following:
1. Confirm that the Set Clock Extra Commands dialog box shown in Figure
9-8 is displayed:

9-20
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-8.
Set Clock Extra Commands Dialog Box
2. Select the switching type to Lockout, Forced Switch or Manual Switch by

clicking a check box.
3. Confirm the setting, and click the Set button.
4. Click the Close button. The Set Clock Extra Commands dialog disappears
and the Timing Source Configuration dialog box is displayed again.
5. In the Timing Source Configuration dialog box, perform one of the
following:
To confirm the modification, click the Set button to send the command.
To cancel and quit the NE setup, click the Close button.

9-21
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.7 Timing Source Attribute

9.2.7.1 Parameters
The following parameters can be modified for timing source attribute:
PARAMETERS
VALUES
Switching Criterion
Priority/SSM
DESCRIPTION
When Priority is selected, the clock

module switches according to the
priority order that is set manually for
timing sources.
When SSM is selected, the clock
module takes the QL that is set
manually for timing source and the
actual QL value as the precondition.
When the QL that is set manually and
the QL collected by line coexist, the
former (QL set manually) is effective.
When the QLs of several timing sources
are same, the clock module switches
according to the priority that is set
manually for timing source.
Timing Source
Threshold
Used to select the timing source

threshold.
When starting up the SSM protocol, the
timing source cannot be recorded as the
reference clock if its QL priority is lower
than the setting value.
9.2.7.2 Procedure: Modify Timing Source Attribute

To change the clock module configuration, perform the following:
1. Open the Setup dialog box with Timing Source Attribute tab by performing
one of the following:
2. Select Configuration Timing Source Attribute.
3. Click the Timing Source Attribute tab on the Setup dialog box when this
dialog box has already opened for modifying other NE configurations.

9-22
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-9. Setup Dialog Box with Timing Source Attribute Selected
NOTE: For modifying other NE configurations after this, i.e., NE attributes, physical
slot configuration and timing source configuration, click the corresponding
tab on the top of the Setup dialog box. The same result can be obtained by
selecting a submenu under the Configuration menu or by clicking a
shortcut button.
7. To finish modifying the clock module configuration, click the Close button.

9-23
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.8 Set 2M EXT CLK Output

9.2.8.1 Parameters
The following parameters can be modified for output-clock port:
ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
A4-A7 of 2Mbps signal can be used

as SANBIT.
(drop-down list)
Setting:
Output Status
(drop-down list)
Setting:
Squelch
(drop-down list)
Setting:
SANBIT
9.2.8.2 Procedure: Modify Output-Clock Port Configuration

To change the Output-Clock port configuration, perform the following:
1. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Set 2M EXT
CLK Output from the Configuration menu. The 2M EXT CLK Output
dialog box shown in Figure 9-10 appears:
Figure 9-10.
2M EXT CLK Output Dialog Box

9-24
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
2. Select the SANBIT from the SANBIT drop-down list.

3. Select the Output Status from the Output Status drop-down list.
4. Select the Timing Source Threshold from the Squelch drop-down list.
5. Click the Set button to send the data down to NE. The entered port will be
displayed in the Set 2M EXT CLK Output list.
6. Click the Retrieve button to report the port installation condition to the CID.
7. Click the Close button to complete the operation.

9-25
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.9 MSPring Configuration

9.2.9.1 Precaution
MSPring must have already been set up.
9.2.9.2 Procedure: Modify the MSPring Configuration

1. From the Subnet Architure&Port Config page you can add nodes, delete
nodes, and edit the ports configuration, the appearance of Subnet
Architure&Port Config page is shown as below:
Figure 9-11.
The appearance of the Subnet Architure&Port Config Page
Add Node:
Click the Add button to open the Node Config dialog box, its appearance is
shown as below:

9-26
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-12. Add a Node for a MSPring

From this dialog box, you should input the NE ID which you want to add to the
MSPring, and click Set button to complete the setting.
Delete the Node:
Select the node which you want to delete, and click the Delete button, the node
would be deleting.
There is a problem you should pay more attention: when you delete a node from
the MSPring, you should re-connect the other nodes, and configure the ports of
these nodes.
Edit the Ports:
Select the port which you want to modify from the Node Port Config field by
click it. Then you can modify the configuration according to your need and click
Set button to send the setting to the equipment.
2. From the Subnet Maintain page you can retrieve the attribute of the port and
set the switch command. The attribute of the ports includes: NE Name, NE ID,
Port ID, Port Status, K1/K2 Received, K1/K2 Transmitted, State, and
Switch Command, the detail information is shown as below:

9-27
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Set the Switch Command:

Click the target line in the Port Protect State field, and there will pop-up the
Set Switch Command dialog box, its appearance is shown as below:
Figure 9-13.
Set Switch Command Dialog Box
Select the one of the commands by click the target line, and click Set button to
finish configuration, then the window will return to the Subnet Maintain page,
from there you must click Set button to send these configuration to the
equipment, otherwise, these configuration would not be valid.

9-28
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.10 AU Squelch Configuration

9.2.10.1 Items and Parameters
The following parameters can be modified:
ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
MSPR
Specify the MSPrings ID
(drop-down list)
Side
Decide which side of the NE to be

configured: west side/east side.
(drop-down list)
AU
Specify which AU to transmit the traffic
(drop-down list)
Near
Specify which node as the near add

node.
(drop-down list)
Remote
Specify which node as the remote add

node.
(drop-down list)
Near
Specify which node as the near down

node.
(drop-down list)
Remote
Specify which node as the remote

down node.
(drop-down list)
Direction
Indicate the traffic direction is incoming

or outcoming.
(drop-down list)
Traffic Type
Specify the traffic type as AU or TU
(radio button)
Add
Node
Down
Node
9.2.10.2 Procedure: Modify the AU Squelch Table

1. Select the target line from the AU Squelch Table list by click it, then the detail
information of this item should be shown in configuration field below of the AU
Squelch Table.
2. If you want to modify the settings, you should change the settings in the
configuration field, then click Modify button to add this configuration to the AU
squelch table. And if you want to delete an item from the AU squelch table, you
could click Delete button directly.
3. Click the Set button to send the modified data to the CID
4. Click the Retrieve button to retrieve whether the data valid..
5. To finish modifying the NE attributes, click the Close button.

9-29
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.11 Port Configuration

9.2.11.1 Parameters
The following parameters can be modified for port configuration:
PARAMETERS
Set:
Configured Port Type
VALUES
(drop-down list)
DESCRIPTION
Select the port type to be installed.
9.2.11.2 Procedure: Modify Port Configuration

To change the port configuration, perform the following:
From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Port
Configuration from the Configuration menu. The Port Configuration dialog
box shown in Figure 9-14 appears:
Figure 9-14. Port Configuration Dialog Box

9-30
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Modify port configuration of MCP board

6. Select the MCP board from the left sub window. Right sub window displayed
all port and expected port type of selected board.
7. Click Autoset button to match Expected Port Type to Installed Port Type.
8. If you want mismatch Expected Port Type to Installed Port Type, you can
change Expected Port Type as NULL or V.24_PORT or V.11_PORT then
click set to send setting to V-Node.

9-31
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Modify port configuration of E12 board

1. Select the E12 board from the left sub window. Right sub window displayed all
port and expected port type of selected board.
change the value of the Expected Port Type as NULL or E1 PORT, then click
set to send setting to V-Node.

9-32
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Modify port configuration of STM16 board

1. Select the STM16 board from the left sub window. Right sub window displayed
all port and expected port type of selected board.
change the value of the Expected Port Type as NULL or STM_16(O) then
click set to send setting to V-Node.

9-33
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Modify port configuration of STM-1/4 board

1. Select the STM-1/4 board from the left sub window. Right sub window
displayed all port and expected port type of selected board.
change Expected Port Type as NULL or STM_1(O) or STM_4(O) then click
set to send setting to V-Node.

9-34
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Modify port configuration of CS board

1. Select the CS board from the left sub window. Right sub window displayed all
change Expected Port Type as NULL or EXTCLK 2Mb/s IN ,EXTCLK
2MHz IN ,EXTCLK 2Mb/s OUT and EXTCLK 2MHz OUT then click set to
send setting to V-Node.
Figure 9-15.
Expected Input Port Type

9-35
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-16.
Expected Output Port Type

9-36
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Modify port configuration of FE board

1. Select the FE board from the left sub window. Right sub window displayed all
change the value of the Expected Port Type as NULL or
100BT_LAN_PORT or 100BT_WAN_PORT then click set to send setting to
V-Node.
Figure 9-17. FE Board Expected Port Type (100BT_LAN_PORT)

9-37
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-18.
FE Board Expected Port Type (100BT_WANPORT)

9-38
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.12 Setup Port Enable

The Setup Port Enable dialog box has the following parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Running State
Activate/Inactivate port
(drop-down list)
Retiming
Turn off/Turn
function
on
retiming
(drop-down list)
NOTE: Only E12 board
support this function
9.2.12.2 Procedure: Setup Port Enable

To Setup Port Configuration, perform the following procedure:
1. Open the management dialog box of the target NE. Detailed operation is provided
in the section 7. Working with CID of the CID Operating Guide manual.
2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Setup Port
Enable from the Configuration menu. The Setup Port Enable dialog box
shown in Figure 9-19 appears:

9-39
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-19.
Setup Port Enable
3. Select the port of target board from the left sub window. Right sub window
displayed all port state of selected board.
NOTE:
For E12 board there is more retiming and resistance function state
showing in right sub window.
4. If you want to change running states, you can select activate/inactivate state from
drop-down list.
NOTE:
If you want to change retiming, you can select retiming state from
drop-down list.
5. Click the set button to send setting to V-Node.


9-40
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.13 Trace Message

9.2.13.1 Parameters
The following parameters can be modified for trace message:
PARAMETERS
VALUES
DESCRIPTION
Enable Trace
(check box)
Enable or Disable the trace message.

When this is selected (leaving a tick),
the trace message is enabled.
J Sending Value
(text field)
Specify J sending value.
J Expected Receiving
Value
Up to 15 character
length with any
ASCII code.
Specify J expected receiving value.
9.2.13.2 Procedure: Modify Trace Message

To change the trace message, perform the following:
1. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Set Trace
Message from the Configuration menu. The Set Trace Message dialog
Figure 9-20.
Set Trace Message Dialog Box
2. Select the target port from the list box on the left of the dialog box.

9-41
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
3. Click the Enable Trace check box (leaving a tick) to enable trace message.
NOTE: When this check box is unselected, trace message is disabled.
4. Set J sending value and J expected receiving value in the corresponding text box
on the right of the dialog box.
5. After completing the setting above, confirm the entered items. Then click the
Set button to download the settings to NE.
6. Click the Retrieve button to report the data in MCP of the equipment to the
CID.
7. Click the Close button to complete the trace message setup.

9-42
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.14 HKA/HKC Name

The MCP board of the equipment has eight external environment alarm interfaces (HKA),
and a user can change their names via the Set HKA/HKC Name dialog box.
9.2.14.1 Precaution
HKA or HKC must have already been set up.
9.2.14.2 Procedure: Change HKA Name

1. Select Set HKA/HKC Name from the Alarm menu. The Set HKA/HKC
Name dialog box shown in Figure 9-21 below appears:
Figure 9-21.
Set HKA/HKC Name Dialog Box (HKA)
2. Unfold the tree structure in the left window.

3. Click a port whose name is to be modified in the right window.
4. Double-click a port in the screen. The Name Definition dialog box for the
selected HKA appears.
Figure 9-22 shows an example of Name Definition dialog box where HKA1 is
selected:

9-43
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-22.
Name Definition Dialog Box (for HKA1)
5. Enter a new HKA alarm name in the Name Definition dialog box.
6. Confirm the entered name, and then click the Set button. The Name Definition
Dialog Box will be disappeared.
NOTE:
1)
Clicking the Close button instead of the Set button closes the Name
Definition dialog box, ignoring the modified setting.
2)
For this version of the CID, HKA Name can register only 20
characters.
7. Confirm that the defined new name is set for the selected HKA in the HKA/HKC
Name Setup dialog box.
8. Click the Close button on the HKA/HKC Name Setup dialog box to complete
the HKA name setup.

9-44
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.14.3 Procedure: Change HKC Name

1. Select Set HKA/HKC Name from the Alarm menu. The Set HKA/HKC
Name dialog box shown in Figure 9-21 above appears.
2. Click the HKC tab on the top of the top of the Set HKA/HKC Name dialog box.
Figure 9-23.
Set HKA/HKC Name Dialog Box (HKC)
3. Unfold the tree structure in the left window.

4. Click a port whose name is to be modified in the right window.
5. Double-click a port in the screen. The Name Definition dialog box for the
selected HKC appears.

9-45
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-24 shows an example of Name Definition dialog box where HKC4 is
selected:
Figure 9-24.
HKC Name Definition
6. Enter a new HKC alarm name in the Name Definition dialog box.
7. Confirm the entered name, and then click the Set button. The Name Definition
Dialog Box will be disappeared.
NOTE:
1)
Clicking the Close button instead of the Set button closes the Name
Definition dialog box, ignoring the modified setting.
2)
For this version of the CID, HKC Name can register only 20
characters.
8. Confirm that the defined new name is set for the selected HKC in the HKA/HKC
Name Setup dialog box.
9. Click the Close button on the Set HKA/HKC Name dialog box to complete the
HKC name setup.

9-46
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.15 Laser Management

This section provides the procedures of port configuration setup.
Installation of a port is operated in the Laser Management dialog box by using CID.
9.2.15.1 Attribute setting

The Laser Management dialog box has the following parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
Protocol setting
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Selected protocol setting:
(drop-down list)
Forced Open/
Forced Close/
Auto Run/
Manual Run
Auto Activate Delay
Select auto activate delay time:

60s, 180s, 300s.
(drop-down list)

9-47
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.15.1.2 Procedure: Laser Attribute setting

To set laser attribute, perform the following procedure:
2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Laser
Management from the Configuration menu. The Laser Management
dialog box with Attribute Setting tab selected appears shown in Figure 9-25
appears:
Figure 9-25. Laser Attribute Setting

3. Select target board from the left sub window. Right sub window displayed all
port laser attribute of selected board.
4. If you want to change Protocol Setting, you can select Forced Open/Forced
Close/Auto Run/Manual Run state from drop-down list.
NOTE: If you select Manual Run, you can refer to 9.2.15.2 to get more
information for it.
9-48
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
5. If you want to change auto activate delay time, you can select 60s/180s/300s
from drop-down list.

9-49
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.15.2 Manual Open

ITEM/PARAMETER
Manual
Open
Operation
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Manual
Open (short
time, 2s/9s)
After you manual open the

laser 2 or 9 seconds later, it will
be closed automatically.
(selected)
Manual Test
Open (long
time, 90s)

laser 90 seconds later, it will be
closed automatically.
(selected)
9.2.15.2.2 Procedure: Laser Manual Open

The Laser Manual Open performs the following procedure:
dialog box with Manual Open tab selected appears shown in Figure 9-26
appears:

9-50
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-26.
Laser Manual Open
3. You can click Manual Open (short time, 2s/9s) or Manual Test Open
(long time, 90s) check box from Manual Open Operation.

9-51
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.16 LAN-Interface Port Configuration

9.2.16.1 Parameters
NOTE: To use LAN port and WAN port, state of each port should be change to on.
LAN Port
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
State
On/Off
Set the LAN port status.
Auto Negotiation
Enable/
Disable
Enable or disable the auto negotiation function.
Duplex(Actual/set
)
Half/Full
Display actual working mode and setting mode of the

port.
Speed(bit/s
Actual/set)
10M/100M
Display actual working speed and setting speed of the

port.
Ingress Rate
1 thru 10000
Limit the port in rate. Maximum is 10000 x 10Kbit/s.
(10Kbit/s)
NOTE: 0 denotes do not limit rate.
Egress Rate
1 thru 10000
(10Kbit/s)
Limit the port out rate. Maximum is 10000 x 10Kbit/s.

NOTE: 0 denotes stop status.
Flow Control
Enable/
Disable
Enable or disable the flow control function.
Security
Enable/
Disable
Enable or disable the port security function.
Ingress Filtering
Forward
Matched VID/
Forward VID_matched, all untagged, VID=1 frames

and priority tagged frames with VID=0.
Drop Untagged
Frame/
NOTE:
Discard all untagged frames and priority tagged frames

with VID=0, forward all other frames.
with VID=0, forward VID_matched and VID=1 frames
Enable All/
Forward all frames.
Disable All
NOTE: When VLAN Mode is Port Based, Ingress

Filtering function is not applicable.
If the check boxes before the parameters are not chosen mean the configuration
shouldnt be effective.

9-52
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
WAN Port
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
State
On/Off
Set the WAN port status.
Ingress Filtering
Forward Matched VID/
Forward VID_matched, all untagged, VID=1

frames and priority tagged frames with
VID=0.
Drop Untagged Frame/
Discard all untagged frames and priority

tagged frames with VID=0, forward all other
frames.
Enable All/
Discard all untagged frames and priority

tagged frames with VID=0, forward
VID_matched and VID=1 frames
Disable All
Forward all frames.

NOTE: When VLAN Mode is Port Based,
Ingress Filtering function is not applicable.
NOTE: If check box at left of parameter is not chosen, this parameter can not be
modified.

9-53
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.16.2 Steps
LAN-Interface Ethernet Port Configuration Port Configuration
dialog box (refer to Figure 9-27).
[tx1]
Figure 9-27. Port Configuration dialog box

See the section 4.7 Procedure: Setup Port Configuration given in the section 4.
Register NE Configuration.

9-54
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.17 LAN-Interface Layer 2 Configuration

9.2.17.1 Bridge Parameters
PARAMETER
VLAN Operation Mode
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Set the VLAN Operation mode
Port based
IEEE 802.1Q
MAC Ageing Interval
300 thru 765 or no

ageing
Set MAC Ageing time
Broadcast Storm Filtering
Set Broadcast Storm Filtering
5%,
10%,
15%
20%,
25%
Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay
Set Bridge Transmit Delay time
Disable/
1/
2/
4
Low Queue Delay Bound
Enable/ Disable
Set Queue Delay Bound
Maximum Queue Delay Time
2 thru 510
Set Maximum Queue Delay

Time
Queue Mode
FIFO/
Set Queue mode
SP/
WRR
WRR High Weight
1 thru 7
Set high WRR Weight
WRR Low Weight
1 thru 7
Set low WRR Weight
User Priority
0 or 1
Set User priority
Monitor Mode
Disable/
Ingress/
Egress /
Both
Monitored Port
LAN&WAN port
Set monitored port
Monitoring Port
LAN port
Set monitoring port
Maximum Frame Size
1522 thru 1568
Set Maximum frame size

9-55
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.17.2 STP Config Parameters

PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
STP Action
Enable/ Disable
Enable/Disable STP protocol
Bridge Hello
1 thru 10
Set STP hello time
Bridge Forward
Delay Time
4 thru 30
Set Bridge Forward Delay Time
Bridge Max Age
6 thru 40
Set Bridge Ageing Time
Bridge Priority
0 thru 65535
Set Bridge Priority
STP Standard
-------
Bridge Address
00-07-30-xx-xx-xx
Set by manufacturer and forbidden modifying.
Root Bridge ID
STP Priority+ Root
Read only.
Time
Bridge MAC Address
9.2.17.3 Trunk Parameters

PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Trunk ID
VLAN member
Set the Trunk NO.
Port List
1 thru 4
Display the LAN/WAN port.
Member list
(list)
Display the Trunk member.
9.2.17.4 VLAN Parameters

PARAMETER
VLAN ID
VALUE
2 thru 255
(Port based)
DESCRIPTION
Set the VLAN ID NO. (default VLAN is

NO.1).
2 thru 255
(IEEE 802.1Q:untag)
2 thru 4094
(IEEE 802.1Q:tag)
Port List
(list)
Display the LAN/WAN/Trunk port.
Member List
VLAN member
Display the VLAN member

9-56
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.17.5 STP Port Parameters

PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Port
(Port
Displayed)
The source port for STP enable or not
STP Control
Enable/
Enable/Disable port STP function
Disable
Link Cost
1 thru 65535
Set link cost
Port Priority
0 thru 255
Set Port Priority
Port Status
Disable/
Port status. Read only.
Blocking/
Listening/
Learning/
Forwarding
9.2.17.6 MAC Table Parameters

PARAMETER
Action
VALUE
Forward/
DESCRIPTION
Set operation mode
Discard
MAC address
32bit
Set source MAC address of operation
VLAN ID
All existed
Set the VLAN that operation is applied to
VLAN
Member List
Selected port
Set the port(s) that operation is applied to
9.2.17.7 Steps
LAN-Interface Layer 2 Configuration
Layer 2 Configuration dialog box (refer to Figure 9-28)

9-57
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-28. Layer 2 Configuration dialog box

See the section 4.8 Procedure: Setup Layer 2 Configuration given in the section 4.
Register NE Configuration.

9-58
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.18 LAN-Interface Encapsulation and LCAS Configuration

9.2.18.1 Parameters
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Port
WAN port
Encapsulation port.
Encapsulation
Type
GFP/LAPS
Set encapsulation type.
Data Frame with

FCS
Yes/No
Enable/Disable FCS for data frame.
LCAS
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable LCAS function.
LCAS Mode
Bidirectional/Uni
directional
Select Bidirectional or unidirectional adjustment for

LCAS when LCAS function is enable.
NOTE: The item is valid only in case of GFP

encapsulation. FPGA will judge the FCS flag
automatically with input streams from WAN port
and handle different streams in different ways If it
is different between local and remote side.

9-59
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.18.2 Steps
LAN-Interface Encapsulation And LCAS Configuration
Encapsulation And LCAS Configuration dialog box (refer to Figure
9-29)
Figure 9-29.
Encapsulation and LCAS Configuration dialog box
See the section 4.10 Procedure: Setup Encapsulation and LCAS Configuration
given in the section 4. Register NE Configuration section.

9-60
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.19 LAN-Interface Bandwidth Configuration

9.2.19.1 Parameters
PARAMETER
Src Port
VALUE
#1 WAN/
DESCRIPTION
The source port of bandwidth configuration.
#2 WAN/
#3 WAN/
#4 WAN
Dst Port
#01AU_1/
The destination port of bandwidth configuration.
#02AU_1
#03AU_1
#04AU_1
Timeslots
1-63(VC12)/
Select Time Slot Number for Receiving direction.
1-3(VC3)/
1(VC4)
Bandwidth
nxVC12(n=1-63)/
nxVC3(n=1-3)/
Select Time Slot Number for Transmitting

direction.
1 x VC4

9-61
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.2.19.2 Steps
LAN-Interface Bandwidth Configuration
Bandwidth Configuration dialog box (refer to Figure 9-30).
Figure 9-30.
Bandwidth Configuration dialog box
See the section 4.9 Procedure: Setup Bandwidth Configuration given in the section
4. Register NE Configuration section.

9-62
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.3 Crossconnect
The modification procedure of crossconnect is same as the procedures that are required to
setup the crossconnect configuration, and the registered crossconnection shouldnt be
modified when the traffic is useful.
See the section 6.2 Cross connect configuration given in the section 6. Setup
Crossconnect.
Parameter Change Crossconnect

9-63
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4 Network Connection

9.4.1 IP Parameter
9.4.1.1 Parameters
Refer to the NOTE of A10_7.2 IP Parameter Setup
9.4.1.2 Steps
Communication IP Parameter Setup
IP parameters Setup dialog box (refer to Figure 9-31).
Figure 9-31.
IP parameters Setup dialog box
See the section 7.2.2 Add/Modify/Delete IP Parameters given in the section 7. Setup
Network Connection.
Parameter Change Network Connection

9-64
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4.2 DCC Link Layer

9.4.2.1 Parameters
DCC dialog box
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
T200
Fixed, forbidden to change Retransmission time, default is:500ms
N200
Fixed, forbidden to change Maximum number of retransmissions,

default is: 3
N201
Fixed, forbidden to change Maximum number of octets

information field, default is: 512
Fixed, forbidden to change Maximum number of outstanding I

frames, default is: 7
T203
Fixed, forbidden to change Maximum time allowed without frames

being exchanged, default is: 10s
TM20
Fixed, forbidden to change Response monitoring timer at XID

sending, default is: 2500ms
NM20
Fixed, forbidden to change Maximum number of retransmissions of

XID frame, default is: 3
UITS/AITS
Fixed, forbidden to change Decide to response to I frame or not,

Expected value is AITS
in
AITS: response
UITS: no response
Minipack
Fixed, forbidden to change Minimum package length.
PAD
Fixed, forbidden to change Pad setting. For Minipack
Side
USER
NETWORK
USER and NETWORK must be paired

up for assignments between NEs. See
NOTE below.
NOTE:
1. Two NEs are connected with peer to peer and NETWORK is selected for an
NE, USER must be selected for the other-side NE. NETWORK/USER can be
freely selected for an NE, but the above rule must be observed for the
other-side NE.
2. Some equipment has different meaning on this setting. For example, NECs
SMS services have opposite meaning. In this case, NETWORK-NETWORK,
or USER-USER setting should be used.

9-65
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4.2.2 Steps
Communication DCC Link Layer Setup DCC Link Layer Setup
dialog box DCC dialog box (refer to Figure 9-32).
Figure 9-32.
DCC dialog box (list of parameter)
See the section 7.3.2 Procedure: Setup DCC Link Layer given in the section 7.
Setup Network Connection.

9-66
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4.3 Physical Layer

9.4.3.1 Parameters
Ethernet Port tab
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Subnet
(not selected)
Display the subnet name
NE
(not selected)
Display the NE name
MAC Address
(not selected)
Displays the physical address for the

equipment.
Active State
Enable
Enables modification of MAC address.
(not change)
Upper Protocol
TCP/IP
Displays the upper protocol.
(drop-down list)
Route Protocol
RIP (check box)
Set the transmitting and stopping of RIP

package.
To
select
represents
transmitting and unselect represents
stopping.

9-67
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
DCC tab
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Subnet
(not selected)
NE
(not selected)
Display the NE name
Board
(not selected)
Display the board name
Port
(not selected)
Display the port number
ACTIVE STATE
(check box)
Enable/disable active of DCC channels.

To select represents active and unselect
represents forbidden.
UPPER PROTOCOL
TCP/IP
(dropdown box)
(not selected)
ROUTE PROTOCOL
RIP (check box)

package.
To
select
represents
stopping.
D1-D3:
(check box)
Specifies the communication bytes of

DCC channels.
D4-D12:
(check box)

DCC channels.
That RIP is selected or not in two above tables influences the contents of Route Table.
In order to explain more explicitly take a four V-NODE ring for an example.
IP Settings of F and DCC Port of Four NEs
When RIP of all ports is enabled, Route Table of four NEs are shown in Figure
9-33, Figure 9-34, Figure 9-35, Figure 9-36.

9-68
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Type Destination IP
Gateway
Netmask
Interface IP Hops Priority Flags Refcnt Use
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2 127.0.0.1
Local 192.1.1.0
192.1.1.1
255.255.255.0 192.1.1.1
30
Rip
192.1.2.0
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.1.1
Rip
192.1.3.0
192.1.4.1
255.255.255.0 192.1.4.2
Local 192.1.4.0
192.1.4.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.4.2
30
Local 192.254.1.0
192.254.1.1 255.255.255.0 192.254.1.1 0
257
Rip
192.254.2.0
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.1.1
Rip
192.254.3.0
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.1.1
Rip
192.254.4.0
192.1.4.1
255.255.255.0 192.1.4.2
Figure 9-33.
Type Destination IP
NE1 Route Table when RIP of all ports is enabled

Gateway
Netmask
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2 127.0.0.1
Local 192.1.1.0
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.1.2
10
Local 192.1.2.0
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
112
Rip
192.1.3.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
Rip
192.1.4.0
192.1.1.1
255.255.255.0 192.1.1.2
Rip
192.254.1.0
192.1.1.1
255.255.255.0 192.1.1.2
220
Local 192.254.2.0
192.254.2.1 255.255.255.0 192.254.2.1 0
257
Rip
192.254.3.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
101
Rip
192.254.4.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
Figure 9-34.
Type Destination IP
Gateway
Netmask
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2
127.0.0.1
Rip
192.1.1.0
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.2
Local 192.1.2.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.2
111
Local 192.1.3.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.1
Rip
192.1.4.0
192.1.3.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.1
Rip
192.254.1.0
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.2
119
Rip
192.254.2.0
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.2
192.254.3.1 255.255.255.0 192.254.3.1 0
257
Local 192.254.3.0
Rip
192.254.4.0
Figure 9-35.
192.1.3.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.1
NE3 Route Table when RIP of all ports is enabled.

9-69
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Type Destination IP
Gateway
Netmask
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2
127.0.0.1
Rip
192.1.1.0
192.1.4.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.1
Rip
192.1.2.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
Local 192.1.3.0
192.1.3.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
10
Local 192.1.4.0
192.1.4.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.1
10
Rip
192.254.1.0
192.1.4.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.1
124
Rip
192.254.2.0
192.1.4.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.1
Rip
192.254.3.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
192.254.4.1 255.255.255.0 192.254.4.1 0
257
Local 192.254.4.0
Figure 9-36.
When RIP of NE1 F port is disabled as shown in Figure 9-37 (F ports of other
NEs and DCC ports of all NEs are all enabled), Route Table of four NEs are
shown in Figure 9-38, Figure 9-39, Figure 9-40, Figure 9-41.
Figure 9-37.
Type Destination IP
Gateway
RIP of NE1 F Port is disabled
Netmask
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2
127.0.0.1
Local 192.1.1.0
192.1.1.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.1.1
30
Rip
192.1.2.0
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.1.1
Rip
192.1.3.0
192.1.4.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.2
Local 192.1.4.0
192.1.4.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.2
30
Local 192.254.1.0
192.254.1.1
255.255.255.0 192.254.1.1 0
257
Rip
192.254.2.0
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.1.1
Rip
192.254.3.0
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.1.1
Rip
192.254.4.0
192.1.4.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.2
Figure 9-38.
NE1 Route Table when RIP of NE1 F Port is disabled

9-70
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Type Destination IP
Gateway
Netmask
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2 127.0.0.1
Local 192.1.1.0
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.1.2
61
Local 192.1.2.0
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
165
Rip
192.1.3.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
Rip
192.1.4.0
192.1.1.1
255.255.255.0 192.1.1.2
Local 192.254.2.0
192.254.2.1 255.255.255.0 192.254.2.1 0
257
Rip
192.254.3.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
151
Rip
192.254.4.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
Figure 9-39.
NOTE: The route of NE1 F port does not occur in NE2 Route Table showing F
port route of NE1 does not relay to NE2.
Type Destination IP
Gateway
Netmask
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2
127.0.0.1
Rip
192.1.1.0
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.2
Local 192.1.2.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.2
168
Local 192.1.3.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.1
65
Rip
192.1.4.0
192.1.3.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.1
10
Rip
192.254.2.0
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.2
192.254.3.1 255.255.255.0 192.254.3.1 0
257
Local 192.254.3.0
Rip
192.254.4.0
Figure 9-40.
192.1.3.2
255.255.255.0
Interface IP Hops Priority FlagsRefcn Use
192.1.3.1
Type Destination IP
Gateway
Netmask
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2
127.0.0.1
Rip
192.1.1.0
192.1.4.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.1
Rip
192.1.2.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
Local 192.1.3.0
192.1.3.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
56
Local 192.1.4.0
192.1.4.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.1
53
Rip
192.254.2.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
Rip
192.254.3.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
192.254.4.1 255.255.255.0 192.254.4.1 1
257
Local 192.254.4.0
Figure 9-41.
9-71
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
When RIP of NE1 two DCC ports are disabled as shown in Figure 9-42 (DCC
ports of other NEs and F ports of all NEs are all enabled), Route Table of four
NEs are shown in Figure 9-43, Figure 9-44, Figure 9-45, Figure 9-46.
Figure 9-42. RIP of NE1 two DCC ports is disabled

Type Destination IP
Gateway
Netmask
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2
127.0.0.1
Local 192.1.1.0
192.1.1.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.1.1
192.1.4.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.2
192.254.1.1 255.255.255.0 192.254.1.1 0
257
Local 192.1.4.0
Local 192.254.1.0
Figure 9-43.
Type Destination IP
NE1 Route Table when RIP of NE1 DCC Ports is disabled

Gateway
Netmask
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2 127.0.0.1
Local 192.1.1.0
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.1.2
87
Local 192.1.2.0
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
191
Rip
192.1.3.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
Rip
192.1.4.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
Local 192.254.2.0
192.254.2.1 255.255.255.0 192.254.2.1 0
257
Rip
192.254.3.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
151
Rip
192.254.4.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0 192.1.2.1
Figure 9-44.
NOTE: The routes of NE1 F and DCC ports do not occur in NE2 Route Table
showing F and DCC port routes of NE1 do not relay to NE2 (F port of NE1
relies on DCC port to relay, so though RIP of NE1 F port is enabled, it
does not relay to NE2).
9-72
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Type Destination IP
Gateway
Netmask
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2
127.0.0.1
Rip
192.1.1.0
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.2
Local 192.1.2.0
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.2
184
Local 192.1.3.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.1
82
Rip
192.1.4.0
192.1.3.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.1
10
Rip
192.254.2.0
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.2
192.254.3.1 255.255.255.0 192.254.3.1 0
257
Local 192.254.3.0
Rip
192.254.4.0
Figure 9-45.
192.1.3.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.1
Type Destination IP
Gateway
Netmask
Local 127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
255.255.255.2
127.0.0.1
Rip
192.1.1.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
Rip
192.1.2.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
Local 192.1.3.0
192.1.3.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
90
Local 192.1.4.0
192.1.4.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.1
86
Rip
192.254.2.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
Rip
192.254.3.0
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.2
192.254.4.1 255.255.255.0 192.254.4.1 0
257
Local 192.254.4.0
Figure 9-46.

9-73
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
DCC pass through tab

PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Subnet
(drop-down list)
Display the subnet ID
NE
(drop-down list)
Display the NE name
Board A
(drop-down list)
Display the port A slot ID;
Port A
(drop-down list)
Display the port A port ID;
D1-D3
(check box)
D4-D6
(check box)

DCC channels of port A.
D7-D9
(check box)
D10-D12
(check box)
Section A
Board Z
(drop-down list)
Port Z
(drop-down list)
D1-D3
(check box)
D4-D6
(check box)

D7-D9
(check box)
D10-D12
(check box)
Section Z
Direction
Bidirectional/Unidirectional

9-74
Display the DCC pass through direction.
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4.3.2 Steps
Communication Physical Layer Setup Physical Layer Setup
dialog box (LAN Port tab) (refer to Figure 9-47).
Figure 9-47.
Physical Layer Setup dialog box
Physical Layer Setup dialog box (DCC tab) DCC dialog box (refer to
Figure 9-48).
Figure 9-48.
DCC dialog box

9-75
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Physical Layer Setup dialog box (DCC pass through tab) DCC pass
through dialog box (refer to Figure 9-49).
Figure 9-49. DCC pass through

See the section 7.4.2 Procedure: Setup Physical Layer given in the section 7. Setup
Network Connection. .

9-76
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4.4 Routing
9.4.4.1 Parameters
Route Database tab
PARAMETER
VALUE
Type
Local/Rip/Static
Destination IP
Local IP and remote IP
Gateway
Local IP
Netmask
IP netmask
Interface IP
In Core
Route tab
Hops
In Route
Database
Priority
Local IP
Flags
DESCRIPTION
1 thru 16
1 thru 254
0 thru 5
bit0: this route can use.
bit1: this route is a gatway route
bit2: this route is a host route
bit3: his route is a redirect creat route
bit4: this route is a redirect modify
route
Refcnt
Use
Static
Radio button
Dynamic
Radio button
All
Radio button
Add
button
Modify
button
Delete
Retrieve
button
button
Set
button
Close
button
Local: local route

Rip: remote route transferred by Rip
protocol
Static: static route added by user
Address of the destination.
The gate address connecting to another subnet.
8-byte code that distinguish subnet
type.
Describing the local IP
Transfer number to the destination
IP.
IP.
priority of different type route.
describing the five type of Route
Indicate how many connect use this

route.
The count that summarize how
many data packet used this route
Display the static route that is manual configured by user.
Display the route that be built by
dynamic route protocol (for example
RIP or OSPF).
Display both the static route and dynamic route.
Add the route
According to your need to modify
the route
Delete the route
Retrieve the route information
Let the configuration of the route
information become effective
Close this dialog.

9-77
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4.4.2 Steps
NOTE:
Core Route tab dialog is only use for display, its parameters cant be
changed. If you want modify the parameters of route, please select the
Route Database tab, and the detail operation refer to the follows:
Communication Route Table Route Table dialog box (Route

Database tab) Modify button
Route dialog box (refer to Figure 9-50).
Figure 9-50. Route dialog box

See the section 7.5.2 Procedure: Add/Modify/Delete Routing given in the section 7.

9-78
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4.5 Orderwire Configuration

9.4.5.1 Parameters
Orderwire Attribute tab
PARAMETER
Calling Number
VALUE
000 thru 999
DESCRIPTION
Set a number for one-to-one orderwire

communication. It must be unique in the
SDH network, and different from the group
calling number.
NOTE: 000 denotes all call.
Group Calling
000 thru 999
Set a number for group calling (party line)

SDH network, and different from the calling
number.
a or
a-law must be used. Specify coding way to

a-law or -law.
Number
Coding Way
9.4.5.2 Steps
Configuration Orderwire and User CH Configuration Orderwire
and User CH Configuration dialog box (Orderwire Attribute Tab) (refer
to Figure 9-51)

9-79
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 9-51.
Orderwire and User CH Configuration dialog box
See the section 7.6.2 Procedure: Setup Orderwire Attribute given in the section 7.

9-80
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4.6 Orderwire Channel Configuration

9.4.6.1 Parameters
Orderwire Channel Tab
PARAMETER
Orderwire
Status
Selected
Channel No.
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
(check box)
When the check box is selected, you can

enable orderwire channel and modify the
value of the Channel NO. and the Section.
1 thru 6
Display the number of selected channel.
Selected
(text box)
Receiving
Open/Close
Specify the receiving control.
Sending
Open/Close
Specify the sending control.
Section
E1 or E2
Select orderwire byte
(drop-down list)
Orderwire
Status
Selected
Selected
(check box)

value of the Channel NO. and the Section.

9-81
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4.6.2 Steps
Configuration Orderwire and User CH Configuration
Orderwire and User CH Configuration dialog box (Orderwire
Channel Tab) (refer to Figure 9-52).
Figure 9-52.
See the section 7.6.3 Procedure: Setup User Channel given in the section 7. Setup
Network Connection.

9-82
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4.7 User Channel Configuration

9.4.7.1 Parameters
User Channel tab
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Board A
MCP+optical board
Select one board used for user channel
Port A
Optical ports provided by

selected board A.
Select one port used for user channel

NOTE: MCP board also provides 6 user
channel ports besides optical board.
Section A
E2/F1
Select user channel byte
Board Z
MCP+optical board
Port Z
Optical ports provided by

selected board Z.
Section Z
E2/F1


9-83
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.4.7.2 Steps
Configuration Orderwire and User CH Configuration
Orderwire and User CH Configuration dialog box (User Channel Tab)
(refer to Figure 9-52).
Figure 9-53.
See the section 7.6.3 Procedure: Setup User Channel given in the section 7. Setup
Network Connection

9-84
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.5 Alarm Attributes

The alarm attributes including alarm severity, alarm mask, auto report/passive report,
delay time and stretch time can be changed via the Alarm Attribute Setup dialog box.
9.5.1 Precautions
Changing the alarm severity level affects all other objects within the equipment if they
have the same condition types.
Parameter Change Alarm Attributes

9-85
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.5.2 Parameters
PARAMETER
Alarm Severity
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Critical Alarm
Specifies the alarm severity.
Major Alarm
See subsection 9.5.2.1 for details.
Minor Alarm
Warning
Alarm Mask
Mask
Enables/disables alarm mask.
Non Mask
Auto Report
Auto Report
Passive Report
Select auto report or passive report for

alarm report.
NOTE: When set Passive Report, the alarm
will not auto report to CID screen, Please
retrieve in CID in order to update the alarm
display.
Delay Time[s]
0 thru 2.5
Specify the delay time.
Stretch Time[s]
0 thru 10
Specifies the stretch time
9.5.2.1 Alarm Severity Levels

For the V-NODE, the following four severities are used:
SEVERITY
DESCRIPTION
Critical
Alarm
CR: Service-affecting condition has occurred and an immediate

corrective action is required, such as when a managed object
becomes totally out of service and its capability must be restored.
Major Alarm
MJ: Service-affecting condition has developed and an immediate

corrective action is required, such as when there is a severe
degradation in the capability of the managed object and its full
capability must be restored
Minor Alarm
MN: Existence of non-service-affecting fault and a corrective action

should be taken to prevent a more serious (i.e., service-affecting)
fault. This severity can be used, for example, when the detected
alarm is not currently degrading the capacity of the managed object
Warning
Warning: Non-service-affecting fault has developed and a corrective

action should be taken to prevent a more serious fault.

9-86
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.5.3 Steps
The procedure for modifying alarm attributes is given below:
9.5.4 Procedure: Modify Alarm Attribute

To modify alarm attributes, perform the following procedure:
1. Select Alarm Attribute Setup from the Alarm menu. The Alarm Attribute
Setup dialog box shown in Figure 9-54 appears:
Figure 9-54.
Alarm Attribute Setup Dialog Box
2. Select the location of generated alarm among the alarm source tree in the left
window.
3. Click the alarm attribute to be modified in the right window, and re-select or
enter new setting.
4. Confirm the setting and click the Set button to download the data to NE.
5. Click the Retrieve button to retrieve the alarm attribute value to the CID.
6. After all the settings are completed, click the Close button to complete the alarm
attribute setup.
9-87
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.6 Performance Monitoring

Performance monitoring (PM) provides reports regarding to the status and performance
of equipment or network, and gives evaluation according to that report. The main purpose
of PM is to collect various statistical data for monitoring or adjusting the status and
performance of network and NE, and further more, help user analyze the network and
reallocate it.
Parameter Change Performance Monitoring

9-88
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.6.1 Modifying PM Items

This subsection provides the descriptions and procedure to modify PM items. PM item
includes performance mask, reporting method of performance threshold crossing alert
(TCA) for 15-minute setup and 24-hour setup, and TCA threshold values.
All the operations for PM item modification are performed via the PM Item Setup
dialog box.
9.6.1.1 Parameters
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Mask
Mask/Non
Mask
Enables/disables performance
mask.
15m TCA Report
Auto
Report/
Passive
Report
Specifies the reporting method for

15-m TCA.
Auto
Report/
Passive
Report
Specifies the reporting method for

24-h TCA.
24h TCA Report
NOTE: When set Passive Report, the

TCA information will not auto report
to CID screen, Please retrieve in CID
in order to update the TCA display.
NOTE: When set Passive Report, the

TCA information will not auto report
to CID screen, Please retrieve in CID
in order to update the TCA display.
15m Performance Threshold
Specifies
the
threshold
15-minute performance.
24h Performance Threshold
Specifies the threshold for 24-hour

performance.
for

9-89
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.6.1.2 Procedure: Modify PM Items

To modify PM items, perform the following procedure:
1. Select PM Item Setup from the Performance menu. The Performance
Attribute dialog box shown in Figure 9-55 appears:
Figure 9-55.
PM Item Setup Dialog Box
2. Select the performance source from the tree structure in the left window by
clicking. The selected performance source will be highlighted.
3. The performance monitoring types of the selected performance source are listed
in the right window. Find a target performance monitoring type.
4. Click a PM item (performance mask, 15-m TCA, 24-h TCA, etc.) of the target
performance monitoring type to be modified, and modify the setting.
5. Confirm the setting, and then click the Set button to send the data to the NE.
6. Click the Retrieve button to report the data in NE to the CID.
7. Click the Close button to finish the PM item modification.
9-90
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.6.2 Modifying PM Attributes

This subsection provides the descriptions and procedure to modify general performance
properties (PM attributes). PM attributes includes performance counter for 15-m setup
performance history and 24-h setup performance history, zero-value report, zero-value
record, and performance report mode.
All the operations for PM attribute modification are performed via the PM Attribute
Setup dialog box.
9.6.2.1 Parameters
PARAMETER
Performance
Counter Number
Zero Value
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
15m History
Performance
Counter Number
The number of the 15m

history performance counter.
24h History
Performance
Counter Number
(just for retrieving)

The number of the 24h
history performance counter.
(just for retrieving)
Zero Value Report
Auto Report/
Non Report
Decide whether report the

zero value or not.
Zero Value Record
Auto Record/
Non Record
Decide whether record the

zero value or not.
Auto Report/
Manual Report
Decide whether report the

performance to EMS or not.
Performance Report Mode for EMS

9-91
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9.6.2.2 Procedure: Modify PM Attributes

To modify PM attributes, perform the following procedure:
1. Select PM Attribute Setup from the Performance menu. The PM Attribute
Setup dialog box shown in Figure 9-56 appears:
Figure 9-56.
PM Attribute Setup Dialog Box
2. Specify each parameter in the PM Attribute Setup dialog box.

3. Confirm the setting, then click the Set button to send the data to the NE.
4. Click the Retrieve button to report the data in the NE to the CID.
5. Click the Close button to finish the PM attribute modification.

9-92
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8. ACCEPTANCE TEST
This section provides procedures to verify all the setups done by the provisioning
procedures. If a test operation of a procedure fails, a specified value at the provisioning
may be invalid, or a hardware failure is suspected. The verification procedures in this
section are divided as shown below:
CATEGORY
TASK
PROCEDURE
(for each test)
Examine Alarm Status
8.1.2
Local Node
LED Test (on board)
8.2.1.2
LED Test (by CID)
8.2.1.3
Examine Optical Levels
8.3.1.4
Examine Line Bit Error Rate
8.3.2.3
Measure Optical Receiver Sensitivity
8.3.3.3
Traffic Connectivity
Verify Crossconnect Condition
8.4.3
Network System
Verify Path Protection Performance
8.5.2.2
Acceptance
Verify Orderwire Setup
8.5.3.3
Verify User Channel Setup
8.5.4.3
Line Facility
Acceptance Test
8-1
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8.1 Examine Alarm Status

The following procedure is required to perform before and after each test procedure in
order to avoid any alarm interfering the test or test results, and to set the system back in
the condition to perform normal operation.
8.1.1 Apparatus
CID
8.1.2 Procedure: Examine Alarm Status

1. Start up the CID, and log in to the target NE
in the section 7. Working with CID of the CID Operating Guide manual
3. Open the Alarm Monitor dialog box by performing one of the following:
Select Current Alarm from the Alarm menu.
Click the visual board of the equipment in the NE management dialog box.
Click the
shortcut button.
4. The Alarm Monitor dialog box with Current Alarm tab selected is displayed,
listing all the alarms currently existing within the system. Figure 8-1 shows an
example:
Acceptance Test Examine Alarm Status

8-2
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Alarm contents
Figure 8-1. Alarm Monitor Dialog Box (Current Alarm)

5. If any alarm is occurring,
i)
Find the problem, and clear the alarm condition.
ii) Click the Retrieve button to see if the alarm is cleared.

NOTE: When the Auto Report Screen check box is selected, the current
alarm status is automatically displayed when opening this dialog box.
6. Click the Close button.
Acceptance Test Examine Alarm Status

8-3
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8.2 Local Node Acceptance Test

This section provides the procedure to verify the operation condition and setup status of a
local NE after performing the provisioning status.
8.2.1 LED Test

Performing this procedure verifies the communication between the CS that manages the
equipment, and registered other boards within the equipment. Note that boards without
their registrations are not managing objects of the CS, that is, their LEDs may be on and
off by themselves, not controlled by the CS. The LED test also can be confirmed on the
CID screen.
8.2.1.1 Target Boards

MCP board
CS board
FE board
E12 board
E31/E32 board
STM-1/4
S1E
STM16 board
TPS_E12 board
TPS_E3
TPS_S1E
Acceptance Test Local Node Acceptance Test

8-4
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8.2.1.2 Procedure: Verify Board LEDs

MCP Board:
MCP board with 4 indicators, there are PWR LED indicators (green), FAIL LED
indicators (red), OW LED indicators (yellow) and BUSY LED indicators (yellow).
When MCP board works in normal operation, PWR LED indicators will blink.
During the period between power on and operation normal or do some abnormal
operation, it will light up. And when power off or power failure or abnormal
operation, it will be shut down.
When the board failure the FAIL LED indicators will light up; and when the board
works in normal operation status the FAIL LED indicators will shut down.
If the OW phone is off-hook or line busy status, the OW LED indicators should light
up. The LED should blink quickly when dial a number or the OW is called. The LED
should shut down after the line is free.
Flashrom burning or FPGA downloading or MCP synchronizing database, the BUSY
LED indicators will light up. If the board works in normal status, the LED will shut
down.

8-5
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
CS Board:
CS board with 4 indicators, there are PWR LED indicators (green), FAIL LED
indicators (red), ONLINE LED indicators (green) and BUSY LED indicators
(yellow).
When CS board works in normal operation, PWR LED indicators will blink. During
the period between power on and operation normal or do some abnormal operation, it
will light up. And when power off or power failure or abnormal operation, it will be
shut down.
When the board failure or the service path report alarm (MS-AIS, LOS etc.), the
FAIL LED indicators will light up; and when the board works in normal operation
status, the FAIL LED indicators will shut down.
If the board in working mode, the ONLINE LED indicator will light up. Else if the
board works in standby mode, the LED will shut down.
Flashrom burning or FPGA downloading or MCP synchronizing database, the BUSY
LED indicators will light up. If the board works in normal status, the LED will shut
down.
STM16 Board:
STM16 board with 3 indicators, there are PWR LED indicators (green), FAIL LED
indicators (red) and ONLINE1 LED indicators (green).
When STM16 board works in normal operation, PWR LED indicators will blink.
Operation at working port (MS1+1, MS1:1and MS ring), the ONLINE1 LED
indicator will light up. Else if the board operation at standby port (MS1+1, MS1:1and
MS ring), the LED will shut down.

8-6
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
STM1/ STM4 Board:

STM1/ STM4 board with 3 indicators, there are PWR LED indicators (green), FAIL
LED indicators (red), and ONLINE LED1, 2 indicators (green).
When STM1/ STM4 board works in normal operation, PWR LED indicators will
blink. During the period between power on and operation normal or do some
abnormal operation, it will light up. And when power off or power failure or
abnormal operation, it will be shut down.
Operation at working port (MS1+1, MS1:1and MS ring), the ONLINE1, 2 LED
MS ring), the LED will shut down
NOTE: When insert an optical stick to the optical port, the corresponding LED will
light up, and if these two optical ports are inserted with the optical stick,
both two LEDs will light up.
S1E Board:
S1E board with 3 indicators, there are PWR LED indicators (green), FAIL LED
indicators (red), and ONLINE LED1, 2 indicators (green).
When S1E board works in normal operation, PWR LED indicators will blink. During
shut down.
Operation at working port (MS1+1, MS1:1and MS ring), the ONLINE1, 2 LED
MS ring), the LED will shut down

8-7
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
E12 Board:
E12 board with 3 indicators, there are PWR LED indicators (green), FAIL LED
(yellow).
When E12 board works in normal operation, PWR LED indicators will blink. During
shut down.
If the board in TPS protection working status, the ONLINE LED indicator will light
up. Else if the board works in TPS protection standby status, the LED will shut
down.
E31/E32 Board:
E31/E32 board with 3 indicators, there are PWR LED indicators (green), FAIL LED
(yellow).
When E31/E32 board works in normal operation, PWR LED indicators will blink.
If the board in TPS protection working status, the ONLINE LED indicator will light
up. Else if the board works in TPS protection standby status, the LED will shut down.

8-8
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
FE Board:
FE board with 2 indicators, there are PWR LED indicators (green), FAIL LED indicators
(red).
When FE board works in normal operation, PWR LED indicators will blink. During
shut down.
When the board failure the FAIL LED indicators will light up; and when the board
works in normal operation status the FAIL LED indicators will shut down.

8-9
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
TPS_E12, TPS_E3, TPS_S1E Board:

TPS_E12, TPS_E3 and TPS_S1E board have the same LED indicators. All of these
boards with 2 indicators, there are PWR LED indicators (green), SW LED indicators
(red).
When these boards works in normal operation, PWR LED indicators will blink.
When these boards in protection working status, the SW LED indicators will light up;
and when the board works in TPS protection standby status, the SW LED indicators
will shut down.
8.2.1.3 Procedure: Verify Board LEDs by CID

1. Connect NE with CID.
2. If there is (are) alarm(s) occurring in the equipment, the LED (red) of
corresponding board on CID should light up. The LED should shut down after
the alarm(s) disappear.
Acceptance Test Line Facility Acceptance Test

8-10
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8.3 Line Facility Acceptance Test

This section provides the procedure to verify the registration of line facilities and their
setups, and to confirm that the correct operations are carried out. Since using a facility
loopback, a crossconnect setup is not required for these performances.
8.3.1 Optical Output Level Test

Perform this test for each optical output signal to verify that the output level is correct.
8.3.1.1 Apparatus
Optical Power Meter equipped with an Optical Sensor
Fiber Patch Cord
8.3.1.2 Requirements
R
NE
Optic power
meter
Optic wave
meter
Optical Fiber
SDH
analyzer
Figure 8-2.
Testing Setup of Optic Output Level

8-11
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8.3.1.3 Acceptance Values
TARGET BOARD
STM-1o
STM-4
STM-16
SPEC
WAVELENGTH
OUTPUT RANGE
S-1.1
1261-1360 nm
-8dBm ~ -15dBm
L-1.1
1280-1335 nm
0dBm ~ -5dBm
L-1.2
1480-1580 nm
0dBm ~ -5dBm
S-4.1
1293-1334 nm
-8dBm ~ -15dBm
L-4.1
1296-1330 nm
+2dBm ~ -3dBm
L-4.2
1480-1580 nm
+2dBm ~ -3dBm
S-16.1
1260~1360 nm
0dBm ~ -5dBm
L-16.1
1280~1335 nm
3dBm ~ -2dBm
L-16.2
1500~1580 nm
3dBm ~ -2dBm
8.3.1.4 Procedure: Examine Optical Output Levels

1. Examine the optical link.
2. Measure optical power and confirm if the result is within acceptable value.
3. Measure wavelength and confirm if the result is within acceptable value.

8-12
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8.3.2 Optical Line Bit Error Test

Perform this test to verify that the end-to-end BER is correctly carried out on the optical
boards. Since using the facility loopback, a crossconnect setup is not required for this
performance. The facility loopback can be executed by operating the CID.
8.3.2.1 Apparatus
SDH analyzer
Fiber Patch Cord
CID
Figure 8-3.
Testing Setup
8.3.2.3 Procedure: Examine Line Bit Error Rate

1. Loop back the remote interface of a tributary pathway at a certain site.
2. No error codes during 24 hours testing.
3. Monitor at least one route of 2Mb/s signal or 155Mb/s signal.

8-13
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8.3.3 Optical Receiver Sensitivity Test

Perform this procedure to check the sensitivity of all optical receivers. To confirm the
output level that an interface can accept without causing an error, change an output level
to detect LOS or LOF at the interface, then remove the fiber cable and measure the level
by using a level meter. Since using the facility loopback, a crossconnect setup is not
required for this performance.
8.3.3.1 Apparatus
Optical Power Meter equipped with an Optical Sensor
Variable Optical Attenuator
SDH analyzer
Fiber Patch Cord
CID
8.3.3.2 Acceptance Values
TARGET BOARD
STM-1O
STM-4
STM-16
SPEC
S-1.1
< -28dBm
L-1.1
< -34dBm
L-1.2
< -34dBm
S-4.1
< -28dBm
L-4.1
< -28dBm
L-4.2
< -28dBm
S-16.1
< -18dBm
L-16.1
< -27dBm
L-16.2
< -28dBm

8-14
RECEIVER SENSITIVITY LEVEL
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8.3.3.3 Procedure: Measure Optical Receiver Sensitivity

1. Link the circuit according to Figure 8-4; turn on the equipments at first.
SDH
Analyzer
Optical
Attenuator
NE
Optic Power
Meter
Figure 8-4 Testing Setup of Optical Receiver Sensitivity

2. Increase optic attenuation gradually, and get the threshold value when the error
codes begin to arise.
3. Disconnect the fiber cable at receive side and connect it to the optic power meter,
measure the value of optic power that equals the receive sensitivity.

8-15
F5259_E10
PROVISIONING
8.4 Traffic Connectivity Acceptance Test

This section provides the procedure to verify the condition of path connections and path
traffics of a network. The test confirms the connection of main signal traffic, and the bit
error rates with a network.
8.4.1 Apparatus
SDH Analyzer
CID
8.4.2 Requirements
Setups of cross connects at the tested nodes must be completed.
Unexpected error should not occur during test.
While having a test, if a protection switching is carried out, the error count will be no
more applicable for the tested path. To avoid a protection switching, specify Lockout,
if required.
CAUTION
When applying random pattern to a path for this
test, the main signal is interrupted.
8.4.3 Procedure: Verify Crossconnect Condition

1. Confirm whether the connection is OK by using error count of SDH Analyzer
and PM count in V-NODE.
2. Confirm whether the timing source is OK by using error count of SDH Analyzer
and PM count in V-NODE.
Acceptance Test Traffic Connectivity Acceptance Test

8-16
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8.5 Network System Acceptance Test

This section provides the procedure to verify if the correct operation is carried out by the
network connections and its setups specified at provisioning.
8.5.1 Apparatus
PDH Analyzer
CID
8.5.2 Path Protection Performance Test

The purpose of this test is to check whether all equipment are linked to the management
and operating system of main control center by the data communication channel, which
eventually builds up the SDH network management and monitoring system to realize
supervising and controlling the SDH sub network to ensure they can works normally.
Link the circuit according to Figure 8-2.
8.5.2.2 Procedure: Verify Path Protection Performance

1. The network management system can configure the equipment, configure the
single set installing, and configure the time slot for Tributary pathway by
controlling the equipments.
2. It can also control a certain Tributary pathway crossing time-slot of 2Mb/s signal,
going straightly, and distribution.
3. The function of divaricating and crossing time-slot can be examined by adding
several PDH/SDH analyzers to the corresponding Tributary pathway that is
divaricated or allocated.
Acceptance Test Network System Acceptance Test

8-17
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8.5.3 Orderwire Function Test

The purpose of this test is to check whether the orderwire function is OK.
8.5.3.1 Apparatus
CID
OW phone
HU25C analyzer or equivalent
The OW configuration of the stations need to be connected is correct.
8.5.3.3 Procedure: Verify Orderwire Setup

NOTE: #1 optical interface of STM16 board is mentioned in this procedure as one
of example.
1. Set -law in OW setup.
2. Connect #1 optical interface on the STM16 board of both stations.
3. Pick off the OW phone.
4. Dial another station.
5. Dial this station from another station.
6. Set a-law in OW setup and repeat above steps.
7. Set 1020Hz, 0dBm as send value, connect RX of the HU25C analyzer to an
OW interface and connect TX of the HU25C analyzer to another OW interface.
Received value should range in 2 1dBm.

8-18
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8.5.4 User Channel Connection Test

The purpose of this test is to check whether the user channel connection is OK.
8.5.4.1 Apparatus
CID
CE5009 analyzer or equivalent
The user channel configuration of the stations is correct.
8.5.4.3 Procedure: Verify User Channel Setup

1. Set F1 byte as optical interface and MCP overhead byte and set Add/Drop as
interface control type in user channel setup.
2. Test optical interface and MCP user channel interface corresponding interface of
D_INF by CE5009 analyzer to confirm whether there is Bit Error within 1
minute.
3. Set E2 byte as optical interface and MCP overhead byte and set Add/Drop as
interface control type in user channel setup. Then repeat above steps.

8-19
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7. SETUP NETWORK CONNECTION

This section provides the information on the necessary setup for the communication
between the NMS/CID and remote NEs.
7.1 Overview
7.1.1 Network Example
Transmission
layer
TM
ADM
ADM
ADM
ADM
STM-16
REG
ADM
ADM
Backbone
ADM
ADM
ADM
STM-16
Junction
ADM
Network layer
ADM
ADM
STM-4
ADM
ADM
ADM
ADM
STM-4
ADM
TM
ADM
ADM
TM
ADM
Local network
ADM
ADM
TM
STM-1
ADM
ADM
Access
Setup Network Connection Overview

7-1
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.2 IP Parameter Setup

This section provides the procedure to set the IP parameters. There are two types of IP
parameters: IP parameters of F interface (Ethernet) and IP parameters of DCC interface.
IP parameter of F interface
Used to access NE from CID or NMS.
IP parameter of DCC interface
Used to route between NEs
NOTE:
Because V-NODE only supports RIPv1 now, IP settings must conform to

following rules:
1. Please set IP addresses for F and DCC ports in same class (Refer to
Table *1).
2. Except Natural Mask case, setup same Natural Network Address for F
and DCC ports (Refer to Table *2).
3. IP address should fill the following restriction:
In the range 1~254 for each byte
The address with the following head are forbidden:
127.x.x.x, 224~225.x.x.x
4. 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255 are forbidden as subnet mask.
Below table is an example of valid IP settings.

IP Class
Class A
Class B
Class C
Net Mask
Setup
Port
255.0.0.0
255.255.0.0
255.255.255.0
(case1)
(case2)
(case3)
F port
10.1.1.1(*1)
10.1.1.1(*2)
10.1.1.1(*2)
For Case2&3, both F
DCCr port
11.1.1.1
10.2.1.1
10.1.2.1
and DCCr's IP
Route
Information
10.0.0.0
11.0.0.0
10.1.0.0
10.2.0.0
10.1.1.0
10.1.2.0
should be in same
F port
N/A
172.28.1.1(*1)
172.28.1.1(*2)
For Case3, both F
DCCr port
N/A
172.29.1.1
172.28.2.1
and DCCr's IP
Route
Information
172.28.0.0
172.29.0.0
172.28.1.0
172.28.2.0
should be in same
N/A
F port
N/A
N/A
192.168.1.1(*1)
DCCr port
N/A
N/A
192.168.2.1
Route
Information
N/A
N/A
192.168.1.0
192.168.2.0
Remark
natural IP address.
natural IP address.
All the operations for IP parameter setup are performed via the IP parameter Setup
dialog box using the CID.
Setup Network Connection IP Parameter Setup

7-2
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.2.1 Open IP parameters Setup Dialog Box

Perform the following procedure to display the IP parameter Setup dialog box:
Procedure
1. Start up the CID, and log in to the target NE.
3. Select IP Parameter Setup from the Communication menu. The IP
parameters Setup dialog box shown in Figure 7-1 appears:
Set IP address of
F interface
Add/modify IP address of
DCC interface
Finally push Add/Modify/Delete

Button (DCC Port)
Second input parameters

(DCC Port)
Figure 7-1.
IP parameters Setup Dialog Box
This step is the end of the procedure. Go to the section 7.2.2 Add/modify/delete
IP parameters.

7-3
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.2.2 Add/Modify/Delete IP Parameters

In the IP parameters Setup dialog box, IP parameters of F interface and IP parameters
of DCC interface can be set, modified and deleted. See Figure 7-2
7-2.. The locations of IP
parameter are provided:
Set IP address of
F interface
First to select
(DCC Port)
Finally push Add/Modify/Delete
Button (DCC Port)
Add/modify IP address of
DCC interface
Second input parameters
(DCC Port)
Figure 7-2.
Parameters in IP parameters Setup Dialog Box
Modification of IP parameters of F interface:

To modify the IP address of F interface, directly enter the IP address into the IP
Address field and enter the subnet mask into the Net Mask field in F Interface
(A/B/C/D) on the top of the IP parameters Setup dialog box.
Add/modify/delete of IP parameters of DCC interface:
To set the IP parameters of DCC interface, for example, set for the DCC1 channel of
slot2 in the dialog box above, select this channel in the tree structure on the left of the
IP parameters Setup dialog box first. Then enter the IP address and subnet mask
into the IP Address and the Net Mask fields on the bottom of the IP parameter
Setup dialog box, respectively. After entering them, click the Add button

7-4
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
To modify existing IP parameters of DCC interface, select the target channel and
enter the IP address and subnet mask in the same way, then click the Modify button.
To delete the IP address, select the corresponding DCC interface and click the Delete
button.
After all the setting is completed, confirm the contents and perform one of the following:
To send the IP parameter settings to the NE, click the Set button.
NOTE:
1) Even if the IP parameter is set or modified, no setting is valid until the Set button is
clicked.
2) When IP address and Netmask is added/modified/deleted at LAN interface and each
DCC interface, and click the Set button, the CID will pop-up a warning: Succeed!
Please reset the MCP.
To retrieve the IP parameter settings of the V-NODE NE to the CID, click the
Retrieve button and confirm the IP parameters.
To finish the IP parameter settings, click the Close button.
7.2.3 Print IP Parameters

The IP address, subnet mask and broadcast address can be printed out by clicking the
Print button. The Output Setting dialog is shown as below:

7-5
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
According to you need to select print type: Out To Printer or Out To File.
If you select Out To File, V-Node will save the IP parameter as CSV format, of course,
if you select Out To Printer the V-Node will print it to printer.
The printed file is a table including the items of Index, NE, Board, IP Address Net Mask,
and Broadcast Address. Figure 7-3 shows an example:
Figure 7-3.
Print Range

7-6
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.3 DCC Link Layer Setup

This section provides the procedure to set the parameters for DCC link for diversified
boards.
7.3.1 Parameter
DCC dialog box
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
T200
Fixed, forbidden to change Retransmission time, default is:500ms
N200
Fixed, forbidden to change Maximum number of retransmissions,

default is: 3
N201
Fixed, forbidden to change Maximum number of octets

information field, default is: 512
Fixed, forbidden to change Maximum number of outstanding I

frames, default is: 7
T203
Fixed, forbidden to change Maximum time allowed without frames

being exchanged, default is: 10s
TM20
Fixed, forbidden to change Response monitoring timer at XID

sending, default is: 2500ms
NM20
Fixed, forbidden to change Maximum number of retransmissions of

XID frame, default is: 3
UITS/AITS
Fixed, forbidden to change Decide to response to I frame or not,

Expected value is AITS
in
AITS: response
UITS: no response
default is: AITS
Minipack
Fixed, forbidden to change Minimum package length. default is: 50
PAD
Fixed, forbidden to change Pad setting. For Minipack. default is: 0
Side
USER
NETWORK
USER and NETWORK must be paired

up for assignments between NEs. See
NOTE below.
default is: NETWORK
Setup Network Connection DCC Link Layer Setup

7-7
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
NOTE:
1. Two NEs are connected with peer to peer and NETWORK is selected for an NE,
USER must be selected for the other-side NE. NETWORK/USER can be freely
selected for an NE, but the above rule must be observed for the other-side NE.
2. Some equipments have different meaning on this setting. For example, NECs SMS
services have opposite meaning. In this case, NETWORK-NETWORK, or
USER-USER setting should be used.
7.3.2 Procedure: Setup DCC Link Layer

Attention!
In DCC Link Layer Setup dialog box, there is only one parameter side need to be
modified, and the detail operation is shown as below:
The DCC parameter setup operation is performed via the DCC Link Layer Setup
dialog box using the CID. Perform the following:
3. Select DCC Link Layer Setup from the Communication menu. The DCC
Link Layer Setup dialog box shown in Figure 7-4 appears:
Figure 7-4.
DCC Link Layer Setup Dialog Box

7-8
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4. DCC ports and boards including them are shown in the left field of the DCC
Link Layer Setup dialog box. Click them to select them.
5. Double-click the corresponding DCC link in the right field. The DCC dialog box
Figure 7-5. Dialog Box of DCC Link Parameters for Browsing and Setting
6. Double-click the Side text area on the right and select the link of NETWORK or
USER. Other items are fixed not to be changed.
NOTE:
1)
These parameters are defined according to Q.921 recommendation.

No parameters can be modified, except for the last item Side that
needs to be configured according to the network configuration.
2)
When local NE has NETWORK (USER) in DCC configuration,

remote NE connected to local NE via DCC should have USER
(NETWORK) in DCC configuration.
7. Confirm the setting, and then click the Ok button. The DCC dialog box
disappears and the DCC Link Layer Setup dialog box is displayed again and
confirm the DCC parameter.
8. Perform one of the following:
To send the DCC parameter settings to the NE, click the Set button.
7-9
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
NOTE:
1) The specified setting is not valid until the Set button is clicked.
2) When the value of DCC is modified and click the Set button, the CID
will pop-up a warning: In order to make these parameters act effective,
reset the MCP.
To retrieve the DCC parameter settings of the V-NODE NE to the CID, click
the Retrieve button and confirm the DCC parameter.
To finish the DCC parameter settings, click the Close button.

7-10
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.4 Physical Layer Setup

This section provides the procedure to set the address, port and protocol of the
equipment.
7.4.1 Parameters
7.4.1.1 Ethernet tab
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Subnet
(not selected)
NE
(not selected)
Display the NE name
MAC Address
(not selected)
Displays the physical address for the

equipment.
Active State
Enable
Enables modification of MAC address.
(not change)
Upper Protocol
TCP/IP
(drop-down list)
Route Protocol
RIP (check box)

package.
To
select
represents
stopping.
Setup Network Connection Physical Layer Setup

7-11
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.4.1.2 DCC tab

PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Subnet
(not selected)
NE
(not selected)
Display the NE name
Board
(not selected)
Port
(not selected)
ACTIVE STATE
(check box)
Enable/disable active of DCC channels.

To select represents active and unselect
represents forbidden.
UPPER PROTOCOL
TCP/IP
(dropdown box)
(not selected)
ROUTE PROTOCOL
RIP (check box)

package.
To
select
represents
stopping.
D1-D3:
(check box)

DCC channels.
D4-D12:
(check box)

DCC channels.

7-12
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.4.1.3 DCC pass through tab

PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Subnet
(drop-down list)
NE
(drop-down list)
Display the NE name
Board A
(drop-down list)
Port A
(drop-down list)
D1-D3
(check box)
D4-D6
(check box)

D7-D9
(check box)
D10-D12
(check box)
Section A
Board Z
(drop-down list)
Port Z
(drop-down list)
D1-D3
(check box)
D4-D6
(check box)

D7-D9
(check box)
D10-D12
(check box)
Section Z
Direction
Bidirectional/Unidirectional
Display the DCC pass through direction.

7-13
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.4.2 Procedure: Setup Physical Layer

Attention!
In Ethernet dialog box, there is only one parameter Route Protocol need to be
modified, and the parameter MAC Address forbid to be modify. The detail operation is
shown as below:
All the operations for physical layer setup are performed via the Physical Layer Setup
dialog box using the CID. Perform the following procedure:
7.4.2.1 Configuration in Ethernet dialog box

3. Select Physical Layer Setup from the Communication menu. The
Physical Layer Setup dialog box shown in Figure 7-6 appears:
Figure 7-6.
Physical Layer Setup Dialog Box (LAN)

7-14
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4. If you want modify the Ethernet physical layer setup, you should click the target
row to select them and click the Modify button to open Ethernet window, it is
shown as bellow:
5. Select Upper Protocol from the drop-down list.

6. Click the Route Protocol check box leaving a tick or not to enable or disable
LAN port RIP function.
NOTE: When IP addresses of F port and DCC port are in same natural
segment, closing RIP of F port or DCC port only close the transmitting
RIP package of the port, but does not close receiving RIP package of
the port.

7-15
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.4.2.2 Set the protocol for DCC channels

1. Click the DCC tab (see Figure 7-7 for an example).
Figure 7-7.
Physical Layer Setup Dialog Box (DCC)
2. DCC ports and boards including them are shown in the left field of the Physical
Layer Setup dialog box. Click them to select them.
3. Double-click the corresponding DCC link in the right field. The DCC dialog box
Figure 7-8.
Dialog Box of Protocol Setting for DCC Channel

7-16
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Since this equipment uses TCP/IP protocol at present, TCP/IP is displayed in

UPPER PROTOCOL.
4. Select from the ACTIVE STATE drop-down for enables/disable the specified
setting for the communication bytes of DCC channels.
5. Check this ROUTE PROTOCOL RIP. It sends or not sends RIP pkts.
6. Specify the communication bytes of DCC channel through click the check box of
D1_D3 and D4_D12.
7. Confirm the specified contents, and click the OK button. The DCC dialog box
disappears and the Physical Layer Setup dialog box is displayed again.
NOTE:
1. If the OK button is clicked with the ACTIVE STATE check box is
selected as disable, the specified setting for the communication bytes of
DCC channels is ignored.
2. If click Cancel button, all changing setting are clear and the Physical
Layer Setup dialog is displayed again.

7-17
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.4.2.3 Configuration in DCC pass through dialog box

Add DCC function
1. Click the DCC pass through tab (see Figure 7-9 for an example).
Figure 7-9. Physical Layer Setup Dialog Box (DCC pass through)
2. DCC ports and boards including them are shown in the left field of the Physical Layer Setup dialog box. Click them to select them.
3. If you want add the DCC, you should click the Add button to open DCC pass
through window, it is shown as bellow:

7-18
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 7-10.
Add DCC Configuration
4. Select the subnet from the Subnet drop-down list.

5. Select the NE from the NE drop-down list.
6. From the Board A drop-down list, you can specify the board A slot ID
7. From the Port A drop-down list, you can specify the port ID of port A;
8. Specify the communication bytes through click the check box of D1_D3, D4_D6,
D7-D9, and D10-D12.
9. Repeat the same step of 6, 7, and 8 to configure the Board Z, Port Z, and
Section Z.
10. Click OK button to confirm the setting.
11. Click the Set button to send the setting data to the CID. If not click this button
changing setting are invalid.
NOTE:
1)
No setting is valid until the Set button is clicked.
2)
When changing the parameter of the physical layer and click the Set
button, the CID will pop-up a warning: In order to make these
parameters act effective, reset the MCP.
7-19
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
12. Click the Retrieve button to retrieve the setting data and confirm setting.
13. Click the Close button to finish the physical layer setup.

7-20
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Modify function
1. Double-click the corresponding DCC link in the right field. The DCC pass
through dialog box shown in
Figure 7-11. Modify the DCC Configuration

2. Specify the parameters to be modified in the DCC pass through dialog box.
For the function of the items in this dialog box, refer to the section 7.4.1.3
3. Click OK button to confirm the setting.
4. Click the Set button to send the setting data to the CID. If not click this button
changing setting are invalid.
NOTE:
1)
2)
When changing the parameter of the physical layer and click the Set
button, the CID will pop-up a warning: In order to make these parameters
act effective, reset the MCP.

7-21
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Delete function
1. Click the corresponding DCC item to select it.
2. Click the Delete button to delete it.
3. Click the Set button to send the setting data to the CID. If not click this
button changing setting are invalid.
NOTE:
1) No setting is valid until the Set button is clicked.
2) When changing the parameter of the physical layer and click the Set
6. This step is the end of the procedure.

7-22
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.5 Static Route Setting

This section provides the procedure to add a new routing and to modify the existing
routings.
NOTE:
1) Static routing also can be added and the added the static route is not shown in
Dynamic router table.
2) When configure IP, please comply with the rule refer to the NOTE in section
7.2.
3) The maximum number of registered static routing is up to 50.
Setup Network Connection Static Route Setting

7-23
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.5.1 Parameters
Route tab
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Type
Local/Rip/Static
Local: local route

Rip: remote route transferred by Rip
protocol
Static: static route added by user
Destination IP
Local IP and remote IP
Address of the destination.
Gateway
Local IP
The gate address connecting to another subnet.
Netmask
IP netmask
8-byte code that distinguish subnet

type.
Interface IP
Local IP
Describing the local IP
Hops
In Core
Route tab
1 thru 16

IP.
In Route
Database
1 thru 254

IP.
Priority
0 thru 5
priority of different type route.
Flags
bit0: this route can use.

bit1: this route is a gatway route
bit2: this route is a host route
bit3: his route is a redirect creat route
bit4: this route is a redirect modify route
describing the five type of Route
Refcnt
1 thru 0xffffffff
Indicate how many connect use this

route.
1 thru 0xffffffff
The count that summarize how

many data packet used this route
Radio button
Display the static route that is manual configured by user.
Radio button
Display the route that be built by

dynamic route protocol (for example
RIP or OSPF).
Radio button
Display both the static route and dynamic route.
button
Add the route
button
According to your need to modify

the route
Delete
button
Delete the route
Retrieve
button
Retrieve the route information
button
Let the configuration of the route

information become effective
button
Close this dialog.
Use
Static
Dynamic
All
Add
Modify
Set
Close

7-24
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.5.2 Procedure: Add/Modify/Delete Static and Default

Routing
All the operations for adding/modifying static and default the routing(s) are performed
via the Route Table dialog box using the CID. Perform the following:
3. Select Route Table from the Communication menu. The Route Table
Figure 7-12.
NOTE:
Route Table Dialog Box (Core Route)
Core Route tab dialog is only use for display, its parameters cant be
changed. If you want modify the parameters of route, please select the
Route Database tab, and the detail operation refer to the follows:
4. Click the Route Database tab. The Route Database window (Route Table
dialog box with the Route Database tab selected) shown in Figure 7-13
appears.

7-25
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 7-13.
Route Table Dialog Box (Route Database)
In this window, there is a list of Static and Default Routing Setting.

NOTE: Only when V-NODE can not automatically create route table, should
this table be used. It is mostly used for V-NODE to communicate with
the equipments that do not support RIP protocol. It requires operators
to add/modify/delete route manually. So operators must be very
familiar with the whole network connection.
To add a new static routing:
NOTE: You can set the Netmask randomly and the system will accord you
configuration of Netmask to mask the Destination IP; in the same way,
you can configure the Hops randomly, its number does not reflected
the setting.
1) Click the Add button on the bottom of the Route Table dialog box. The
Route dialog box shown in Figure 7-14 appears:

7-26
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 7-14. Route Dialog Box (Add New Route)

2) Enter the destination IP and gateway into Destination IP and Gateway
text boxes, respectively.
3) Confirm the settings, and click the Ok button. The Route dialog box
disappears, and the Route Table dialog box (Route Database tab
selected) is displayed with the specified new static routing added into the list.
NOTE:
1. Clicking the Cancel button cancels the setting, and the Route dialog
box disappears ignoring all the settings specified here.
2. Default Routing Setting: Destination IP 0.0.0.0, Netmask 0.0.0.0 is valid
for V-NODE. See below Figure 7-15.
3. Once the static route creates successfully, the other NEs in same network
can access through it because the static routing information can be
transmitted to them by RIP

7-27
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 7-15.
Example of Default Routing Setting
To modify a static routing:

1) Select a static routing in the list.
2) Click the Modify button on the bottom of the Route Table dialog box. The
Route dialog box for the selected static routing appears (see Figure 7-16
for an example):
Figure 7-16.
Route Dialog Box (Modify Route)
3) Change the destination IP and/or gateway in the Destination IP and/or

Gateway text box (es).
4) Confirm the setting, and click the Ok button. The Route dialog box
disappears, and the Route Table dialog box (Route Database tab
selected) is displayed with the specified static routing modified its
parameters.

7-28
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
NOTE: Clicking the Cancel button cancels the setting, and the Route dialog
box disappears ignoring all the settings specified here.
To delete a static routing:
1) Select a static routing in the list.
2) Click the Delete button on the bottom of the Route Table dialog box.
1. Confirm that all the necessary settings are specified (addition/modification/
deletion of static routings) by referring to the routing list in the Route Table
dialog box.
2. Click the Set button to send the routing setting to the NE.
NOTE:
1)
2)
When changing the parameter of the static route and click the Set
3. Click the Retrieve button to retrieve the routing setting to the CID and confirm
setting parameters.
4. Click the Close button to finish the routing setting.

7-29
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.6 Orderwire and User CH Configuration

This section provides the procedure to set up the orderwire communication for the
equipment.
7.6.1 Parameters
Orderwire Attribute tab
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Subnet
(not selected)
NE
(not selected)
Display the NE name
Calling Number
000 thru 999
Set a number for one-to-one orderwire

SDH network, and different from the group
calling number.
NOTE: 000 denotes all call.
Group Calling
000 thru 999
Set a number for group calling (party line)

SDH network, and different from the calling
number.
Coding Way
a or
Specify coding way to a-law or -law.
Working Status
Hang Up/Hook
Off
Display the working status.
Line Status
Free/Busy
Display the line status
Number
Setup Network Connection Orderwire and User CH Configuration

7-30
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Orderwire Channel tab

PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Subnet
(not selected)
NE
(not selected)
Display the NE name
Board
(not selected)
Port
(not selected)
Orderwire
Selected Status
Selected
(check box)

value of the Channel NO. And the Section.
Channel No.
1 thru 6
Display the number of selected channel.
(text box)
Receiving
Open/Close
Specify the receiving control.
Sending
Open/Close
Specify the sending control.
Section
E1 or E2
Select orderwire byte
(drop-down list)

7-31
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
User Channel tab

PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Subnet
(not selected)
NE
(not selected)
Display the NE name
Board A
MCP+optical board
Port A
Optical ports provided

by selected board A.
Section A
E2/F1
Board Z
MCP+optical board
Port Z
Optical ports provided

by selected board Z.
Section Z
E2/F1
Direction
Unidirectional
Display the user channel direction.


(not selected)

7-32
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.6.2 Procedure: Setup Orderwire Attribute

The orderwire attribute setup operation is performed via the Orderwire and User CH
Configuration dialog box using the CID. Perform the following:
3. Select Orderwire and User CH Configuration from the Configuration
menu. The Orderwire and User CH Configuration dialog box shown in
Figure 7-17 appears:
Figure 7-17.
Orderwire and User CH Configuration Dialog Box

(Orderwire Attribute Setup)
4. Click the target row to select them and click the Modify button to open the
Orderwire Attribute window. The Orderwire Attribute window is shown as
bellow:

7-33
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
5. Specify each parameter. Refer to the section 7.6.1 Parameters.

6. Click the OK button to confirm the settings and close this window or click
Cancel button to ignore the setting and close the window.
7. In Orderwire and User CH Configuration window, click the Set button to
download the settings to NE.
8. Confirm the specified settings and click the Retrieve button to report the data in
MCP of the equipment to the CID.
9. Click the Close button to finish the orderwire attribute setup.

7-34
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.6.3 Procedure: Setup Orderwire Channel

The user channel setup operation is performed via the Orderwire and User CH
menu to open the Orderwire and User CH Configuration dialog box.
4. Click the Orderwire Channel tab. Figure 7-18 shows an example:
Figure 7-18.
Orderwire and User CH Configuration Dialog Box (Orderwire Channel Setup)
5. Select one of the channels by click to open the Orderwire Channel window. It
is shown as bellow:

7-35
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6. If the selected channel is to be used for orderwire communication, click the

Orderwire Selected Status check box
NOTE: Up to six orderwire intercommunications are available in the system.
7. Specify the receiving control, Close or Open, from the Receiving drop-down
list in the Orderwire Channel Attribute field.
8. Specify the sending control, Close or Open, from the Sending drop-down list
in the Orderwire Channel Attribute field.
9. Set the overhead byte used by data channel, E1 (E1 byte) or E2 (E2 byte), from
the Section drop-down list in the User Channel field.
12. Confirm the specified setting and click the Retrieve button to report the data in
13. Click the Close button to finish the user channel setup.

7-36
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7.6.4 Procedure: Setup User Channel

The user channel setup operation is performed via the Orderwire and User CH
menu to open the Orderwire and User CH Configuration dialog box.
4. Click the User Channel tab. Figure 7-18 shows an example:
Figure 7-19.
Orderwire and User CH Configuration Dialog Box (User Channel Setup)
5. Select one of the channels by click to open the User Channel window. It is
shown as bellow:

7-37
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 7-20.
Configure the Communication from Port A to Port Z
For communicate with port A and port Z, you should not only configure the
communication from port A to port Z but also configure the communication from
port Z to port A. The detail configuration is shown as below
Figure 7-21.
Configure the Communication from Port Z to Port A
6. Specify the Subnet from the drop-down list in User Channel field.
7. Specify the NE from the drop-down list in User Channel field.

7-38
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8. Select one board used for user channel, MCP/optical board, from the Board A
drop-down list in the User Channel field.
9. Select one of the provided ports used for user channel from the Port A
10. Select user channel byte, E2 (E2 byte) or F1 (F1 byte), from the Section A
11. Refer to the procedure 8, 9, 10 to configuration Board Z, Port Z, Section Z.
NOTE: Since the six data channels on the MCP board can cross with the optical port
on all optical board, there are two cross types:
1)
The cross between MCP and optical board;
2)
The cross between optical board and optical board.
The detailed configure operation of these two cross types are shown as below:
The cross between MCP and optical board
a) Specify MCP board and an optical board from the drop-down list in User
Channel field
b) The result is shown as below figure:

7-39
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
NOTE: The direction is

uni-direction.
The cross between optical board and optical board

a) Specify two optical board from the drop-down list in User Channel field
b) The result is shown as below figure:

7-40
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
NOTE: The direction is

uni-direction.
14. Confirm the specified setting and click the Retrieve button to report the data in
15. Click the Close button to finish the user channel setup.

7-41
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6. SETUP CROSSCONNECT
This section provides the procedures that are required to setup the crossconnection
configuration.
6.1 Crossconnection Type

The following three crossconnection types are available for the V-NODE.
Time Slot (TS) Connection (without protective TS)
Time slot connection (without protective TS) means only one source time slot or path
and one destination time slot or path can be connected together.
For the setup procedure of the time slot connection (without protective TS), refer to
the section 6.4 Time Slot Connection (without protective TS).
Broadcast Time Slot Connection
Broadcast time slot connection means only one source time slot or path and more than
one destination time slot or path can be connected together.
For the setup procedure of the broadcast time slot connection, refer to the section 6.5
Broadcast Time Slot Connection.
Protective Time Slot Connection
Protective time slot connection means two source time slots or paths and one
destination time slot or path are connected to compose protective connection.
For the setup procedure of the protective time slot connection, refer to the section 6.6
Protective Time Slot Connection.
Setup Crossconnect Crossconnection Type

6-1
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.2 Cross Connect Configuration Dialog Box

The crossconnect configuration setup operation is operated via the Cross Connect
Configuration dialog box. This section provides the procedure to open the Cross
Connect Configuration dialog box and functions provided with this dialog box.
6.2.1 Open Cross Connect Configuration Dialog Box

Perform the following to display the Cross Connect Configuration dialog box:
Procedure
in the section 7. Operating with CID of the Working with CID manual.
3. Select Cross Connect Configuration from the Configuration menu. The
Cross Connect Configuration dialog box shown in Figure 6-1 appears:
Figure 6-1.
Cross Connect Configuration Dialog Box
Setup Crossconnect Cross Connect Configuration Dialog Box

6-2
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.2.2 Items in Cross Connect Configuration Dialog Box

The Cross Connect Configuration diagram has the following items:
ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Port list box
Select the port.
(tree diagram)
Configuration
window
Displays the crossconnect configuration.
The color of connection

turns pinkish red when
selected.
Up
Moves the port location in the configuration

window to upward by clicking In.
Left

window to the left by clicking In.
Right

window to the right by clicking In.
Bottom

window downward by clicking In.
Build
Creates a new time slot connection.
(radio button)
Delete
Deletes the selected time slot connection.

When this is selected, Multi-TS is disabled.
(radio button)
Single-TS
Specifies the Single-TS mode. Under this

mode, a new connection should be created
one-by-one
(radio button)
Multi-TS
Specifies the Multi-TS mode. Under this

mode, multi time slot connections can be
created at a time based on different types
of function unit (such as 8x2M extended
board, 32x2M extended board).
(radio button)
Broadcast
Specifies the broadcast time slot

connection. In this connection, a source
time slot can connect to multi-destination
time slots.
(radio button)
1+1 Primary
Specifies the 1+1 primary path protection

for destination time slot.
(radio button)
Time slot connections can be selected by

clicking.
1+1 Backup
Specifies the 1+1 backup path protection

for destination time slot.
Delete[All]
Deletes all the crossconnection on the

equipment.
This option is invalid

when configuring the
protective time slot with
1+1 Primary or 1+1
Backup option.
When either of these

options selected, the
multi-TS mode is not
available.
The V-NODE will be
automatically restarted
after clicking this button.

6-3
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
(Continued)
ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Set
Makes the current crossconnect setting

valid. The setting is sent to the NE.
Cancel
Makes the current crossconnect setting

invalid. The setting is cancelled and not
sent to the NE.
Retrieve
Retrieves the current crossconnect setting

status to the CID.
Source
Displays the source time slots.
(no selection)
Destination
Displays the destination time slots.
(no selection)
Cross Connect
Displays the crossconnect attributes
(no selection)
Attribute

6-4
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.2.3 Pop-Up Menu for Time Slot Configuration

A pop-up menu window shown in Figure 6-2 is provided for the time slot configuration.
This window appears by right-clicking the mouse.
Figure 6-2.
Pop-Up Menu for Time Slot Configuration
The functions of each menu in this pop-up window is as follows:

ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
Select Cancel
Cancels the selected time slots or the crossconnection that

has been built.
Extend Next Layer
Extends the layer to see next order path. When one of

ports you have selected is moved, the port icon will be
seen first in the visual time slot configuration window. By
right-clicking to open the menu and selecting Extend Next
Layer, the higher order path VC4, TUG3, and VC12 path
can be seen sequentially, by repeating this operation. See
for detailed information.
Channel Configuration
Sets WTR time and Hold Off Time for path protection.
Set Extra Command of Working
Sets operation status of path working.
Set Extra Command of Protect
Sets operation status of path protection.
6.2.3.1 Extend Layer

In the configuration window, each of three TUG3 extends to 21 T12s by selecting
Extend Next Layer from the pop-up menu. For the convenience of thoroughly
understanding the relationship among TU12, TUG2 and TUG3, the following list is
provided. This table shows the multiplexing arrangements of three TU-12s via the
TU-2, and multiplexing arrangement of seven TUG-2s via TUG-3 as right column.

6-5
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
(1of2)
CID
ITU-T
TUG3
TU12
TS No.
TUG3
TUG2
TU12
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33

6-6
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
(2of2)
CID
ITU-T
TUG3
TU12
TS No.
TUG3
TUG2
TU12
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63

6-7
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.3 Task Flow for Crossconnection Setup

This section provides the general procedure for crossconnection setup. All the operations
are performed via the Cross Connect Configuration dialog box using the CID.
6.3.1 Task Flow

The task flow of the crossconnection setup is as follows:
1. Open the Cross Connect Configuration dialog box.
2. Select a port and move it to the configuration window.
3. Specify necessary options.
4. Perform necessary operations using the pop-up menu.
5. Complete the crossconnection setting.
For detailed procedures, see the subsection 6.3.2 General Procedure for
Crossconnection Setup
NOTE: When crossconnect setup is unsuccessful, to remove any inconsistency
between CID and NE, retrieving crossconnect information is required
before starting next operation.
6.3.2 General Procedure for Crossconnection Setup

The following shows the general procedure to setup cross connection, based on the task
flow shown in 6.3.1 above. For the procedure according to each cross connection type,
refer to section 6.4 Time Slot Connection (without protective TS), 6.5 Broadcast Time
Slot Connection and 6.6 Protective Time Slot Connection, respectively.
Procedure
1. Open the Cross Connect Configuration dialog box.
Open the Cross Connect Configuration dialog box. Refer to the section
6.2.1 Open Cross Connect Configuration Dialog Box.
Setup Crossconnect Task Flow for Crossconnection Setup

6-8
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
2. Select a port and move it to the configuration window.

Select a port in the list box, and then click the In button of Up, Left, Right or
Bottom option. The selected port is moved into the crossconnection
configuration window on the right.
NOTE: The location of the port in the window depends on what option is
selected to In, Up, Left, Right and Bottom correspond to the position
of up, left, right, and bottom in the configuration window, respectively.
The port can be located up, left, right or bottom.
3. Specify necessary options.
Click the necessary options on the left frame according to the crossconnection
type to be configured. For the function of each option, refer to 6.2.2 Items in
Cross Connect Configuration Dialog Box.
Click the Build radio button to create a new time slot connection.
Click the Delete radio button to delete the time slot connection had has been
once built.
Then select the destination time slot so that its relevant crossconnection turns
from black to pinkish red, and click the Delete button to delete the built
crossconnection.
Select Single-TS or Multi-TS by clicking the corresponding radio button.
In the Single-TS mode, only one time slot connection can be built at a time,
while in the Multi-TS mode all time slot connections can be built at one time.
When configuring the broadcast time slot connection, click the Broadcast
radio button.
When configuring the protective time slot connection, select 1+1 Primary or
1+1 Backup by clicking the corresponding radio button, then connect proper
time slot.
After this, the selected radio button has automatically switched to the selected
path protection, prompting to configure the corresponding protective time slot.
NOTE: When 1+1 Primary or 1+1 Backup is selected, the Multi-TS mode is
invalid.

6-9
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4. Perform necessary operations using the pop-up menu.

Right-click the mouse to open the pop-up menu, and select a menu according to
the configured crossconnection type, if necessary. When configuring the
protective time slot connection, for example, select Channel Configuration
from the pop-up menu to specify the WTR time and Hold Off time for path
protection (see the section 6.6 Protective Time Slot Connection for detailed
information on the protective time slot connection).
5. Complete the crossconnection setting.
Perform one of the following:
Click the Set button to complete the crossconnection setting. In this event, the
setting data is sent to the NE.
Click the Cancel button to cancel the crossconnection setting. In this event,
the setting data is not sent to the NE.
Click the Delete [All] button to delete all the crossconnection setting on the
equipment.
Click the Retrieve button to retrieve the current crossconnection setting
status to the CID.

6-10
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.4 Time Slot Connection (without protective TS)

This section provides the procedure to establish the time slot connection without
protective time slot.
Perform the following procedure:
Procedure
1. Open the Cross Connect Configuration dialog box. Refer to the section
2. Select a port in the list box, and then click the In button of Up, Left, Right or
3. Click the Build radio button.
4. Select Single-TS or Multi-TS by clicking the corresponding radio button.
NOTE: In the Single-TS mode, only one time slot connection can be built at a
time, while in the Multi-TS mode all time slot connections can be built at
one time.
5. Select Broadcast.
6. Select a source time slot ID or path in the crossconnect configuration window by
clicking. The selected source time slot or path will be displayed in red.
NOTE: To cancel the selection, right-click the time slot that has been selected
and click Select Cancel in the pop-up menu.
7. Click the destination time slot ID or path. The time slot connection is built.
8. Click the Set button.
Setup Crossconnect Time Slot Connection (without protective TS)

6-11
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.5 Broadcast Time Slot Connection

This section provides the procedure to build the broad time slot connection.
Figure 6-3 shows an example of broadcast time slot connection:
Figure 6-3. Broadcast Time Slot Connection

To configure the broadcast time slot connection, perform the following procedure:
Procedure
Setup Crossconnect Broadcast Time Slot Connection

6-12
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4. Select Single-TS or Multi-TS by clicking the corresponding radio button.
NOTE: In the Single-TS mode, only one time slot connection can be built at a
time, while in the Multi-TS mode all time slot connections can be built at
one time.
5. Click the Broadcast radio button.
6. Select a source time slot ID or path in the crossconnect configuration window by
clicking. The selected source time slot or path will be displayed in red.
NOTE: To cancel the selection, right-click the time slot that has been selected
and click Select Cancel in the pop-up menu.
7. Click the destination time slot ID or path. The time slot connection is built.
8. Select the time slot or path again that needs to broadcast, and connect them to the
corresponding time slot or channel of another side.
NOTE: When broadcast path is configured, source path termination point may
send RDI signal, because it cannot receive appropriate path overhead
information from destination path termination point. In order to avoid
this situation, it is recommended to make two way paths between one of
destination path termination point and source path termination point.
Setup Crossconnect Broadcast Time Slot Connection

6-13
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.6 Protective Time Slot Connection

This section provides the procedure to build the protective time slot connection.
Figure 6-4 shows an example of protective time slot connection:
Figure 6-4.
Protective Time Slot Connection
To configure the protective time slot connection, first ensure the types of protection: 1+1
primary path protection or 1+1 backup path protection. Then perform the following
procedure:
Procedure
Setup CrossconnectProtective Time Slot Connection
6-14
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4. Select Single-TS by clicking the radio button.

5. Click the 1+1 Primary or 1+1 Backup radio button according to the path
protection type to be set.
6. Connect proper time slot.
7. To specify the path parameters, perform the followings:
1) Right-click the destination time slot number to open the pop-up menu, and
then select Channel Configuration. The Channel Configuration dialog
Figure 6-5. Channel Configuration Dialog Box (Standby Channel Configuration)

2) In this dialog box, the Source Cross Slot ID and Destination Cross
Slot with path identity are displayed. Confirm the settings.
3) Click the Recover radio button to enable recover switching after the fault
has been cleared.
4) Set the hold off time into Hold Off Time [ms]. The available range is
within 0 through10000 ms and the step is 50ms.
5) Set the wait-to-restore time into WTR Time [s]. The available range is
within 0 through 720 s and the step is 60s.
6) Confirm the settings, and then click the Set button. The Channel
Configuration dialog box disappears and the Cross Connect
Configuration dialog box is displayed again.
Setup Crossconnect Protective Time Slot Connection

6-15
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
NOTE: To cancel the path parameter setting, click the Close button. The
Channel Configuration dialog box disappears and the Cross
Connect Configuration dialog box is displayed, ignoring all the
settings specified here.
8. To specify the switching mode (operation status of channel protection),
right-click the destination time slot number to open the pop-up menu, and then
select Set Extra Command of Working or Set Extra Command of
Protect command.
The Set Extra Commands dialog box shown in Figure 6-6 below appears:
Setup CrossconnectProtective Time Slot Connection

6-16
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-6. Set Switch Command Dialog Box

In this dialog box, perform the following:
1) Click a radio button to select the switching mode. The function of each mode
is as follows:
SWITCHING MODE
FUNCTION
Manual Switch
If the command is set and protection channel is in

normal status, the traffic will be switched to protection
channel.
Forced Switch
If the command is set, the traffic will be switched to

protection channel unconditionally.
Channel Lockout
If the command is set, the protection channel will be

forbidden to use unconditionally.
NOTE: It is impossible to set several commands at the same time because a new
command set will automatically cancel the command set before.
2) Confirm the setting and click the Set button. The Set Switch Command
dialog box disappears and the Cross Connect Configuration dialog box
is displayed again.
NOTE: To cancel the switching mode setting, click the Cancel button. The Set
Switch Command dialog box disappears and the Cross Connect
Configuration dialog box is displayed, ignoring the setting specified
here.
This step is the end of the procedure
Setup Crossconnect Protective Time Slot Connection

6-17
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.7 Time Slot Connection Configuration used text

interfaces
This section provides the general procedure for crossconnection setup by using text
interface. All the operations are performed via the Cross Connect Configuration
dialog box using the CID.
6.7.1 General Procedure for Crossconnection Retrieve

Procedure
2. Select Panel from the drop-down list.
3. Select the cross connect level.
4. Then click Retrieve button to upload cross connect status:
The format of the source and
Displays the crossconnect attri-
Destination column:
butes:
/The shelf ID/The slot ID/[High
1.
Source/Dest Independent
order path] [Low order path]
2.
Broadcast
3.
Sending Primary
4.
Sending Backup
5.
1+1 Primary
6.
1+1 Backup
Displays the crossconnect type:

1.
Uni-directional Unprotected
2.
Bi-directional Unprotected
3.
Broadcast
4.
Uni-directional open end

protected

s
Setup CrossconnectTime Slot Connection Configuration used text interfaces
6-18
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.7.2 General Procedure for Crossconnection Setup

Procedure
2. Select Cross Connect from the Configuration menu.
3. Click the Build button to open the Cross Connect Configuration window.
4. Select the cross connect type and cross connect level from the Cross Connect
Configuration window.
5. Configure the time slot for every object.
6. Click the END button to finish the configuration
Setup Crossconnect Time Slot Connection Configuration used text interfaces

6-19
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.7.2.1 Prpcedure for Uni-directional Unprotected

Crossconnection setup
Since the cross connect type is classified as Uni-directional Unprotected, Bidirectional
Unprotected, Broadcast, Uni-directional open end protected, Uni-directional close end
protected, Bidirectional protected, It is only the type of Uni-directional unprotected for
example to show how to configure the cross connect.
Procedure
2. Select Cross Connect from the Configuration menu. The Cross Connect
dialog box shown in
Figure 6-7. Cross Connect Configuration

3. Click the Build button to open the Cross Connect Configuration windows,
it is shown as bellow:

6-20
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-8. Cross Connect Configuration Windows

4. Select Uni-directional Unprotected from the Cross Connect Type
drop-down list and then select the cross connect level ,at last, click Ok button to
continue the cross connect configuration.
5. Just then, we need to select time slots of object A. Select board from Board
drop-down list, click the time slot which you want to configuration from
Available Time Slot drop-down list and then click > to selected it, repeated
this step you can select several time slots for the object A.

6-21
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6. Click Next button to continue.

7. Refer to step 5 to select time slot of Z.
NOTE: If the number of Time-Slots is not matching, it will be configured with
minimum number.
8. Click the END button to finish the configuration, the operation interface is shown
as bellow:

6-22
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

6-23
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.7.2.2 Prpcedure for Bi-directional Unprotected

This is the procedure for Bi-directional unprotected crossconnection setup
Procedure
2. Refer to the 6.7.2.2 step 2 to open the Cross Connect window from the
Configuration menu.

4. Select Bi-directional Unprotected from the Cross Connect Type

6-24
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

7. Refer to step 5 to select time slot of Z.
minimum number.
as bellow:

6-25
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

6-26
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.7.2.3 Prpcedure for Broadcast Crossconnection setup

This is the procedure for Broadcast crossconnection setup
Procedure
Configuration menu.
Figure 6-10.
Cross Connect Configuration Windows
4. Select Broadcast from the Cross Connect Type drop-down list and then
select the cross connect level ,at last, click Ok button to continue the cross
connect configuration.
Available Time Slot drop-down list and then click > to selected it.

6-27
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
NOTE: Only one Time-Slot can be selected, because it is Broadcast mode.

7. Refer to step 5 to select time slot of Z1Zn.
as bellow:

6-28
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

6-29
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.7.2.4 Procedure for Uni-directional open end Protected

Crossconnection Setup
This is the procedure for Uni-directional open end protected crossconnection setup
Procedure
Configuration menu.

4. Select Uni-directional open end protected from the Cross Connect Type
6-30
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Available Time Slot drop-down list and then click > to selected it. Repeated

7. Refer to step 5 to select time slot of Z1 and Z2.
minimum number.
as bellow:

6-31
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

6-32
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.7.2.5 Prpcedure for Uni-directional close end protected

This is the procedure for Uni-directional close end protected crossconnection setup
Procedure
Configuration menu.
Figure 6-12.
4. Select Uni-directional close end protected from the Cross Connect

Type drop-down list and then select the cross connect level ,at last, click Ok
button to continue the cross connect configuration.
5. Just then, we need to select time slots of object A1. Select board from Board
6-33
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
this step you can select several time slots for the object A1.

7. Refer to step 5 to select time slot of A2 and Z.
minimum number.
as bellow:

6-34
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

6-35
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6.7.2.6 Prpcedure for Bi-directional protected

This is the procedure for Bi-directional protected crossconnection setup.
Procedure
Configuration menu.
Figure 6-13.
4. Select Bi-directional Unprotected from the Cross Connect Type

5. Just then, we need to select time slots of object A1. Select board from Board
6-36
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
this step you can select several time slots for the object A1.

7. Refer to step 5 to select time slot of A2 and Z.
minimum number.
as bellow:

6-37
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

6-38
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4. REGISTER NE CONFIGURATION
This section provides the procedures to setup the V-NODE.
The operations are performed from the Configuration menu on the target NEs
management dialog box by using the CID. Thus, the CID must be ready to proceed with
these steps, that is, the target NE must be connected with the CID, you must log in to the
NE, and the target NEs management dialog box is displayed by selecting in the CID
main window before starting the procedures here. This basic information on the CID, in
order to operate with NEs, is provided in the section 7. Working with CID of the CID
Operating Guide manual.
Register NE Configuration
4-1
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.1 Adjust NE Time

The date and time for the system is required to adjust and keep the same condition in a
network. If not, it will affect performance monitoring (PM), logging, etc. Perform the
following procedure to adjust the clock of the target NE.
NOTE:
After NE is reset or power off, NE time will be automatically adjusted as CID

time when logging to NE with CID.
The date and time can be adjusted via the Adjust NE Time dialog box by using CID.
4.1.1 Parameters
The Adjust NE Time dialog box has the following parameters:
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
NE Time
Displays the current date and hour in

reference to the target NE has.
(not a selection)
PC Time
An equipment time will be set to the

time of the PC in which the CID is
running.
(not a selection)
Adjust Time
Input the expected time,
When click the Set button,

the NE time and the PC time
should be adjusted as the adjust time.
Register NE Configuration Adjust NE Time

4-2
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.1.2 Procedure: Adjust NE Time

2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Adjust NE
Time from the Configuration menu or click the
shortcut button. The
Adjust NE Time dialog box shown in Figure 4-1 appears:
Figure 4-1. Adjust NE Time Dialog Box

3. Modify the time in Adjust Time, by selecting item from Date and Time and
using up/down button.
4. Click the Set button to download the adjusted time settings to the NE.
5. Click the Retrieve button to report the adjusted time settings in MCP of the
equipment to the CID.
6. Click the Close button to finish the NE time adjustment.
Register NE Configuration Adjust NE Time

4-3
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2 Setup NE
The CID retrieves the configuration information data of the equipment for each login.
When logging in for the first time, it is required to initialize (setup) NE.
4.2.1 Starting NE Setup (Initialization)

Setup operation for NE can be executed via a wizard format. Perform the following
procedure:
Procedure
2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Setup NE from
the Configuration menu. The Setup-NE Attributes dialog box appears (see
Figure 4-2).
This step is the end of the procedure. Go to the subsection 4.2.2 Setup NE
Attribute and perform the procedure to proceed with the NE setup operation.
Register NE Configuration Setup NE

4-4
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.2 Setup NE Attribute

In the Setup-NE Attributes dialog box, parameters in NE attributes required for NE
setup should be specified.

The Setup-NE Attribute dialog box has the following items and parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
VALUES
DESCRIPTION
NE ID
4-byte
non-negative
integer
NE ID of private system, consisting of

the 4-byte non-negative integer, is unique within whole system. Value ranger
is from 2 to 4294967294. For supporting routing selection based on private
protocol, the NE ID is coded conforming
to some prescribed rules, and the
default identity is set by the NE program.
Equipment Type
(not selected)
Displays the current NE type.
Start-up Date
Date
Displays relative seconds to 1970, and

all other time involved in CID is also
expressed in such way. The running
time can be set by selecting using the
up and down button. The range is from
1980-01-01 to 2037-01-01.
NE Name
(text field)
A name of NE should be set so that the

CID support multi-language versions.
The default is blank. Maximum character number is 80.
System Location
(text field)
Enter the geological position of NE. For

example, enter Changping District, Beijing as the location of NE. The default is
blank. Maximum character number is
80.
Contact Address
(text field)
A contact address of manufacturer set

by the CID. Maximum character number
is 80.

4-5
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.2.2 Procedure: Setup NE Attributes

1. Confirm the Setup-NE Attribute dialog box shown in Figure 4-2 is displayed.
Figure 4-2.
Setup-NE Attributes Dialog Box
2. Specify the required parameters (NE attributes).

3. After all the NE attributes required for NE setup are specified, confirm the
entered items and then click the Retrieve button. The installing and
configuration data are reported to the network management system.
To proceed with the NE setup operation, click the Next button to open the
Setup-Physical Slot Configuration dialog box, and go to the section 4.2.3
Setup Physical Slot Configuration section to perform the procedure.
To quit the NE setup operation, click the Close button.
4-6
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.3 Setup Physical Slot Configuration

In the Setup-Physical Slot Configuration dialog box, parameters required to setup
the physical slot configuration should be specified.

The Setup-Physical Slot Configuration dialog box has the following items and
parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
VALUES
DESCRIPTION
Slot NO.
(not selected)
Displays the slot number and board type

selected by clicking a slot on the left of
equipment figure.
Installed Board
(not selected)
Displays the installed board type.
Hardware Version
(not selected)
Displays
version.
the
installed
board
PCB
Required Installed
Board
Select a board to be installed to the

selected slot from the drop-down list.
Management
Status
Select the management status from the

drop-down list.
Running Status
Install/Uninstall
(button)
(not selected)
Displays the installed board working

status.
Add/Delete board on CID.

4-7
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.3.2 Procedure: Setup Physical Slot Configuration

1. Confirm that the Setup-Physical Slot Configuration dialog box shown in
Figure 4-3 is displayed.
Figure 4-3.
Setup-Physical Slot Configuration Dialog Box
2. Click a slot number configured on the equipment in the figure. The selected slot
number will be displayed in the Slot NO.: field.
3. Select the name of board from Required Installed Board drop-down list,
according to the actual configuration.
4. Select Work Normally from the Management Status drop-down list.
NOTE: Only work normally can be used.
5. Click the Install button to register the board.
NOTE: For removing the board registration, click the Uninstall button.
To proceed with the NE setup operation, click the Next button to open the
Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box, and go to the section
4.2.5 Setup NE Timing Source to perform the procedure.
To go back to the NE attributes setup, click the Back to return to the
Setup-NE Attributes dialog box.
To quit the NE setup operation, click the Close button.
4-8
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Physical slot configurations of all kinds of boards are shown below for customer
to how to configure them in CID more easily.
S1E
STM-1/4
Figure 4-4.
STM-1/4 Physical Slot Configuration

4-9
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
STM16
Figure 4-5. STM16 Physical Slot Configuration
E12
Figure 4-6.
E12 Physical Slot Configuration

4-10
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
E31
E32

4-11
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
FE
Figure 4-7.
FE Physical Slot Configuration

4-12
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.4 Package Protect Configuration

This section provides the procedure to set up the Package Protect Configuration for the
equipment.
The board protect operation is performed via the Package Protect Configuration
open the Package Protect Configuration dialog box. The Package Protect
Configuration dialog box shown in Figure 4-8 appears:
Figure 4-8.
Package Protect Configuration

4-13
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.4.1
CS Board Protect

The Board Protect dialog box has the following items and parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
VALUES
DESCRIPTION
Protect Group
CLK_CS
Displays the Protect Group.
Protect
Group
Attribute
08# CLK_CS
Displays the slot number and board name.
Board
09# CLK_CS
Primary/
Backup
Primary/ Backup
Displays the configuration of board: primary or

backup.
Actual
Status
Primary/ Backup
Displays the actual status of board: primary or

backup.
Control
Status
Lockout of protection/
Displays CS package switch external command.
Forced switch /
Manual switch
Switch Test
Command
Switch to 8 slot
Switch to 9 slot

CS board is not used.
Forced switch to
When this check box is selected, the backup CS

board is forcibly used as the primary board
protection
Manual switch to
protection
NOTE:
The Lockout of protection, Forced switch to protection and Manual

switch to protection commands in the Command field are controlled by the
software in the CS board. When the software in the CS board gets problem, these
commands are unavailable. But Switch Test command is available as it is
controlled by the software in the MCP.

4-14
When this check box is selected, the backup CS

board is used as the primary board if it has no
alarms.
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

1. Refer to 4.2.4 to open the Package protect configuration dialog box:
2. Click Board Protect tab (default), if needing modify CS board protect

attribute.
3. Double click target row according to CS board needing to modify from Protect
Group Attributes. Then there will pop-up the Protect Attributes

4-15
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-9.
The Protect Attributes Configuration of 8# CLK_CS
Figure 4-10.
The Protect Attributes Configuration of 9# CLK_CS
NOTE: According to the Figure 4-9 and Figure 4-10, the Switch Test function of
the 8# CLK_CS board can be set, but this function of the 9# CLK_CS board
cannot be set now.
4. From Switch Test field, you can decide which CS board as the primary board
and which as backup board.
5. If you want to change the status of target CS board, you can select three
NOTE: The Lockout of protection function does not be supported now.

4-16
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.4.2
TPS Protect

ITEM/PARAMETER
VALUES
DESCRIPTION
Protect Group
E12/E3/S1E
Displays the TPS Protect Group.
Protect
Group
Attribute
Board
E12/E3/S1E
Displays the slot number and board name.
Primary/
Backup
Primary/ Backup
Displays the configuration status of board:

primary or backup.
Actual
Status
Primary/ Backup
Displays the actual status of board: primary or

backup.
Control
Status
Lockout
protection/
Displays TPS
command
of
package
switch
external
Forced switch /
Manual switch
Command
Priority
1~255
Display the priority of working board.
WTR
60~720
Display WTR time.
Lockout
protection
of

TPS board is not used.
Forced switch to
protection
When this check box is selected, the backup

TPS board is forcibly used as the primary
board whether it has alarms or not.
Manual switch to
protection
When this check box is selected, the backup

TPS board is used as the primary board if it
has no alarms.

1. Refer to 4.2.4 to open the Package protect configuration dialog box:

4-17
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
2. Click TPS Protect tab, if needing modify TPS protect attribute.

3. Double click target row according to TPS protect needing to modify from
Protect Group Attributes. Then there will pop-up the Protect Attributes

4-18
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4. According to you need to modify Priority and WTR.

5. If you want to change the status of target TPS protect, you can select three

4-19
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.5 Setup NE Timing Source

The Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box is used to setup the NE timing
source.
Addition of a new timing source is configured in the Set Timing Source dialog box by
clicking the Add button on the upper left of the Setup-Timing Source
Configuration dialog box. Perform the procedure described in the subsection 4.2.5.2
Procedure: Add New NE Timing Source.
Modification and deletion of a timing source can also be operated. For this operation,
click the Modify or Delete button on the upper left of the dialog box. Perform the
procedure described in the subsection 4.2.5.3 Procedure: Modify NE Timing Source or
4.2.5.4 Procedure: Delete NE Timing Source respectively.
In addition, the switching type can be set for each timing source in the Set Clock
External Commands dialog box, which will be opened by clicking the Switch button
on the top of the Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box. Refer to the
subsection 4.2.6.2 Procedure: Setup Timing Source Switching Type for the procedure.

4-20
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

The Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box has the following items
and parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
VALUES
DESCRIPTION
System Timing Source/
Displays the system timing source and bypass

timing source. System clock is the working
clock for phase-lock loop of SDH system, and
bypass clock is selected for external output
clock
Timing Source
Displays the list of timing sources for selection.
Receive SSM Set Value
Select the QL (quality level) of the receiving

timing source from the drop-down list. This is
valid when the SSM protocol is selected.
Force/Auto
Select Force or Auto from the drop-down list.
Bypass Timing Source
Transmit SSM Mode
When Force is selected, the selected port will

be forced to send QL of the timing source.
When Auto is selected, the QL of the timing
source sent at the selected port is that of the
current operating reference clock. In this case,
the current operating reference clock is not the
timing source of the selected port.
Force Transmit SSM
Value
Auto Reversed
Group ID
Hold off Time
DNU
1 thru 255
When connect several optical ports between

two equipments, it maybe bring abnormal
phenomena: the clock source locked each
other as a ring or the oscillator switching. For
avoiding these phenomena, when the origin of
the several known time sources is the same,
you can configure the DNU GROUP ID of
these time sources as the same (non-zero).
When the time source module use one of
these time sources, the other time source port
with the same DNU GROUP ID send the
DNU synchronously.
0 thru 1800
Set Hold-off time, which is the duration to hold

QL until the operating timing source switches
to be available upon failure of this timing
source. The step is 300 ms.
(ms)
WTR Time
Priority
Selected port sends forcibly QL value of the

timing source.
0 thru 720
(sec)
Set Wait To Restore time, which is the amount

of time to wait before a recovered timing
source becomes active again. The step is 60s.
1 thru 254
Set the priority of timing source manually. The

highest priority is 1, and the lowest is 254.

4-21
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.5.2 Procedure: Add New NE Timing Source

1. Confirm that the Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box shown in
Figure 4-11 is displayed:
Figure 4-11.
Setup-Timing Source Configuration Dialog Box
2. Click the Add button on the upper left of the Setup-Timing Source
Configuration dialog box. The Set Timing Source dialog box shown in

4-22
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-12.
Set Timing Source Dialog Box (for Addition)
3. Select the clock type from the System/Bypass drop-down list.

4. Select the timing source in Timing Source list box.
5. Set values for the Receive SSM Set Value, Transmit SSM Mode and Force
Transmit SSM Value combo boxes on the right of the dialog box, using the
drop-down list.
NOTE: the Synchronous Equipment Timing Sources are shown as bellow, among them,
the G.811>Quality unknown>G.812 Transit>G.812 Local>G.813 (SETS), the
1111 do not used for timing source.
Bits (5 thru 8) in S1 Byte Timing Source Quality and Grade
0000
Quality unknown
0010
0100
G.811
G.812 Transit
1000
1011
G.812 Local
G.813 (SETS)
1111
6. Set the Auto Reversed DNU Group ID (0 thru 255)

7. Set the Hold Off Time (0 thru 1800 ms) and WTR Time (0 thru 720 s).
4-23
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8. Set the Priority (1 thru 254).

9. Confirm the entered items, and click the OK button. The Set Timing Source
dialog box disappears, and the Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box is
displayed again with the specified timing source in the list.
NOTE: Clicking the Close button instead of the OK button cancels adding the
NE timing source, back to the Setup-Timing Source Configuration
dialog box ignoring all the settings.
10. Click the Retrieve button on the bottom of the Setup-Timing Source
Configuration dialog box to retrieve the timing source configuration data in
MCP.
To modify/delete the timing sources, click the Modify or Delete button on
the upper left of the Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box.
Then go to the subsection 4.2.5.3 Procedure: Modify NE Timing Source or
4.2.5.4 Procedure: Delete NE Timing Source respectively.
To set the switching type for timing sources, click the Switch button on the
upper right of the Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box to
open the Set Clock External Commands dialog box. Then go to the
subsection 4.2.6 Setup Timing Source Switching Type.
To forward the NE setup, click the Next button on the bottom of the
Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box to open the
Setup-Timing Source Attribute dialog box. Then go to the subsection
4.2.7 Setup-Timing Source Attributes.
To go back to the NE slot configuration setup, click the Back button to return
to the Setup-Physical Slot Configuration dialog box.

4-24
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.5.3 Procedure: Modify NE Timing Source

Figure 4-11 above is displayed.
2. Select a timing source to be modified from the list by clicking. Then the Modify
and Delete buttons becomes valid.
3. Click the Modify button on the upper left of the Setup-Timing Source
Configuration dialog box. The Set Timing Source dialog box shown in
Figure 4-13.
Set Timing Source Dialog Box (for modification)
4. Modify the necessary parameters by referring to the procedures for adding a new
timing source, provided in the subsection 4.2.5.2 Procedure: Add New NE
Timing Source.
5. Confirm the entered items, and click the OK button. The Set Timing Source
dialog box disappears, and the Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog
box is displayed again with the modified timing source in the list.
NOTE: Clicking the Close button instead of the OK button cancels the NE
timing source modification, back to the Setup-Timing Source
Configuration dialog box ignoring all the settings.
4-25
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6. Click the Retrieve button on the bottom of the Setup-Timing Source

Configuration dialog box to retrieve the timing source configuration data in
MCP.

4-26
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.5.4 Procedure: Delete NE Timing Source

Figure 4-11 above is displayed.
2. Select a timing source to be deleted from the list by clicking. Then the Modify
and Delete buttons becomes enabled.
3. Click the Delete button on the upper left of the Setup-Timing Source
Configuration dialog box.

4-27
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.6 Setup Timing Source Switching Type

In the Set Clock External Commands dialog box, the switching type can be specified
for each timing source.

The Set Clock External Commands dialog box has the following items and
parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
VALUES
DESCRIPTION
System/Bypass
Which timing source switching, system

or bypass, is controlled, can be
selected.
(list box)
Lists the timing sources for selection.
Lockout
(Check Box)

selected timing source is not used as
synchronous signal.
Forced Switch

as the timing source whether it has
alarms or not.
Manual Switch

current reference clock is used as the
timing source if it has no alarms.
4.2.6.2 Procedure: Setup Timing Source Switching Type

1. Confirm that the Set Clock External Commands dialog box shown in Figure
4-14 is displayed:
2. Select system clock or external clock using the System/Bypass drop-down list.
3. Select the target timing source for which the switching type is set from the list.
4. Select the switching type to Lockout, Forced Switch or Manual Switch by
clicking a check box.
5. Confirm the setting, and click the Set button.

4-28
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6. Click the Close button. The Set Clock External Commands dialog disappears and the Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box is displayed
again.
7. In the Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box, perform one of the
following:
To forward the NE setup, click the Next button to open the Setup-Timing
Source Attribute dialog box. Then go to the subsection 4.2.7 Setup-Timing
Source Attributes.
Figure 4-14.
Setup-Timing Source Attribute Dialog Box

4-29
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.7 Setup-Timing Source Attributes

In the Setup-Timing Source Attributes dialog box, the timing source attributes are
specified for the NE clock module configuration.

The Setup-Timing Source Attributes dialog box has the following items and
parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
VALUES
DESCRIPTION
Select System or Bypass for timing source:
System/Bypass
System: For NE system clock with PLL

Bypass: For EXTCLK output without PLL
Switching Criterion
Priority/SSM
When Priority is selected, the clock

module switches according to the priority
order that is set manually for timing
sources.
When SSM is selected, the clock module
takes the QL that is set manually for timing
source and the actual QL value as the
precondition. When the QL that is set
manually and the QL collected by line
coexist, the former (QL set manually) is
effective. When the QLs of several timing
sources are same, the clock module
switches according to the priority that is set
manually for timing source.
Timing Source
Threshold
Select the timing source threshold.

When starting up the SSM protocol, the
timing source cannot be used as the
reference clock if its QL priority is lower
than the setting value.
Actual Received SSM

Value
(not a selection)
This is the QL of active reference timing

source.
Working Timing
(not a selection)
NE identity of working timing source.
(not a selection)
Slot number of working timing source.
(not a selection)
Port number of working timing source.
Source Subrack
Working Timing
Source Slot
Working Timing
Source Port

4-30
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
(Continued)
ITEM/PARAMETER
Working Mode
VALUES
Lock
Holdover
Freerun
(not a selection)
DESCRIPTION
Indicates the working mode of the clock
module.
Lock indicates that clock module is
tracking current reference timing source
normally.
Holdover indicates that current reference
source alarms or losses.
Freerun indicates that clock module does
not find any available reference timing
source.

4-31
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.7.2 Procedure: Setup NE Clock Module Configuration

1. Confirm that the Setup-Timing Source Attribute dialog box shown in Figure
4-15 is displayed:
Figure 4-15.
Setup-Timing Source Attribute Dialog Box
2. Select the target timing source from the list box.

3. Select Private or SSM from the Switching Criterion drop-down list.
4. Select the timing source threshold from the Timing Source Threshold
drop-down list.
5. Confirm the entered items.
NOTE: Clicking the Retrieve button on the bottom of the dialog box retrieves
the attribute data of specified timing source in MCP.
To forward the NE setup, click the Next button to open the Setup-Others
dialog box. Then go to the subsection 4.2.8 Complete NE Setup.

4-32
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
To go back to the timing source configuration setup, click the Back button to
return to the Setup-Timing Source Configuration dialog box.

4-33
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.2.8 Complete NE Setup

Perform the following procedure to complete the NE setup operations.
Procedure
1. Confirm that the Setup-Others dialog box shown in Figure 4-16 is displayed:
Figure 4-16.
Setup-Others Dialog Box
2. Click the Download check box (leaving a tick) to download any data to the NE.
NOTE: To configure NE, Download check box must be checked.
3. Adjust the system time in the Time Adjusting field, if necessary.
4. Confirm the settings, and perform one of the following:
To modify any settings for NE setup again, click the Back button to go back
to the Setup-Timing Source Attribute dialog box.
To complete the setting for NE setup (initialization), click the End button.
This step is the end of all the procedures for NE setup operation.

4-34
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.3 Set 2M EXT CLK Output

This section provides the procedures of output-clock port setup.
4.3.1 Items and Parameters

The 2M EXT CLK Output dialog box has the following parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
Slot ID
DESCRIPTION
Display slot ID of the selected slot.
NOTE
Only CS board
available
Port ID
Display port ID of the selected port.
(not selected)
SANBIT
Display SANBIT value of 2Mb/s port.
(not selected)
Output Status
Displays the output status.
(not selected)
Timing Source
Displays the squelch value.
(not selected)
A4-A7 in 2Mbps signal can be used

as SANBIT.
(drop-down list)
Setting:
Output Status
(drop-down list)
Setting:
Squelch
(drop-down list)
Threshold
Setting:
SANBIT
Register NE Configuration Set 2M EXT CLK Output

4-35
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.3.2 Procedure: Set Output-Clock Port

To install new ports, perform the following procedure:
2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Set
Output-Clock Port from the Configuration menu. The 2M EXT CLK
Output dialog box shown in Figure 4-17 appears:
Figure 4-17.
2M EXT CLK Output Dialog Box
3. Select the SANBIT from the SANBIT drop-down list.

4. Select the Output Status from the Output Status drop-down list.
5. Select the Timing Source Threshold from the Squelch drop-down list.
6. Click the Set button to send the data down to NE. The entered port will be
displayed in the Output Clock Port list.
Register NE Configuration Set 2M EXT CLK Output

4-36
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.4 Setup MSP Configuration

This section provides the procedures of MSP configuration setup.
Creating a MSP is operated in the MSP Group Configuration and MSP
Configuration dialog boxes by using CID.

The MSP Group Configuration dialog box has the following parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
MSP Group
Displays the existed MSP group ID
(for retrieve)
Protection Type
Select the protection type of

MSP group.
(drop-down list, now only SDH

MS Linear 1+1 Protection is
available)
Support External
Command
Enable to support external command.
(check box, note however it is

checked or not, external commands are all supported.)
MSP Level
Select MSP level
(STM-1/STM-4/STM-16)
The MSP Configuration dialog box has the following parameters:

ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
MSP Group ID
MSP Group ID
(auto-created according sequence)
Protection Type
Protection type of MSP group.
(selected in above MSP Group Configuration)
Primary/Backup
Select work or protect for selected line interface
(work or protect)
Hold Off Time
It is the time between declaration

of signal degrade or signal fail,
and the initialization of the protection switching algorithm.
In non revertive mode, fixed

to 0(ms)
WTR time
It is The time between failure cleared and traffic switch back.
In non revertive mode, fixed

to 300(sec)
K1/K2 Received Value
K1/K2 received value
(for retrieve)
K1/K2 Transmitted
K1/K2 transmitted value
(for retrieve)
Value
Register NE Configuration Setup MSP Configuration
4-37
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Primary Port
Command
Switch
Set extern switch command for

primary port.
(for retrieve)
Backup Port
Command
Switch
Set extern switch command for

backup port.
(for retrieve)
Status
Status of MSP
(normal or switch)
Switch
For extern command setup
(radio)
4.4.2 Procedure: Set MSP Configuration

To create a MSP, perform the following procedure:
2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select MSP Group
Configuration from the Configuration menu. The MSP Group
Configuration window shown in Figure 4-18 appears:
Figure 4-18.
MSP Group Configuration

4-38
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
3. Select line level from down drop list box MSP Level.
4. Click Add button, MSP Configuration window pops up shown in Figure 4-19.
Figure 4-19.
MSP Configuration (1)
5. Select LINE_MSP_WORK or LINE_MSP_PROTECT from the down drop list

box of Primary/Backup.
6. Click Add button, MSP Configuration window pops up shown in Figure 4-20.

4-39
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-20.
MSP Configuration (2)
7. Click Add button, MSP Configuration window disappears with MSP creating.
NOTE: Switch button shown in Figure 4-19 and Figure 4-20 is used for setting
external switch command. Click it, a window named Set Switch
Command shown in Figure 4-21 pops up.

4-40
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-21.
Set Switch Command window
Lockout of protection The line on which the command is set will be

forbidden to use unconditionally. If the command (LKOW) is set on work
line, the traffic will be switched to protection line unconditionally. If the
command (LKOP) is set on protection line, the traffic will be switched to
work line unconditionally.
Forced switch If the command is set on one line, the traffic will be
switched to the other line unconditionally. If the command (FSP) is set on
work line, the traffic will be switched to protection line unconditionally. If
the command (FSW) is set on protection line, the traffic will be switched to
work line unconditionally.
Manual switch If the command is set on one line and the other line is in
normal status, the traffic will be switched to the other line. If the command
(MSP) is set on work line and protection line is in normal status, the traffic
will be switched to protection line. If the command (MSW) is set on
protection line and work line is in normal status, the traffic will be switched
to work line.
NOTE: If several commands are set in work and protection line at the same
time, the command with the highest priority will be executed. The priority of the
commands is shown below:
LKOP>LKOW>FSW>FSP>MSW>MSP

4-41
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.4.3 Check MSP switch status

CID provides two methods to check MSP switch status. Below description gives the
detailed information of two methods.
4.4.3.1 Retrieve MSP switch status

In MSP Configuration windows, the read-only edit box Status shows the MSP
status. If V-NODE works on working line, it shows Normal as in Figure 4-22; If
V-NODE works on protection line, it shows Switch as in Figure 4-23.
Figure 4-22.
MSP in Normal status

4-42
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-23.
MSP in switch status
4.4.3.2 Retrieve MSP switch event

Perform the following procedure to monitor the MS protection switching conditions:
3. Select Event View from the Alarm menu. The Event View dialog box appears.
4. Click the MSP Event tab. The window shown in Figure 4-24 appears:

4-43
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
MSP working status
Figure 4-24. Event View Dialog Box with MSP Event Tab

4-44
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.5 Setup MSPring Configuration

This section provides the procedures of MSPring configuration setup.
Creating an MSPring is operated in the MSPring Configuration dialog boxes by using
CID.

The MSPring Configuration dialog box has the following parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Traffic Subnet ID
Specify the subnet ID by user
(text box)
Protect Type
V-Node equipment only supports SDH

MS Two Fibers BLSR protection now.
(not selected)
LoopLine Level
Select the loopline level.
(drop-down list)
STM-4/STM-16
Nut Channel
Specify the channel state.
W: work
Half of the channels are in working

state, and the other are in protecting
state, if you changing the working
channel as not working channel, the
corresponding protecting channel will
automatically change to not protecting
state.
P: protect
N: not work or not protect
Register NE Configuration Setup Port Configuration

4-45
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.5.2 Example Description

In order to introduce the configuration of the MSPring clearly, this section will
provide a vivid instance, in this instance, the MS-SP ring compose of three NEs, and
the physical connection of them is shown as below:
Figure 4-25.
The Physical Connection of the MS-SP Ring
4.5.3 Procedure: Set MSPring Configuration

Since the CID is a stand-alone management system, when using the CID to configure
the MSPring, we must configure the ports of each NE individually.
Configure the First NEs Ports
1. Open the management dialog box of the first NE (AAA). Detailed operation is
provided in the section 7. Working with CID of the CID Operating Guide
manual.
2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select MSPring
Configuration from the Configuration menu. The MSPring Configuration
window shown in Figure 4-26 appears:

4-46
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-26. The MSPring Management Dialog Box

3. Click Create button to create a MSP ring, the MSPR Wizard dialog box will be
shown as below:

4-47
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-27.
MSPR Wizard Configuration Dialog Box
4. Specify the traffic subnet ID for the MSP ring from the Traffic Subnet ID text
box.
5. Select the loop line level from the LoopLine Level drop-down list box, the
V-Node equipment only supports STM-4 and STM-16.
6. Specify the ports state: work, protect, not work or not protect.
The default setting for STM-16
Working Port
Protecting Port
Port 1
Port 9
Port 2
Port 10
Port 3
Port 11
Port 4
Port 12
Port 5
Port 13
Port 6
Port 14
Port 7
Port 15
Port 8
Port 16

4-48
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
The default setting for STM-4

Working Port
Protecting Port
Port 1
Port 3
Port 2
Port 4
You can re-specify the state of each port according to your need, when the state
of the working port is changed as not working, and the state of the corresponding
protecting port also be changed as not protecting automatically. The
configuration boxes are shown as below:
Figure 4-28. Configure the Port State of STM-16

4-49
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-29.
Configure the Port State of STM-16
7. Click the Next button to continue setting, the MSPR Wizard dialog box will
pop-up, the appearance is shown as below:

4-50
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-30. The MSPR Wizard Configuration Dialog Box

8. Input the traffic subnet node number from the Traffic Subnet Node Number
text box, and the range is from 2 to 16.
9. If you want to change the configuration you have just done in the previous steps,
you can click Back button to return to the previous window. Otherwise, you can
click Next button to continue configuring, the Traffic Subnet Node List will
pop-up; its appearance is shown as Figure 4-31.
Figure 4-31.
Configure the Traffic Subnet Node List

4-51
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
10. From this window, you should enter the NE ID and Node ID for the each node,
and the information of these nodes will compose a traffic subnet node list, this list
cannot be changed in this MSPring. According to the physical connection of the
instance, the traffic subnet node list is shown as below:
11. Confirm the information you have just done, and click NEXT button to enter the
ports configuration dialog box, its appearance shown as below:

4-52
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
12. Configure the west side port or east side port, by click WEST_SIDE or
EAST_SIDE from the Node Port Config field. The detail operation is shown
as below:
Figure 4-32. Configure the West Side Port

4-53
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-33.
Configure the East Side Port
13. Confirm the information you have just done, and click Finish button to end the
configuration, the result is shown as below.

4-54
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
14. After these operations the window will return to the MSPring Management dialog
box. There are three pages in this window: Base Attributes, Subnet
Architure&Port Config, and Subnet Maintain.
From the Base Attributes page you can retrieve the base configuration of
this MSPring, the interface is shown as below
Figure 4-34. Retrieve the Base Configuration from the Base Attributes Page
From the Subnet Architure&Port Config page you can add nodes, delete
nodes, and edit the ports configuration, the appearance of Subnet
Architure&Port Config page is shown as below:

4-55
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-35. The appearance of the Subnet Architure&Port Config Page

Add Node:
Click the Add button to open the Node Config dialog box, its appearance is
shown as below:
Figure 4-36. Add a Node for a MSPring

From this dialog box, you should input the NE ID which you want to add to the
MSPring, and click Set button to complete the setting.

4-56
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Delete the Node:

Select the node which you want to delete, and click the Delete button, the node
would be deleting.
There is a problem you should pay more attention: when you delete a node from
the MSPring, you should re-connect the other nodes, and configure the ports of
these nodes.
Edit the Ports:
The edit operation procedure is the same as the create operation procedure. So the
detail operation please refers to the step 12.
From the Subnet Maintain page you can retrieve the attribute of the port
and set the switch command. The attribute of the ports includes: NE Name,
NE ID, Port ID, Port Status, K1/K2 Received, K1/K2 Transmitted,
State, and Switch Command, the detail information is shown as below:
Set the Switch Command:

Click the target line in the Port Protect State field, and there will pop-up the
Set Switch Command dialog box, its appearance is shown as below:

4-57
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-37.
Set Switch Command Dialog Box
Select the one of the commands by click the target line, and click Set button to
finish configuration, then the window will return to the Subnet Maintain page,
from there you must click Set button to send these configuration to the
equipment, otherwise, these configuration would not be valid.
Configure the Second and Third NEs Ports
The procedure to setting the second and third NEs ports is the same to the
procedure to setting the first NEs ports; however, there is a key point for setting
the second and third NEs ports: keep one traffic subnet node list in an MSPring.
Refer to the step 10, we configured the traffic subnet node list for the MSPring,
and this list will be fixed as an original list for the whole MSPring, can not be
changed. Now, let me take the procedure to set the NE2 to illuminate this point.
When configuring the step 10 of NE2 (BBB), the system will show the traffic
subnet node list as below:

4-58
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-38.
Configure the NE2s Traffic Subnet Node List
In the original list, the NE2s Node ID is 2, however, in the above window the
NE2s Node ID is 1, so the Traffic Subnet List should be modify as below
Figure 4-39.
Modified Traffic Subnet Node List of the NE2

4-59
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.6 AU Squelch Configuration

This section provides the procedures of AU squelch configuration setup.
Creating an AU squelch list is operated in the AU Squelch Configuration dialog
boxes by using CID.

The AU Configuration dialog box has the following parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
MSPR
Specify the MSPrings ID
(drop-down list)
NE
Specify the NE which you want to

configure.
(drop-down list)
Side
Decide which side of the NE to be

configured: west side/east side.
(drop-down list)
Port
Display the corresponding port of the

selected side.
(not selected)
AU
Specify which AU to transmit the traffic
(drop-down list)
Near
Specify which node as the near add

node.
(drop-down list)
Remote
Specify which node as the remote add

node.
(drop-down list)
Near
Specify which node as the near down

node.
(drop-down list)
Remote
Specify which node as the remote

down node.
(drop-down list)
Direction
Indicate the traffic direction is incoming

or outcoming.
(drop-down list)
Traffic Type
Specify the traffic type as AU or TU
(radio button)
Add
When confirm the configuration and

click add button, the system will add
this configuration to the AU squelch
table.
(button)
Modify
Modify the configuration
(button)
Delete
Delete an item from the AU squelch

table.
(button)
Add
Node
Down
Node
Register NE Configuration AU Squelch Configuration

4-60
NOTE: For the CID only

can configure the local NE,
so this item cannot be
changed.
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.6.2 Example Description

According to the example of the MSPring, we could suppose two traffics, and their
transmission direction is shown as below:
So the AU squelch table could be set as below:
Table 4-1.
Node
AU
Node1
Outgoing #1
Drop node 1
Drop node 2
Incoming #2
Outgoing #3
Node3
Incoming #4
Node3
Outgoing #4
Incoming #3
Outgoing #2
Incoming #1
Node2
Node2
Node1
Add node 1
AU Squelch Table
Add node 2

4-61
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.6.3 Procedure: Set AU Configuration

Since the CID is a stand-alone management system, when using the CID to configure
the AU squelch table, we must configure the ports of each NE individually.
1. Open the management dialog box of the target NE. Detailed operation is provided in
the section 7. Working with CID of the CID Operating Guide manual.
2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select AU Squelch
Configuration from the Configuration menu. The AU Squelch Configuration
window shown in Figure 4-40 appears
Figure 4-40.
The Appearance of the AU Squelch Configuration
3. According to the AU Squelch table, we should configure the each port individually,
now let me give an example to show how to configure the #1port, the detail
information please refers to the below figure:

4-62
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-41.
Configure the #1 Port
4. Then finish the configuration of the #1 port, and click Add button to add this
configuration to the AU squelch table.
Repeat the step 1 to step 4 to configure other ports.
When complete the configuration of port, please confirm whether the configuration
information correct? If not, you could click Modify button to modify your setting, or
you could click Delete button to delete the items from the AU squelch table.

4-63
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.7 Setup Port Configuration

Installation of a port is operated in the Port Configuration dialog box by using CID.

The Port Configuration dialog box has the following parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
Board
Select the board to be added

for a port.
Port Kind
Display port type
Port NO.
Indicates the port number.
(not selected)
Installed Port Type
Displays the actual port types

identified by the CID.
(not selected)
Expected Port Type
Displays the port types defined

by a user.
(not selected)
Status
Displays the port status.
(not selected)
AutoSet
Match Expected Port Type to

Installed Port Type
button
Register NE Configuration Set Port Configuration

4-64
NOTE
(drop-down list)
-
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.7.2 Procedure: Setup Port Configuration

To install a port, perform the following procedure:
2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Port
Configuration from the Configuration menu. The Port Configuration
Figure 4-42. Port Configuration Dialog Box

3. Select the board from the left sub window. Right sub window displayed all port
and expected port type of selected board.
4. Click Autoset to Match Expected Port Type to Installed Port Type.
change Expected Port Type then click set to send setting to V-Node.

4-65
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

4-66
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.8 Setup Port Enable

Installation of a port is operated in the Setup Port Enable dialog box by using CID.

The Setup Port Enable dialog box has the following parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Port Number
Display port number
(not selected)
Port Type
Display port type
(not selected)
Running State
Activate/Inactivate port
(drop-down list)
Retiming
Turn off/Turn on retiming function
(drop-down list)
Display the port resistance
(not selected)
Port Resistance


Register NE Configuration Setup Port Enable

4-67
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.8.2 Procedure: Setup Port Enable

2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Setup Port
Enable from the Configuration menu. The Setup Port Enable dialog box
Figure 4-43.
Setup Port Enable
3. Select the port of target board from the left sub window. Right sub window
displayed all port state of selected board.
NOTE:
For E12 board there is more retiming and port resistance function state
showing in right sub window.
4. If you want to change running states, you can select activate/inactivate state from
drop-down list.
4-68
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
NOTE:
If you want to change retiming, you can select retiming state from
drop-down list.


4-69
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.9 Setup Trace Massage

This section provides the procedures of trace message setup.
The trace message setup is operated in the Set Trace Message dialog box by using
CID.

The Set Trace Message dialog box has the following items and parameters:
ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
(list box)
Select the port for which trace

massage is specified.
Click to select.
Enable Trace
Enable or Disable the trace

message. When this is selected
(leaving a tick), the trace
message is enabled.
(check box)
J Sending Value
Specify J sending value.
(text field)
J Expected Receiving
Value
Specify J expected receiving

value.
Up to 15-character length
with any ASCII code.
J Actual Receiving
Specify J actual receiving
(text field)
Value
value.
See NOTE below.
NOTE: The actual receiving path signal identifier, C2/ V5, cannot be modified by users.
4.9.2 Procedure: Setup Trace Message

To setup the trace massage, perform the following procedure:
2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Set Trace
Message from the Configuration menu. The Set Trace Message dialog
Register NE Configuration Setup Trace Massage
4-70
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-44.
Set Trace Message Dialog Box
3. Select the target port from the list box on the left of the dialog box.
4. Click the Enable Trace check box (leaving a tick) to enable trace message.
NOTE: When this check box is unselected, trace message is disabled.
5. Set J sending value and J expected receiving value in the corresponding text box
on the right of the dialog box.
6. After completing the setting above, confirm the entered items. Then click the Set
button to download the settings to NE.
CID.
8. Click the Close button to complete the trace message setup.
Register NE Configuration Setup Trace Massage
4-71
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.10Setup HKA/HKC
This section provides the procedures of HKA/HKC setup.
The HKA/HKC setup is operated in the Set HKA/HKC dialog box by using CID.
4.10.1 HKA Setup

4.10.1.1 Parameters
The HKA interface dialog box (Set HKA/HKC dialog box with HKA Interface tab
selected) has the following parameters:
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Alarm Generating Value
Select the alarm generating value.
(drop-down list)
Activate
When the activate check box is

selected, the HKA alarm should
display on CID when it generates.
Otherwise the alarm should not
display any matter it generates or
not.
(check box)
Set HKA Name
Users can set the HKA name

according to themselves.
4.10.1.2 Procedure: Setup HKA Attribute

To setup the HKA, perform the following procedure:
2. From the main menu on the NE management dialog box, select Set HKA/HKC
from the Configuration menu. The Set HKA/HKC dialog box with HKA
Interface tab selected appears shown in Figure 4-45 below:
Register NE Configuration Setup HKA/HKC

4-72
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-45.
Set HKA/HKC Dialog Box (HKA)
3. In this dialog box, eight environment alarm input interfaces on the MCP board
can be managed. Click the target interface to enable the Alarm Generating
Value text box.
4. Set an alarm generating value in the Alarm Generating Value text box.
5. Click the Activate check box (leaving a tick).
CID.
8. Click the Close button to complete the HKA setup operation.

4-73
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.10.1.3 Procedure: Setup HKA Name

To setup the HKA name, perform the following procedure:
Name from the Alarm menu. The Set HKA/HKC Name dialog box with HKA
Figure 4-46.
Set HKA/HKC Name Dialog Box (HKA)
3. In this dialog box, the names of eight environment alarm input interfaces on the
MCP board can be modified. Click the target interface and input the new alarm
name in the Name Definition text box.
CID.
6. Click the Close button to complete the HKA setup operation.
NOTE: The character number of HKA name is within 0 to 20.

4-74
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.10.2 HKC Setup

4.10.2.1 Parameters
The HKC interface dialog box (Set HKA/HKC dialog box with HKC Interface tab
selected) has the following parameters:
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Control Level
Select the control level Open or

Loop.
(radio button)
Control Status
Select the control status Start or

Stop.
(radio button)
Duration
Set the duration time.
(text field)
Available range: 60 to 15240 (s)

Hold-on
Set the level in the hold-on status.
(check box)
Set HKC Name
Users can set the HKC name

according to themselves.
4.10.2.2 Procedure: Setup HKC Attribute

To setup the HKC, perform the following procedure:
from the Configuration menu. The Set HKA/HKC dialog box appears.
3. Click the HKC Interface tab on the Set HKA/HKC dialog box, shown in
Figure 4-47.
4. In this dialog box, four alarm output interfaces on the MCP board can be
managed. Click the target interface. The Control Level radio button
(Open/Loop), Control Status radio button (Start/Stop) and Duration text
field are valid.
5. Specify the control level (Open or Loop) by clicking the radio button on the
right of Control Level (leaving a tick).
6. Specify the control status (Start or Stop) by clicking the radio button on the
right of Control Status (leaving a tick).
7. Set the level duration in the Duration text field.
NOTE: The range of level duration is within 60 through 15240 seconds.

4-75
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
8. Click the Hold-on check box (leaving a tick) to set the level in the hold-on
status.
CID.
11. Click the Close button to complete the HKS setup operation.
Figure 4-47.
Set HKA/HKC Dialog Box (HKC)
4.10.2.3 Procedure: Setup HKC Name

To setup the HKC name, perform the following procedure:
4-76
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Name from the Alarm menu. The Set HKA/HKC Name dialog box with HKC
Figure 4-48.
Set HKA/HKC Name Dialog Box (HKC)
3. In this dialog box, the names of eight environment alarm input interfaces on the
MCP board can be modified. Click the target interface and input the new alarm
name in the Name Definition text box.
CID.
6. Click the Close button to complete the HKC setup operation.
NOTE: The character number of HKC name is within 0 to 20.

4-77
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.11Laser Management
Installation of a port is operated in the Laser Management dialog box by using CID.
4.11.1 Attribute setting

ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Port
Display optical port
(not selected)
Protocol setting
Selected protocol setting:
(drop-down list)
Forced Open/
Forced Close/
Auto Run/
Manual Run
Auto Activate Delay
Select auto activate delay time:

60s, 180s, 300s.
(drop-down list)
Laser State
Display laser state
(not selected)
Laser Wave
Display laser wave
(not selected)
Register NE Configuration Laser Management

4-78
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.11.1.2 Procedure: Laser Attribute setting

dialog box with Attribute Setting tab selected appears shown in Figure 4-49
appears:
Figure 4-49. Laser Attribute Setting

3. Select target board from the left sub window. Right sub window displayed all
port laser attribute of selected board.
4. If you want to change Protocol Setting, you can select Forced Open/Forced
Close/Auto Run/Manual Run state from drop-down list.

4-79
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
NOTE: If you select Manual Run, you can refer to 4.11.2 to get more
information for it.
5. If you want to change auto activate delay time, you can select 60s/180s/300s
from drop-down list.

4-80
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.11.2 Manual Open

ITEM/PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
Sel
Select the row
(selected)
Slot
Display slot number

Package name.
Port
Display port number
(not selected)
Protocol Setting
Display protocol setting:
(not selected)
and
(not selected)
Forced Open/
Forced Close/
Auto Run/
Manual Run
Laser State
Manual
Open
Operation
Display laser state: Open/Close
(not selected)
Manual
Open
(short
time,
2s/9s)

laser 2 seconds later, it will be
closed automatically.
(selected)
Manual
Test Open
(long
time, 90s)

laser 90 2 seconds later, it will
be closed automatically.
(selected)

4-81
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.11.2.2 Procedure: Laser Manual Open

dialog box with Manual Open tab selected appears shown in Figure 4-50
appears:
Figure 4-50.
Laser Manual Open
3. You can click Manual Open (short time, 2s/9s) or Manual Test Open
(long time, 90s) check box from Manual Open Operation.

4-82
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.12Setup LAN-Interface Port Configuration

The sections from 4.12 to 4.15 provide the procedures to setup the LAN-Interface.
Following chart gives the rough step. Refer corresponding section for detail information.
Start
Start Port Configuration
make State on
Enable/ Disable Auto Negotiation
For other port configurations , default setting
Is prefer In most Instances
Start Layer 2 Configuration
Select VLAN mode:IEEE 802 .1Q/Port based
Enable/ Disable STP
Create Trunk
Create VLAN
For other layer 2 configurations, default
setting Is prefer In most Instances
Start Encapsulation
Select encapsulation:GFP/ LAPS
For other encapsulation configurations ,
default setting Is prefer In most Instances
Start Bandwidth Configuration
Select VC12 /VC3/VC4
Select Time Slot Number
For other width configurations , default
setting Is prefer In most Instances
Create cross connect
End
Register NE Configuration Setup LAN-Interface Port Configuration

4-83
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.12.1 Parameters
LAN Port
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
State
On/Off
Set the LAN port status.
Auto
Negotiation
Enable/ Disable
Enable or disable the auto negotiation function.
Duplex(Actua
l/set)
Half/Full
Display actual working mode and setting mode of the

port.
Speed(bit/s
Actual/set)
10M/100M
Display actual working speed and setting speed of the

port.
Ingress Rate
0 thru 10000
Limit the port in rate. Maximum is 10000 x 10Kbit/s.
(NOTE1)
(10Kbit/s)
Egress Rate
NOTE: 0 denotes not limit rate.

0 thru 10000
(10Kbit/s)
Limit the port out rate. Maximum is 10000 x 10Kbit/s.

NOTE: 0 denotes not limit rate.
Flow Control
Enable/ Disable
Enable or disable the flow control function.
Security
Enable/ Disable
Enable or disable the port security function.

(NOTE2)
Ingress
Filtering

Enable All/

Disable All
Forward all frames.

NOTE:
1)
When auto negotiation of local V-NODE is enabled and auto negotiation of far end
equipment is disabled or it does not support auto negotiation, local V-NODE through auto
negotiation works at Half duplex even if it is set as Full duplex working mode.
2)
This function takes effect combining with MAC table function at L2SW. If it's enabled, the
port does not forward any packets except that defined to forward in MAC table with
source address being MAC Address [DST]. If it's disabled, the port forward packets
normally through address learning. Refer to 1.3.11 MAC filtering in F5259_B05
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION for more detail information.

4-84
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
WAN Port
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
State
On/Off
Set the WAN port status.
Ingress
Filtering


Enable All/

Disable All

Forward all frames.
4.12.2 Procedure: Setup Port Configuration

The LAN-Interface port setup operation is performed via the Port Configuration
3. Select Port Configuration from the Ethernet Port Configuration menu to
open the Ethernet Port Configuration dialog box. The Ethernet Port

4-85
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-51.
Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog Box
NOTE: If a port has already belong to a trunk, it can not be set individually, of
cause, it can not be shown the setting individually.
4. Select one port by click then click Set button or double-click a port. The Port
NOTE:
1. State value should be on in order to make the port available.
2. The setting of ingress rate and egress rate must not exceed port speed. For
example, you can not set the port speed as 10M, and set the ingress rate as
10000 x 10Kbit/s.
3. In case of using Port base VLAN, Filter function doesn't be available.

4-86
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-52a. Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog Box (LAN port)
Figure 4-52b.
Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog Box (WAN port)

4-87
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
5. Click the OK button to download the settings to NE.

6. Click the Close button to finish the LAN-Interface port setup.

4-88
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.13Setup LAN-Interface Layer 2 Configuration

This section provides the procedure to set up the LAN-Interface layer 2 configuration for
the equipment.
The LAN-Interface layer 2 setup operation is performed via the Layer 2 Configuration
3. Select Layer 2 Configuration from the LAN-Interface menu to open the
Layer 2 Configuration dialog box. The Layer 2 Configuration dialog box
Figure 4-53.
Layer 2 Configuration Dialog Box
Register NE Configuration Setup LAN-Interface Layer 2 Configuration

4-89
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.13.1 Bridge
4.13.1.1 Parameters
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
VLAN Operation Mode
Port based
IEEE 802.1Q
Set the VLAN Operation mode
MAC Ageing Interval
300 thru 765 or

No Ageing
Set MAC Ageing time.

No Ageing means: the MAC address entry is not deleted for long
time.
Broadcast Storm Filtering
0
5%,
10%,
15%
20%,
25%
Set Broadcast Storm Filtering.

0 denotes to disable broadcast
storm filter.
Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay
Disable/
1/
2/
4
Set Bridge Transmit Delay time.

Its used for a frame to set the
maximum time of staying in the
switcher.
Low Queue Delay Bound
Enable/ Disable
Set Queue Delay Bound
Maximum Queue Delay Time
2 thru 510
Set Maximum
Time.
Queue Mode
FIFO/
SP/
WRR
Set Queue mode
WRR High Weight
1 thru 7
Set high WRR Weight
WRR Low Weight
1 thru 7
Set low WRR Weight
User Priority
0 or 1
Set User priority
Monitor Mode
Disable/
Ingress/
Egress /
Both
Monitored Port
LAN&WAN port
Set monitored port
Monitoring Port
LAN port
Set monitoring port
Maximum Frame Size
1522 thru 1568
Set Maximum frame size

4-90
Queue
Delay
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.13.1.2 Procedure: Setup Bridge Configuration

1. See Figure 4-53, select Bridge attribute page on the top of window.
2. In order to set the VLAN Mode, select VLAN in the bottom of window. Figure
4-54 appears. Select Port based or IEEE 802.1Q in VLAN Operation Mode
drop down box according to the requirement.
Figure 4-54. VLAN Operation Mode Setting

NOTE: Exclude default VALN (VLAN1), if any VLAN exist, you must not change
VLAN mode before delete the VLAN.
3. In order to set the MAC Ageing Interval and Broadcast Storm Filtering
and Maximum Frame Size, select General in the bottom of window. Figure
4-53 appears
1) For setting MAC Ageing Interval, input a number within 300 through 765
into MAC Ageing Interval text edit box. System will delete a MAC
address route in route table if the MAC address does not renew in the course
of MAC Ageing Interval set.
2) For setting Broadcast Storm Filtering, select one from 0, 5%, 10%,
15%, 20% and 25% in Broadcast Storm Filtering drop down box. Its
preferred to enable broadcast storm filter function in a network with many
broadcast frames transmitting.

4-91
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
3) For setting Maximum Frame Size, input a number within 1522 through
1568. Maximum Frame Size text edit box. Its used to set the maximum
frame length that system can deal with.
4. In order to set the Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay and Low Queue
Delay Bound and Maximum Queue Delay Time, select Delay in the bottom
of window. Figure 4-55 appears.
1) For setting Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay time, select one from
Disable, 1, 2 and 4 in Maximum Bridge Transmit Delay drop down
box.
2) For setting Low Queue Delay Bound, select Enable or Disable in Low
Queue Delay Bound drop down box. Its used to enable or disable to set
the delay time of low priority queue.
3) For setting Maximum Queue Delay Time, input a number within 2ms
through 510ms into Maximum Queue Delay Time. Its used to set the
maximum delay time of low priority queue.
Figure 4-55.
Delay Setting
NOTE:
1. If you want to set 'Queue delay control' and 'Max Queue delay', you must
enable 'Max Bridge transit delay'.
2. If you want to set 'Max Queue delay', you must enable 'Queue delay control.
4-92
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
5. In order to set the Queue Mode and WRR High Weight, WRR Low Weight
and User Priority, select Queue in the bottom of window. For setting Queue
Mode, select one from FIFO, SP and WRR in Queue Mode drop down box.
1) When FIFO is selected, the order of queue ingress and egress is FIFO (first
in first out), namely ignoring queue priority. The window is shown in
Figure 4-56.
Figure 4-56.
FIFO Selection
2) When SP is selected, the order of queue ingress and egress is decided by its
priority, namely it is only after all the queues with higher priority are sent
out that the queues with lower priority begin to be sent out. The window is
shown in Figure 4-57. In the figure User Priority of 8(0-7) kinds of frames
may be set as 0(low user priority) or 1(high user priority).

4-93
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-57. SP Selection

3) When WRR is selected, the order of queue ingress and egress is decided by
its priority and weight. The weight may be rough regarded as the
bandwidth possessed by high priority or low priority. The larger the weight,
the more the bandwidth possesses. The window is shown in Figure 4-58. In
the figure User Priority setting is same to that of Figure 4-57. WRR High
Weight and WRR Low Weight may be set a value from 1 to 7 to specify
package speed ratio of high user priority (1) and low user priority (0).
Figure 4-58. WRR Selection

NOTE: If you want to set 'High Priority Weight' or 'Low Priority Weight', you must
set 'Queue Mode' to WRR.
4-94
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
6. In order to set the Monitor Mode, Monitoring Port and Monitored Port,
select Monitor in the bottom of window, shown in Figure 4-59.
NOTE:
1. Monitored port and monitoring port must be in same VLAN group.
2. Port configured as Trunk cannot monitor or be monitored.
3. Only LAN port can be selected in 'monitoring port'
Figure 4-59.
Monitor setting
2) For setting Monitor Mode, select one from Disable, Ingress, Egress
and Both in Monitor Mode drop down box.
3) For setting Monitoring Port, select one from LAN Ports in Monitoring
Port drop down box.
4) For setting Monitored Port, select one from LAN&WAN ports in
Monitored Port drop down box.
7. When all settings are completed, click Set button to make them valid. If need to
retrieve inform, click Retrieve button.
8. Click the Close button to finish Layer 2 Configuration setup.

4-95
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.13.2 STP Config

4.13.2.1 Parameter
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
STP Action
Enable/ Disable
Enable/Disable STP protocol
Bridge Hello
1 thru 10
Set STP hello time. General speaking, the

larger the network, the less Bridge hello time
should be set as.
4 thru 30
Set Bridge Forward Delay Time. General

speaking, the larger the network, the larger
Bridge hello time should be set as.
Bridge Max Age
6 thru 40
Set Bridge Ageing Time
Bridge Priority
0 thru 65535
Set Bridge Priority. When user knows network

topology in advance, bridge priority may be
helpful to construct a more robust network by
making a station with good conditions as root
knot.
STP Standard
-------
Bridge Address
00-07-30-xx-xx-xx
Set by manufacturer and forbidden modifying.
Root Bridge ID
STP Priority+ Root
Read only.
Time
Bridge Forward
Delay Time
Bridge MAC Address
4.13.2.2 Procedure: Setup Protocol Configuration

1. See Figure 4-53, select STP Config attribute page on the top of window.
Figure 4-60 appears.

4-96
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-60.
STP configuration
2. Select Enable or Disable in STP Action drop down box according

requirement.
3. Input a value within 1 through 10 into Bridge Hello Time text edit box.
4. Input a value within 4 through 30 into Bridge Forward Delay Time text edit
box.
5. Input a value within 0 through 65535 into Bridge Priority text edit box.
6. When all settings are completed, click Set button to make them valid. If need to
retrieve inform, click Retrieve button.

4-97
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.13.3 Trunk
Trunk function allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a Link
Aggregation Group, which is treated as if it were a single link.
NOTE:
1) This function not supports Auto Negotiation.
2) This function not supports half duplex.
3) All member of TRUNK must belong to same VLAN with same tag mode.
4) ALL of a TRUNK member must be LAN port or WAN port.
5) If you want to create a TRUNK, all setting of ports excludes port cost and port
priority must be identical.
6) Before registering any port into Trunk member, each port should be configured
into the same VLAN group.
7) Port configuration and bandwidth configuration of each port configured into
Trunk member should be the same value.
8) If a port has already become a TRUNK member, it can not be added another
TRUNK.
9) If a TRUNK has been set a static MAC, it must be not deleted before delete the
static MAC.
10) If you want create a TRUNK, you must add two or more port.
11) If you want modify a TRUNK, you must leave two or more port.
12) If you want add a port into a TRUNK, the port must has not static MAC.
13) If a TRUNK consists of WAN ports, the trunk has same parameter to WAN port.

4-98
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.13.3.1 Parameter
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Trunk ID
1 thru 4
Set the Trunk NO.
Port List
Display the LAN/WAN port.
Member list
(list)
Display the Trunk member.
4.13.3.2 Procedure: Setup Trunk configuration

1. See Figure 4-53, select Trunk attribute page on the top of window. Figure 4-61
appears.
Figure 4-61.
Trunk
2. Select FE board in left subwindow, and then click Add button, Figure 4-62
appears.

4-99
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-62.
Adding Trunk Window
3. Double-click the port from the Port List in left sub-window to add the port(s)
into the Member List. Double-click the port from Member List in right
sub-window to delete the port(s) into Port List.
4. Select Trunk port No. from Trunk ID drop down box.
6. If need to modify a trunk port, select the trunk port and click modify button.
Figure 4-63 appears.

4-100
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-63.
Modifying Trunk window
7. Repeat steps 3 through 5.

8. If need to delete a trunk port, select the trunk port and click delete button.
This is the end of procedure.

4-101
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.13.4 VLAN
VLAN is used to logically separate the ports in a VLAN from other ports. Only the ports
in a same VLAN can communicate with each other.
4.13.4.1 VLAN with Port Based mode

4.13.4.1.1
PARAMETER
Parameter
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
VLAN ID
2 thru 255
Set the VLAN ID NO. (Default VLAN is NO.1,

V-NODE supports up to 254 VLAN in the mode).
Port List
(list)
Member List
VLAN member
4.13.4.1.2 Procedure: Setup VLAN Configuration

1. See Figure 4-53, select VLAN attribute page on the top of window. Figure 4-64
appears.
Figure 4-64. VLAN

4-102
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
2. Select FE board in left sub-window, then click Add button, Figure 4-65 appears.
Figure 4-65. Adding VLAN

3. Double-click the port from the Port List on the left of the window to add the
port(s) into the Member List. Double-click the port from Member List in right
sub-window to delete the port(s) into Port List.
4. Input the VLAN ID on the top of the window.
6. If need to modify a VLAN, select the VLAN and click modify button. Figure
4-66 appears.

4-103
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-66. Modifying VLAN

8. If need to delete a VLAN, select the VLAN and click delete button.
NOTE:
1) If a port has already belonged to a trunk, it can not be set individually. Of cause,
it can not be showed setting individually.
2) If a VLAN has been set a static MAC, it must be not deleted before delete the
static MAC.
3) In port-based VLAN mode, one port must belong to only one VLAN.
4) In 802.1Q VLAN mode, one port with tagged can be add to multi VLAN and can
be add to only one VLAN with untagged mode.
5) If a VLAN member has been set a static MAC, it must be not remove from VLAN
before delete the static MAC.

4-104
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.13.4.2 VLAN with IEEE 802.1Q Mode

4.13.4.2.1
Parameter
PARAMETER
VLAN ID
VALUE
2 thru 4094(Tag)/
DESCRIPTION
2 thru 255(Untag)
Set the VLAN ID NO. (default VLAN is NO.1.

V-NODE supports up to 254 VLAN in untag mode
and 4093 in tag mode).
Port List
(list)
Member List
VLAN member
NOTE: The total ports in all VLANs in one FE board are permitted up to 480,that is to say,
if each VLAN include 2 ports, the maximum number of VLAN can be configured in
one FE board is 240.The other cases can be deduced by analogy.
4.13.4.2.2
Procedure: Setup VLAN Configuration
1. See Figure 4-53, select VLAN attribute page on the top of window. Figure 4-64
appears.
2. Select FE board in left sub-window, then click Add button. Figure 4-65 appears.
3. Double-click the port from the Port List on the left of the window. Figure 4-67
appears.
Figure 4-67.
Port Mode
4. After selecting Tag/Untag, click Ok to add the port(s) into the Member List.
Double-click the port from Member List in right sub-window to delete the
port(s) into Member List.
5. Input the VLAN ID on the top of the window.

4-105
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING

7. If need to modify a VLAN, select the VLAN port and click Modify button in
Figure 4-64. Figure 4-68 appears.
Figure 4-68. Modifying VLAN

9. If need to delete a VLAN, select the VLAN and click Delete button in Figure
4-64.

4-106
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.13.5 STP Port

4.13.5.1 Parameter
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Port
(Port
Displayed)
The source port for STP enable or not
STP Control
Enable/
Enable/Disable STP function
Disable
Link Cost
1 thru 65535
Set link cost
Port Priority
0 thru 255
Set Port Priority
Port Status
Disable/
Port status. Read only.
Blocking/
Listening/
Learning/
Forwarding
4.13.5.2 Procedure: Setup STP Port Configuration

1. See Figure 4-53, select STP Port attribute page on the top of window. Figure
4-69 appears.
Figure 4-69.
STP Port

4-107
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
2. Double-click a row of record, Figure 4-70 appears.
Figure 4-70.
STP Parameter Setting
3. If need to enable STP function of the port, select Enable in STP Control drop
down box. If need to disable STP function of the port, select Disable in STP
Control drop down box.
4. Input link cost number into Link cost drop down box.
5. Input a port priority number into Port Priority drop down box.
NOTE: If a port has already belonged to a trunk, it can not be set individually. Of cause, it
can not be showed setting individually.

4-108
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.13.6 MAC Table

4.13.6.1 Parameter
PARAMETER
Action
VALUE
Forward/
DESCRIPTION
Set operation mode
Discard
MAC address
48bit
Set destination MAC address of operation
VLAN ID
All existed
Set the VLAN that operation is applied to
VLAN
Member List
Selected port
Set the port(s) that operation is applied to
4.13.6.2 Procedure: Setup MAC Table Configuration

1. See Figure 4-53, select MAC Table attribute page on the top of window. Figure
4-71 appears.
Figure 4-71.
MAC Table
2. Select FE board in left sub-window, then click Add button. Figure 4-72 appears.

4-109
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-72.
MAC Table Parameter Setting
3. Input the MAC Address into MAC Address text edit box.
4. Select VLAN from VLAN ID drop down box.
5. Select Forward/Discard in Action drop down box.
6. For applying Forward/Discard to a port, double-click the port in left
sub-window to add the port(s) into right sub-window.
8. If need to delete a row of record, select the row and click delete button.
NOTE:
1) If a port has already belonged to a trunk, it can not be set individually. Of
cause, it can not be showed setting individually.
2) One MAC can be added only one mode (FORWARD or DISCARD) in one
VLAN.
3) The following MAC must not be add: 00-00-00-00-00-00; ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff;
01-80-C2-xx-xx-xx
4) One Unicast-MAC can be added to only one port.
4-110
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.14 Setup LAN Interface Encapsulation

Configuration
This section provides the procedure to set up the LAN-Interface encapsulation
configuration for the equipment.
4.14.1 Parameters
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Port
WAN port
Encapsulation port.
Encapsulation
Type
GFP/LAPS
Set encapsulation type.
Data Frame with

FCS
Yes/No
Enable/Disable FCS for data frame.
LCAS
Open/Close
Enable/Disable LCAS function.
LCAS Mode
Directional/Unidi
rectional
Specify the LCAS Mode: Directional/Unidirectional
NOTE:
NOTE: The item is valid only in case of GFP

encapsulation. FPGA will judge the FCS flag
automatically with input streams from WAN port and
handle different streams in different ways If it is
different between local and remote side.
If V-NODE connects to the other equipment, there is packet loss when

bandwidth is changed.
Register NE Configuration Setup LAN Interface Encapsulation Configuration

4-111
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.14.2 Procedure: Setup Encapsulation Configuration

The LAN interface encapsulation setup operation is performed via the Encapsulation
Configuration dialog box using the CID. Perform the following procedure:
3. Select Encapsulation Configuration from the LAN-Interface menu to open
the Encapsulation Configuration dialog box. The Encapsulation
Figure 4-73. Encapsulation Configuration Dialog Box (1)

4. Double click a row of record then Bandwidth Configuration dialog box of
corresponding port will be shown in Figure 4-74 appears:

4-112
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-74. Encapsulation Configuration Dialog Box (2)

5. Select GFP/LAPS in the drop down list box of Encapsulation Type. If you
select GFP, then go to the step 6; otherwise go to the step 7.
NOTE:
1)
GFP is only supported Null extension.
2)
Only support GFP-F.
3)
Only support Ethernet encapsulation.
4)
Current V-Node connects to only V-Node in case of LAPS. (In case of

GFP, it should be connected to the other equipment.)
5)
If Ethernet payload data has 7E or 7D byte, it should be converted to

double byte length in case of using LAPS. It means the throughput
performance will be decreased. (converted from 7E --> 7D5E, 7D -->
7D5D)
6. Select Yes/No in the drop down list box of Data Frame with FCS.
7. If you want to use LCAS function, select Enable in the drop down list box of
LCAS; If you dont want to use LCAS function, select Disable in the drop
down list box of LCAS. If you select Enable, then go to the step 8; otherwise go
to the step 9.
8. Select Bidirectional/Unidirectional in the drop down list box of LCAS
Mode.

4-113
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9. Click the Set button to make settings effective.


4-114
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.15Setup LAN Interface Bandwidth Configuration

This section provides the procedure to set up the LAN-Interface bandwidth configuration
for the equipment.
4.15.1 Parameters
PARAMETER
VALUE
Board Name
Slot number+FE
Source Port
#1 WAN/
DESCRIPTION
Display the slot number and package name.
The source port of bandwidth configuration.
#2 WAN/
#3 WAN/
#4 WAN
Destination Port
#01AU_1/
The destination port of bandwidth configuration.
#02AU_1
#03AU_1
#04AU_1
Bandwidth
nxVC12(n=1-63)
Set bandwidth.
nxVC3(n=1-3)
1 x VC4
Time Slots(Rx)
1-63VC12/
1-3VC3/
Select Time
direction.
Slot
Number
for
Receiving
1VC4
Time Slots(Tx)
1-63VC12/
1-3VC3/
Select Time Slot Number for Transmitting

direction.
1VC4
Register NE Configuration Setup LAN Interface Bandwidth Configuration

4-115
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.15.2 Procedure: Setup Bandwidth Configuration

The LAN interface bandwidth setup operation is performed via the Bandwidth
Configuration dialog box using the CID. Perform the following procedure:
3. Select Bandwidth Configuration from the LAN-Interface menu to open the
Bandwidth Configuration dialog box. The Bandwidth Configuration
Figure 4-75.
Bandwidth Configuration Dialog Box
LCAS configuration in 4.14 Setup LAN Interface Encapsulation Configuration can

influence the bandwidth configuration.
LCAS CONFIGURATION
BANDWIDTH CONFIGURATION
DESCRIPTION CHAPTER
LCAS Disable
LCAS Enable/unidirectional
LCAS Enable/Bidirectional
4.15.2.1
4.15.2.1
4.15.2.2
4.15.2.1 Bandwidth under LCAS disable

4-116
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-76.
VC12 Bandwidth Configuration Dialog Box
5. Choose VC12/VC3/VC4 in drop down list box of left upper window. If choosing
VC12, Bandwidth Configuration Dialog box is shown in Figure 4-76 If
choosing VC3, Bandwidth Configuration Dialog box is shown in Figure
4-77. If choosing VC4, Bandwidth Configuration Dialog box is shown in
Figure 4-78.
Figure 4-77.

4-117
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-78.
NOTE: VC4 doesn't support LCAS.

6. In Figure 4-76 and Figure 4-77, click time slot (TS) number according to
requirement. At the same time, the quantity of selected TS will be shown in the
offside of bandwidth word. In Figure 4-78, only one TS is available for
selection. Refer to Figure 4-79, Figure 4-80 and Figure 4-81.
Figure 4-79.
VC12 Timeslot Type

4-118
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-80.
VC3 Timeslot Type
Figure 4-81.
VC4 Timeslot Type
In Figure 4-79, Figure 4-80 and Figure 4-81, R and T can be selected
respectively showing Rx time slot and Tx time slot can be configured
respectively. Of course user can change LCAS/Disable to other LCAS status.
NOTE: User can select several paths at one time by dragging mouse for
simplifying operation.

4-119
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
7. In Figure 4-79, Figure 4-80 and Figure 4-81, click button of to

configuration LCAS function according to application requirement. Refer to
Figure 4-82.
Figure 4-82.
LCAS Configuration
8. After completing the configuration, click the OK button to download the settings
to NE.
9. After completing configuration Bandwidth Configuration Dialog box is
shown in Figure 4-83.
Figure 4-83.
Bandwidth Configuration Dialog Box (2)
10. If need to modify bandwidth configuration of one port, select corresponding row
and click Modify button. If need to retrieve bandwidth configuration of one port,
select corresponding row and click Retrieve button.

4-120
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
11. Click the Close button to finish Bandwidth Configuration Dialog box.
Under LCAS Directional/Unidirectional status bandwidth configuration process is
same as that under LCAS disable mostly except LCAS status shows different in
bandwidth configuration box .Take below figure for an example

4-121
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
4.15.2.2 Bandwidth under LCAS Enable/Bidirectional

Figure 4-84.
5. Choose VC12/VC3/VC4 in drop down list box of left upper window. If choosing
VC12, Bandwidth Configuration Dialog box is shown in Figure 4-84. If
choosing VC3, Bandwidth Configuration Dialog box is shown in Figure
4-85.

4-122
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
Figure 4-85.
NOTE: VC4 doesn't support LCAS.

6. In Figure 4-84 and Figure 4-85, click time slot (TS) number according to
requirement. At the same time, the quantity of selected TS will be shown in the
offside of bandwidth word.
Figure 4-86.
VC12 Timeslot Type

4-123
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
NOTE: User can select several paths at one time by dragging mouse for
simplifying operation.
Figure 4-87.
VC3 Timeslot Type
In Figure 4-86, Figure 4-87, R and T must be selected simultaneously

showing Rx time slot and Tx time slot can be configured simultaneously. Of
course user can change LCAS/Bidirectional to other LCAS status.
7. In Figure 4-86, Figure 4-87, click button of to configuration LCAS
function according to application requirement. Refer to Figure 4-88.
Figure 4-88.
LCAS Configuration
8. After completing the configuration, click the OK button to download the settings
to NE.

4-124
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
9. After completing configuration Bandwidth Configuration Dialog box is

shown in Figure 4-89.
Figure 4-89.
Bandwidth Configuration Dialog Box (2)
10. If need to modify bandwidth configuration of one port, select corresponding row
and click Modify button. If need to retrieve bandwidth configuration of one port,
select corresponding row and click Retrieve button.
11. Click the Close button to finish Bandwidth Configuration Dialog box.

4-125
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
3. TURN ON THE POWER OF V-NODE

The following steps describe how to turn on the power of V-NODE for the first time. For
the information and procedures on how to apply the power after the first time power-on,
refer to the Operation and Maintenance manual
WARNING
48 V DC
When the station power is supplied to V-NODE subracks directly
or via the PDP shelf in the rack and the station power is on, 48 V
DC may be present at subracks, boards and modules.
CAUTION
A regulated voltage checks must already
have been performed.
CAUTION
ESD
To prevent damages to the electrostatic-sensitive devices used
in the equipment, a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must
be worn whenever handling the equipment.
Turn On the Power of V-NODE

3-1
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
3.1 Apply Power to Equipment

Procedure
1. Supply power to the rack or the equipment.
2. Check the power voltage, which should be within 38.4V DC to 60V DC.
3. Check whether short circuit phenomenon exists.
4. Turn on the power of the rack.
5. Turn on the power of the equipment.
Turn On the Power of V-NODE

3-2
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
2. PRELIMINARY CHECKS
After all the hardware installations and their connections are finished, turn on the
V-NODE equipment and set up the parameters.
INSPECTION TASK
1
VERIFIED
Confirm the Environment:

Temperature and humidity are within the specifications.
Properly air-conditioned.
The room is secure and authorized.
Confirm whether the equipment is installed firmly.
Confirm whether the voltage range is correct.
Check whether there is short circuit phenomenon.
Confirm whether the power cable is connected.
Check the boards are installed correctly.
Confirm the optical cables and other cables are connected correctly.
Preliminary Checks
2-1
F5259_B10
PROVISIONING
10. RESTRICTIONS IN DELETING

Since an object or parameter holds several registered items to define its attributes, the
object/parameter itself may not be deleted before terminating those registered items.
The following table shows the correlations among objects or parameters that should be
considered when deleting a registration or specified setups. To delete registration, the
requirements in each table must be satisfied.
TO DELETE:
BOARD
REQUIREMENTS
No crossconnect,
No board /TPS protection,
No MSP,
No timing source is configured on the
board.
Port
Clock module port
No timing source is configured on the

board.
Restrictions in Deleting
10-1
E
F5259_B11
SpectralWave V-NODE
RELEASE 2.10
Operation and Maintenance
NEC Corporation
F5259_B11

1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B11
Contents
1. SUMMARY
1-1
1.1 Overview of Maintenance Works ..........................................................1-1

1.2 Requirements for Maintenance Operation...........................................1-2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Skills Required for Maintenance Operator .............................................. 1-2

Apparatus for Maintenance....................................................................... 1-2
2. OPERATION CONTROLS
2-1
2.1 Orderwire................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1
2.1.2
Using Handset (Telephone Set) ................................................................ 2-2

Terminate Orderwire Communication...................................................... 2-3
2.2 House Keeping Control .........................................................................2-4

2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
Apparatus ................................................................................................... 2-4

Parameters ................................................................................................. 2-4
Procedure: Enable Housekeeping Controls............................................ 2-4
3. RETRIEVE INFORMATION
3-1
3.1 Alarm Status...........................................................................................3-1

3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
Procedure: Open Alarm Monitor Dialog Box........................................... 3-1

Alarm Monitor Dialog Box......................................................................... 3-2
View Current Alarms.................................................................................. 3-5
View History Alarms .................................................................................. 3-8
View Actual Alarms.................................................................................. 3-10
3.2 Operation Log ......................................................................................3-12

3.2.1
3.2.2
Items in Operation Log Dialog Box ........................................................ 3-12

Procedure: View Operation Logs ........................................................... 3-13
3.3 Event View............................................................................................3-15

3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
Mointor Traffic Performance................................................................... 3-15

Monitor Path Protection Switching Conditions .................................... 3-17
Monitor MS Protection Switching Conditions....................................... 3-18
Monitor Timing Source Switching Conditions ...................................... 3-19
3.4 Performance Monitoring .....................................................................3-20

3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
PM Parameters......................................................................................... 3-20
Display Current PM Status...................................................................... 3-36
Display History PM Data.......................................................................... 3-44
PM Counter Reset.................................................................................... 3-50
Contents
-i-
F5259_B11
3.4.5
Display Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) ............................................... 3-53
3.5 Hardware Inventory and LED Status ..................................................3-54

3.5.1
Display Hardware Information and LED Status .................................... 3-54
3.6 Firmware Version.................................................................................3-56

3.6.1
Procedure: Retrieve Installed Firmware Version .................................. 3-56
3.7 Logged-in Users ..................................................................................3-58

3.7.1
Procedure: Retrieve Logged-in Users List ............................................ 3-58
4. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
4-1
4.1 Check LED Operation on All Boards....................................................4-1

4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10
4.1.11
4.1.12
4.1.13
Target Boards............................................................................................. 4-1

Procedure: Verify LEDs on MCP Board ................................................... 4-2
Procedure: Verify LEDs on CS Board ...................................................... 4-3
Procedure: Verify LEDs on FE Board ...................................................... 4-4
Procedure: Verify LEDs on E12Board...................................................... 4-6
Procedure: Verify LEDs on E31/E32 Board ............................................. 4-7
Procedure: Verify LEDs on STM16 Board ............................................... 4-8
Procedure: Verify LEDs on STM-1/4 Board ............................................. 4-9
Procedure: Verify LEDs on S1E Board .................................................. 4-10
Procedure: Verify LEDs on TPS_E12 Board.......................................... 4-11
Procedure: Verify LEDs on TPS_E3W and TPS_E3P Board ................ 4-12
Procedure: Verify LEDs on TPS_S1EW and TPS_S1EP Board ........... 4-13
Procedure: Verify LEDs on Board by CID.............................................. 4-14
4.2 Check FAN............................................................................................4-15

4.2.1
4.2.2
Apparatus ................................................................................................. 4-15

Procedure: Verify FAN............................................................................. 4-15
5. HARDWARE REPLACEMENT
5-1
5.1 Replace Cables ......................................................................................5-2

5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
Precautions ................................................................................................ 5-2

Apparatus ................................................................................................... 5-2
Procedure: Disconnect Cables................................................................. 5-2
Procedure: Connect Cables...................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Board ......................................................................................................5-3

5.2.1
5.2.2
Apparatus ................................................................................................... 5-3

Procedure: Replace Board........................................................................ 5-3
5.3 Module ....................................................................................................5-4

5.3.1
5.3.2
Contents
- ii -
Precautions ................................................................................................ 5-4

Apparatus ................................................................................................... 5-4
F5259_B11
5.3.3
Procedure: Replace Module ..................................................................... 5-4
5.4 Power Board...........................................................................................5-5

5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
Precautions ................................................................................................ 5-5

Apparatus ................................................................................................... 5-5
Procedure: Replace Power Board............................................................ 5-5
5.5 Battery of MCP Board............................................................................5-6

5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
Precautions ................................................................................................ 5-6

Apparatus ................................................................................................... 5-6
Procedure: Replace Power Board............................................................ 5-6
5.6 FAN .........................................................................................................5-8

5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
Precautions ................................................................................................ 5-8

Apparatus ................................................................................................... 5-8
Procedure: Replace FAN........................................................................... 5-8
6. EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
6-1
6.1 Database Upload/Download..................................................................6-2

6.1.1
6.1.2
Database List.............................................................................................. 6-2

Procedure: Upload/Download Database.................................................. 6-4
6.2 Equipment Reset ...................................................................................6-7

6.2.1
Procedure: Execute Equipment Reset..................................................... 6-7
6.3 Equipment Initialization.........................................................................6-9

6.4 Erase NE History Data .........................................................................6-10
6.4.1
Procedure: Execute Equipment Reset................................................... 6-10
6.5 Set History Data Save Mode ............................................................... 6-11

6.5.1
Procedure: Execute Equipment Reset................................................... 6-11
7. TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE
7-1
7.1 Loopback................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
Description ................................................................................................. 7-2

Loopback Statuses .................................................................................... 7-3
Procedure: Setup Loopback..................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Crossconnect Maintenance ..................................................................7-6

7.3 Protection ...............................................................................................7-8
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
MSP ............................................................................................................. 7-8

MS-SP Ring .............................................................................................. 7-12
SNCP......................................................................................................... 7-15
Hardware Protection................................................................................ 7-17
8. FIRMWARE MAINTENANCE
8-1
Contents
- iii -
F5259_B11
8.1 Switch Firmware Version ......................................................................8-2

8.1.1
Procedure: Switch Firmware Version ...................................................... 8-2
8.2 Upgrade Firmware Version ...................................................................8-4

8.2.1
Procedure: Upgrade the Version of CS Board ........................................ 8-4
8.3 Config CutOver ....................................................................................8-14

8.3.1
Procedure: Config CutOver .................................................................... 8-14
9. CONFIGURATION CHANGES
9-1
9.1 Adding Nodes ........................................................................................9-2

9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
Example Description(Before change) ...................................................... 9-2

Add Node.................................................................................................... 9-7
IP Address Configuration.......................................................................... 9-7
Crossconnect Configuration .................................................................. 9-13
9.2 Removing Nodes .................................................................................9-22
10. TROUBLE CLEARING
10-1
10.1 Making Contact with NEC ...................................................................10-1

10.2 Categories of Condition Types ...........................................................10-2
10.2.1 List of Indication Messages.................................................................... 10-2
10.3 Retrieve Alarm Information ...............................................................10-10

10.3.1 Procedure: Display Current Alarm ....................................................... 10-10
10.4 Equipment ..........................................................................................10-12

10.4.1
10.4.2
10.4.3
10.4.4
10.4.5
10.4.6
10.4.7
10.4.8
10.4.9
BUS_ERROR .......................................................................................... 10-12

MEM_FAIL............................................................................................... 10-13
PKG_FAIL ............................................................................................... 10-14
PKG_REMOVED..................................................................................... 10-15
PKG_TYPE.............................................................................................. 10-16
PORT_REMOVED................................................................................... 10-17
PORT_TYPE ........................................................................................... 10-18
POWER_FAIL (Power LED off).............................................................. 10-19
CID timeout............................................................................................. 10-20
10.5 Facility ................................................................................................10-21

10.5.1
10.5.2
10.5.3
10.5.4
10.5.5
10.5.6
10.5.7
10.5.8
Contents
- iv -
AIS........................................................................................................... 10-22
AU-AIS .................................................................................................... 10-23
AU-LOP ................................................................................................... 10-24
CLKFAIL.................................................................................................. 10-25
CLKDRIFT............................................................................................... 10-26
HP-DEG................................................................................................... 10-27
HP-EXC ................................................................................................... 10-28
HP-PLMF................................................................................................. 10-29
F5259_B11
10.5.9 HP-RDI .................................................................................................... 10-30

10.5.10 HP-TIM ................................................................................................. 10-31
10.5.11 HP-UNEQ ............................................................................................. 10-32
10.5.12 LOF....................................................................................................... 10-33
10.5.13 LOF 2Mbps...................................................................................... 10-34
10.5.14 LOM ...................................................................................................... 10-35
10.5.15 LOS ...................................................................................................... 10-36
10.5.16 LOS 2 MHz ...................................................................................... 10-37
10.5.17
10.5.18
10.5.19
10.5.20
10.5.21
10.5.22
10.5.23
10.5.24
10.5.25
10.5.26
10.5.27
10.5.28
10.5.29
10.5.30
10.5.31
10.5.32
10.5.33
LOS Electrical INTF ........................................................................ 10-38

LP-DEG ................................................................................................ 10-39
LP-EXC................................................................................................. 10-40
LP-PLMF .............................................................................................. 10-41
LP-RDI .................................................................................................. 10-42
LP-TIM .................................................................................................. 10-43
LP-UNEQ.............................................................................................. 10-44
LTI......................................................................................................... 10-45
MS-AIS ................................................................................................. 10-46
MS-DEG ............................................................................................... 10-47
MS-EXC ................................................................................................ 10-48
MS-RDI ................................................................................................. 10-49
PPS-FAIL.............................................................................................. 10-50
REF_FAIL ............................................................................................. 10-51
RS-TIM ................................................................................................. 10-52
TU-AIS .................................................................................................. 10-53
TU-LOP ................................................................................................ 10-54
10.6 Environment.......................................................................................10-55
10.6.1 HKAn....................................................................................................... 10-55
10.7 Network...............................................................................................10-56
10.7.1 LINK-FAIL ............................................................................................... 10-56
10.8 Ethernet Alarm ...................................................................................10-57

10.8.1 CSF_LCS ................................................................................................ 10-57
10.8.2 CSF_LCSync .......................................................................................... 10-58
10.8.3 CSF_R_LCS............................................................................................ 10-59
10.8.4 CSF_R_LCSync...................................................................................... 10-60
10.8.5 DropPkts_EXC........................................................................................ 10-61
10.8.6 LINK_DOWN ........................................................................................... 10-62
10.8.7 RxAlignmentErrorFrames_EXC............................................................ 10-63
10.8.8 RxFCSErrorFrames_EXC ...................................................................... 10-64
10.8.9 TxCollisions_EXC .................................................................................. 10-65
10.8.10 TxDelayTransmission_EXC................................................................ 10-66
10.8.11 TxExtCollision_EXC............................................................................ 10-67
10.8.12 TxLateCollisions_EXC........................................................................ 10-68
Contents
-v-
F5259_B11
10.8.13 WAN_PORT_SD .................................................................................. 10-69

10.8.14 WAN_PORT_SF ................................................................................... 10-70
10.9 Encapsulation Alarm .........................................................................10-71

10.9.1 SSF_LGS ................................................................................................ 10-71
10.9.2 LAPS_FAIL ............................................................................................. 10-72
10.10 Virtual Concatenation Alarm.........................................................10-73

10.10.1
10.10.2
10.10.3
10.10.4
10.11
LP-Xv-LOA ........................................................................................... 10-73

LP-Xv-LOM .......................................................................................... 10-74
LP-Xv-PLM ........................................................................................... 10-75
LP-Xv-SQM .......................................................................................... 10-76
Office Alarms..................................................................................10-77
10.12 Alarm action table..........................................................................10-78
Contents
- vi E
F5259_B11
1. SUMMARY
This manual provides information on operation and maintenance for the SpectralWave
V-NODE.
1.1 Overview of Maintenance Works

Maintenance works are roughly divided into routine maintenance and operational
maintenance.
For operational maintenance, the performance monitoring function is provided so as to
identify and isolate the problem if it occurs. Refer to the section 3.Retrieve Information
for details.
Routine maintenance is necessary to secure normal equipment operations. Detailed
information is provided in the section 4. Routine Maintenance.
If any failure occurs, it is notified by alarms. The section 10. Trouble Clearing provides
detailed information on alarms and clearance methods for alarmed conditions.
Summary Overview of Maintenance Works

1-1
F5259_B11
1.2 Requirements for Maintenance Operation

The following are required for maintenance operation.
1.2.1 Skills Required for Maintenance Operator

Maintenance operations must be performed by qualified personnel who satisfy the
following requirements:
Having been trained by supplier transaction engineers or having coordinative
experience of training.
Knowledge to PC: mastering the ABC of operating system including English
version Windows 98SE/2000/XP and Windows NT 4.0 with SP6a.
NOTE: ABC is used as maintenance technology example.
1.2.2 Apparatus for Maintenance

The following apparatuses are required for maintenance works:
Error code testing instrument (PDH/SDH)
Multi-meter whose precision error is less than 5%
Single mode fibers, adapters, connecting cable, optical splitter
Optical power meter
Optical attenuator
Cleaning kit for optical connector
Summary Requirements for Maintenance Operation

1-2
F5259_B11
8. FIRMWARE MAINTENANCE
Firmware is the semi-permanent set of operating instructions (software). The version of
the firmware can be retrieved/switched/upgraded via the Upgrade F/W and FPGA
dialog box.
NOTE: For retrieving the firmware version, refer to 3.6.1 Procedure: Retrieve Installed
Firmware Version in this manual.
Firmware Maintenance
8-1
F5259_B11
8.1 Switch Firmware Version

Sometimes it is necessary to switch the firmware version for maintenance.
The firmware version switch is available for the software port only. For other ports
(FPGA hardware ports) the firmware version switch cannot be performed.
8.1.1 Procedure: Switch Firmware Version

Perform the following procedure to switch the firmware version:
in the 7. Working with CID of the CID Operating Guide manual.
3. Select Upgrade F/W and FPGA from the Maintenance menu. The Upgrade
F/W and FPGA dialog box shown in Figure 8-1 appears:
Figure 8-1. Upgrade F/W and FPGA Dialog Box
Firmware Maintenance Switch Firmware Version

8-2
F5259_B11
4. At the top of Upgrade F/W and FPGA dialog box, Select the target board from
first drop-down list and select F/W from the second drop-down list.
NOTE: V-Node only support F/W version switch on MCP, CS and FE board
now.
5. Click Retrieve button to retrieve the current version information.
6. Click the check box from the Serial column to select the operation object.
7. Check the Switch radio button, and then click the Run button. The Process
Result dialog box will be shown.
Figure 8-2.
Process Result dialog box
This step is the end of procedure.
Firmware Maintenance Switch Firmware Version

8-3
F5259_B11
8.2 Upgrade Firmware Version

The firmware can be upgraded to support new functions or revise bugs. Take CS board
upgrading for example:
NOTE: All the other applications must be quitted during performing the firmware
version upgrading operation.
8.2.1 Procedure: Upgrade the Version of CS Board

Upgrade Firmware Version
Perform the following procedure to upgrade the firmware version:
1. Close all the files and applications running in the system.
Firmware Maintenance Upgrade Firmware Version

8-4
F5259_B11

5. Select the CS board and the upgrade type F/W from the drop-down list on the top
of the Upgrade F/W and FPGA dialog box
6. Check the Retrieve radio button and click the Run button to upload the release
information.
7. Click the Upgrade radio button.
8. Click the Set Upgrade button. The Upgrade Setting dialog box is shown as
Figure 8-4:

8-5
F5259_B11
Figure 8-4.
Upgrade Setting Dialog Box
9. Input the location of the upgrade file to the Upgrade File textbox, if you know
where the upgrading file exists accurately, else you can select the upgrade file by
click the Browse button. The Open window shown as bellow:
NOTE: If the Cancel button is clicked here instead of the Open button,
browsing operation will be cancelled.
10. If you want upgrade later on, you may select the CutOver Time check box and
then you can specify a fixed time to upgrade. Detailed operation is provided in
8.3 Config CutOver.

8-6
F5259_B11
11. Select the The settings are fit for all objects which have the same
attributes check box to enable this function, otherwise the settings are only
applied for the selected objects.
12. Confirm the setting you have just done correct, and then click the Ok button to
over you setting procedure.
13. If you want to check the version compatible status, you could click the
Compatible button from the bottom of Upgrade F/W and FPGA dialog box.
The checking result will be shown in the Process Result windows as bellow:
Figure 8-5.
Version Compatible Status dialog Box
14. Then click the Run button to execute firmware upgrading.

NOTE:
If the Exit button is clicked here instead of the Run button, the firmware
upgrading is cancelled.
15. During the upgrading operation, the window is shown as Figure 8-6 .

8-7
F5259_B11
Figure 8-6. Upgrade F/W and FPGA Dialog Box during Upgrading
16. If the Stop Current Object button in the Process Result dialog box is
clicked during the firmware version upgrading operation, it only stop upgrading
the current object; if the Stop All Object button is clicked, all object upgrading
operation will be interrupted
To quit the firmware version upgrading operation, click the Close button.
NOTE:
1) When finish upgrade CS F/W, there is a trial run status, during which it
is forbidden to power down or reset until 6 minutes late.
2) CS F/W can only work in 1st zone.
3) After finished the F/W upgrading, you must upgrade the E1 FPGA.

8-8
F5259_B11
Upgrade FPGA Version

Perform the following procedure to upgrade the firmware version:

3. Select the CS board and the upgrade type FPGA from the drop-down list on the
top of the Upgrade F/W and FPGA dialog box
4. Check the Retrieve radio button and click the Run button to upload the release
information.
6. Click the Set Upgrade button. The Upgrade Setting dialog box is shown as
Figure 8-4:

8-9
F5259_B11
Figure 8-8.
Upgrade Setting Dialog Box

8-10
F5259_B11
8. If you want upgrade later on, you may select the CutOver Time check box and
then you can specify a fixed time to upgrade. Detailed operation is provided in
8.3 Config CutOver.
10. Confirm the setting you have just done correct, and then click the Ok button to
over you setting procedure.
11. If you want to check the version compatible status, you could click the
Compatible button from the bottom of Upgrade F/W and FPGA dialog box.
The checking result will be shown in the Process Result windows as bellow:
Figure 8-9.
Version Compatible Status dialog Box
12. Then click the Run button to execute firmware upgrading.

NOTE:
13. During the upgrading operation, the window is shown as Figure 8-6 .

8-11
F5259_B11
To quit the FPGA version upgrading operation, click the Close button.
NOTE:
1) The procedure for upgrading firmware on MCP and FE board is the same as
CS board. The version information of all boards is listed as below:
PKG NAME
MCP
CS
FE
TYPE
F/W
FPGA
F/W
FPGA
FPGA(STM16)
FPGA(STM-1/4)
FPGA(E3)
FPGA(E1)
EPLD
F/W
FPGA
FPGA
EPLD

8-12
CODE
SF221-0001-A01
SF221-0001-F01
SF226-0003-A01
SF226-0003-F01
SF226-0003-F02
SF226-0003-F03
SF226-0003-F04
SF226-0003-F05
SF226-0003-E01
SF208-0007-A01
SF208-0007-F01
SF208-0007-F02
SF208-0007-E01
F5259_B11
PKG NAME
STM16
STM-1/4
S1E
E3
E1
TPS-S1E/E3/E1
TYPE
EPLD
EPLD
EPLD
EPLD
EPLD
EPLD
CODE
SF213-0004-E01
SF212-0002-E01
SF212-0002-E01
SF203-0004-E01
SF201-0007-E01
SF220-0101-E01
2) The upgrade time for FW on MCP board and both FW and FPGA on FE
board is using CID's time, and the upgrade time for FPGA on the MCP
board is using the V-Node's time;
3) Since the EPLD can't be downloaded via CID, it has no upgrade time.
4) Because the traffic board FPGAs are saved in CS board, when clicking
retrieve button to get the CS board version information you can find FPGA
information about traffic board such as STM-1/4, STM16 and E1 board
which is only used for retrieving, but not upgrading. If you want to upgrade
traffic board FPGA, you must first select the corresponding target board and
upgrade it individually.
5) If there are two CS packages, you must first upgrade the working CS FPGA,
STM-1/4 FPGA, STM16 FPGA, E3 FPGA and E1 FPGA, and then switch
the two CS board, lastly, upgrade another CS board.

8-13
F5259_B11
8.3 Config CutOver

Cutover means that user can download the upgrade file to equipment but not take
effective until the time user prescribed.
8.3.1 Procedure: Config CutOver

Perform the following procedure to configuration cutover time:
1. Close all the files and applications running in the system.
Firmware Maintenance Config Cutover

8-14
F5259_B11
5. Select the target board and the upgrade type F/W or FPGA from the drop-down
list on the top of the Upgrade F/W and FPGA dialog box
6. Click the Retrieve button and the Run button to upload the release information.
8. Click the Set Upgrade button. The Upgrade Setting dialog box shown in
Figure 8-12 appears for browsing:
Figure 8-12. Upgrade Setting Dialog Box


8-15
F5259_B11
10. Enable the CutOver Time function by click the CutOver Time check box, and
then you can specify a fixed time to upgrade.
12. Confirm the setting you have just done correct, and then click the Ok button.
13. Click the Run button to execute firmware upgrading.
8-16
F5259_B11
NOTE:
14. During the upgrading operation, the window is shown as Figure 8-13:
To quit the firmware version upgrading operation, click the Close button.
16. Then, the CID will feedback the result of the upgrading operation, the result
interface is shown as bellow:

8-17
F5259_B11
17. When the upgrade operation is over, we can click the Modify CutOver button in
the Upgrade F/W and FPGA dialog box to modify the cutover time. The
Modify CutOver Time dialog box is shown as bellow:

8-18
F5259_B11
7. TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE
This section provides the maintenance information and procedures related to traffics.
Traffic maintenance should be carried out by a maintenance personnel to assure or
inspect the quality of the traffic.
The tasks provided in this section are not arranged in any specific order.
Traffic Maintenance
7-1
F5259_B11
7.1 Loopback
7.1.1 Description
CAUTION
Performing loopback interrupts the flow of traffic,
and changes the normal transmission.
CAUTION
When using F port to remote login and selecting
Remote at Login screen, please don't operate SDH
interface Loopback setting. The setting might not be
relieved because you disconnect to remote and can
not login again.
Loopback function allows fault isolation and pre-service operation practice. Performing
loopback interrupts the flow of traffic, and changes the normal transmission. Therefore,
the use of loopback as routine practice is not recommended.
When the loopback is executed, the system generates an alarm indication signal, and
sends it to the far-end NE.
See the following for other features of the loopback:
The loopback can be executed on every path.
Alarms in the path layer are masked during the loopback operation.
NOTE: When Remote check box of CID is checked at login screen, loopback control for
SDH interface from CID is rejected. Though CID does not show any information
box, making loopback in remote login will lead communication down
Traffic Maintenance Loopback

7-2
F5259_B11
7.1.2 Loopback Statuses

There are the following three kinds of loopback status:
LOOPBACK STATUS
DESCRIPTION
Facility loopback
Incoming signals from other equipment is looped back to

the signal source without any management.
Terminal loopback
Signals are looped back without sending to other

equipment.
Non loop
Signals go straight without any loopback.
7.1.3 Procedure: Setup Loopback

in the section Ch07_Working with CID of the B09_CID Operating Guide
manual.
3. Select Loopback Control from the Maintenance menu. The Loopback
Control dialog box shown in Figure 7-1 appears:

7-3
F5259_B11
Figure 7-1.

7-4
Loopback Control Dialog Box
F5259_B11
4. Select a port for which loopback is to be executed from tree structures in the left
window (selected ports will be highlighted).
5. Click the Retrieve button to send the loopback data information of the selected
port to the CID.
6. Click a port in the Loopback Status field. Its loopback status switches
(Facility)
(Terminal)
(Non Loop) by clicking.
NOTE: A same loopback status can be specified for all the paths on a certain
slot position by clicking the corresponding button in the All field.
7. Click the Set button. The specified loopback settings will be sent to the NE.
8. Click the Close button to finish the loopback setup operation.

7-5
F5259_B11
7.2 Crossconnect Maintenance

The procedures regarding the crossconnect maintenance operations are provided in the
Provisioning manual.
Procedure
2. Open the management dialog box of the target NE.
Cross Connect Configuration dialog box shown in Figure 7-2 appears:
Figure 7-2.
Cross Connect Configuration Dialog Box
4. Choose the Delete radio button, delete the crossconnect that need to be modified
at the destination side.
NOTE: When this is selected, Multi-TS is disabled.
Traffic Maintenance Crossconnect Maintenance
7-6
F5259_B11
5. Configure the new crossconnect.

NOTE: In the latest release, VC-12, VC-3 and VC4 crossconnect function are all
supported.
Traffic Maintenance Crossconnect Maintenance

7-7
F5259_B11
7.3 Protection
V-NODE supports two kinds of protections: MSP (multiplex section protection) and
SNCP (sub-network connection protection).
7.3.1 MSP
7.3.1.1 Action mode
V-NODE supports MSP in action mode: 1+1 Uni-directional Non-revertive Linear
Protection. The following illustration shows 1+1 Unidirectional Linear Protection
Operation. Only receive side is switched by line failure.
Figure 7-3
1+1 Unidirectional Linear Protection Operation

The boards in same level can be configured as protection in V-NODE , for example,
STM-16 without slot limitation.
Traffic Maintenance Protection

7-8
F5259_B11
Figure 7-4.
MSP Configuration
7.3.1.3 switching criterion

Item
Switching
requirement
Monitor place
B2ERR_HIGH
SF
Line (Work / Prot)
B2ERR_LOW
SD
Line (Work / Prot)
LOS
SF
Line (Work / Prot)
LOF
SF
Line (Work / Prot)
MS-AIS
SF
Line (Work / Prot)
RS-TIM*
SF
Line (Work / Prot)
*: J Byte must be enabled in order to make TIM function be a switch criterion.
7.3.1.4 External Commands

Command
Term
LKOP
Forced switch to protection
FSP
Forced switch to working
FSW
Manual switch to protection
MSP
Manual switch to working
MSW
Content
Protection line is forbidden to use
unconditionally.
If the command is set on working line, the
traffic will be switched to protection line
unconditionally.
If the command is set on protection line, the
traffic will be switched to working line
unconditionally.
If the command is set on working line and
protection line is in normal status, the traffic
will be switched to protection line.
If the command is set on protection line and
working liner is in normal status, the traffic
will be switched to the working line.

7-9
F5259_B11

LKOP>LKOW>FSW>FSP>SF on Prot>SF on Work>SD on Prot>SD on Work>
MSW>MSP
7.3.1.6 Switch status

MSP switch status is given in MSP Configuration windows of CID. In order to
setup MSP configuration, please refer to the section 10.4 Setup MSP Configuration
in manual 10 Provision for detail information.
In MSP Configuration windows, read only edit box Status give the MSP status. If
V-NODE works on working line, it shows Normal as in Figure 7-5; If V-NODE
works on protection line, it shows Switch as in Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-5.

7-10
MSP in Normal Status
F5259_B11
Figure 7-6.
MSP in Switch Status

7-11
F5259_B11
7.3.2 MS-SP Ring

7.3.2.1 Action mode
This section is referring to ITU-T G.783/G.841 MS-SPRING protection is for the
STM-4/ STM-16 optical interface.
OPTICAL INTERFACE
STM-16
STM-4
MODE
SPECIFICATION
2 Fiber MS-SP Ring
ITU-T G.841
2 Fiber MS-SP Ring
ITU-T G.841
In addition, the mode (Transoceanic Application) of operation based on ITU-T G.841

Annex A decides not to support for the time being.

the following figure shows the protection among the STM-4, and among the STM-16
without slot limitation.
V-Node
STM-16
MS-Spring
V-Node
V-Node
TPS_E12P
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
P_INF
P_INF
D_INF
V-Node
CS
CS
Figure 7-7. MS-SP Ring Configuration

7-12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
STM-4/16
STM-4/16
FE
MCP
2M(With TPS)
100Base-T
F5259_B11

Table 7-1.
Switching Factor
Item
Switching
requirement
Monitor place
B2EXC
B2DEG
LOS
LOF
MS-AIS
J0-TIM
SF
SD
SF
SF
SF
SF
Line (Work / Prot)

Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Line (Work / Prot)
Table 7-2.
Item
EQPT FAIL
PKG-REMOVE
PKG-TYPE
Optical Interface Factor
Switching
requirement
Monitor place
SF
SF
SF


Command
Term
Lockout of
protection
LKOP
Forced Switch
Ring
FSR
Manual Switch
Ring
MSR
Exercise Ring
EXR
Content
This command prevents using ring switches anywhere
in the ring. If any ring switches exist in the ring, this
command causes the switches to drop. Thus, all ring
switching is prevented (and pre-empted). It used for
whole subnet.
This command performs the ring switch of normal
traffic from working channels to the protection
specifically node.
This command performs the ring switch of the normal
traffic from the working channels to the protection
specifically node.
This command exercises ring protection switching of
the requested channel without completing the actual
bridge and switch. It used for one port of the
specifically node.

7-13
F5259_B11

LKOP>FS-S>FS-R>SF-S>SF-R>SD-P>SD-S>SD-R>MS-S>MS-R>WTR>EXER-S
>EXER-R>RR-S>RR-R>NR
7.3.2.6 Switch time


7-14
F5259_B11
7.3.3 SNCP
7.3.3.1 Action mode
V-NODE supports SNCP in action methods: 1+1 Unidirectional Non-Revertive/
Revertive and monitor methods: SNC/I (Sub-Network Connection Protection with
Inherent Monitoring) and SNC/N (Sub-Network Connection Protection with
Non-intrusive Monitoring).
NOTE:
1) V-NODE supports both SNC/N and SNC/I in SNCP ring configuration
2) When configure the SNCP ring, suggest you to configure the hold off time
in CID.

STM-16 without slot limitation
V-Node
V-Node
V-Node
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
STM-4
STM-4
STM-16
STM-16
STM-4
SNCP
P_INF
CS
CS
2M(With TPS)
100Base-T
FE
MCP
V-Node
P_INF
D_INF
V-Node
TPS_E12P
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
TPS_E12W
STM-16
SNCP
V-Node
V-Node
Figure 7-8.
SNCP Configuration

7-15
F5259_B11

For SNC/I
Item
Switching Requirement
AU-LOP
AU-AIS
TU-LOP
TU-AIS
Note
HOP
Include cause of AU-AIS ex LOS
LOP
Include cause of TU-AIS ex LOS
For SNC/N
Item
Switching Requirement
AU-LOP
AU-AIS
HP-UNEQ
HP-TIM
HP-EXC
HP-DEG
TU-LOP
TU-AIS
LP-UNEQ
LP-TIM
LP-EXC
LP-DEG
LOM
TSF (Trail Signal Fail
HOP
LOP
7.3.3.4 External Commands

Command Term
Content
Revertive
Nonrevertive
Lockout of
protection
LKOP
If the command is set, the protection channel

will be forbidden to use unconditionally.
Forced
switch
FSP
If the command is set, the traffic will be

switched to protection channel unconditionally.
Manual
switch
MSP
If the command is set and protection channel is

in normal status, the traffic will be switched to
protection channel.

7-16
F5259_B11

LKOP> FSP> SF on Prot>SF on Work> SD on Prot> SD on Work> MSP>
Wait-to-restore> No request
7.3.4 Hardware Protection

7.3.4.1 TPS
TPS carries out 2M electronic interface protection with 1:4 mode, The five slots
located in the most left and most right can be installed with TPS board. TPSs
Figure 7-9.
Normal Working Mode

7-17
F5259_B11
Figure 7-10.
Switch Working Mode
TPS system is made of standby interface board, working interface board and TPS
switch board. When system is normal, both the standby interface board and working
board can transmitting service separately without interference.
7.3.4.2 CS Board Protection

In V-Node, there are 2 CS boards in 8# and 9#, they detect their own status and
transfers it to each other. the 8# CS board analyze its own status and the 9# CS
boards status and decide which board should be in work-status and which should be
in protect-status and control the switch process, the 9# CS board accept the 8# CS
boards signal and control its status. The CS board reports their status and the cause
of the switch.

7-18
F5259_B11
6. EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
This section provides the maintenance information and procedures related to the
equipment and equipment configuration.
Equipment Maintenance
6-1
F5259_B11
6.1 Database Upload/Download

When the configuration of a V-NODE is completed, all the configuration information on
that equipment can be saved by the database upload function. After this, these
configurations can be conveniently sent to another V-NODE, which needs to set up its
configuration, by the database download function without needing repeat the
configuration setup for it.
6.1.1 Database List

The configuration database items that can be uploaded/downloaded are listed in the
following table in alphabetical order. These are listed in the Database Select text box
of the Database Upload/Download dialog box (see Figure 6-1).
Equipment Maintenance Database Upload/Download

6-2
F5259_B11
Database Items
NE Attribute Tab
Common Performance Attribute Tab
Environment Control Output Port Config Tab
RIP Config Tab
Slot Config Tab
Physical Port Config Tab
Static Route Tab
SDH/PDH Service Interface Config Tab
SDH MSP Group Config Tab
SDH MSP Config Tab
Higher Order Path Cross-Connect Config Tab
Higher Order Service TimeSlot (J1) Config Tab
SDH Lower Order TimeSlot Config Tab
System Timing Source Tab
ByPass Timing Source Tab
Clock Path Info Config Tab
2M bit/Hz Output State & SAN bit Tab
Power Port/Fan port/Environment Port
Alarm Type Config Tab
Digital Performance Type Config Tab
User Information Tab
IP\RS232\DCC Config Tab
OWH_ATTR
DATA_CHANNEL
TRUNK_FE
VLAN_FE
MAC Filter of FE
Bandwidth_FE
Port_FE
Board_FE
STP_FE
Encapsulation_FE
HKA/HKC Name
AU Squelch

6-3
F5259_B11
6.1.2 Procedure: Upload/Download Database

Perform the following procedure to upload/download the database:
3. Select Database Upload/Download from the File menu. The Database
Upload/Download dialog box shown in Figure 6-1 appears:
Figure 6-1. Database Upload/Download Dialog Box

4. When downloading database, a database folder to which the database is to be
saved must be selected first. Perform the following procedure:
1) Click the Browse button on the right of the DataBase Folder Select
field to open the Work Path Select dialog box shown in Figure 6-2.

6-4
F5259_B11
Figure 6-2.
Work Path Select Dialog Box
2) Select a desired directory from the tree structure on the left of the dialog box.
The path of the selected folder (directory) will be displayed in the upper
field.
3) Click the OK button. The Work Path Select dialog box is closed and the
Database Upload/Download dialog box appears again, with the selected
directory entered in the DataBase Folder Select field.
5. In the Operation field, select the operation mode Upload or Download radio
button.
6. Select the databases to be uploaded or downloaded in the Database Select text
box. The left text box lists all the databases, and the right text box will list the
selected databases. Perform one of the following procedures to select the database
to be uploaded/downloaded:
Click a database in the left text box (a selected database name will be
highlighted), then click the > button. The target database moves to the right
text box.
NOTE: Two or more databases can be selected by using the Shift key and Ctrl
key on the keyboard.

6-5
F5259_B11
Double-click a database in the left text box. The target database moves to the
right text box.
To select all the databases at once, click the >> button. It is not necessary to
select any database in this event.
NOTE: The selected databases once moved into the right text box can be
returned to the left text box. Select database(s) in the right text box
(selected databases will be highlighted), then click the < button. All the
databases in the right text box can be moved into the left text box by
clicking the << button without selecting any databases.
7. Confirm that the specified operation (upload/download) and selected the
databases to be uploaded/downloaded are correct, and then click the Start button.
8. Then the confirmation dialog box appears, asking whether to actually execute the
uploading/downloading operation. Click the OK button.
9. When the updating/downloading operation is completed, a message box appears
displaying whether the operation has been successfully finished or not.

6-6
F5259_B11
6.2 Equipment Reset

After modifying the IP parameter or the DCC parameter (see 7.2 IP Parameter Setup in
the Provisioning manual for details), it is necessary to reset the equipment.
NOTE: Equipment reset operation will cause TCA, PPS, MSP and Timing Source
Switch events clear and CID communication down.
6.2.1 Procedure: Execute Equipment Reset

Perform the following procedure to reset the equipment:
3. Select Equipment Reset from the Maintenance menu. The Equipment
Reset dialog box shown in Figure 6-3 appears:
Figure 6-3.
Equipment Reset Dialog Box
Equipment Maintenance Equipment Reset

6-7
F5259_B11
4. Select the equipment, board, or port to be reset in the Device Select tree structure
on the left of the dialog box.
5. Select Hardware or Software from the Device Reset Select field.
NOTE: CS, STM-1/4, STM16 and 2M board can be configured as hardware reset.
When hardware reset configuration take effect, the service is break; The MCP,
CS, FE board can be set as software reset. When FE board is set as software
reset the service is break.
6. Confirm that the selected equipment/board/port is correct, and then click the
Reset button. The confirmation dialog box shown in Figure 6-4 appears:
Figure 6-4.
Confirmation Dialog Box for Equipment Reset
7. Click the OK button to perform equipment reset.

NOTE: Clicking the Cancel button instead of the OK button closes the
confirmation dialog box and the Equipment Reset dialog box appears
again.
8. The equipment restarts automatically. It takes about 60 to 90 seconds for
equipment restart.
NOTE: The communication between CID and NE will be shut down during
restarting.
Equipment Maintenance Equipment Reset

6-8
F5259_B11
6.3 Equipment Initialization

Perform the following procedure to reset the equipment:
3. Select Equipment Initialization from the Maintenance menu. The
Equipment Initialization dialog box shown in Figure 6-5 appears:
Figure 6-5.
Equipment Initialization Dialog Box
4. Click the OK button to perform equipment initialization. The equipment will

restart automatically. Click the Close button to quit equipment initialization.
NOTE:
1) Equipment initialization will delete all configuration of NE. Users should
be very caution before initializing equipment.
2) CS board must be lockout at working status before initialization.
Equipment Maintenance Equipment Initialization

6-9
F5259_B11
6.4 Erase NE History Data

Perform the following procedure to erase NE history data the equipment:
3. Select Erase NE History Data from the Maintenance menu. The Erase NE
History Data dialog box shown in Figure 6-3 appears:
Figure 6-6.
Erase NE History Data Dialog Box
4. You must specify the start time from the Start Time field and the end time from
End Time field.
5. Then you can select the target object which you want to erase from the Data
Resource field.
6. Click the Clear button to carry out clear command. Or click the Close button to
ignore the setting you have just done.
Equipment Maintenance Erase NE History Data
6-10
F5259_B11
6.5 Set History Data Save Mode

Perform the following procedure to set history data save mode the equipment:
3. Select Set History Data Save Mode from the Maintenance menu. The
History Data Save Mode dialog box shown in Figure 6-3 appears:
Figure 6-7.
Erase NE History Data Dialog Box
4. Double click the target line to select it, then the History Data Mode pop-up
window will appear, it shown as bellow:
Equipment Maintenance Set History Data Save Mode

6-11
F5259_B11
5. Click the target object from the Item column to select it and select its mode from
the drop-down list in Value column: Overwrite and Stop Count.
6. Click the OK button to send the setting information to the equipment. Or click
the Cancel button to ignore the setting you have just done.
Equipment Maintenance Set History Data Save Mode

6-12
F5259_B11
5. HARDWARE REPLACEMENT
This section provides steps to replace hardware installed in V-NODE equipment while in
service.
CAUTION
To prevent the equipment from getting damages, be sure to wear
anti-static wrist strap connected to the ESD terminal.
- Put on gloves when touching boards.
- When storing a spare board, put it into an antistatic bag and
place it in an antistatic environment.
- Ensure that all testing equipment, instrument, computer, etc.,
are connected to shielded ground and static ground reliably
Hardware Replacement
5-1
F5259_B11
5.1 Replace Cables

This subsection provides procedures to remove/replace cables connected at V-NODE
equipment. While in service, removal of cables requires special precautions.
5.1.1 Precautions
Confirm there is no traffic in cable.
5.1.2 Apparatus
CID
New Cable for replacement
5.1.3 Procedure: Disconnect Cables

1. Pull out the cable which need to be replaced.
2. Clean the optical connector.
5.1.4 Procedure: Connect Cables

3. Connect the new optical cable to the equipment.
4. Check the new cable to confirm whether the connection is credible.
Hardware Replacement Replace Cables

5-2
F5259_B11
5.2 Board
This subsection provides procedures to remove/replace board of the V-NODE equipment.
While in service, removal of board requires special precautions.
5.2.1 Apparatus
CID
New board for replacement
5.2.2 Procedure: Replace Board

1. Delete all the configurations on the board which need to be replaced.
2. Pull out the board.
3. Insert the new board.
4. Make new configuration to the board.
NOTE: When switch the CS board, at first, please lockout the master CS board as
working status.
Hardware Replacement Board

5-3
F5259_B11
5.3 Module
This subsection provides procedures to remove/replace module of the V-NODE
equipment. While in service, removal of module requires special precautions.
5.3.1 Precautions
Confirm there is no effect on traffic.
5.3.2 Apparatus
CID
New module for replacement
5.3.3 Procedure: Replace Module

1. Delete all the configurations on the module which need to be replaced.
2. Shut off the power of the equipment.
3. Pull out the board.
4. Replace the new module.
5. Power on the equipment.
6. Make new configuration to the board.
Hardware Replacement Module

5-4
F5259_B11
5.4 Power Board

This subsection provides procedures to remove/replace power terminal of the V-NODE
equipment. While in service, removal of power terminal requires special precautions.
5.4.1 Precautions
Confirm there is no power supply to power board.
CAUTION
During replacement work of power board, power supply to the
equipment should keep turn off.
5.4.2 Apparatus
CID
New Power board for replacement
5.4.3 Procedure: Replace Power Board

Since the V-Node equipment supply two power boards (slot #23, slot #26), so if you want
to replace one of them, you must insert another board at first. Now suppose the working
power board of slot #23 will be replaced, let me take bellow procedure for example to
show you how to replace the power board:
1. Insert a standby power board to slot #26
2. Connect power cable and turn on the power of slot #26.
3. Turn off the board power of slot #23.
4. Remove power cable of slot #23.
5. Replace power board of slot #23.
Hardware Replacement Power Board

5-5
F5259_B11
5.5 Battery of MCP Board

This subsection provides procedures to replace battery of MCP unit of the V-NODE
equipment.
5.5.1 Precautions
1. When MCP is used, the insulation sheet under battery is removed.
2. If MCP is preserved as stock, please keep the insulation sheet under the battery.
3. If the insulation sheet of the battery is removed and keep it as stock, the battery
will be expired within 3 years.
4. Never short-circuit or reverse polarity in the application of battery, when replace
the battery.
5.5.2 Apparatus
New battery for replacement
Antistatic wrist strap
5.5.3 Procedure: Replace Power Board

1. Place the MCP unit stable on a level worktable.
2. Unfold the clamp by right hand, and take out the old battery by the left hand.
3. If you only want to let this MCP unit as storage you should install the insulation
sheet before install the battery. The method to install the insulation sheet is to
hold the long tail of the insulation sheet and put its head into the battery sit; the
detail operation is referring to below figure.
Hardware Replacement Battery of MCP Board

5-6
F5259_B11
Figure 5-1.
Install the Insulation Sheet
4. Then you can put the lithium battery on the insulation sheet (negative face down),
the detail operation is shown as below figure:
5. Press the battery into socket and confirm it installed firmly.

6. Then the insulation sheet and battery installation is over. If you want to let this
MCP unit in working status, you must remove the insulation at first. The method
is to drag out the long tail of the blue insulation sheet by one hand, at the same
time, press the battery by another hand to fix the battery not be moved.
Hardware Replacement Battery of MCP Board

5-7
F5259_B11
5.6 FAN
This subsection provides procedures to remove/replace fan of the V-NODE equipment.
While in service, removal of fan requires special precautions.
NOTE: For FAN cleaning and replacing, fan removing time should be as short as
possible because long time fan remove increases equipment temperature and
damage performance.
5.6.1 Precautions
Confirm there is no operation in service.
5.6.2 Apparatus
CID
New Fan board for replacement
5.6.3 Procedure: Replace FAN

1.
Delete all the configurations on the fan which need to be replaced.
2.
Pull out the fan.
3.
Insert new fan.
4.
Make new configuration to the fan.
Hardware Replacement FAN

5-8
F5259_B11
4. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
4.1 Check LED Operation on All Boards
4.1.1 Target Boards
MCP board
CS board
FE board
E1 board
E31/E32
STM16 board
STM-1/4 board
S1E board
TPS_E1 board
TPS_E3W/TPS_E3P board
TPS_S1EW/S1EP board
Routine Maintenance Check LED Operation on All Boards

4-1
F5259_B11
4.1.2 Procedure: Verify LEDs on MCP Board

From the front panel, four LEDs labeled as PWR, FAIL, OW and BUSY respectively
indicate the status of power, fail, order wire phone, and busy. Figure 4-1 shows the front
view of MCP board.
Figure 4-1. The LEDs On MCP Board

NAME
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR (green)
DESCRIBE
Normal Operation
The period between power on and operation normal
Abnormal operation
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal operation
FAIL (red)
On
Board failure
Off
Normal operation
Blink
OW (yellow)
BUSY
(yellow)
Calling /Called status
On
Off-hook or Line busy status
Off
Free
On
Off
Flashrom burning or FPGA downloading

Normal Operation

4-2
F5259_B11
4.1.3 Procedure: Verify LEDs on CS Board
Figure 4-2. The LEDs On CS Board

LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR (green)
DESCRIBE
Normal operation
The period between power on and normal operation
Abnormal
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
FAIL (red)
ONLINE (green)
BUSY (yellow)
On
Board failure
Off
Normal operation
On
In working mode
Off
In standby mode
On
Off
Flashrom burning or FPGA downloading

Normal Operation

4-3
F5259_B11
4.1.4 Procedure: Verify LEDs on FE Board

From the front panel, two LEDs labeled as PWR, FAIL respectively indicate the status of
power, fail.
Figure 4-3. The LEDs On FE Board

LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR (green)
DESCRIBE
Normal operation
Abnormal
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
FAIL (red)
On
Board failure
Off
Normal operation

4-4
F5259_B11
LED condition of FE board is shown as bellow.

Table 4-2 LED Condition of FE Board
LED
Data
Name
Rate
Condition
Rate
Off: 10Mbps
On: 100Mbps
Data
Off: Link down

On: Link up but no data transmission
Blink: Data transmission
Procedure
1. Connect PC or other terminal equipment by using UTP cable.
2. When link up condition is detected at LAN port, Data LED (green) turns on. And
if data communication rate is 100Mbps, Rate LED turns on.
3. After starting data communication, Data LED (green) blinks.

4-5
F5259_B11
4.1.5 Procedure: Verify LEDs on E12Board

From the front panel, three LEDs labeled as PWR, FAIL and ONLINE respectively indicate
the status of power, fail and ONLINE.
Figure 4-4.
LED
The LEDs On E12Board
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR (green)
DESCRIBE
Normal operation
Abnormal
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
FAIL (red)
ONLINE (green)
On
Board failure or the service path report alarm (MS-AIS, LOS etc.)
Off
Normal operation
On
Off

4-6
F5259_B11
4.1.6 Procedure: Verify LEDs on E31/E32 Board

From the front panel, three LEDs labeled as PWR, FAIL and ONLINE respectively indicate
the status of power, fail and ONLINE.
E31
E32
PWR
PWR
PWR
FAIL
PWR
FAIL
FAIL
FAIL
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
Figure 4-5. The LEDs On E31/E32 Board

LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR (green)
DESCRIBE
Normal operation
Abnormal
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
FAIL (red)
ONLINE (green)
On
Off
Normal operation
On
Off

4-7
F5259_B11
4.1.7 Procedure: Verify LEDs on STM16 Board
Figure 4-6. The LEDs On STM16 Board

LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR (green)
DESCRIBE
Normal operation
Abnormal
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
FAIL (red)
ONLINE1 (green)
On
Off
Normal operation
On
Operation at working port (MS1+1,MS1:1and MS ring)
Off
Operation at standby port (MS1+1,MS1:1and MS ring)

4-8
F5259_B11
4.1.8 Procedure: Verify LEDs on STM-1/4 Board
Figure 4-7. The LEDs On STM-1/4 Board

LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR (green)
DESCRIBE
Normal operation
Abnormal
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
FAIL (red)
ONLINE1 (green)
On
Off
Normal operation
On
Off

4-9
F5259_B11
4.1.9 Procedure: Verify LEDs on S1E Board
Figure 4-8. The LEDs On S1E Board

LED
STATUS
Blink
On
PWR (green)
DESCRIBE
Normal operation
Abnormal
Power off
Off
Power failure
Abnormal
FAIL (red)
ONLINE (green)
On
Off
Normal operation
On
Off

4-10
F5259_B11
4.1.10 Procedure: Verify LEDs on TPS_E12 Board
Figure 4-9.
LED
STATUS
On
PWR (green)
SW (yellow)
The LEDs On TPS Board
Off
DESCRIBE
Power runs normal
Power off
Power failure
On
Off

4-11
F5259_B11
4.1.11 Procedure: Verify LEDs on TPS_E3W and TPS_E3P

Board
TPS
E3P
TPS
E3W
PWR
SW
PWR
SW (yellow)
The LEDs On TPS_E3W and TPS_E3P Board
STATUS
On
PWR (green)
Off
DESCRIBE
Power runs normal
Power off
Power failure
On
Off

4-12
SW
PWR SW
SW
Figure 4-10.
LED
PWR
F5259_B11
4.1.12 Procedure: Verify LEDs on TPS_S1EW and

TPS_S1EP Board
Figure 4-11.
LED
STATUS
On
PWR (green)
SW (yellow)
The LEDs On TPS_S1EW and TPS_SE1P Board
Off
DESCRIBE
Power runs normal
Power off
Power failure
On
Off

4-13
F5259_B11
4.1.13 Procedure: Verify LEDs on Board by CID

1. Connect NE with CID.
2. In NE management window, if no alarm occurs in the equipment, LEDs' color of
installed board is green. If any alarm(s) occurs in the equipment, the LEDs' color
of corresponding board becomes other colors except green. Which color is shown
is decided by occurring alarm class. After the alarm(s) disappear(s), the LEDs
become green again.

4-14
F5259_B11
4.2 Check FAN

If a fan fails, the temperature within the shelf may go up, which affects the equipment
operation. Since the life of a fan is limited, fans installed in the shelf should be replaced
approximately within 5 years. And the air filter should be cleaned within half year for
preventive maintenance.
NOTE: For cleaning and replacing both the FAN board and the air filter, the removing
time should be as short as possible because long time fan remove increases
equipment temperature and damage performance.
4.2.1 Apparatus
Antistatic wrist strap
Three new fans, if required.
Vacuum cleaner, cotton swabs, brush, etc. (do not use chemical agents or detergents
for cleaning)
4.2.2 Procedure: Verify FAN

1. Make the temperature around the equipment over 40 C and the FAN will run
automatically.
2. The FAN will stop running automatically after the temperature around the
equipment less than 40 C.
NOTE: The threshold of environment temperature of equipment for start/stop of FAN
is changed according to equipment configuration.
Routine Maintenance Check FAN

4-15
F5259_B11
3. RETRIEVE INFORMATION
3.1 Alarm Status
The information on the alarm status, including the current alarms, history alarm and
actual alarms, can be retrieved and displayed in the Alarm Monitor dialog box.
NOTE: V-Node can only save up to 1000 items of History Alarm message. When the
number of History Alarm message is more than 1000, there are two strategies
offered to select: stop accumulating or first come first out.
3.1.1 Procedure: Open Alarm Monitor Dialog Box

Perform the following procedure to open the Alarm Monitor dialog box:
3. Perform one of the following procedures:
Select Current Alarm, History Alarm or Actual Alarm from the Alarm
menu. The Alarm Monitor dialog box appears with the corresponding tab
selected.
Click the visual board of the equipment in the NE management dialog box. The
Alarm Monitor dialog box appears with the Current Alarm tab selected.
Click the
shortcut button. The Alarm Monitor dialog box appears with
the Current Alarm tab selected.
This step is the end of the procedure. Go to the section 3.1.2 Alarm Monitor Dialog Box
subsection for the use of the Alarm Monitor dialog box.
Retrieve Information Alarm Status

3-1
F5259_B11
3.1.2 Alarm Monitor Dialog Box

Figure 3-1 shows an example of the Alarm Monitor dialog box:
Alarm contents
Tabs to switch Current

Alarm, History Alarm
and Actual Alarm
Figure 3-1. Alarm Monitor Dialog Box (Current Alarm Tab Selected)
Retrieve Information
on Alarm Status
3-2
F5259_B11
3.1.2.1 Items in Alarm Monitor Dialog Box

ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
column headers (on top)
Sort alarm records. By clicking a column header, the alarm

records in the list are sorted according to the selected
subject.
Current Alarm tab
Switch the window for displaying a list of current alarms.
History Alarm tab
Switch the window for displaying alarm history.
Actual Alarm tab
Switch the window for displaying a list of alarms including

both masked and unmasked ones (actual alarms).
Retrieve button
The alarms of NE are collected again by clicking this

button.
Print button
The alarm information is printed out by clicking this button.
Close button
Alarm browsing is quitted (closing the dialog box) by

clicking this button.
Auto Report Screen
The auto report function is enabled by clicking this check

box (leaving a tick). This is provided for the current alarm
list (Current Alarm tab selected) only.
check box
All check box
Specifies whether to list the alarm records of all the boards

or those of a certain board type by clicking this check box.
When this is selected (leaving a tick), the alarms in all
boards are listed. When this is not selected (leaving
empty), only the alarms in certain-type boards are listed.
This is selected by default.

3-3
F5259_B11
3.1.2.2 Display Options

When the All check box is unselected (leaving empty), the following display options
are available:
ITEMS
Board
Used to select the board type from the drop-down list.
Port Type
Used to select the port type from the drop-down list.
Alarm Class
Alarm
Severity
Time Span
Equipment
Specify to list equipment alarms.
Facility
Specify to list facility alarms.
Environment
Specify to list environment alarms.
Ethernet
Specify to list Ethernet alarms.
Critical Alarm
Specify to list critical alarms (CR).
Major Alarm
Specify to list major alarms (MJ).
Minor Alarm
Specify to list minor alarms (MN).
Warning
Specify to list warning alarms (WN).
Start Time
Specify the start time for time span.
End Time
Specify the end time for time span.

3-4
DESCRIPTION
F5259_B11
3.1.3 View Current Alarms

A list of alarms that is currently occurring and not cleared can be displayed in the Alarm
Monitor dialog box with the Current Alarm tab selected.
The list of the current alarms is displayed when opening the Alarm Monitor dialog box.
When the Alarm Monitor dialog box has already been opened for viewing alarm history
or actual alarms, switch the window by clicking the History Alarm or Actual Alarm
tab.
List of Current Alarms
Current Alarm tab
Figure 3-2. Alarm Monitor Dialog Box (Current Alarm)

In this dialog box:
Click the Retrieve button to update the current alarm list.
Click the Print button to print out the current alarm list.
Click the Close button to finish alarm monitor.
on Alarm Status
3-5
F5259_B11
3.1.3.1 Using Display Options

When the Alarm Monitor dialog box is opened for the first time, the All check box
is selected by default to display all current alarms for the equipment. The current
alarms to be displayed, however, can be specified by using the display options. Refer
to the 3.1.2.2 Display Options subsection for detailed information on the display
options.
Perform the following procedure to select the current alarms to be displayed in the
list:
Procedure:
1. Clear the active state of All check box by clicking. The window shown in Figure
3-3 appears:
click to unselect.
Figure 3-3. Browsing Current Alarms (Clear All Check Box)
on Alarm Status
3-6
F5259_B11
2. Select the board type from the drop-down list on the right of Board.
3. Select the port type from the drop-down list on the right of Port Type.
4. Specify the alarm class by clicking the check boxes in the Alarm Class field.
NOTE: Refer to the section 10.2.1 List of Indication Message to select Alarm Class.
5. Specify the alarm severity by clicking the check boxes in the Alarm Severity
field.
NOTE: Refer to the section 9.5 Alarm Attributes of PROVISIONING manual.
6. Click the Retrieve button. The current alarms that correspond to the selection
above are displayed.
NOTE:
1. To display all the current alarms after specifying the current alarms to be
displayed, click the All check box and click the Retrieve button.
2. Selection/unselection of the All check box is valid even after the window is
switched by clicking the History Alarm/Actual Alarm tab for viewing
alarm history/actual alarms.
3.1.3.2 Auto Refresh Function

Current alarm information displayed in the Alarm Monitor dialog box can
automatically be updated by using the auto refresh function. This function is enabled
by clicking the Auto Report Screen check box. After select/unselect the Auto
Report Screen check box, click the Retrieve button to update the Current Alarm
display.
The alarm should be reported automatically after the alarms delay time has passed
and it should be holding before exceed this alarms stretch time.

3-7
F5259_B11
3.1.4 View History Alarms

A list of alarms that have already cleared and confirmed by the user (alarm history) can
be displayed in the Alarm Monitor dialog box with the History Alarm tab selected.
To display the alarm history, perform one of the following:
Select History Alarm from the Alarm menu.
When the Alarm Monitor dialog box has already been opened for viewing current
alarms or actual alarms, click the History Alarm tab.
History Alarm tab
Figure 3-4.
Browsing Alarm History (Clear All Check Box)
In this dialog box:

Click the Retrieve button to update the alarm history.
Click the Print button to print out the alarm history.
Click the Close button to finish viewing.
on Alarm Status
3-8
F5259_B11

Alarms displayed in the history alarm field can be specified by using the display
options. Refer to the subsection 3.1.2.2 Display Options for detailed information.
Perform the following procedure to select the alarms displayed in the history alarm.
Procedure:
1. Unselect the All check box by clicking.
field within NE working period.
6. Specify the time span by setting Start Time and End Time in the Time Span
field.
7. Click the Retrieve button. The alarms that correspond to the selection above are
displayed.
NOTE:
1. To display all alarms after specifying the alarms to be displayed in the
history alarm, click the All check box to select it again and click the
Retrieve button.
switched by clicking the Current Alarm/Actual Alarm tab for viewing
current alarms/actual alarms.

3-9
F5259_B11
3.1.5 View Actual Alarms

A list of alarms, regardless of whether they are masked or not, can be displayed in the
Alarm Monitor dialog box with the Actual Alarm tab selected.
NOTE: The difference between current alarm and actual alarm is that actual alarm
includes masked current alarms but current alarm not, that is, masked current
alarms are shown in actual alarm tab but not in current alarm tab.
To display the actual alarms, perform one of the following:
Select Actual Alarm from the Alarm menu.
When the Alarm Monitor dialog box has already been opened for viewing current
alarms or actual alarms, click the Actual Alarm tab.
Actual Alarm tab
Figure 3-5.
Browsing Actual Alarm (Clear All Check Box)
In this dialog box:

Click the Retrieve button to update the actual alarm list.
Click the Print button to print out the actual alarm list.
Click the Close button to finish viewing.
on Alarm Status
3-10
F5259_B11

Actual alarms to be displayed can be specified by using the display options. Refer to
the subsection 3.1.2.2 Display Options for detailed information.
Perform the following procedure to select the alarms displayed in the actual alarm
list:
Procedure:
1. Unselect the All check box by clicking.
field.
6. Click the Retrieve button. The alarms that correspond to the selection above are
displayed.
NOTE:
1. To display all the alarms after specifying the alarms to be displayed in the actual
alarm list, click the All check box to select it again and click the Retrieve
button.
switched by clicking the Current Alarm/History Alarm tab for viewing
current alarms/alarm history.

3-11
F5259_B11
3.2 Operation Log

A list of the operation logs (event logs) of the NE can be displayed in the Operation
Log dialog box.
3.2.1 Items in Operation Log Dialog Box

ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
Sort operation logs. By clicking a column header, the

operation logs in the list are sorted according to the
selected subject.
Start Time/End Time
Specify the time scope. It is valid when the radio button

TIME SCOPE is selected.
TIME SCOPE radio button
Display the operation logs within the time range specified

by Start Time and End Time. When this radio button is
selected, the ALL radio button on the right of this radio
button is automatically unselected, and Start Time and
End Time are enabled.
ALL radio button
Display all the operation logs, regardless of the time range.

When this radio button is selected by click, the TIME
SCOPE radio button on the left of this radio button is
automatically unselected, and Start Time and End Time
are disabled.
Delete button
Delete selected operation logs from the list.
Retrieve button
Retrieve the operation logs.
Print button
Print out the operation log list.
Close button
Finish the operation log browsing (closing the dialog box).
Retrieve Information Operation Log

3-12
F5259_B11
3.2.2 Procedure: View Operation Logs

Perform the following procedure to view the operation log list:
3. Open the Operation Log dialog box by performing one of the following
procedures:
Select Operation Log from the Security menu.
Click the
shortcut button.
Figure 3-6.
Operation Log Dialog Box
4. In this dialog box;

To display all the operation logs, click the ALL radio button (leaving a tick), and
click the Retrieve button.

3-13
F5259_B11
To display operation logs within a certain time range, click the TIME SCOPE
radio button (leaving a tick) and specify the start time and end time in the Start
Time and End Time text boxes. Then click the Retrieve button.
5. To quit the operation log browsing, click the Close button. The Operation Log
dialog box will be closed.

3-14
F5259_B11
3.3 Event View

The conditions of traffic performance TCA and protection can be retrieved and displayed
in the Event View dialog box.
3.3.1 Mointor Traffic Performance

Perform the following procedure to monitor the traffic performance:
Procedure:
3. Select Event View from the Alarm menu. The Event View dialog box shown
in Figure 3-7 appears:
Figure 3-7. Event View Dialog Box with TCA Event Tab
Retrieve Information Event View
3-15
F5259_B11
4. Confirm that the TCA tab is selected. If not, click the TCA tab.
5. Click the Retrieve button. The performance conditions of the existing events are
displayed.
6. Click the Close button to finish event monitor.
Retrieve Information Event View

3-16
F5259_B11
3.3.2 Monitor Path Protection Switching Conditions

Perform the following procedure to monitor the path protection switching conditions:
Procedure:
4. Click the PPS Event tab. The window shown in Figure 3-8 appears:
Here show the VC4 sequence number in XC

matrix. The relationship between slot ID and
VC4 sequence number is shown as below:
Slot2:1~4
Slot11:1~16
Slot3:1~4
Slot12:1~16
Slot4:1~4
Slot13:1~4
Slot5:1~16
Slot14:1~4
Slot6:1~16
Slot15:1~4
Slot7:1~16
Slot16:1~4
Slot10:1~16
Here show the VC12 (or VC3)

sequence number in the VC4.
PPS Event tab
Figure 3-8. Event View Dialog Box with PPS Event Tab
5. Click the Retrieve button. The locations and causes of switching events are
displayed, if any events happen.
on Event View
3-17
F5259_B11
3.3.3 Monitor MS Protection Switching Conditions

Perform the following procedure to monitor the MS protection switching conditions:
Procedure:
4. Click the MSP Event tab. The window shown in Figure 3-9 appears:
MSP Event tab
Figure 3-9. Event View Dialog Box with MSP Event Tab
5. Click the Retrieve button. The locations and causes of MSP events are displayed,
if any events happen.
on Event View
3-18
F5259_B11
3.3.4 Monitor Timing Source Switching Conditions

Perform the following procedure to monitor the timing source switching conditions:
Procedure:
4. Click the Timing Source Switch Event tab. The window shown in Figure
3-10 appears:
Timing Source Switch Event tab
Figure 3-10.
Event View Dialog Box with Timing Source Switch Event Tab
5. Click the Retrieve button. The locations and causes of Timing Source switching
events are displayed, if any events happen.
on Event View
3-19
F5259_B11
3.4 Performance Monitoring

The Performance Monitoring (PM) is used to identify and isolate the problem if occurring
at a particular line or path. It also monitors the quality of lines and paths. All Performance
Monitoring parameters are collected every minute and accumulated to 15-minute and
24-hour (1 day) statistics. The following are brief descriptions about the PM provided by
V-NODE.
3.4.1 PM Parameters
3.4.1.1 PM Status Monitor Types
SDH PM
(1 of 2)
MONITOR TYPES
RST
MST
MST
(Far End)
HPT
DEFINITION
BBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
ES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
SES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
OFS
Out of frame seconds
ITU-T G.784
UAS
Unavailable seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
BBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
ES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
SES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
UAS
Unavailable seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEBBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FESES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEUAS
ITU-T G.826 G.784
BBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
ES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
SES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
UAS
Unavailable seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
Retrieve Information Performance Monitoring

3-20
SPEC.
F5259_B11
(2 of 2)
MONITOR TYPES
HPT
(Far
End)
LPT
LPT
(Far
End)
MSA
HPA
MSP
DEFINITION
SPEC.
FEBBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FESES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEUAS
ITU-T G.826 G.784
BBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
ES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
SES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
UAS
Unavailable seconds
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEBBE
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FESES
ITU-T G.826 G.784
FEUAS
ITU-T G.826 G.784
PJE-P
(see NOTE)
ITU-T G.783,G.784
PJE-N
(see NOTE)
ITU-T G.783,G.784
PJE-P
(see NOTE)
ITU-T G.783,G.784
PJE-N
(see NOTE)
ITU-T G.783,G.784
PSC
Protection switching counts

(Only for 1+1 APS)
ITU-T G.783
PSD
Protection switching duration

(Only for 1+1 APS)
ITU-T G.783
NOTE:
1.
PJE is the pointer justification event, and justification because of AU pointer

stuff:
AU pointer positive stuff=>PJE-P
AU pointer Negative stuff=>PJE-N
No AU pointer stuff=>No PJE counter

3-21
F5259_B11
Ethernet PM
(1 of 3)
MONITOR TYPES
LAN
DEFINITION
ETH-DropPkts
ETH-RxAlignm
entErrorFrame
s
A count of frames received on a particular

interface that are not an integral number
of octets in length and do not pass the
FCS check
ETH-RxBroadc
astPkts
Number of
received
ETH-RxFCSEr
rorFrames

interface that are an integral number of
octets in length but do not pass the FCS
check.
ETH-RxMultica
stPkts

ETH-RxOctets
The total number of octets received on the

interface, including framing characters.
ETH-RxPkt102
4toMax

ETH-RxPkt128
to255

ETH-RxPkt256
to511

ETH-RxPkt512
to1023

ETH-RxPkt64
Number of packets received that were 64

octets in length (including bad packets)
ETH-RxPkt65t
o127

ETH-TxCollisio
n
Number of collisions on this Ethernet

segment
ETH-TxDelayT
ransmissions
A count of frames for which the first

transmission attempt on a particular
interface is delayed because the medium
is busy.
good

3-22
SPEC.
broadcast
RFC1643
packets
RFC1643
RFC1213
RFC1643
F5259_B11
(2 of 3)
MONITOR TYPES
LAN
DEFINITION
SPEC.
ETH-TxExtColli
sionFrames
A count of frames for which transmission

on a particular interface fails due to
excessive collisions.
RFC1643
The number of times that a collision is

detected on a particular interface later
than 512 bit-times into the transmission of
a packet.
RFC1643
ETH-TxLateCo
llision
A count of successfully transmitted frames

on a particular interface for which
transmission is inhibited by more than one
collision.
RFC1643
ETH-TxMultiCo
llisionFrames
RFC1213
ETH-TxNUcast
Pkts

The total number of octets transmitted out
of the interface, including framing
characters.
RFC1213
ETH-TxOctets
ETH-TxSingle
CollisionFrame
s
A count of successfully transmitted frames

on a particular interface for which
transmission is inhibited by exactly one
collision.
RFC1643
ETH-TxUcastP
kts

level protocols requested be transmitted
to a subnetwork.
RFC1213
ETH-DropPkts
ETH-RxAlignm
entErrorFrame
s

interface that are not an integral number
of octets in length and do not pass the
FCS check
ETH-RxBroadc
astPkts
Number of
received
ETH-RxFCSEr
rorFrames

interface that are an integral number of
octets in length but do not pass the FCS
check.
ETH-RxMultica
stPkts

ETH-RxOctets
The total number of octets received on the

interface, including framing characters.
WAN
good
broadcast
RFC1643
packets
RFC1643
RFC1213

3-23
F5259_B11
(3 of 3)
MONITOR TYPES
DEFINITION
ETH-RxPkt102
4toMax

ETH-RxPkt128
to255

ETH-RxPkt256
to511

ETH-RxPkt512
to1023

ETH-RxPkt64
Number of packets received that were 64

octets in length (including bad packets)
ETH-RxPkt65t
o127

RFC1213
ETH-TxNUcast
Pkts

The total number of octets transmitted out
of the interface, including framing
characters.
RFC1213
ETH-TxOctets
ETH-TxUcastP
kts

level protocols requested be transmitted
to a subnetwork.
RFC1213
WAN

3-24
SPEC.
F5259_B11
Encapsulation PM
MONITOR TYPES
GFP_RxEXI
ErrorPkts
DEFINITION
SPEC.
A count of received frame with HEAD

errors.
GFP_RxFCS A count of received frame with FCS

ErrorPkts
errors.
GFP
GFP_RxOct
ets
GFP_RxPkts A count of received frame.

GFP_TxOcte A count of transmitted octets.
ts
LAPS
GFP_TxPkts
LAPS_RxFC
SErrorPkts
A count of received frame with FCS

errors.
LAPS_RxOc
tets
LAPS_RxPkt A count of received frame.

s
LAPS_TxOct A count of transmitted octets.
ets
LAPS_TxPkt
s

3-25
F5259_B11
3.4.1.2 Performance Counter Range

SDH PM Counter Range
PM TYPES
15m PM COUNTER RANGE

MEMORY
RANGE
MEMORY
RANGE
OFS(RS)
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
BBE
4 Byte
0-16777215
4 Byte
0-1610612640
ES
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
SES
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
UAS
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
FE-BBE
4 Byte
0-16777215
4 Byte
0-1610612640
FE-ES
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
FE-SES
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
FE-UAS
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
PSC
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
PSD
2 Byte
0-900
4 Byte
0-86400
PJE-P
4 Byte
0-113184
4 Byte
0-10865664
PJE-N
4 Byte
0-113184
4 Byte
0-10865664

3-26
24h PM COUNTER RANGE
F5259_B11
Ethernet PM Counter Range

PM TYPES
15m PM COUNTER RANG
24h PM COUNTER RANG
MEMORY
RANGE
MEMORY
RANGE
ETH-TxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxUcastPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxNUcastPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxMulticastPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxBroadcastPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxLateCollision
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-TxCollision
4 Byte
0-46875000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt64
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt65to127
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt128to255
4 Byte
0-76014000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt256to511
4 Byte
0-40760970
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt512to1023
4 Byte
0-21146400
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt1024toMax
4 Byte
0-10775700
4 Byte
0-4294967294
ETH-DropPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294

3-27
F5259_B11
GFP PM Counter Range

PM TYPES
15m PM COUNTER RANG
24h PM COUNTER RANG
MEMORY
RANGE
MEMORY
RANGE
GFP_TxPkts
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
GFP_TxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
GFP_RxPkts
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
GFP_RxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
GFP_RxFCSErrorPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
GFP_RxEXIErrorPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
LAPS PM Counter Range

PM TYPES
15m PM COUNTER RANG
24h PM COUNTER RANG
MEMORY
RANGE
MEMORY
RANGE
LAPS_TxPkts
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
LAPS_TxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxPkts
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxOctets
4 Byte
0-4294967294
4 Byte
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxFCSErrorPkts
4 Byte
0-133929000
4 Byte
0-4294967294
NOTE: when the PM value exceeds the maximum value in the range showed in all
above tables, the PM will be regarded as overflow and showed in PM
monitor screen of CID.

3-28
F5259_B11
3.4.1.3 SES
Two conditions cause SES defect. One is the ratio of error code in one second is
30% or more, the other is that one or more defects occur(s), which is shown in
below table.
The Defects Causing Near End SES
PATH LAYER
LO path layer
LP UNEQ
LP TIM
TU LOP
TU AIS
HP LOM
HP PLM
HO Path layer
HP UNEQ
HP TIM
AU LOP
AU AIS
MST layer
MS AIS
RST layer
RS TIM
STM LOS
STM LOF
The Defects Causing Far End SES

PATH LAYER
FAR END DEFECT CONDITION
LO path layer
LP RDI
HO Path layer
HP RDI
SES PM threshold is shown in below table.

Facility
SES Threshold Value
VC12
600
VC3
2400
VC4
2400
RS
2400
MS
2400

3-29
F5259_B11
3.4.1.4 Invalid PM
When the Performance monitor is unbelievable in some condition, the state of PM is
invalid.
3.4.1.4.1 Invalid PM Status
NM
All addition sections are normal
NV
All addition sections are invalid
3.4.1.4.2 Invalid PM Condition
Invalid condition means that PM does not correctly count.
Time modified(>30s)
Loopback (for the unit)
Facility alarm occur
Near end alarm
F/W Reset
H/W Reset

3-30
F5259_B11
3.4.1.5 Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) Default Values

Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) is set to almost every Performance Monitoring
Parameter. It is used to detect when degradation of transmission has reached
unacceptable levels. The TCA value of each parameter can be customized. The TCA
report can be disabled as well, by setting the value to 0.
SDH TCA
(1 of 2)
LAYER
RS
MS
PM TYPES
AU-4
VC-4
24h TCA THRESHOLD
DEFAULT
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
65535
0-16777215
6291360
0-1610612640
ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
OFS
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
BBE
65535
0-16777215
6291360
0-1610612640
ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
65535
0-16777215
6291360
0-1610612640
FE-ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
FE-SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
FE-UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
PSC
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
PSD
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
PJE-P
113184
0-113184
10865664
0-10865664
PJE-N
113184
0-113184
10865664
0-10865664
BBE
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
ES
900
0-900
8640
0-86400
SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
BBE
FE-BBE
MSP
15m TCA THRESHOLD

3-31
F5259_B11
(2 of 2)
LAYER
VC-4
VC-3
PM TYPES
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
FE-ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
FE-SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
FE-UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
FE-ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
FE-SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
FE-UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
65535
0-65535
6291360
0-6291360
FE-ES
900
0-900
86400
0-86400
FE-SES
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
FE-UAS
63
0-900
4095
0-86400
PJE-P
113184
0-113184
10865664
0-10865664
PJE-N
113184
0-113184
10865664
0-10865664
FE-BBE
BBE
BBE
FE-BBE
TU

3-32
24h TCA THRESHOLD
DEFAULT
FE-BBE
VC-12
15m TCA THRESHOLD
F5259_B11
Ethernet TCA
(1of2)
LAYER
LAN
PM TYPES
15m TCA THRESHOLD
24h TCA THRESHOLD
DEFAULT
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
ETH-TxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxFCSErrorF
rames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxAlignment
ErrorFrames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxUcastPkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxNUcastPkt
s
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxMulticastP
kts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxBroadcast
Pkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxSingleColli
sionFrames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxMultiCollisi
onFrames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxDelayTran
smissions
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxExtCollisio
nFrames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxLateCollisi
on
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxCollision
46875000
0-46875000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt64
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt65to12
7
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt128to2
55
76014000
0-76014000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt256to5
11
40760970
0-40760970
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt512to1
023
21146400
0-21146400
4294967294
0-4294967294

3-33
F5259_B11
(2of2)
LAYER
LAN
WAN
PM TYPES
15m TCA THRESHOLD

DEFAULT
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
ETH-RxPkt1024to
Max
10775700
0-10775700
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-DropPkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxFCSErrorF
rames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxAlignment
ErrorFrames
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxUcastPkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-TxNUcastPkt
s
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxMulticastP
kts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxBroadcast
Pkt
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt64
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt65to12
7
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt128to2
55
76014000
0-76014000
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt256to5
11
40760970
0-40760970
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt512to1
023
21146400
0-21146400
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-RxPkt1024to
Max
10775700
0-10775700
4294967294
0-4294967294
ETH-DropPkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294

3-34
24h TCA THRESHOLD
F5259_B11
GFP TCA
LAYER
Encapsula
tion
PM TYPES
15m TCA THRESHOLD
24h TCA THRESHOLD
DEFAULT
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
GFP_TxPkts
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
GFP_TxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967295
4294967294
0-4294967294
GFP_RxPkts
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
GFP_RxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
GFP_RxFCSError
Pkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
GFP_RxEXIErrorP
kts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294
LAPS TCA
LAYER
Encapsula
tion
PM TYPES
15m TCA THRESHOLD
24h TCA THRESHOLD
DEFAULT
RANGE
DEFAULT
RANGE
LAPS_TxPkts
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
LAPS_TxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxPkts
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxOctets
4294967294
0-4294967294
4294967294
0-4294967294
LAPS_RxFCSErro
rPkts
133929000
0-133929000
4294967294
0-4294967294

3-35
F5259_B11
3.4.2 Display Current PM Status

The current performance monitor (PM) data of NE can be retrieved and displayed.
NOTE: When PM value exceeds the content of PM register, CID reports PM value
overflow in Performance value column.
Figure 3-11 shows an example where the current 15m PM data are listed.
Tabs to switch current PM data list

(15 minutes or 24 hours) and PM
data history (15 minutes or 24 hours)
PM data
Figure 3-11.
PM Data Dialog Box
NOTE: Hereafter, a dialog box that lists the current PM data is referred to PM Data
dialog box.

3-36
F5259_B11
3.4.2.1 Items in PM Data Dialog Box

The functions of the items in the PM Data dialog box are following:
ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
Sort PM data. By clicking a column header, the PM data in

the list are sorted according to the selected subject.
Current 15m Data tab
Switch the window for displaying a list of current 15-minute

PM data.
Current 24h Data tab
Switch the window for displaying a list of current 24-hour

PM data.
History 15m Data tab
Switch the window for displaying the history of 15-minute

PM data.
History 24h Data tab
Switch the window for displaying the history of 24-hour PM

data.
Retrieve button
The PM data are collected again by clicking this button.
Print button
The PM data information is printed out by clicking this

button.
Close button
PM data browsing is quitted (closing the dialog box) by

Dont
Display
Value check box
Invalid
Select this check box not to display the PM whose value is

Invalid. This is selected by default.
Dont Display Zero Value

check box

zero. This is selected by default.
All check box
Specifies whether to list the PM data of all the boards and

ports or those of a certain type board/port by clicking this
check box. When this is selected (leaving a tick), the PM
data in all boards are listed. When this is not selected (not
leaving a tick), only the PM data in certain-type boards and
ports are listed. This check box must be unselected for
viewing the PM history. This is selected by default.

3-37
F5259_B11

When the All check box is unselected (leaving empty), the following display options
are available:
ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
Board
Select the board type from the drop-down list.
Port Type
Select the port type from the drop-down list.
Time Span
Start Time
End Time
3.4.2.3 Procedure: View Current 15-Minute PM Data

Perform the following procedure to view a list of the current 15m PM data:
3. Perform one of the following two procedures:
Select Current PM from the Performance menu.
Click the
shortcut button.
4. The PM Data dialog box listing the current 15m PM data shown in Figure 3-12
appears:

3-38
F5259_B11
Figure 3-12.
Performance View Current 15m PM Data
5. In this dialog box, perform one of the following:

To view the current 15m PM data list using the display option, refer to 3.4.2.5
View Current PM Data Using Display Options.
To update the current 15m PM data list, click the Retrieve button.
To print out the current 15m PM data list, click the Print button.
To view the current 24h PM data list, click the Current 24h Data tab. Refer to
3.4.2.4 Procedure: View Current 24-Hour PM Data for details.
To view the PM data history, click the History 15m Data or History 24h
Data tab. Refer to 3.4.3 Display History PM Data for details.
To finish viewing, click the Close button.

3-39
F5259_B11
3.4.2.4 Procedure: View Current 24-Hour PM Data

Perform the following procedure to view a list of the current 24h PM data:
3. Select Current PM from the Performance menu or click the
button. The PM Data dialog box shown in Figure 3-12 appears.
shortcut
4. Click the Current 24h Data tab on the dialog box to switch the window. Figure
3-13 shows an example where the Current 24h Data tab is selected:
Figure 3-13.
Performance View Current 24h Data

3-40
F5259_B11
5. In this dialog box, perform one of the following:

To view the current 24h PM data list using the display option, refer to 3.4.2.5
View Current PM Data Using Display Options.
To update the current 24h PM data list, click the Retrieve button.
To print out the current 24h PM data list, click the Print button.
To view the current 15m PM data list, click the Current 15m Data tab. Refer to
3.4.2.3 Procedure: View Current 15-Minute PM Data for details.
To view the PM data history, click the History 15m Data or History 24h
Data tab. Refer to 3.4.3 Display History PM Data for details.
To finish viewing, click the Close button.

3-41
F5259_B11
3.4.2.5 View Current PM Data Using Display Options

When the PM Data dialog box is opened for the first time, the All check box is
selected by default to display all the current 15m PM data within the equipment. The
current PM data to be displayed, however, can be specified by using the display
options. Refer to the subsection 3.4.2.2 Display Options for detailed information on
the display options.
Perform the following procedure to select the current PM data to be displayed in the
list:
Procedure:
1. Unselect the All check box by clicking. The window shown in Figure 3-14
appears:
click to unselect.
Figure 3-14.
Performance View Current 15m Data (Clear All Check Box)

3-42
F5259_B11
click to unselect.
Figure 3-15.
Performance View Current 24h Data (Clear All Check Box)
4. Click the Retrieve button. The current PM data that correspond to the selection
above are displayed.
NOTE:
1. To display all the current PM data after specifying the current PM data to be
displayed, click the All check box to select it again and click the Retrieve button.
switched by clicking the Current 15m Data/Current 24h Data tab for viewing
the list of the current 15-minute/24-hour PM data or the 15-minute/24-hour PM
data history.

3-43
F5259_B11
3.4.3 Display History PM Data

The history of performance monitor (PM) data of NE can be retrieved and displayed.
When browsing history PM data, the All check box is not available.
Figure 3-16 shows an example where the history of the 15m PM data is displayed.
PM history data
Tabs to switch the current PM data
list (15 minutes or 24 hours) and PM
data history (15 minutes or 24 hours)
Figure 3-16. PM History Dialog Box

NOTE: Hereafter, a dialog box that lists the PM data history is referred to as PM
History dialog box.

3-44
F5259_B11
3.4.3.1 Items in PM History Dialog Box

The functions of the items in the PM History dialog box are following:
ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
Sort PM data. By clicking a column header, the PM data in

the list are sorted according to the selected subject.
Current 15m Data tab
Switch the window for displaying a list of current 15-minute

PM data.
Switch the window for displaying a list of current 24-hour

PM data.
Switch the window for displaying the history of 15-minute

PM data.
Switch the window for displaying the history of 24-hour PM

data.
Retrieve button
The PM data are collected again by clicking this button.
Print button
The PM data information is printed out by clicking this

button.
Close button
PM data browsing is quitted (closing the dialog box) by

Dont
Display
Value check box
Invalid

Invalid. This is selected by default.
Dont Display Zero Value

check box
Select this check box to display all the PM data on the

screen. This is selected by default.

ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
Board
Select the board type from the drop-down list.
Port Type
Select the port type from the drop-down list.
Time Span
Start Time
End Time

3-45
F5259_B11
3.4.3.3 Procedure: View History 15 Minute PM Data

Perform the following procedure to view history 15m PM data:
3. Select History PM from the Performance menu. The PM History dialog box
appears, showing history 15m PM data.
NOTE: The PM History dialog box can also be displayed by clicking the History
15m Data tab on the PM Data dialog box.
Figure 3-17.
Performance View History 15m Data

3-46
F5259_B11
field.
7. Click the Retrieve button. History 15m PM data that corresponds to the
selection above is displayed.
8. In this dialog box, the following options are also available:
To print out history 15m PM data, click the Print button.
To view history 24h PM data, click the History 24h Data tab. Refer to 3.4.3.4
Procedure: View History 24-Hour PM Data for details.
To view the current 15m/24h PM data list, click the Current 15m Data or
Current 24h Data tab. Refer to 3.4.2 Display Current PM Status for details.
9. To finish viewing, click the Close button.
NOTE: Selection/unselection of the All check box is valid even after the window is
switched by clicking the History 24h Data/Current 15m Data/Current 24h
Data tab for viewing the 24h PM data history or the list of the current
15-minute/24-hour PM data.

3-47
F5259_B11
3.4.3.4 Procedure: View History 24-Hour PM Data

Perform the following procedure to view history 24h PM data:
3. Select History PM from the Performance menu. The PM History dialog box
appears, showing history 15m PM data.
4. Click the History 24h Data tab. The PM History dialog box displays history
24h PM data.
NOTE: The PM History dialog box for 24h PM data can also be switched from
the PM Data dialog box by clicking the History 24h Data tab.
Figure 3-18.
Performance View History 24h Data

3-48
F5259_B11
field.
8. Click the Retrieve button. History 24h PM data that corresponds to the selection
above is displayed.
9. In this dialog box, the following options are also available:
To print out history 24h PM data, click the Print button.
To view history 15m PM data, click the History 15m Data tab. Refer to 3.4.3.3
Procedure: View History 15 Minute PM Data for details.
To view the current 15m/24h PM data list, click the Current 15m Data or
Current 24h Data tab. Refer to 3.4.2 Display Current PM Status for details.
NOTE: Selection/unselection of the All check box is valid even after the window is
switched by clicking the History 15m Data/Current 15m Data/Current 24h
Data tab for viewing the 15m PM data history or the list of the current
15-minute/24-hour PM data.

3-49
F5259_B11
3.4.4 PM Counter Reset

The performance of the equipment can be reset via the Performance Counter Reset
dialog box. Figure 3-19 shows an example:
Figure 3-19.
Performance Counter Reset Dialog Box

3-50
F5259_B11
3.4.4.1 Items in Performance Counter Reset Dialog Box

ITEMS
DESCRIPTION
Performance Source
Select the operating object for which the

PM counter should be reset.
Performance Name
Select the performance name that needs to

be reset.
Counter
Type
Select the 15m PM counter.
15m Performance Counter
NOTE: This item already is selected by

CID, and CID displays grey in the screen.
24h Performance Counter
Select the 24h PM counter.

NOTE: This item already is selected by
CID, and CID displays grey in the screen.
Reset All check box
When this check box is selected (leaving a

tick), all the operating objects will be reset.
Set button
Send the specified settings to the NE.
Close button
Quit the PM counter reset operation

(closing the dialog box).

3-51
F5259_B11
3.4.4.2 Procedure: Execute PM Counter Reset

Perform the following procedure to reset the PM counter.
3. Select PM Counter Reset from the Performance menu. The Performance
Counter Reset dialog box shown in Figure 3-19 appears.
4. Select the operating object for which the PM counter should be reset from the
Performance Source tree in the left window.
5. Select the performance name that needs to be reset from the Performance
Name list box in the right window. In this list, only the performance names that
are relevant to the operating object selected in Step 4 are displayed.
6. Confirm the setting, then click the Set button to send the data to NE.
7. To reset all the operating objects, click the Reset All check box (leaving a tick).
8. Click the Close button to finish the PM counter reset operation.
NOTE: If the Close button is clicked without clicking the Set button, the
Performance Counter Reset dialog box is closed ignoring the
setting.

3-52
F5259_B11
3.4.5 Display Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA)

The TCA values can be displayed in the PM Item Setup dialog box. Perform the
following procedure.
NOTE: TCA values can also be modified via the PM Item Setup dialog box. Refer to 9.
Parameter Change; 9.6.1 Modifying PM Items in the Provisioning manual for
details.
Procedure:
3. Select PM Item Setup from the Performance menu. The PM Item Setup
Figure 3-20.
PM Item Setup Dialog Box
4. After viewing, click the Close button.


3-53
F5259_B11
3.5 Hardware Inventory and LED Status

3.5.1 Display Hardware Information and LED Status
Information on the installed boards and its LED status can be displayed in the NE
management dialog box. Perform the following procedure to open the management
dialog box of the target NE:
Procedure:
1. Start up the CID, and log in to the target NE. The CID retrieves the configuration
information data on the equipment during logging in.
2. When the CID main window shown in Figure 3-21 is displayed, click or double
the target NE in the window, then double click it:
Click or double-click to select the

target NE, then double-click it.
Figure 3-21.
CID Main Window
Retrieve Information Hardware Inventory and LED Status

3-54
F5259_B11
3. The NE management dialog box shown in Figure 3-22 appears:
Figure 3-22.
NE Management Dialog Box
Information on the installed boards and its LED status are displayed. In this
dialog box, the target NE type of the equipment, working mode and alarm
conditions are also displayed.
Retrieve Information Hardware Inventory and LED Status

3-55
F5259_B11
3.6 Firmware Version

The information on the firmware installed in an NE can be retrieved.
3.6.1 Procedure: Retrieve Installed Firmware Version

F/W and FPGA dialog box shown in Erro! A origem da referncia no foi
encontrada. appears:
Figure 3-23.
Upgrade F/W and FPGA Dialog Box
Retrieve Information Firmware Version

3-56
F5259_B11
4. Select the corresponding board from first drop-down list on the top of the
Upgrade F/W and FPGA dialog box.
5. Select type: F/W or FPGA or EPLD from second drop-down list on the top of
the Upgrade F/W and FPGA dialog box.
6. Click the Retrieve radio button in the Select Function field.
7. Click the Run button to retrieve the firmware version.
If you want to save the retrieved result information, you can click the Save As
button to pop-up the Save As dialog box. It is shown as bellow:
Else if you want to print the retrieved result information, you can click the Print
button to print it.
8. Click the Exit button to finish viewing the firmware version.
Retrieve Information Firmware Version

3-57
F5259_B11
3.7 Logged-in Users

Perform the following to list up the logged-in users.
3.7.1 Procedure: Retrieve Logged-in Users List

1. Start up the CID, and log in to an NE.
3. Select User Management from the Security menu. The User Management
Figure 3-24. User Management Dialog Box

Clicking the Retrieve button retrieves the logged-in user list.
Retrieve InformationLogged-in Users

3-58
F5259_B11
2. OPERATION CONTROLS
This section provides information on the use of the orderwire function and HKC (House
Keeping Control) operations to control V-NODE.
Operation Controls
2-1
F5259_B11
2.1 Orderwire
This subsection provides the procedures for operating the orderwire.
NOTE: Handset (Telephone Set) which requires distinction of Tip and Ring terminal
can not be used for the orderwire interface of V-NODE.
2.1.1 Using Handset (Telephone Set)

By using a handset, a caller can only make a selective calling (point-to-point orderwire
communication) and a group calling (multiparty line).
2.1.1.1 Apparatus
Handset (Two wire DTMF tone Telephone set)
Set correct configuration of orderwire, and the handset is connected to the equipment.
2.1.1.3 Procedure: Operate Orderwire Handset

(Calling Side)
1. Pick up the handset. OW LED becomes yellow green.
2. Push the code number of receiving side. OW LED blinks.
3. Waiting for the response.
2.1.1.4 Procedure: Operate Orderwire Handset

(Receiving Side)
1. Receive the request from the calling side. OW LED blinks and buzzer bips.
2. Pick up the handset. OW LED blinks and buzzer becomes silent.
3. Begin the talking.
Operation Controls Orderwire

2-2
F5259_B11
2.1.2 Terminate Orderwire Communication

Perform the following procedure to terminate the orderwire communication and release
the line.
NOTE: If a selected line to be closed has been used at any other nodes in the network,
those connections will also be terminated by performing the following
procedure.
2.1.2.1 Procedure: Terminate Orderwire normal orderwire

termination method (Telephone set on-hook method)
1. Hang up the telephone on-hook.
2. Verify that the connection is terminated and the orderwire line status is changed
to idle.
2.1.2.2 Procedure: Terminate Orderwire Forced Hang Up

1. Select Forced Hang Up to valid status in Orderwire and User CH Configuration
window.
2. Execute the command by pressing Set button.
3. Verify that the connection is terminated and the orderwire line status is changed
to idle.
Operation Controls Orderwire

2-3
F5259_B11
2.2 House Keeping Control

This subsection provides the procedure to enable/disable HKC assigned by the procedure
in the Provisioning manual.
2.2.1 Apparatus
CID
2.2.2 Parameters
PARAMETER
Control Level
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
Open
Specify the circuit open status as

effective control level of exterior
equipment.
Loop
Specify the circuit loop status as

effective control level of exterior
equipment.
Start
Clicking this radio button enables

HKC.
Stop
Clicking this radio button disables

HKC.
Duration
60 thru 15240 (s)
Set the duration time.
Hold-on
check box
Keeping Control Level status.
Control Status
2.2.3 Procedure: Enable Housekeeping Controls

in the section7. Working with CID of the CID Operating Guide manual.
from the Configuration menu. The Set HKA/HKC dialog box appears:
4. Click the HKC Interface tab on the Set HKA/HKC dialog box. Figure 2-1
shows an example:
Operation Controls House Keeping Control

2-4
F5259_B11
Figure 2-1. Set HKA/HKC Dialog Box (HKC)

5. In this dialog box, four control output interfaces on the MCP board can be
managed. Click the target interface. The Control Status and Start/Stop radio
buttons is available, then remove check on Hold-on check box, Duration text
field are available also.
6. Click the Start button by clicking the radio button on the right of Control
Status (leaving a tick).
7. Set the duration time in the Duration text field.
NOTE: The range of duration time is within 60 through 15240 seconds.
8. Repeat Steps 5 thru 7 for other HKCs to be enabled.
9. When completed, click the Set button.
Operation Controls House Keeping Control

2-5
F5259_B11
9. CONFIGURATION CHANGES
This section provides descriptions and procedures for changing V-NODE setups while in
service by CID operations. Because only ring network is supported by our products, this
section provides descriptions and procedures of adding NE into ring and removing NE
from ring network.
The following configuration changes are provided:
Adding nodes
Removing nodes
Configuration Changes
9-1
F5259_B11
9.1 Adding Nodes

In this section, an example will be given to illustrate how to add a node in a ring network.
In the course of adding a node in a ring network IP address for F and DCC interfaces and
traffic linkage must be modified. In order to achieve adding a node in service the ring
network must be configured with protection mode.
9.1.1 Example Description(Before change)

Figure 9-1 is a STM ring network. The ring includes three NEs.
NE2
STM- ring
NE1
NE3
Figure 9-1. SDH ring network

Table 9-1 shows the traffic configuration relationship of three NEs (for example).
9.1.1.1 Crossconnect Configuration

Table 9-1.
Crossconnect Configuration of Three NEs (for example)
NE NO.
TS NO.
ADD/DROP
NE1
PASS THROUGH
1#VC4 1#TUG3 1# TU12

1#VC4 1#TUG3 2# TU12
NE2
1#VC4 1#TUG3 1# TU12
1#VC4 1#TUG3 2# TU12
NE3
1#VC4 1#TUG3 2# TU12
1#VC4 1#TUG3 1# TU12
Configuration Changes Adding Nodes

9-2
F5259_B11
Figure 9-2, Figure 9-3 and Figure 9-4shows the crossconnect configuration of three
NEs in CID.
Figure 9-2. NE1 Crossconnect Configuration

9-3
F5259_B11

9-4
F5259_B11
9.1.1.2 IP Address Configuration

Figure 9-5 shows IP address of NE and CID. It is just an example. Many other settings
are also usable. Table 9-2 gives the corresponding IP parameter setting.
Figure 9-5.
Table 9-2.
OBJECT
IP Setting of DCC Port (for example )

IP Parameter Setting(for example )
DCC PORT
PORT
IP PARAMETERS
PORT
POSITION
PORT
ALLOCATION
IP
SUBNET
ADDRESS
MASK
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
Port 1
STM-16-W
Network
192.1.1.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.1.255
Port 2
STM-16-E
User
192.1.3.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.255
LAN
Port 1
STM-16-W
Network
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.255
Port 2
STM-16-E
User
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.1.255
LAN
Port 1
STM-16-W
Network
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.255
Port 2
STM-16-E
User
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.255
LAN
192.254.3.1 255.255.255.0
192.254.3.255
CID1
192.254.1.2 255.255.255.0
192.254.1.255
CID2
192.254.3.2 255.255.255.0
192.254.3.255
NE1
NE2
NE3
192.254.1.1 255.255.255.0
192.254.2.1 255.255.255.0
192.254.1.255
192.254.2.255

9-5
F5259_B11
Then we will add a node of NE4 into the above ring network. Figure 9-6 shows a new
STM-ring network after adding a new node of NE4 between NE2 and NE3. Below
description provides how to operate in CID for adding NE4.
NE2
CID3
CID1
STM- ring
NE1
NE4
CID2
F
NE3
Figure 9-6. New SDH ring Network after Adding NE4

9-6
F5259_B11
9.1.2 Add Node

Procedure:
1. Pull out of the optical fiber between NE2 and NE3.
NOTE: Only pull out of the optical fiber; do not cut off the service between NE2 and
NE3.
2. Connect the NE2 to NE4 with the optical fiber.
3. Connect the NE3 to NE4 with the optical fiber.
9.1.3 IP Address Configuration

9.1.3.1 New IP configuration
Figure 9-7 shows IP setting of NE and CID of new network. It is also an example.
Table 9-3 provides the corresponding new IP parameter setting.
Figure 9-7.
IP Setting of DCC Port (for example)

9-7
F5259_B11
Table 9-3. IP Parameter Setting (for example)

DCC PORT
OBJECT
IP PARAMETERS
PORT
PORT
POSITION
PORT
ALLOCATION
IP
ADDRESS
SUBNET
MASK
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
Port 1
STM-16-W
Network
192.1.1.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.1.255
Port 2
STM-16-E
User
192.1.4.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.255
LAN
192.254.1.1
255.255.255.0
192.254.1.255
Port 1
STM-16-W
Network
192.1.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.255
Port 2
STM-16-E
User
192.1.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.1.255
LAN
192.254.2.1
255.255.255.0
192.254.2.255
Port 1
STM-16-W
Network
192.1.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.255
Port 2
STM-16-E
User
192.1.2.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.2.255
LAN
192.254.4.1
255.255.255.0
192.254.4.255
Port 1
STM-16-W
Network
192.1.4.1
255.255.255.0
192.1.4.255
Port 2
STM-16-E
User
192.1.3.2
255.255.255.0
192.1.3.255
LAN
192.254.3.1
255.255.255.0
192.254.3.255
CID1
192.254.1.2
255.255.255.0
192.254.1.255
CID2
192.254.3.2
255.255.255.0
192.254.2.255
192.254.4.2
255.255.255.0
192.254.3.255
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
CID3
Comparing Table 9-2 and Table 9-3, we will find that only NE3s IP address should
be modified in original network and the new adding NE4 should be totally initialed.
Below description provides the IP setting procedure of F interface and DCC
interface of NE3 and NE4 with CID.

9-8
F5259_B11
9.1.3.2 NE3 IP Modification Procedure

Procedure
1. Start up the CID, and log in to the target NE3.
in the 7. working with CID of the CID Operating Guide manual.
parameters Setup dialog box shown in Figure 9-8 appear:
Figure 9-8. IP Parameters Setup Dialog Box of NE3

4. Click the Retrieve button to report the IP parameters of the V-NODE NE to the
CID.
5. Enter the IP address (192.254.2.1) into the IP Address field and enter the subnet
mask (255.255.255.0) into the Net Mask field in F Interface (A,B,C,D)

9-9
F5259_B11
6. Select DCC1 channel in the tree structure, enter IP address (192.1.4.1) and subnet
mask (255.255.255.0) into the IP Address and the Net Mask fields
respectively and click the Modify button.
7. Select DCC2 channel in the tree structure, enter IP address (192.1.3.2) and subnet
mask (255.255.255.0) into the IP Address and the Net Mask fields
respectively and click the Modify button.
8. Click the Set button to send above modification down to NE.

9-8
F5259_B11
9.1.3.3 NE4 IP Setup Procedure

Procedure
parameters Setup dialog box shown in Figure 9-9 appear:
4. Click the Retrieve button to report the IP parameters of the V-NODE NE to the
CID.
5. Enter the IP address (192.254.3.1) into the IP Address field and enter the subnet
mask (255.255.255.0) into the Net Mask field in F Interface (A,B,C,D)
6. Select DCC1 channel in the tree structures, enter IP address (192.1.3.1) and
subnet mask (255.255.255.0) into the IP Address and the Net Mask fields
respectively and click the Add button.
7. Select DCC2 channel in the tree structures, enter IP address (192.1.2.2) and
subnet mask (255.255.255.0) into the IP Address and the Net Mask fields
respectively and click the Add button.
8. Click the Set button to send above modification down to NE.

9-11
F5259_B11
Figure 9-9. IP Parameter Setup Dialog Box NE4

9-8
F5259_B11
9.1.4 Crossconnect Configuration

9.1.4.1 New Crossconnect Configuration
New crossnnect configuration should not change the traffic linkage between original
three nodes. At the same time original NEs must transmit new nodes traffic. Table
9-4 shows an example of the traffic configuration relationship for four NEs.
Table 9-4. Crossconnect Configuration of Four NEs (for example)
NE NO.
TS NO.
ADD/DROP
NE1
PASS THROUGH
1#VC4 1#TUG3 1# TU12

1#VC4 1#TUG3 2# TU12
1#VC4 1#TUG3 3# TU12
NE2
1#VC4 1#TUG3 1# TU12
1#VC4 1#TUG3 2# TU12

1#VC4 1#TUG3 3# TU12
NE3
1#VC4 1#TUG3 2# TU12
1#VC4 1#TUG3 1# TU12

1#VC4 1#TUG3 3# TU12
NE4
1#VC4 1#TUG3 3# TU12
1#VC4 1#TUG3 1# TU12

1#VC4 1#TUG3 2# TU12
Figure 9-10, Figure 9-11, Figure 9-12 and Figure 9-13 show the crossconnect
configuration of four NEs in CID.

9-13
F5259_B11
Figure 9-10. NE1 Cossconnect Configuration

9-8
F5259_B11
Figure 9-11.
NE2 Crossconnect Configuration

9-15
F5259_B11

9-8
F5259_B11
Figure 9-13.
NE4 Crossconnect Configuration

9-17
F5259_B11
9.1.4.2 NE1 Crossconnect Setting Procedure

Procedure
3. Select Cross Connect Configuration from the Communication menu. The
Cross Connect Configuration dialog box appears.
4. Click 1+1 Primary, connect 1#VC4 1#TUG3 1#TU12 of 01 optic port to
1#TU12 of E1 port.
5. Click 1+1 Backup, connect 1#VC4 1#TUG3 1#TU12 of 02 optic port to
1#TU12 of E1 port.
6. Click Broadcast, connect 1#TU12 of E1 port. to 1#VC4 1#TUG3 1#TU12 of
01 optic port and 1#VC4 1#TUG3 1#TU12 of 02 optic port.
7. Repeat steps 4,5 and 6 for 1#VC4 1#TUG3 2#, 3# TU12 of 01 and 02 optic port
individually to 2#, 3# TU12 of E1 port.

9-8
F5259_B11

Procedure
1#TU12 of E1 port.
1#TU12 of E1 port.
7. Click Broadcast, connect 1#VC4 1#TUG3 2#TU12 of 01 optic port from/to
1#VC4 1#TUG3 2#TU12 of 02 optic port, 1#VC4 1#TUG3 3#TU12 of 01 optic
port from/to 1#VC4 1#TUG3 3#TU12 of 02 optic port respectively.

9-19
F5259_B11

Procedure
2#TU12 of E1 port.
2#TU12 of E1 port.

9-8
F5259_B11

Procedure
3#TU12 of E1 port.
3#TU12 of E1 port.

9-21
F5259_B11
9.2 Removing Nodes

Removing a node is just reverse to adding a node. Detail process refers to above adding
process.
Configuration Changes Removing Nodes

9-22
F5259_B12
SpectralWave V-NODE
RELEASE 2.10
GLOSSARY
NEC Corporation
F5259_B12
GLOSSARY

1st Issue Oct 2005
Printed in China
F5259_B12
GLOSSARY
1. GLOSSARY
For the purpose of this manual, the following abbreviations are used.
AB
Alarm output for Bell
ACO
Alarm Cut Off
ADM
Add/Drop Multiplexer
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
AL
Alarm output for Lamp
APS
Automatic Protection Switching
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU
Administrative Unit
AUG
Administrative Unit Group
BER
Bit Error Ratio
CID
Craft Interface Device
DCC
Data Communication Channel
DDF
Digital Distribute Frame
DM
Differed Maintenance (alarm)
ECC
Embedded Control Channel
EMC
Electro Magnetic Compatibility
EMI
Electro Magnetic Interference
EOS
Ethernet over SDH
ES
Errored Seconds
ESD
Electrostatic-Sensitive Device
FE
Far End
FM
Fault Monitor
FSP
Forced Switch to Protection
FSW
Forced Switch to Working
GFP
Generic Framing Procedure
GUI
Graphic User Interface

Glossary
1-1
F5259_B12
GLOSSARY
Glossary
1-2
HDLC
High Level Data Link Control
HKA
Housekeeping Alarm
HKC
Housekeeping Control
HP
Higher Order Path
HPA
Higher Order Path Adaptation
HPC
Higher Order Path Connection
HPT
Higher Order Path Termination
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPS
Link Access Procedure-SDH
LCAS
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LKOP
Lockout of Protection
LKOW
Lockout of Working
LOF
Loss of Frame
LOM
Loss of Multiframe
LOP
Loss of Pointer
LOS
Loss of Signal
LP
Lower Order Path
LPA
Lower Order Path Adaptation
LPC
Lower Order Path Connection
LPT
Lower Order Path Termination
MAC
Media Access Control
MCP
Management Control Part
MII
Media Independent Interface
MSA
Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection
MST
Multiplex Section Termination
MSW
Manual Switch
NMS
Network Management System
OFS
Out of Frame Seconds
F5259_B12
GLOSSARY
OOF
Out of Frame
OS
Operating System
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDU
Protocol Data Unit
PJE-N
Pointer Justification Event-Negative
PJE-P
Pointer Justification Event-Positive
PLMF
Payload Mismatch Fault
PM
Performance Monitor
PM
Prompt Maintenance (alarm)
POH
Path Overhead
PPS
Path Protection Switch
RDI
Remote Defect Indication
REI
Remote Error Indication
RIP
Route Information Protocol
RST
Regenerator Section Termination
SD
Signal Degrade
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SES
Severely Errored seconds
SETS
Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
SF
Signal Failure
SFP
Small Form-factor Pluggable
SNCP
Sub-network Connection Protection
SOH
Section Overhead
SPI
SDH Physical Interface
SSM
Synchronization Status Message
SSU
Synchronization Supply Unit
STM
Synchronous Transport Module
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
Glossary
1-3
F5259_B12
GLOSSARY
Glossary
1-4
TCA
Threshold Crossing Alert
TIM
Trace Identifier Mismatch
TM
Terminal Multiplexer
TU
Tributary Unit
UAS
Unavailable seconds
UNEQ
Unequipped
VC
Virtual Container
VLAN
Virtual Local Access Network
WAN
Wide Area Network
WTR
Wait to Restore

V Node

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

V Node

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

F5259_B01

SpectralWave is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.

Copyright 2005-2006 by NEC Corporation.

CID OPERATING GUIDE

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

This page is intentionally left blank.

SpectralWave is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.

Copyright 2005-2006 by NEC Corporation.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not

Do not touch without proper protection.

Electrostatic sensitive devices are installed.

Electrostatic Sensitive Devices

Handle with precaution

MAXIMUM INPUT VALUE

DO NOT EXCEED THE FOLLOWING RANGES:

Input Voltage: 48V DC ( 38.4V DC to 60V DC)

SpectralWave is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.

Copyright 2005-2006 by NEC Corporation.

2.1 Description........................................................................................ 2-1

3. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENT

3.1 Environment and Performance ....................................................... 3-1

4. OVERVIEW OF INSTALLATION TASKS

4.1 Installation Flow................................................................................ 4-1

5.1 Crew Tool Box................................................................................... 5-1

7.1 Unpack and Verify Contents ............................................................ 7-1

8. INSTALL V-NODE SUBRACK

8.1 To 19inch RACK................................................................................ 8-3

This page is intentionally left blank.

NOTE: The components that make up a V-NODE system are follows:

This page is intentionally left blank.

2.2 V-NODE Subrack View

V-NODE subrack view

2.3 V-NODE Subrack Dimensions

Figure 2-2. V-NODE subrack dimension

3. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENT

3.1 Environment and Performance

Equipment Installation Safety Requirement

3.2 Safety Items

Equipment Installation Safety Requirement

4. OVERVIEW OF INSTALLATION TASKS

4.1 Installation Flow

TASKS (Sections Containing Procedures)

Prepare the installation site. Define floor layout.

Receive equipment, uncrate and inspect received

See appropriate instruction manual.

8. Install V-NODE Subrack

Install Subrack into the rack.

TASKS (Sections Containing Procedures)

Verify strap settings on boards before

Unit Installation manual.

Install boards into the Subrack.

Unit Installation manual.

Power and Grounding

Cable Installation manual.

Route and connect cables.

Cable Installation manual.

Overview of Installation Tasks

This page is intentionally left blank..

5.1 Crew Tool Box

Cordless Electric Drill & Bit Index

Large Pry Bar